SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
FORM 20-F
(Mark One)
¨ | REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 |
or
x | ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 |
For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2004
or
¨ | TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934 |
Commission file number 0-19003
Smith & Nephew plc
(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)
England and Wales
(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)
15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA
(Address of principal executive offices)
Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
Title of each class |
Name on each exchange on which registered |
|
American Depositary Shares | New York Stock Exchange | |
Ordinary Shares of 12 2 / 9 p each | New York Stock Exchange* |
* | Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of American Depositary Shares, pursuant to the requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission. |
Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None.
Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act: None.
Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuers classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report:
937,136,201 Ordinary Shares of 12 2 / 9 p each
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days:
Yes x No ¨
Indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:
Item 17 ¨ Item 18 x
Dear Shareholder
As a consequence of the Companys Ordinary Shares being traded on the New York Stock Exchange (in the form of American Depositary Shares) we are required to prepare and file a Form 20-F with the US Securities and Exchange Commission. In order to provide the same information to both UK and US shareholders we have combined the Annual Report and Accounts and the Companys Form 20-F filing as a single document. US shareholders receive the combined Annual Report and Form 20-F.
For non-US shareholders who have elected to receive the full Annual Report and Accounts, the combined Annual Report and Form 20-F contains a very large amount of information and you may not wish to receive such a large document in the future. If so, please complete the enclosed form of request to elect to receive the Companys Summary Financial Statement in future, which is sent to the vast majority of shareholders each year. Shareholders electing to receive the Summary Financial Statement may subsequently choose to receive the full combined Annual Report and Form 20-F.
|
Yours sincerely,
Dudley Eustace
Chairman
8 March 2005
i
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
ii
INTRODUCTION
The Smith & Nephew Group is a global medical devices business engaged in orthopaedics, endoscopy and advanced wound management with sales of over £1.2 billion in 2004. Smith & Nephew plc is the parent company of the Smith & Nephew Group. It is an English public limited company with its shares listed on the official list of the UK Listing Authority and traded on the London Stock Exchange. It is also traded on the New York Stock Exchange in the form of ADSs.
This report is the Annual Report of Smith & Nephew plc for the year ended 31 December 2004. It comprises in a single document the Annual Report and Accounts of the Company in accordance with UK requirements and the Annual Report on Form 20-F in accordance with the regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission in the US.
A summary report on the year, the Summary Financial Statement 2004, intended for the investor not requiring the full detail of the Annual Report, is produced as a separate document. The Summary Financial Statement includes a summary review of operations, a summary remuneration report and summary financial statements.
Over 90% of shareholders have chosen to receive only the Summary Financial Statement. The Annual Report is issued to shareholders who have elected to receive it. Both documents are available on Smith & Nephews corporate website at www.smith-nephew.com .
The Groups fiscal year ends on 31 December of each year. References in this Annual Report to a particular year are to the fiscal year unless otherwise indicated. Except as the context otherwise requires, Ordinary Share or share refer to the Ordinary Shares of Smith & Nephew plc of 12 2 / 9 p each.
For the convenience of the reader, a Glossary of technical and financial terms used in this document is included on page 152. The product names referred to in this document are identified by the use of capital letters and are trademarks owned by or licensed to members of the Smith & Nephew Group.
Smith & Nephews corporate website, www.smith-nephew.com , gives additional information on the Group. Information made available on the website is not intended to be, and should not be regarded as being, part of this Annual Report.
iii
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
iv
2-65 | ||
2 | ||
4 | ||
27 | ||
48 | ||
57 | ||
66-132 | ||
68 | ||
70 | ||
71 | ||
74 | ||
133-149 | ||
150 | ||
152 |
This Annual Report including the Report of the Directors was approved by the Board of Directors on 8 March 2005.
1
Financial Highlights
2004 £ million |
2003 £ million |
|||
Group turnover |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | ||
Profit before taxation: |
||||
Before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
278.4 | 242.2 | ||
After goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
177.9 | 230.1 | ||
Adjusted basic earnings per Ordinary Share (EPSA) |
21.14p | 18.49p | ||
Basic earnings per Ordinary Share |
13.39p | 15.92p | ||
Dividends per Ordinary Share |
5.10p | 4.95p |
2004 Dividends
The recommended final dividend of 3.20p per share together with the interim dividend of 1.90p makes a total for 2004 of 5.10p. Approval by shareholders of the 2004 final dividend will be sought at the Annual General Meeting to be held on 5 May 2005. If approved, the final dividend will be paid on 13 May 2005 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 22 April 2005.
Presentation
Smith & Nephew believes that the reporting of profit and earnings before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items provides additional information on underlying returns and trends to shareholders. The Groups internal financial reporting focuses primarily on profit and earnings before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items which are the key performance indicators used in budgets, monthly reporting, forecasts, long-term planning and incentive plans. For this purpose exceptional items comprise operating exceptional items, share of exceptional items of joint venture and net profit on disposal of discontinued operations and associated undertaking. Throughout this document earnings per share calculated in this way is termed adjusted basic earnings per Ordinary Share (EPSA). The calculation of profit before goodwill amortisation and EPSA is set out in the Five Year Record (page 140).
Managements key indicator of sales performance is underlying growth in sales. This is calculated by excluding the effects of foreign currency translation movements and acquisitions. Management believes that sales growth on an underlying basis provides a consistent year-on-year measurement of performance without the distortions created by the translation effect of foreign currency movements and acquisitions which are separate from the Groups normal operations. Underlying sales growth is used by management in its internal financial reporting, budgeting and planning. A reconciliation of reported sales to underlying sales is provided on page 29.
The Group, as an international business, operates in many countries and earns revenues and incurs costs in many currencies. The results of the Group, as reported in Sterling, are therefore affected by movements in exchange rates between Sterling and overseas currencies. The Group uses the average exchange rates prevailing during the year to translate the results of overseas companies into Sterling. The currencies which most influence these translations are the US Dollar and the Euro. During 2004 average Sterling exchange rates were stronger against the US Dollar by 12% and stronger against the Euro by 2%, compared with 2003.
The Group Accounts of Smith & Nephew in this Annual Report are presented in Sterling. Solely for the convenience of the reader, certain parts of this Annual Report contain translations of amounts in Sterling into US Dollars at specified rates. These translations should not be construed as representations that the Sterling amounts actually represent such US Dollar amounts or could be converted into US Dollars at the rate indicated. Except as where stated otherwise the translation of pounds Sterling and pence to US Dollars and cents appearing in this Annual Report has been made at the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers in Sterling as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (the Noon Buying Rate) on the date indicated. On 28 February 2005, the Noon Buying Rate was US$1.925 per £1.
The Accounts of the Group in this Annual Report are presented in millions (m) unless otherwise indicated.
2
Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements
The Groups reports filed with, or furnished to, the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), including this document and written information released, or oral statements made, to the public in the future by or on behalf of the Group, constitute forward-looking statements within the meaning of the US Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. In particular, statements regarding planned growth in our business and in our operating margins discussed under Outlook and Trend Information are forward-looking statements as are discussions of our product pipeline and discussions of the costs of future revisions of the macrotextured knee product under Recent Developments, Legal Proceedings and Operating and Financial Review, Liquidity and Prospects. When used in this Annual Report, the words aim, anticipate, believe, consider, estimate, expect, intend, plan, well-placed, target and similar expressions are generally intended to identify forward-looking statements. Such forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other important factors (including, but not limited to, the outcome of litigation and regulatory approvals) that could cause the actual results, performance or achievements of Smith & Nephew, or industry results, to differ materially from any future results, performance or achievements expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements. Specific risks faced by the Group are described under Risk Factors on page 23 of this Annual Report.
All forward-looking statements in this Annual Report are based on information available to Smith & Nephew as of 8 March 2005. All written and oral forward-looking statements attributable to Smith & Nephew or any person acting on behalf of Smith & Nephew are expressly qualified in their entirety by the foregoing. Smith & Nephew does not undertake any obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statement contained herein to reflect any change in Smith & Nephews expectation with regard thereto or any change in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statement is based.
Market Data
Market data and market share estimates throughout this report are derived from a variety of sources including publicly available competitors information, internal management information and independent market research reports.
3
This section discusses the activities, resources and operating environment of the business under the following headings:
5 | ||
5 | ||
6 | ||
11 | ||
11 | ||
11 | ||
12 | ||
13 | ||
13 | ||
13 | ||
14 | ||
14 | ||
14 | ||
15 | ||
16 | ||
17 | ||
17 | ||
22 | ||
23 |
Discussion of the Groups management structure and corporate governance procedures is set out in the Corporate Governance section (pages 48 to 56).
The Remuneration Report gives details of the Groups policies on senior managements remuneration in 2004 (pages 57 to 65).
Discussion of the Groups operating and financial performance, liquidity and financial resources for 2004 and 2003 is given in the Operating and Financial Review, Liquidity and Prospects (pages 27 to 47).
4
Group Overview
Smith & Nephew is a global business engaged in the development, manufacture and marketing of medical devices in the sectors of orthopaedics, endoscopy and advanced wound management.
The Group has a history dating back 149 years to the family enterprise of Thomas James Smith who opened a small pharmacy in Hull, England in 1856. On his death in 1896, his nephew Horatio Nelson Smith took over the management of the business. Smith & Nephew was incorporated and listed on the London Stock Exchange in 1937. Today it is a public limited company incorporated in the UK and registered in, and conducted under the laws of, England and Wales. Operations in countries other than the UK are under the laws of those countries. In November 1999, the Group was listed on the New York Stock Exchange. The corporate headquarters is in the UK and the registered address is:
Smith & Nephew plc
15 Adam Street
London WC2N 6LA
Tel: +44 (0) 20 7401 7646
Website: www.smith-nephew.com
In 2001, Smith & Nephew became a constituent member of the FTSE-100 index in the UK. This means that Smith & Nephew is included in the top 100 companies traded on the London Stock Exchange measured in terms of market capitalisation.
Recent Developments
In March 2004, Smith & Nephew acquired Midland Medical Technologies (MMT), the global market leader in metal-on-metal hip resurfacing for £70m in cash and notes. Additional payments of up to £30m in cash and notes are contingent upon certain regulatory milestones being met. MMT achieved sales in the 2003 calendar year of £20m. Including acquired distributors, MMT contributed £20m to Smith & Nephews turnover in 2004. MMT is being integrated into the orthopaedics business.
In August 2003, Smith & Nephew withdrew from all markets the macrotextured version of its OXINIUM femoral knee component. This withdrawal is specific to the macrotextured version of this OXINIUM component and does not affect any other product using OXINIUM technology. As at that date 2,971 components had been implanted of which approximately 2,471 were in the USA, 450 in Australia and 50 in Europe. As at 28 February 2005 782 revision surgeries had been carried out on affected patients and settlements agreed with patients in respect of 537 of these revisions. As discussed more fully under Legal Proceedings, due to uncertainties relating to the amount of insurance coverage that will be available to cover certain existing claims and future claims, an exceptional charge of £80m has been recorded, representing unsettled insurance claims and an estimate of claims likely to arise in the future assuming that no further insurance cover is available. These estimates constitute forward looking statements that are subject to uncertainties. Depending on the number and average cost of actual revisions, costs to Smith & Nephew may be greater or less than the amount of this provision. See Legal Proceedings and Risk Factors.
5
Group Structure
Smith & Nephew operates on a worldwide basis. This has been achieved through a series of investments and acquisitions, predominantly in the US but also in Europe, and through continued emphasis on the development and introduction of new products to the Groups principal markets.
Smith & Nephew is organised into the three global business units of orthopaedics, endoscopy and advanced wound management and a separate indirect market unit. Each of the three global business units manages its sales directly in ten international markets the US, Canada, the UK, Germany, Japan, Australia, France, Italy, New Zealand and Ireland and takes full responsibility for strategy, research and development (R&D), manufacturing, marketing, sales and financial performance. The remaining 22 markets in which the Group has selling companies are managed by country managers, with business responsibility for the whole of the Groups product range, and comprise the indirect market unit.
A head office team in London, England directs the overall business and supports the business units, primarily in the areas of business development, company secretarial, finance, human resources and investor relations, with a legal department based in Memphis, Tennessee. A central research facility in York, England is charged with the development of enabling technologies in both materials science and biology, particularly cell biology.
Orthopaedics
Overview
Orthopaedic products comprise reconstructive joint implants, trauma products and associated clinical therapies. Reconstructive implants include hip, knee and shoulder joints as well as ancillary products such as bone cement and mixing systems used in cemented reconstructive joint surgery. Trauma products consist of internal and external fixation devices, used in the stabilisation of severe fractures. Clinical therapies consist of products applied in an orthopaedic office or clinic setting and currently comprise bone growth stimulators and a joint fluid therapy product.
The orthopaedics business is managed worldwide from Memphis, Tennessee, which is also the site of its main manufacturing facility. Orthopaedic implants and trauma products are also manufactured at a small facility in Tuttlingen, Germany. As described in Property, Plant and Equipment, continuing strong sales growth has created the need for expansion in both manufacturing and administrative facilities.
The Groups reconstructive knee business is built on two major knee systems: GENESIS II, designed to facilitate the accuracy and efficiency of the operating procedure and provide improved long-term clinical results; and PROFIX, a reconstructive knee system featuring simpler instruments and surgical technique.
Within the reconstructive hip line, the SPECTRON cemented hip system and the REFLECTION acetabular cup system have documented positive long-term clinical performance. More recently, the success of SYNERGY, a tapered titanium stem system, and ECHELON, a revision stem system, have established Smith & Nephew as a strong player in this product segment.
The Group has developed and now manufactures knee and hip implant components made from oxidised zirconium (OXINIUM) which is patent protected and which management believes has improved wear characteristics which may be of significant benefit to younger, more active patients.
Within the trauma business, products in internal and external fixation, such as the TRIGEN intramedullary nail system, PERI-LOC plating system, IMHS CP JET-X fixator and TAYLOR SPATIAL FRAME fixator, provide trauma surgeons a comprehensive offering of products to address acute and reconstructive procedures and hip fractures related to osteoporosis. Orthobiologic products, including demineralised bone matrix are also offered for use in conjunction with reconstructive and trauma surgeries.
The EXOGEN ultrasonic bone healing stimulator and SUPARTZ hyaluronic acid joint fluid therapy are the main products in the clinical therapies sector.
To compete effectively in the growing global orthopaedic market, management believes that as well as having a leading edge product range it is important to have a skilled sales force that can build strong relationships with surgeons and to provide high levels of customer service. Currently the global sales force numbers 1,260, of whom 815 serve the US market.
6
Strategy
Smith & Nephews orthopaedics strategy is for future growth through product development in its existing core business and expansion into the fast-growing market for less invasive therapies. Management believes that the orthopaedic market will continue to grow for the foreseeable future. This is largely attributable to the increasing proportion of the population aged over 55 and the increasing need for joint reconstructive products and other orthopaedic therapies in younger, more active patients.
Management believes that its sales growth has accelerated through the creation of separate divisions for trauma and reconstructive with separate internal resources and specialised sales forces. Smith & Nephew also intends to further penetrate these markets by taking advantage of its portfolio of products and services, by expanding its sales force, and by introducing less invasive and alternative therapies. The Group is also contributing to patient education and empowerment through its websites and other direct-to-consumer activities.
New Products
In 2004, the orthopaedics business continued the promotion and roll-out of OXINIUM technology across the knee and hip product line. OXINIUM is a material exclusive to Smith & Nephew which has the strength of a metal with the wear properties of a ceramic material and expands the market for hip and knee implants. The completion of the OXINIUM femoral head rollout was accomplished with the smaller and larger sizes being introduced in the market. The TANDEM BIPOLAR PROSTHESIS is designed to address the needs of hip fracture patients.
In 2004, the Group released for surgical evaluation the PERI-LOC plating system for lower extremity procedures. It is expected to launch this product in the first half of 2005.
The principal product of MMT, which was acquired in 2004, is the Birmingham Hip Resurfacing (BHR) prosthesis. Hip resurfacing is a less invasive surgical approach, and preserves more bone, than total hip replacement and is more appropriate for use on younger and more active patients. The business is based in Birmingham, UK and is being integrated into the reconstructive division of orthopaedics. Its sales are principally in the UK, continental Europe and Australia. It is not approved for sale in the US. Managements intention is to pursue FDA approval in the US for the BHR based on the significant amount of clinical data which has been assembled since 1997.
Recent Regulatory Approvals
In February 2004, the Japanese Ministry approved the GENESIS II HI FLEX KNEE tibial insert and the FDA cleared the INTERTAN nail for sale in the US. INTERTAN nails are used for fracture fixation and feature an innovative screw design that allows two different locking options.
In July 2004, FDA cleared the OXINIUM revision femoral component for sale in the US. This product can be used when an existing artificial knee needs to be replaced and can be used with stems and wedges which are sometimes needed in revision surgeries.
In September 2004, the Japanese Ministry approved the Asian IMHS. This is a titanium version of the stainless steel IMHS nail, sized for the Asian anatomy.
During 2004, the FDA issued a clearance for VERSABOND AB antibiotic loaded bone cement.
Competition
Management estimates that the worldwide orthopaedic market (excluding spine) served by the Group grew by 13% in 2004 and is currently worth more than £6.5 billion per annum. Management believes that Smith & Nephew holds a 9% share of this market by value.
Principal global competitors in the orthopaedic market and their estimated global shares, are Zimmer (21%), Stryker (18%), De Puy/Johnson & Johnson (17%), Biomet (11%) and Synthes-Stratec (11%).
Endoscopy
Overview
Smith & Nephews endoscopy business, headquartered in Andover, Massachusetts, develops and commercialises a range of endoscopic (minimally invasive surgery) techniques, educational programmes and value-added services for surgeons to treat and repair soft tissues, articulating joints, spinal discs and vascular structures. The business focuses principally on the arthroscopy sector of the endoscopy market. Arthroscopy is the minimally invasive surgery of joints, in particular the knee and shoulder.
7
The endoscopy business offers surgeons endoscopic technologies for surgery, including: fluid management and insufflation equipment for surgical access; digital cameras, digital image capture, central control, multimedia broadcasting, scopes, light sources and monitors to assist with visualisation; radiofrequency wands, electromechanical and mechanical blades, and hand instruments for resecting tissue; and specialised devices, fixation systems and bioabsorbable materials to repair damaged tissue.
Manufacturing facilities are located in Andover and Mansfield, Massachusetts and Oklahoma City, Oklahoma. Major service centres are located in the US, the UK, Germany, Japan and Australia.
Of the current global sales force of 655, 360 serve the US market.
Strategy
Smith & Nephews strategic intent is to establish the endoscopy business as the leading provider of endoscopic techniques for joint and ligament repair and to use its core capabilities to penetrate other select endoscopic markets. Management believes the business capitalises on the growing acceptance of endoscopy as a preferred surgical choice among physicians, patients and payors.
To sustain growth and enhance its market position, the endoscopy business supports its strategy with surgeon education programmes, financing solutions, global fellowship support initiatives, partnerships with professional associations and surgeon advisory boards.
In February 2004, the endoscopy business expanded its Digital Operating Room product range by acquiring Reed Medical, a leading provider of audio-visual technology and design for operating room applications. Management believes that this will enable the Group to establish itself as a lead player in the fast growing market for operating room modernisation.
New Products
In 2004, Smith & Nephew introduced a new three chip endoscopic camera system providing superior image quality, digital output, the option of steam sterilisation, and compatibility with previous generation camera components. The Group continued to expand its offerings in soft tissue repair with the ENDOBUTTON CL BTB and GTS system for knee tendon repair along with the BIORAPTOR anchor, ELITE PASS suture shuttle and CLEAR-TRAC disposable cannulas and obturators for arthroscopic shoulder repair. To encourage surgeon adoption of arthroscopic hip techniques, Smith & Nephew introduced a new hip access system, making it easier for surgeons to safely position instruments in the hip joint.
As the global market leader in arthroscopic resection, the Group introduced the SCULPTOR line of monopolar ablation probes, providing safe and efficient removal of soft tissue during knee and shoulder procedures. Smith & Nephew also introduced additional improvements and enhancements to its DYONICS power system, with more aggressive disposable blades and additional options for its POWERMAX shaver handpiece.
The launch of the new 20S generator system allowed entry into the new spinal market of facet joint pain treatment, complementing the Groups position as a leader for the treatment of disc degeneration. The new generator platform continues to advance the treatment of spine pathologies through both IDET and the new ACUTHERM catheter for targeted disc decompression.
Recent Regulatory Approvals
During 2004, the endoscopy business obtained regulatory approvals for the following products in most major markets, except Japan where the approval process is traditionally slower: DURABRAID and ULTRABRAID high strength sutures; a new RF generator for two interventional spine procedures, IDET and disc decompression, in addition to probes for denervation of the facet joints; a graft sleeve device for intra-tunnel fixation of the ACL graft; and various other arthroscopy fixation and vascular devices.
Competition
Management estimates that the global arthroscopy markets in which the business principally participates is worth £780 million a year and is growing at 8% annually, driven by increasing numbers of sports injuries, longer and more active lifestyles, patient desire for minimally invasive procedures, innovative technological developments and a need for cost effective procedures. Management believes that Smith & Nephew has a 29% share of the global arthroscopy market. Smith & Nephew also participates in the developing minimally invasive spinal and minimally invasive vascular markets and continues to seek ways to leverage its knowledge, experience and core capabilities in other selected endoscopic markets.
8
Smith & Nephews main competitors and their estimated shares of the global arthroscopy market are: Mitek/Johnson & Johnson (17%), Linvatec/Conmed (14%), Arthrex (14%), Stryker (12%) and Arthrocare (7%).
Advanced Wound Management
Overview
Smith & Nephews advanced wound management business is headquartered in Hull, England. It supplies a range of products and clinical support services for the treatment of chronic and acute skin wounds. It offers a range of products from initial wound bed preparation through to full wound closure. These products are targeted particularly at chronic wounds connected with the older population (such as pressure sores and venous leg ulcers), diabetic foot ulcers, burns and complex surgical wounds.
Advanced wound management products are manufactured in facilities in Hull and Gilberdyke, England; Largo, Florida; and La Jolla, California and by certain third party manufacturers.
The advanced wound management business has continued to build its sales and marketing infrastructure in the worlds major markets, with expansion of its sales force and global brand development. These initiatives have led to increased levels of demand on the Groups manufacturing and global supply chain, which have been addressed with increased investment in the production capacity in Hull and Largo.
Strategy
The strategy for advanced wound management products is to focus on the higher added value segments of wound bed preparation and moist and active healing. The formation of a joint venture with Beiersdorf AG in 2001, BSN Medical, enabled the advanced wound management business to exit from its traditional medical textile woundcare business allowing it to focus its attention on higher added value advanced woundcare products.
The business has built its sales and marketing infrastructure in the worlds major markets, both through investment in its existing network and through the additional sales teams gained through its acquired businesses in recent years. The integration of the acquired sales forces has increased the capability of the business throughout the world, particularly in the key markets of the US and Germany. Currently the global sales force is 905 of whom 200 are in the US.
In January 2004, the business acquired VERSAJET, a fluid jet debridement system, from HydroCision Inc., to add to its range of advanced wound bed preparation products.
New Products
Management believes that the market will continue the trend towards advanced products with their ability to accelerate healing rates, reduce hospital stay times and cut the cost of nursing and clinician time and aftercare in the home.
In 2002, the Group acquired the remaining 50% of its former joint arrangements with Advanced Tissue Sciences, Inc. (ATS) for the rights to apply human tissue technology to the treatment of all skin wounds including two significant products, DERMAGRAFT and TRANSCYTE. DERMAGRAFT is a human dermal replacement designed as a treatment for diabetic foot ulcers and TRANSCYTE is a temporary wound covering for the treatment of burns.
At the end of 2002, ACTICOAT achieved Class III medical device approval in Europe and during 2003 the product achieved a drug tariff listing in the United Kingdom. ACTICOAT, acquired from Westaim of Canada in May 2001, is an antimicrobial barrier dressing incorporating the smallest crystallised silver (nanocrystalline silver) used in the treatment of burns or wounds. The silver reduces the risk of bacterial colonisation and acts to kill micro-organisms that can cause infection and prevent or retard healing. Sales have been driven by the worldwide introduction of ACTICOAT and the application of the technology to a wide range of line extensions.
2004 was the second year of the launch of the expanded ALLEVYN hydrocellular dressing range. Management believes that ALLEVYN is the largest selling dressing in its category in the world and that the continued focus on the brand will aid Smith & Nephew in maintaining this position. 2004 was the first full year of the sales of GLADASE, a papain urea ointment that was launched in the US to replace SANTYL, a collagenase product.
Recent Regulatory Approvals
During 2004, the advanced wound management business secured over 215 medical device and 65 pharmaceutical registration approvals in various markets throughout the world. Among the most significant
9
approvals were those for ACTICOAT ABSORBENT, an absorbent antimicrobial barrier product, in Europe as a Class III device and the VISITRAK wound management system in Japan. VERSAJET gained new approvals in Australia, South Korea and South Africa.
Competition
Management estimates that the sales value of the advanced wound management market worldwide is £1.9 billion a year, and that this grew 12% in 2004, and that Smith & Nephew has a 19% market share. Growth is driven by an ageing population and by a steady advancement in technology and products that are more clinically efficient and cost effective than their conventional counterparts. Management believes that, with approximately half of chronic wounds globally still treated with conventional dressings, there is strong growth potential for advanced technology products.
Worldwide competitors in advanced wound management and their estimated market shares comprise Kinetic Concepts (21%), the Convatec division of Bristol-Myers Squibb (12%), Johnson & Johnson (9%), and 3M (8%).
Joint Ventures and Discontinued Operations
Joint Ventures, Associated Undertakings, Joint Arrangements and Other Interests
Joint ventures are those in which the Group holds an interest on a long-term basis and which are controlled by the Group and one other entity under a contractual agreement.
Smith & Nephew owns 50% of the BSN Medical joint venture, which became operational on 1 April 2001. It is jointly owned with Beiersdorf AG and is independently managed. BSN Medical comprises traditional woundcare, casting and bandaging and compression hosiery businesses. Headquartered in Hamburg, Germany it has manufacturing facilities in the US, UK, Germany, France, Republic of Ireland, South Africa, Mexico and Pakistan. In certain markets, Smith & Nephews sales forces sell BSN Medicals products on an agency basis in return for an agency commission and in some markets, mainly in Asia, Smith & Nephew distributes BSN Medical products. Results are accounted for under the gross equity method, whereby 50% of turnover, operating profit, interest, taxation and attributable profit for the year are incorporated into Smith & Nephews profit and loss account.
During 2004 BSN Medical acquired the fracture casting and splinting business of DePuy, Inc., a Johnson & Johnson company and has integrated it with its casting and bandaging business. This acquisition furthered the establishment of BSN Medical as a major independent medical supplies company.
Associated undertakings are those in which the Group has a beneficial interest of 50% or less in the equity capital and where the Group exercises significant influence over commercial and financial policy decisions. In March 2002, the Group acquired 21.5% of AbilityOne Corporation (AbilityOne) as part of a transaction in which it disposed of its rehabilitation business to AbilityOne. In September 2003, the Group disposed of its 21.5% interest in AbilityOne to Patterson Dental Inc. From 1 April 2002 to 12 September 2003 this interest was included in the Groups accounts as an associated undertaking and accounted for under the equity method, whereby 21.5% of operating profit, interest, taxation and attributable profit are incorporated into Smith & Nephews profit and loss account.
The Group had an interest in two joint arrangements with ATS, relating to products for the treatment of diabetic foot ulcers (DERMAGRAFT) since 1996, and cartilage replacement (NEOCYTE) since 1994. On 25 November 2002, the Group purchased from ATS the interests it did not already own in the joint arrangements.
Discontinued Operations
Discontinued operations in 2002 comprise three months of results of the rehabilitation business disposed of in March 2002. The rehabilitation business manufactured and marketed products, equipment and product systems used to increase, improve or maintain functional capabilities after surgery or stroke or of individuals with disabilities.
10
The international medical device industry is highly regulated. Regulatory requirements are a major factor in determining whether substances and materials can be developed into marketable products and the amount of time and expense that should be allotted to such development.
National regulatory authorities administer and enforce a complex series of laws and regulations that govern the testing, approval, manufacturing, labelling, marketing and sale of healthcare and pharmaceutical products. They also review data supporting the safety and efficacy of such products. Of particular importance is the requirement in many countries that products be authorised or registered prior to manufacture, marketing or sale and that such authorisation or registration be subsequently maintained. The major regulatory agencies for Smith & Nephews products are the FDA in the US, the Medicines and Healthcare products Regulatory Agency in the UK and the Ministry for Health Labour and Welfare in Japan. Payment for many medical device products is governed by reimbursement tariff agencies in each individual country.
The trend in recent years has been towards greater regulation and higher standards of technical appraisal, which generally entail lengthy inspections for compliance with appropriate standards, including regulations such as good manufacturing practices. Smith & Nephew believes that these recent changes will not have a material adverse effect on the Groups financial condition and the results of operations. All significant facilities within the Group are subject to regular internal audit for medical device regulatory compliance with national and Group standards and policies.
Smith & Nephew believes that the Groups operations currently comply in all material respects with applicable environmental laws and regulations. Although the Group continues to make capital expenditure for environmental compliance, it is not currently aware of any significant expenditure that would be required as a result of such laws and regulations that would have a material adverse impact upon the Groups financial condition.
The Group monitors the safety of its products from initial product development through to product use or application. In addition, the businesses of the Group analyse on a worldwide basis reports of adverse reactions and complaints relating to its products. Each business reviews these adverse reactions and complaints and any safety matters arising with independent medical advisors. These conclusions are subsequently reviewed by the Groups independent medical advisor.
Product liability is a commercial risk for the industry of which the Group is a part, particularly in the US. Smith & Nephew has implemented systems it believes are appropriate in respect of loss control techniques. These include reporting mechanisms to ensure early notification of complaints and a legal department which manages product liability claims and lawsuits.
The Group carries product liability insurance to cover exposure as far as practicable. With the exception of the macrotextured product liability claim, discussed under Legal Proceedings and Risk Factors, instances of loss to the Group arising from product liability claims have been covered either directly by the Group or by insurance. Apart from the macrotextured claim, there are no individual product liability claims that are expected to have a material adverse effect on the Groups financial position.
There can be no assurance that consumers, particularly in the US or elsewhere, will not bring product liability or related claims that would have a material adverse effect on the Groups financial position or results of operations in the future or that the Group will continue to resolve such claims within insurance limits in view of changing legal doctrines and attitudes regarding such matters. See Risk Factors Product Liability Claims and Loss of Reputation.
11
Smith & Nephews products are not inherently high risk. However, if they malfunction, they could damage or impair the repair of body functions. Management believes that the Groups quality, regulatory and medical controls and insurance cover is adequate and appropriate for this class of products. The Groups reputation is crucially dependent on strong performance in this area and on appropriate crisis management if a serious medical incident or product recall should occur.
The Board is responsible for the maintenance of the Groups systems of risk management and internal control and for reviewing their effectiveness. These systems, which accord with the Turnbull Guidance, have been in place for 2004 and to the date of approval of the report and accounts and involve: the identification, evaluation and management of key risks through a Risk Committee, which reports to the Board annually; business reviews by the Board; and the review of the Audit Committee of internal financial controls and the risk management process. These systems are reviewed annually by the Board. Whilst not providing absolute assurance against material misstatements or loss, these systems are designed to identify and manage those risks that could adversely impact the achievement of the Groups objectives.
The Group maintains insurance against product, employers and directors and officers liabilities, and physical and consequential loss, subject to limits and deductibles. The Group maintains liability provisions to cover known uninsured risks. On 17 December 2004 the Group was advised that certain insurers had declined coverage for macrotextured knee claims. See Legal Proceedings.
12
Smith & Nephews customers are the various providers of medical and surgical services worldwide. In certain parts of the world, including the UK, much of Continental Europe, Australia, Canada and South Africa, these are largely governmental organisations funded by tax revenues. In the US, the Groups major customers are public and private hospitals, many of which have combined to form large purchasing groups and receive revenue from private health insurance and governmental reimbursement programmes. In the US, Medicare is the major source of reimbursement for knee and hip procedures and for wound healing treatment regimes.
Competition exists among healthcare providers to gain patients on the basis of quality, service and price. In many countries, and particularly in the US, providers are under pressure to reduce the total cost of healthcare delivery. There has been some consolidation in the Groups customer base, as well as amongst the Groups competitors, and these trends are expected to continue in the long term. Smith & Nephew competes against both specialised and multinational corporations, including those with greater financial, marketing and other resources.
The Groups customers reflect the wide range of distribution channels, purchasing agents and buying entities in over 90 countries worldwide. The largest single customers worldwide are the National Health Service in the UK and HealthTrust in the US. Sales to these customers in 2004 each represented approximately 4% of the Groups worldwide total sales.
In the US the Groups products are marketed directly to doctors, hospitals and other healthcare facilities. Each business unit operates a separate specialised sales force. Within the orthopaedics business further specialisation of the sales force continues to be introduced progressively for reconstructive, trauma and clinical therapy products. In both orthopaedics and endoscopy the US sales forces consist of independent commissioned sales agents who are managed by a mix of independent agents and the Groups own managers. These agents are not permitted contractually to sell products that compete with Smith & Nephews. In both businesses products are shipped and invoiced direct to the ultimate customer. The advanced wound management business in the US operates a sales force of its own employees who market direct to the ultimate customer. Advanced wound management products in the US are shipped and invoiced to a number of large wholesale distributors.
In the other direct markets of the UK, Ireland, France, Germany, Italy, Australia, New Zealand, Canada and Japan the business units manage separate sales forces directly. Except in Australia and New Zealand, where independent sales agents are used, the sales forces of the direct markets comprise employees and market directly to the ultimate customer.
The indirect markets unit comprises direct selling and marketing operations in Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Eastern Europe, Finland, the Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, China, Hong Kong, Korea, Malaysia, Singapore, Taiwan, Thailand, the United Arab Emirates, South Africa, Mexico and Puerto Rico. In these markets orthopaedics and endoscopy frequently share sales resources. The advanced wound management sales force is separate since it calls on different customers. In all other countries Smith & Nephew sells to third party distributors which market the Groups products locally.
In Continental Europe, the Group operates three centralised distribution facilities. Orthopaedics operates a facility in Paris which acts as a central holding and consolidation point for Continental European stock and stock returns. Product is shipped to Group companies who hold small amounts of stock locally for immediate or urgent customer requirements. Advanced wound management operates distribution centres at Nijmegen, the Netherlands and Gothenburg, Sweden from where stock is shipped directly to the ultimate customer in most European markets.
Where management considers that the Group possesses a core competence its policy is to manufacture products internally wherever possible to ensure quality, regulatory and cost goals are met. The Group invests in the expansion of its manufacturing facilities and equipment to meet these aims.
The Group outsources its manufacturing for several possible reasons including lack of in-house expertise, lack of a cost competitive process or due to capacity constraints.
13
Where products and services are outsourced, suppliers are determined based on a number of factors which include the complexity of the product, manufacturing technology, manufacturing capabilities, cost competitiveness and intellectual property. Suppliers are selected based on their capability to provide products and services, their ability to establish and maintain a quality system and their financial stability. Suppliers are monitored by on-site assessments and ongoing monitoring of delivered products. Ongoing product assurance is maintained by effective quality plans.
Each business unit purchases raw materials, components, finished products and packaging materials from certain key suppliers. These comprise principally metal forgings and stampings for orthopaedics, optical and electronic sub-components for endoscopy, active ingredients and finished goods for advanced wound management and packaging materials for all businesses. Management believes that prices of principal raw materials and finished goods purchased are not particularly volatile and that these materials are generally available from various specialist suppliers. Finished goods purchased for resale are primarily SUPARTZ joint lubricant and the BHR hip resurfacing product in the orthopaedic business; monitors and electrical devices in the endoscopy business; and enzyme debrider agents and ACTICOAT in the advanced wound management business.
Smith & Nephews sales are generally at their highest in quarter four of any year. This is caused by the relatively high number of accidents and sports injuries which occur in the North American and European autumn and winter which increases sales of orthopaedic and endoscopy products and by the deferral of elective surgery during the peak summer holiday period in North America and Europe during the third quarter.
The business units each manage a portfolio of short and long-term product development projects designed to meet the future needs of their customers and to continue to provide growth opportunities for their businesses. The Groups research and development is directed towards all three business segments. Expenditure on research and development amounted to £66.4m in 2004 (2003 £66.8m, 2002 £61.3m), representing approximately 5% of group turnover (2003 6%, 2002 6%).
The Groups principal research facility is located in York, England. The Groups research programme seeks to underpin the longer-term technology requirements for its businesses and to provide a flow of innovative products. The Group continues to invest in future technology opportunities, particularly bio-resorbable materials, tissue engineering and non-invasive healing devices across the Group.
Product development programmes are carried out at the Groups principal manufacturing locations, notably in Memphis, Tennessee (orthopaedics), Andover and Mansfield, Massachusetts (endoscopy) and Hull, England and La Jolla, California (advanced wound management). In-house research is supplemented by work performed by academic institutions and other external research organisations principally in the UK and the US.
Management believes that the Groups policy concerning intellectual property rights promotes innovation in its businesses. Smith & Nephew has a policy of protecting, with patents, the results of the research and development carried out throughout the Group. Patents have been obtained for a wide range of products, including those in the fields of orthopaedic, endoscopic and advanced wound management technologies. Patent protection for Group products is sought routinely in the Groups principal markets. Currently, the Groups patent portfolio stands at over 2,500 existing patents and patent applications.
Smith & Nephew also has a policy of protecting the Groups products in the markets in which they are sold by registering trademarks as soon as possible under local laws. The Group vigorously protects its trademarks against infringement and currently is not aware of any significant infringement of its trademark registrations. The present trademark portfolio of the Group consists of over 3,300 trademarks and design rights.
Smith & Nephews principal products are protected by intellectual property comprising patents, licences and know how, and it strives to provide a collection of intellectual property for each major product that reduces the risk associated with failure of any individual piece of intellectual property. In addition, most pieces of intellectual
14
property protect a relatively small proportion of the Groups annual turnover. As a result, the Group tries to ensure that its overall business is not sensitive to the loss (however caused) of any single piece of intellectual property.
In addition to maintaining a policy of protecting its market position by the filing and enforcement of patents and trademarks, Smith & Nephew has a policy of opposing third party patents and trademarks in those areas that might conflict with the Groups business interests.
In the ordinary course of its business, the Group enters into a number of licensing arrangements with respect to its products. None of these arrangements individually is considered material to the operations and the financial results of the Group.
The Groups principal locations are as follows:
Approximate
area |
||
(Square feet
000s) |
||
Group Head Office in London, England |
15 | |
Group research facility in York, England |
83 | |
Orthopaedics headquarters and manufacturing facility in Memphis, Tennessee |
680 | |
Endoscopy headquarters in Andover, Massachusetts |
112 | |
Endoscopy manufacturing facility in Andover, Massachusetts |
110 | |
Endoscopy manufacturing facility in Mansfield, Massachusetts |
90 | |
Endoscopy manufacturing facility in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma |
100 | |
Advanced wound management headquarters and manufacturing facility in Hull, England |
546 | |
Advanced wound management manufacturing facility in Largo, Florida |
188 | |
Advanced wound management manufacturing facility in La Jolla, California |
69 |
The facilities in Memphis, Hull and Largo and the manufacturing facility in Andover are freehold whilst all other principal locations are leasehold. The Group has freehold and leasehold interests in real estate in other countries throughout the world, but no other is individually significant to the Group. Where required, the appropriate governmental authorities have approved the facilities.
During 2004 additional space of 20,000 square feet was leased at the endoscopy headquarters in Andover, Massachusetts and endoscopy manufacturing moved to a new facility in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma which has 45,000 more square feet than the previous facility.
As a result of its rapid rate of sales growth in recent years and anticipated continuing strong demand for its products, the orthopaedics business needs to increase its manufacturing capacity and administrative facilities. A capacity expansion strategy has been formulated and in 2005 additional freehold manufacturing space of 105,000 square feet and leasehold administrative space of 72,000 square feet will be acquired in Memphis.
Also during 2005, in the UK, new facilities for the development, manufacture and distribution of BHR products will be acquired in the Birmingham area and consolidated with the existing UK orthopaedics operations. Current locations in Bromsgrove and Cambridge will be vacated.
The strategy calls for further administrative and research and development facilities to be added in Memphis during 2006 and the identification and securing of low-cost manufacturing locations in the future.
The expansion in the Groups facilities is not expected to have a material impact on liquidity and resources.
15
The Company and its subsidiaries are parties to various legal proceedings including product liability, which are considered to constitute ordinary and routine litigation incidental to the businesses conducted by the Group, in some of which claims for damages in substantial amounts have been asserted. The outcome of such proceedings cannot readily be foreseen, but other than detailed below management believes that they will not result in any material adverse effect on the financial position or results of operations of the Group.
Smith & Nephew is in dispute with ArthroCare Inc., which alleges infringement of three US patents related to certain bipolar radio frequency products. In June 2004 an injunction was granted against Smith & Nephew prohibiting sales of affected products. Sales of the affected products in 2004 up to the date of the injunction were £3m. Management believes it has meritorious defences based upon pending trial court motions, re-examinations taking place in the US Patent and Trademark Office and an appeal to the Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit and intends to contest the case.
In August 2003 the Group withdrew voluntarily from all markets the macrotextured versions of its OXINIUM femoral knee components. As at that date 2,971 components had been implanted of which approximately 2,471 were in the USA, 450 in Australia and 50 in Europe, the first component having been implanted in December 2001.
The product was withdrawn when management became aware of a higher than usual percentage of reports of early revisions (revisions are implants which need to be replaced). Whilst the cause of the revisions remains uncertain it is apparent that some patients do not achieve adequate initial fixation and that in other patients, while there appears to be good initial fixation, this does not persevere. Extensive testing and modelling has so far failed to identify the precise cause of the failure and, due to the large number of variables involved, it is probable that the precise cause may never be understood fully.
As at 28 February 2005 782 implants had been revised and settlements agreed with patients in respect of 537 of these revisions. The total amount paid out in settlements, legal costs and associated expenses was £50m of which £32m had been or will be recovered from the insurer that provides the primary layer and 65% of the first excess layer in the Groups global product liability programme. The balance of £18m is due from insurers in respect of the balance of the first excess layer and the second excess layer.
On 17 December 2004 the Group was notified that two insurance carriers who comprise 35% of the first and 80% of the second excess layers of the Groups global product liability programme had declined coverage for macrotextured claims. Management intends to take all steps available to it in order to enforce this coverage. Nevertheless, in view of the uncertainty, management cannot assert that it is probable that coverage will be restored and consequently has recorded an exceptional charge of £80m representing the amount currently outstanding from these insurers and an estimate of the cost associated with claims likely to arise in the future assuming that insurance cover is unavailable from these and subsequent excess layer insurers.
The charge has been calculated based on: (1) the amount outstanding at 31 December 2004 from the insurers who have denied coverage; (2) an estimate of the average cost in respect of revisions where settlements were unresolved at that date; and (3) an estimate of the number of settlements of future revisions based on the current trend and decaying to zero after five years and an estimation of the average future cost per settlement.
The Groups assessment of the impact of these revisions and related matters constitute forward-looking statements that are subject to uncertainties, including uncertainties relating to the outcome of settlements as compared to the assumptions made in estimating claim amounts. Smith & Nephew cannot provide assurance that these estimates will prove correct. Depending on the number and average cost of future settlements, costs may be greater or less than the amount provided (see Risk Factors).
16
THE BUSINESS AND THE COMMUNITY
CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
Smith & Nephews aim is to help people regain their lives by repairing and healing the human body. The Group contributes to the treatment and the recovery of patients within its areas of expertise and helps clinicians treat more patients by simplifying procedures and providing cost-effective solutions to healthcare systems. Smith & Nephew has a relatively minor impact on the environment but is committed to making continuous improvements to the management of its environmental, social and economic impacts so as to help develop a sustainable business.
Smith & Nephew is dedicated to helping improve peoples lives. The Group prides itself on the strength of its relationship with its clinicians and other healthcare professional customers with whom it has a reputation for product innovation and high standards of customer service. Healthcare economic considerations are integrated into the product development process to ensure that the benefits from the Groups new products and line extensions not only improve patient outcomes, provide better treatment and procedures for both clinician and patient but also contribute to more cost-effective solutions for healthcare services.
The Group has published a Sustainability Report since 2001, recording its progress in corporate social responsibility. Every year the scope of the report widens and new measurements are published to help the Group monitor its progress and demonstrate to its stakeholders that sustainable development is taken seriously and is considered an integral part of the way the Group does business. The fifth Sustainability Report will be published on the Groups website at the beginning of May 2005 at www.smith-nephew.com .
Smith & Nephews progress has been consistently recognised by two of the leading independent organisations that assess sustainable development activities. In 2004, the Group was again included in the Dow Jones Sustainability Index (DJSI) with improved scores, and their report named Smith & Nephew as a leader in its sector. This is the most widely recognised arbiter of good practice and is truly international in scope. The DJSI has again included the Group in both the World Index and the European Index. In the UK, Smith & Nephew continues to be included in the list of FTSE4Good companies.
Business Integrity
Smith & Nephew aims to be honest and fair in all aspects of its business and expects the same from all those with whom it does business. In 2005 it further developed its code covering the standards expected of its suppliers and the means it uses to ensure that these standards are met. Smith & Nephew did not give or receive improper financial inducements, either directly or indirectly, for business or financial gain. The Group works to the high industry standards set by Eucomed in Europe and Advamed in the US. Accounting records and supporting documents are designed to describe accurately and reflect the nature of underlying transactions and conform to IFRS and US GAAP.
The Groups code of business principles governs the way it operates so that it respects the rights of all its stakeholders and seeks to build open, honest and constructive relationships. It takes account of ethical, social, environmental, legal and financial considerations in planning and business decisions. The code is published as part of Smith & Nephews Sustainability Report and can be found on its website.
Innovation
Smith & Nephew is dedicated to developing innovative, cost-effective products and techniques that deliver significant advantages to clinicians and patients. The Group combines scientific and technical leadership with an understanding of the needs of clinicians and a familiarity with the emerging treatments and procedures being explored by them. This enables Smith & Nephew to produce new products with distinct advantages in clinical performance and cost-effectiveness.
The Groups research and development strategy is based both on assessment of market needs and a longer range view of future requirements and opportunities. Radical new treatment and surgical techniques are developed together with technologies and fundamental scientific work that could deliver new products for up to 15 years from now.
It has long been the Groups practice to develop platform technologies that enable the building of a product range following the initial technology introduction. This provides an efficient and cost-effective means for product development and the ability to deliver a stream of incremental benefits to the healthcare community.
17
The Groups research strategy has involved gaining a biological understanding of problems and applying materials and design expertise to provide solutions. Whilst this approach has been extremely successful and will remain a primary route for product development, increasingly the Group is seeking solutions based on active repair where physical or biological stimuli can enhance or accelerate the restoration of the normal function of damaged tissue.
The Group maintains links with pioneering research being conducted in academic and external research organisations around the world to ensure it continues to be at the forefront of innovation for the benefit of all its stakeholders.
Environment, Health and Safety Management
The Group effected a policy and organisation change at the beginning of 2004, combining environment management with Health and Safety (EHS) to bring improvements through a more integrated and comprehensive approach. This policy can be found on the Groups website. Smith & Nephew is committed to the protection of the environment by using renewable resources wherever possible and developing manufacturing processes and products that minimise adverse effects on the environment. The Groups businesses take effective action to control risks and minimise environmental impacts through systems and procedures based on a thorough understanding of the risks and appropriate training and support. Good EHS standards and practice ensure that the environment and Smith & Nephew employees, together with others affected by the Groups business and its products, are protected from harm. It is considered that good EHS practice contributes to business performance by protecting and developing human and physical resources and by reducing costs.
The Group has environmental management systems to identify, monitor and control potential risks and adverse impacts and to generate continuous improvements and cost savings. Manufacturing processes are relatively low in environmental impact. Emphasis is placed on the close control of energy, water consumption and waste, the latter being the main area of impact at manufacturing sites. Waste prevention and minimisation programmes are in operation and sustainable development aspects of the Groups products are assessed during the research and development process. Smith & Nephews key environmental measurements over the last four years are as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
2001
|
|||||
Emissions to air VOCs (tonnes) |
1 | 10 | 20 | 18 | ||||
Emissions to air carbon dioxide (tonnes) |
48,954 | 50,160 | 47,888 | n/a | ||||
Waste (tonnes) |
3,596 | 4,054 | 3,774 | 3,024 | ||||
Hazardous waste (tonnes) |
234 | 275 | 270 | 184 | ||||
Waste recycled (tonnes) |
767 | 646 | 750 | 813 | ||||
Total energy (GwH) |
132 | 145 | 137 | 132 | ||||
Electricity (GwH) |
86 | 89 | 76 | 71 | ||||
Water usage (1,000 cu. Metres) |
427 | 457 | 433 | 389 | ||||
Discharges/effluent (1,000 cu. Metres) |
384 | 399 | 386 | 342 |
Totals are for the Group as a whole for the year and will therefore include divested businesses e.g. the rehabilitation business which was sold in March 2002.
Waste, energy and water consumption has been increasing since 2001 due to significantly increased manufacturing capacity across the Group. There has been an emphasis on reversing this trend in 2004 generally producing good results. Smith & Nephew has relatively low energy consumption as the above figures show. The Group is monitoring its energy consumption by reference to carbon dioxide emission guidelines set out by the Department of Environment in the UK. The 2004 hazardous waste figure excludes a spillage of chrome plating materials which occurred at the orthopaedics manufacturing site in Memphis. Working closely with the state authorities, prompt action was taken resulting in a total of 920 tonnes of affected soil being removed from the site to eliminate any possible contamination.
A full analysis of these measurements are included in the Sustainability Report on the Groups website.
Smith & Nephew monitors key health and safety performance measurements. A set of graphs together with analysis of these movements are included in the latest Sustainability Report.
Social responsibility
The Smith & Nephew Code of Business Principles governs the way the Group operates with regard to all its stakeholders. This clearly spells out the behaviours and conduct each of its stakeholders should expect from the Group in all its dealings with them. For Smith & Nephew employees the Code of Business Principles provides a
18
framework to guide their actions and embodies the practical implementation of the Groups values in their daily lives. There are additional policies that cover in more detail those relating to a particular stakeholder group. All these can be found in the Sustainability Report on the Groups website.
Employees
Smith & Nephew operates a policy of non-discrimination and seeks to provide an open, challenging, productive and participative environment based on constructive relationships. Smith & Nephew welcomes disabled people and makes every effort to retain any employee who becomes disabled. The Group endeavours to maintain good communication with employees through regular and timely dissemination of Group information and consultation. One method it uses to do this is an employee global opinion survey every two years. 2004 was the third survey carried out, the results of which have been the catalyst for a number of improvements.
The results of the 2004 Global Opinion Survey indicate the continued high level of employee engagement with the values and direction of the Group demonstrated in the 2002 and 2000 surveys. Continuing high scores of positive responses reached levels ranging from 67% to 87%. The process of analysing the data and identifying actions required is a continuous process across the business. Activities are monitored by the GEC to ensure that improvements are implemented.
The Group has started to measure a number of factors which relate to employee engagement including the proportion of appointments filled by internal candidates and labour turnover. The initial measurements recorded can be seen below. These measurements are being collected quarterly and will build to a useful monitoring tool and alert mechanism for action, as well as enable the Group to measure annual trends as an indication of improved performance.
Internal Appointments
In 2004 an average of 30% of vacancies in the Groups top eight countries were filled by internal applicants with over 21% of the entire Groups vacancies filled by internal applicants. The Group has a policy of open advertising and providing opportunities for existing employees wherever possible, while recognising the benefits of the new ideas and approaches that external recruitment brings.
Labour Turnover
In 2004 the Group measured both general voluntary labour turnover and turnover relating specifically to employees who have been with the business less than two years. The latter measure is an indication of how well the Group recruits and then retains its employees so that they can make a contribution to the business. The average voluntary labour turnover for the year was 2.5% with a range of 1.0% 3.5%. The average turnover of employees joining the Group within a rolling two year period was 5.8% with a range of 1.4% 11.0%. The higher number of employees leaving within two years of joining has prompted the Group to review its recruitment and integration processes and introduce a number of improvements in this area.
Training and Development Investment
The Group is committed to providing the training, information and authority needed by all employees to make the maximum contribution possible. The Group is developing systems to collect measurements related to training and the investment made in the development of its people to achieve improved performance. Learning and development programmes are in place to ensure that the Group attracts, retains, and develops to their full potential the best talent at all levels where possible. These are linked, wherever possible, to formal performance appraisal and development planning processes. It aims to fill vacancies by internal promotion, as the internal appointments data above suggests, but looks to strike a balance between internal appointments and external appointments. The Group endeavours to recruit, employ and promote employees on the basis of qualifications, behaviours and the abilities needed for the work to be performed. Discrimination is not tolerated on any grounds and the Group provides equal opportunity based on merit.
Leadership
The Group aims to develop its current and future leaders and harness their talent to improve the performance of the business. A set of group-wide leadership capabilities have been developed by the GEC and management development is a standing item on their meeting agenda. Performance evaluation, coaching and attendance at high quality leadership programmes are utilised for development purposes.
Workplace
Smith & Nephew aims to provide healthy and safe working conditions for all its employees. This is achieved by ensuring that health and safety and the working environment are managed as an integral part of the business and employee involvement is recognised as a key part of this process.
19
The Group does not use any form of forced, compulsory or child labour. The Universal Declaration of Human Rights of the United Nations is supported and the Group respects human rights, the dignity and privacy of the individual and the right of employees to freedom of association, freedom of expression and the right to be heard.
Two-way Communication
Smith & Nephew conducted its third bi-annual global opinion survey amongst all its employees during 2004. Improved scores have been seen as a result of actions taken in response to previous surveys and many focused initiatives around the businesses are working to address areas of improvement which have been identified as priorities. These surveys are an important measure of how the Group meets its values in practice and achieves continuous improvement.
The communications functions at Group Head Office, the Group Research facility and at the business units work closely with human resources management at each site on all forms of internal communication. The corporate intranet is linked to all the business intranets to form a network that promotes transparency and knowledge, not only within each business but across the whole of the business. They allow easy two-way communication worldwide and increase employees awareness of financial, economic and market factors affecting the Groups performance.
Society and Community
The Group works with national and local governments and other organisations to meet its legal and civic obligations, manage its impact on the environment and contribute to the development of laws and regulations that affect its business interests. Smith & Nephew strives to be a good corporate citizen by being an active member of its local communities and by encouraging and supporting employees who undertake community work.
The Groups principles for charitable giving are based on the criteria of being relevant to its three areas of expertise orthopaedics, endoscopy and advanced wound management, with the focus being on medical education. Individual company sites also support their local communities in ways which will best meet their needs.
As a result the Group supports a range of charitable causes, mainly at local level, by donations of money, gifts in kind and employee time. The Group recognises a strong obligation to contribute to the communities in which it operates. The Groups main manufacturing sites work closely with their local communities on many initiatives which can be medical device related, but more often focus on meeting the needs of these communities. Smith & Nephew also targets activities where it can contribute its expertise and where its product range is relevant.
For example, project Apollo is the charitable and humanitarian service programme of Smith & Nephew orthopaedics designed to support the charitable work of surgeons, hospitals and charitable organisations by providing: medical products; healthcare information; medical and technical consulting; person-to-person support through employee volunteers; grant programmes covering transportation costs of medical personnel involved in relief efforts; award programmes recognising charitable and humanitarian activities; and medical textbooks for students in developing areas.
The Group realises that technologies and products designed to support the process of healing for physicians and their patients around the world appear at a fast pace and that these advancements do not reach everyone. Project Apollo seeks to link up with physicians and non-profit groups engaged in medical philanthropy to receive donations of Smith & Nephew products, as well as sponsorship and personal assistance from the Groups employees. Teamed with these individuals and organisations, Smith & Nephew believes it has found a way of increasing the impact of the charitable giving and work it undertakes.
The Smith & Nephew Foundation is an independently administered charitable trust funded entirely by Smith & Nephew advanced wound management. It offers awards to individuals in the nursing professions who wish to undertake postgraduate research with the objective of improving clinical practice in nursing and midwifery in the UK in order to enable them to further their professional training and education, thereby improving their clinical practice, medical knowledge and patient outcomes. The Foundation is unique in being the largest single charitable awarding body to the nursing professions in the UK.
Other examples of the programmes supported around its manufacturing sites can be found in the Performance section of the Sustainability Report on the Groups website.
In 2004, direct donations to charitable and community activities totalled £787,000 of which £300,000 went to the Smith & Nephew Foundation to fund research by individual nurses. Smith & Nephew made no political contributions in 2004.
20
Customers
The Group is committed to developing and delivering innovative, cost-effective solutions to provide benefits to healthcare professionals and their patients through improved treatment, ease and speed of product use and reduced healthcare costs. To underpin this commitment, it will maintain significant investment in research and development and continue to provide education and training support for healthcare professionals.
The Groups products are designed to be safe and reliable for their intended use and comply with or exceed all legal and regulatory requirements, including those concerning packaging, labelling and user instructions. The aim is to anticipate future standards and requirements so that the health and safety of its customers and patients is enhanced.
Business Partners
Smith & Nephew is committed to establishing mutually beneficial relationships with its suppliers, customers and business partners. The Group will only work with partners who it believes adhere to business principles and health, safety, social and environmental standards consistent with its own. The Group continues to look at ways to improve its monitoring of the standards of its suppliers, not only with regard to the quality of materials which could impact the product range but also in their corporate social responsibility related activities so it can encourage progress in this area in a similar manner as it seeks to make continuous improvements year by year.
Economic Contribution
The Group business policies aim to achieve long-term growth and profits which in turn bring continued economic benefits to shareholders, employees, suppliers and local communities. Smith & Nephews sustainable development depends ultimately on its ability to provide a satisfactory economic return. In 2004, the Group generated an improved operating return on capital employed (ratio of operating profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items, as set out in the Five Year Record, to the average of opening and closing capital employed plus net debt) of 34%.
Smith & Nephew continues to invest in research and development focused on delivering better outcomes for patients and improvements in application and use for medical practitioners. The Group also aims to deliver cost savings to healthcare systems through such benefits as reduced dressing changes and shorter surgical operating times. Through the use of its products the Group seeks to reduce patients time in hospital and return them to health faster, improving their lives and potentially bringing broader social and economic benefits.
The Group has built considerable expertise in the area of measuring healthcare economics within its advanced wound management business and is now in the process of introducing a similar system across its other businesses. A description of the principles of healthcare economics and how they relate to Smith & Nephew products can be found in the Sustainability Report on the Groups website and expanded sections for both its orthopaedics and endoscopy businesses will be published during 2005. The integration of healthcare economic considerations within the products and services the Group offers is evidenced in the product examples summarised in the Product and Service Innovation section of the Sustainability Report on the Groups website.
Looking Ahead
The Group is fulfilling an important role in its three areas of expertise, orthopaedics, endoscopy and advanced wound management. Increased demands are being made on healthcare systems that many are finding difficult to meet. The expanding elderly population has yet to be affected by the influx of the baby boomer generation that followed the Second World War. Obesity is bringing forward the need for replacement hips and knees and increasing levels of diabetes. With its risk of foot ulcers, diabetes is increasing the incidence of one of the most difficult wounds to heal. More active lifestyles are putting greater strain on joints and increasing age makes the body more prone to injury and less able to recover quickly.
Smith & Nephews strategy is to build upon its technology leadership positions, expand its markets into areas which may not have been treated before and offer the very best in products and services to the medical profession in order to be the preferred choice for patients. The Group believes that it can achieve this by setting and meeting ambitious performance targets, by constant innovation in products and services and by earning the trust of everyone it deals with. In all its business activities the drive towards sustainability is an ongoing and long-term process and Smith & Nephew is committed to maintaining a consistent effort and to improve on its output. The Groups aim is to maximise these benefits through the application of innovation to produce more cost effective solutions to improve treatments and reduce healthcare costs thus contributing to sustainable and constantly improving healthcare systems.
21
Website Addresses
The following provides a list of addresses for specific pages on the Smith & Nephew website to view policies and actions referred to in the text of Corporate Social Responsibility.
Code of Business Principles: www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability2004/rep-4.html
Community support examples: www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability2004/performance/rep-15.html
Energy, waste, emissions & discharges analysis: www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability2004/performance/rep-4.html
Health & Safety measurements & analysis: www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability2004/performance/rep-5.html
Social responsibility policies: www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability2004/rep-12.html
Community support activities: www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability2004/performance/rep-15.html
Healthcare economics: www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability2004/performance/rep-26.html
Product and service innovation examples: www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability/2004/performance/rep-31.html
Smith & Nephew had an average of 7,866 full-time equivalent employees in 2004, of whom 1,679 were located in the UK, 3,437 were located in the US and 2,750 were located in other countries. The Group does not employ a significant number of temporary employees.
The average number of employees for the past three years by business segment:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(numbers) | ||||||
Orthopaedics |
3,123 | 2,727 | 2,649 | |||
Endoscopy |
1,644 | 1,635 | 1,677 | |||
Advanced wound management |
3,099 | 3,089 | 2,951 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Continuing operations |
7,866 | 7,451 | 7,277 | |||
Discontinued operations |
| | 229 | |||
|
|
|
||||
7,866 | 7,451 | 7,506 | ||||
|
|
|
Smith & Nephew conducts a Group-wide employee opinion survey every two years to track and monitor employee attitudes at all locations worldwide. A particular purpose of the survey is to test for any shortfall between published values and Group behaviours. The Group Executive Committee then takes responsibility for ensuring that improvement areas are identified and that appropriate initiatives are put in place. In the 2004 survey the overall response rate was 89% with 92% of respondents saying they were proud to work for Smith & Nephew. Where the Group has collective bargaining arrangements in place with labour unions, these reflect local market circumstances and operate effectively.
Smith & Nephew operates share option plans that are available to the majority of employees (for further information see Note 24 of the Notes to the Group Accounts).
Further information about Smith & Nephew employees, management principles and Vision and Values is set out in the Sustainability Report on the Smith & Nephew corporate website.
22
There are risks and uncertainties related to Smith & Nephews business. The factors listed below are those that Smith & Nephew believes could cause the Groups actual financial condition or results of operations to differ materially from expected and historical results. Factors other than those listed here, that Smith & Nephew cannot presently identify, could also adversely affect Smith & Nephews business. The factors listed below should be considered in connection with any forward-looking statements in this report and the cautionary statements contained in Financial Summary Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements.
Trends in Healthcare Expenditure
In most markets throughout the world, expenditure on medical devices is ultimately controlled to a large extent by governments. Funds may be made available or withdrawn from healthcare budgets depending on government policy. The Group is therefore largely dependent on future governments providing increased funds commensurate with the increased demand arising from demographic trends.
Pricing of the Groups products is governed in most major markets largely by governmental reimbursement authorities. This control may be exercised by determining prices for an individual product or for an entire procedure. The Group is exposed to changes in reimbursement policy and pricing which may have an adverse impact on sales and operating profit. The Group must adhere to the rules laid down by funding agencies including the US Medicare and Medicaid fraud and abuse rules. Failure to do so could result in fines or loss of future funding.
In addition, competition exists among healthcare providers to gain patients on the basis of quality, service and price. There has been some consolidation in the Groups customer base, as well as among the Groups competitors, and these trends are expected to continue long term. Increased competition and unanticipated actions by competitors or customers could lead to downward pressure on prices and/or a decline in market share in any of the Groups business areas which would adversely affect Smith & Nephews results of operations and hinder its growth potential.
Currency Fluctuations
The Group reports its results in Sterling. However only 10% of group turnover arises in the UK compared with 49% in the US, 23% in Continental Europe and 18% in Africa, Asia, Australia, Canada and Latin America. Fluctuations in the exchange rates used to translate the financial statements of operations outside the UK into Sterling may have a material effect on the Group. If the Sterling exchange rate should strengthen against the US Dollar and/or Euro then group turnover and operating profit would be lower on translation into Sterling.
The Groups manufacturing cost base is situated in the US and the UK from where finished products are exported to the Groups selling operations worldwide. Thus the Group is exposed to fluctuations in exchange rates between the US Dollar and Sterling and the currencies of the Groups selling operations, particularly the Euro and the Japanese Yen. If the US Dollar and/or Sterling should strengthen against the Euro and the Japanese Yen then group operating margin would be adversely affected.
Product Liability Claims and Loss of Reputation
The development, manufacture and sale of medical devices and products entail risk of product liability claims or recalls. Design defects and manufacturing defects with respect to products sold by the Group or by companies it has acquired could result in damage to or impairing the repair of body functions. Smith & Nephew may become subject to liability, which could be substantial, because of actual or alleged malfunction of its products. In addition, product malfunction could also lead to the need to recall from the market existing products, which may be costly and harmful to the Groups reputation which is crucially dependent on product safety and efficacy.
Product liability is a risk in the medical devices industry, particularly in the US, the Groups largest geographic market where claims for pain and suffering and loss of earnings may involve substantial amounts. There is a risk that patients bring product liability or related claims that could have a material adverse effect on the Groups financial position. The potential exists for claimants to join together in a class action which could have the effect of increasing the total potential liability.
In August 2003, the Group withdrew voluntarily the macrotextured versions of its OXINIUM femoral knee components from all markets due to a higher than expected revision rate. At that time, 2,971 knee components had been implanted in patients worldwide, with about 2,471 components implanted in the US, 450 in Australia
23
and 50 in Europe. As of 28 February 2005 approximately 26% of implants (782 out of 2,971 cases) required revision surgery as a result of some patients not achieving adequate fixation.
As of 28 February 2005, the Group had entered into settlement agreements in respect of 537 revision surgeries. The total amount paid out in settlements, legal costs and associated expenses was £50m. Of this amount, £32m has been or will be recovered from the insurer. A balance of £18m remains to be recovered.
On 17 December 2004, the Group received notification that two insurance carriers participating in the first and second excess layers of the Groups global product liability programme had declined coverage. While the Group intends to pursue all available options to obtain this coverage, it cannot be certain that coverage will be restored. Consequently, the Group has recorded an exceptional charge of £80m, representing the amount currently outstanding from these insurers and an estimate of the costs associated with claims likely to arise in the future assuming that insurance coverage remains unavailable. The current quarterly run rate of revision is 20 a month which is consistent with the assumptions used in calculating the provision.
Depending on the number and average cost of settlement, costs to the Group may be greater or less than the amount of this provision. In the hypothetical scenario that all implants eventually need to be revised prematurely and that insurance cover continues to be unavailable, the cost to the Group of the declined insurance cover is estimated to be £190m (an additional £110m over the amount provided) assuming the average cost per settlement remains approximately the same and there is a standard rate of mortality. These estimates are forward-looking statements that are subject to uncertainties, including uncertainties relating to the outcome of settlements as compared to the assumptions made in estimating claim amounts. See Legal Proceedings.
The Group maintains product liability insurance, but this insurance is subject to limits and deductibles. There is a risk that this insurance could become unavailable at a reasonable cost or at all, or will be inadequate to cover specific product liability claims. Insurance premiums are relatively high, particularly for coverage in the US, and there is a risk at the medical devices industry level that insurance coverage could become increasingly costly. If Smith & Nephew or any companies it acquires do not have adequate insurance, product liability claims and costs associated with product recalls, could significantly limit Smith & Nephews available cash flow and negatively impact product sales from any associated loss of business.
Highly Competitive Markets
The Groups principal business units compete across a diverse range of geographic and product markets. The markets in which each of the three business units operates each contain a number of different competitors, including specialised and international corporations. Significant product innovations, technical advances or the intensification of price competition by competitors could adversely affect the Groups operating results. Some of the Groups competitors focus on certain specialised products, while others are large, multinational corporations. Some of these competitors may have greater financial, marketing and other resources than Smith & Nephew. These competitors may be able to deliver products on more attractive terms, more aggressively market their products or invest larger amounts of capital and research and development into their businesses. A competitive risk in the endoscopy market is the reprocessing and re-use of single use disposable devices such as arthroscopic resection blades.
There is a risk of further consolidation particularly in the orthopaedic industry which could adversely affect the Groups ability to compete with much larger companies due to insufficient financial resources. If any of the Groups businesses were to lose market share or achieve lower than expected sales growth there could be a disproportionate adverse impact on the Groups share price and its strategic options.
Failure to Make Successful Acquisitions
A key element of the Groups strategy for continued growth is to make acquisitions or alliances to complement its existing businesses. Failure to identify appropriate acquisition targets or failure to integrate them successfully would have an adverse impact on the Groups competitive position and profitability.
Attracting and Retaining Key Personnel
The Groups continued development depends on its ability to hire and retain highly skilled personnel with particular expertise. This is critical, particularly in research and new product development and in the orthopaedics and endoscopy sales forces of which the largest are in the US. If Smith & Nephew is unable to retain key personnel in research and new product development or if its largest sales forces suffer disruption or upheaval, its sales and operating profit would be adversely affected.
24
Regulatory Approvals and Controls
The medical device industry is highly regulated. Regulatory requirements are a major factor in determining whether substances and materials can be developed into marketable products and the amount of time and expense that should be allotted to such development. At any time the Group is awaiting a number of regulatory approvals, which if not received, could adversely affect results of operations. Regulatory approval of new products and new materials is required in each country in which the Group operates although a single approval may be obtained for all countries within the European Union. Regulatory approval of new products may entail a lengthy process particularly if materials are employed which have not previously been used in similar products. Regulatory approvals in the US, Continental Europe, Japan and the UK are the most critical to the Groups success in launching new products.
The Group is required to comply with a wide range of regulatory controls over the manufacturing, testing, distribution and marketing of its products, particularly in the US, UK, Japan and Continental Europe. Such controls have become increasingly demanding and management believes that this trend will continue. Failure to comply with such controls could have a number of adverse consequences, including withdrawal of approval to sell a product in a country or temporary closure of a manufacturing facility.
Patent Infringement Claims
Due to the technological nature of medical devices, the Group is subject to the potential for patent infringement claims. Smith & Nephew attempts to protect its intellectual property and regularly opposes third party patents and trademarks in those areas that might conflict with the Groups business interests. If Smith & Nephew fails to successfully enforce its intellectual property rights, its competitive position could suffer, which could harm its operating results.
Claims asserted by third parties regarding infringement of their intellectual property rights, if successful, could require the Group to expend significant resources to pay damages, develop non-infringing products or to obtain licences to the products which are the subject of such litigation. The Group is currently involved in a patent infringement suit whereby pursuant to a court-ordered injunction, the Group is prohibited from selling certain bi-polar radio frequency products. Failure to obtain a favourable outcome in the litigation could have an adverse impact on the Groups competitive position and profitability. See Legal Proceedings.
Continual Development and Introduction of New Products
The Group operates in the medical devices industry, which has a rapid introduction rate of new products. In order to remain competitive, each of the Groups business units must continue to develop innovative products that satisfy customer needs and preferences or provide cost or other advantages. Developing new products is a costly, lengthy and uncertain process. A potential product may not be brought to market for any number of reasons, including failure to work optimally, failure to receive regulatory approval, failure to be cost-competitive, infringement of patents or other intellectual property rights and changes in consumer demand. Furthermore, new products that are developed and marketed by the Groups competitors may affect price levels in the various markets in which the Groups business units operate. If new products do not remain competitive with competitors products, the Groups sales revenue could decline.
There is a risk that a major disruptive technology could be introduced into one of the Groups markets and adversely affect its ability to achieve business plans and targets.
Manufacturing and Supply
The Groups manufacturing production is concentrated at seven main facilities in Memphis, Tennessee; Andover and Mansfield, Massachusetts; Oklahoma City, Oklahoma; La Jolla, California; and Largo, Florida in the US and Hull in the UK. If major physical disruption took place at any of these sites, it would adversely affect the results of operations. Physical loss and consequential loss insurance is carried to cover such risks but is subject to limits and deductibles and may not be sufficient to cover catastrophic loss.
Each of the three business units is reliant on certain key suppliers of raw materials, components, finished products and packaging materials. If any of these suppliers is unable to meet the Groups needs or substantially increases its prices, Smith & Nephew would need to seek alternative suppliers. There can be no assurance that alternative suppliers would provide the necessary raw materials on favourable or cost-effective terms. Consequently, the Group may be forced to pay higher prices to obtain raw materials, which it may not be able to pass on to its customers in the form of increased prices for its finished products. In addition, some of the raw materials used may become unavailable, and there can be no assurance that the Group will be able to obtain
25
suitable and cost-effective substitutes. Any interruption of supply or price increases caused by these or other factors could negatively impact Smith & Nephews turnover and operating profit.
Medical Device Company Valuations
As a growth industry, the medical device companies currently have higher stock market valuations than other industrial companies. If market conditions change, or other companies in its sector fail to perform, or the Group is perceived to be performing less well than the sector, then the share price rating of the Group may be adversely affected.
Political and Economic Uncertainties
Because the Group has operations in 32 countries, political and economic upheaval in those countries or in the regions surrounding those countries may impact the Groups results of operation. Political changes in a country could prevent the Group from receiving remittances of profit from a member of the Group located in that country or from selling its investments in that country. Furthermore, legislative measures in a country could result in changes in tariffs, import quotas or taxation that could adversely affect the Groups turnover and operating profit. Terrorist activities and ongoing global political uncertainties, including conflict in the Middle East, could adversely impact the Group.
Other Risk Factors
The Board considers that Smith & Nephew is subject to a number of other risks which are common to most global medical technology groups and which are reviewed as part of its risk management process.
In the financial area these include interest rate volatility, share price volatility, challenges by taxation authorities, failures in reporting and internal financial controls and uninsured losses.
Adverse events in the areas of corporate social responsibility could also adversely impact Group operating results.
26
OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW,
LIQUIDITY AND PROSPECTS
The Operating and Financial Review, Liquidity and Prospects discusses the operating and financial performance of the Group, including the financial outlook and the financial resources of the Group, under the following headings:
28 | ||
32 | ||
36 | ||
41 | ||
42 | ||
44 | ||
45 | ||
45 | ||
Related party transa ctions |
45 | |
46 | ||
47 |
The results for each year are compared primarily with the results for the preceding year.
27
Smith & Nephews operations are organised into three core business units that operate globally: orthopaedics, endoscopy and advanced wound management. These three businesses comprise the Groups Continuing Operations. Smith & Nephew believes that its businesses have the opportunities for strong growth due to its markets benefiting from an ageing population, an increase in active lifestyles and trends toward less invasive medical procedures.
Sales by business segment as a percentage of sales of Continuing Operations were as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(%) | ||||||
Orthopaedics |
47 | 45 | 43 | |||
Endoscopy |
24 | 25 | 27 | |||
Advanced wound management |
29 | 30 | 30 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Continuing Operations |
100 | 100 | 100 | |||
|
|
|
Sales by geographic region as a percentage of sales of Continuing Operations were as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(%) | ||||||
Europe (Continental Europe and United Kingdom) |
33 | 31 | 30 | |||
United States |
49 | 51 | 53 | |||
Africa, Asia and Australia and other America |
18 | 18 | 17 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Continuing Operations |
100 | 100 | 100 | |||
|
|
|
As a result of its global sales reach, Smith & Nephews group turnover is primarily denominated in currencies other than its reporting currency, principally US Dollars and Euros. Sales in Sterling accounted for only 10% of group turnover in 2004 (2003 8%, 2002 8%). Consequently, fluctuations in the exchange rates between Sterling and the local currencies where the Group operates have a significant effect on group turnover.
Operating profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items by business segment as a percentage of operating profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items of Continuing Operations were as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(%) | ||||||
Orthopaedics |
55 | 54 | 50 | |||
Endoscopy |
25 | 27 | 27 | |||
Advanced wound management |
20 | 19 | 23 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Continuing Operations |
100 | 100 | 100 | |||
|
|
|
Underlying Growth in Sales
Managements key indicator of sales performance is underlying growth in sales. This is calculated by excluding the effects of foreign currency translation movements and acquisitions (see Note 2b of the Notes to the Group Accounts). Management believes that sales growth on an underlying basis provides a consistent year-on-year measurement of performance without the distortions created by the translational effect of foreign currency movements and acquisitions which are separate from the Groups normal operations. Underlying sales growth is used by management in its internal financial reporting, budgeting and planning.
28
Reported growth in sales by business segment reconciles to underlying growth in sales in 2004 as follows:
Reported
growth in sales |
Foreign
currency translation effect |
Acquisitions
effect |
Underlying
growth in sales |
||||||
(%) | (%) | (% | ) | (%) | |||||
Orthopaedics |
12 | 9 | (4 | ) | 17 | ||||
Endoscopy |
2 | 7 | | 9 | |||||
Advanced wound management |
| 5 | | 5 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Continuing Operations |
6 | 7 | (1 1 / 2 | ) | 11 1 / 2 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
Reported growth in sales by business segment reconciles to underlying growth in sales in 2003 as follows:
Reported
sales |
Foreign
currency translation effect |
Acquisitions
effect |
Underlying
sales |
|||||||
(%) | (%) | (%) | (%) | |||||||
Orthopaedics |
12 | 4 | | 16 | ||||||
Endoscopy |
3 | 3 | (2 | ) | 4 | |||||
Advanced wound management |
10 | (1 | ) | | 9 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Continuing Operations |
9 | 2 | | 11 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reported growth in sales by geographic market reconciles to underlying growth in sales in 2004 as follows:
Reported
growth in sales |
Foreign
currency translation effect |
Acquisitions
effect |
Underlying
growth in sales |
|||||||||
(% | ) | (% | ) | (% | ) | (% | ) | |||||
Europe (Continental Europe and United Kingdom) |
11 | 1 | (4 | ) | 8 | |||||||
United States |
2 | 12 | | 14 | ||||||||
Africa, Asia and Australia and other America |
8 | 4 | (2 | ) | 10 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Continuing Operations |
6 | 7 | (1 1 / 2 | ) | 11 1 / 2 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reported growth in sales by geographic market reconciles to underlying growth in 2003 as follows:
Reported
growth in sales |
Foreign
currency translation effect |
Acquisitions
effect |
Underlying
growth in sales |
|||||||
(%) | (%) | (%) | (%) | |||||||
Europe (Continental Europe and United Kingdom) |
16 | (6 | ) | | 10 | |||||
United States |
3 | 10 | (2 | ) | 11 | |||||
Africa, Asia and Australia and other America |
15 | (3 | ) | | 12 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Continuing Operations |
9 | 2 | | 11 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factors Affecting Smith & Nephews Results of Operations
Sales Trends
Smith & Nephews business units all participate in the global medical devices market and share a common focus on the repair of human tissue. Smith & Nephew operates predominantly in the well-developed healthcare markets of the US (49% of group turnover), Europe (33% of group turnover) and Japan and Australia (9% of group turnover).
These markets are characterised by an increase in the average age of the population caused by the immediate post-World War II baby boomer generation approaching retirement, increased longevity, more active lifestyles, obesity and increased affluence. Together these factors have created significant demand for more effective
29
healthcare products which deliver improved outcomes through technology advances. Furthermore, pressure to resist increases in overall healthcare spending has led healthcare providers to demand products which minimise the length of hospital stays and surgeon and nursing resources.
A recent trend has been increasing consumer awareness of available healthcare treatments through the Internet and direct-to-customer advertising. This has led to increased consumer influence over product purchasing decisions.
In orthopaedics, improvements in technology have lengthened the effective life of reconstructive implants and have facilitated the implantation of knees and hips in relatively young patients thereby improving the quality of life for a new generation. The decision to create separate divisions for reconstructive, trauma and clinical therapy products was a strategic move intended to generate greater customer focus. With experienced managers responsible for sales, marketing and product development in each, management believes that divisionalisation has resulted in increased sales momentum for Smith & Nephew in trauma in the US.
The endoscopy business is benefiting from the continued trend worldwide towards less invasive surgery with particular focus on arthrosopic repair of the knee and shoulder using a broad range of technology. The Group also expects to benefit from the demand for less invasive approaches to spinal disc repair and arthroscopic hip repair.
The advanced wound management business is focused on the treatment of chronic wounds of the older population and other hard-to-heal wounds such as diabetic foot ulcers, burns and certain surgical wounds and is therefore also expected to benefit from demographic trends. The market for advanced wound treatments is relatively unpenetrated and it is estimated that the potential market is significantly larger than the current market. This increased penetration is expected to be driven by improved outcomes from new technology, health economic benefits, increasing nursing shortages, quality of life expectations and education of healthcare providers to convert from traditional to advanced treatments.
In order to take advantage of the expanding markets the Group must continually develop its existing and new technologies and bring new products to its customers. Expenditure on research and development in 2004 represented approximately 5% of Group turnover and products launched within the last three years represented 20% of Group turnover.
Sales Force
The Groups sales force, which includes independent commissioned sales agents, increased by 9% during 2004. The biggest increase was 22% in orthopaedics where the most significant increase was in the US. The size of the endoscopy sales force increased by 3% to 655. The advanced wound management sales force increased by 3% to 905. Further sales force increases are planned in 2005 particularly in US orthopaedics.
Currency Movements
Smith & Nephews results of operations are significantly affected by exchange rate movements. A substantial proportion of its sales and operating expenses are earned and paid in currencies other than Sterling, the Groups reporting currency. Accordingly, the Group is subject to exposure arising from the translation of results of operations in foreign subsidiaries into Sterling for financial reporting purposes. The Group is also subject to exposures arising from sales made in a currency different from the related costs and expenses. The Group attempts to manage the impact of exchange rate movements on cost of sales by a policy of purchasing forward all its foreign currency commitments when firm purchase orders are placed. In addition, businesses are required to purchase forward a minimum of 50% of their forecast foreign currency requirements on a twelve-month rolling basis. The Group also incurs interest in currencies other than Sterling on its indebtedness denominated in currencies other than Sterling. To the extent that other currencies, particularly the US Dollar and Euro, decline in value against Sterling, Smith & Nephews turnover, operating profit and effective cost of sales may be adversely affected, this would be offset by a reduction in the effective cost of servicing debt. See Financial Position, Liquidity and Capital Resources.
Other
Management is not aware of any governmental, economic, fiscal, monetary or political policies or factors that have materially affected, directly or indirectly, the Groups operations or investments by shareholders.
30
Critical Accounting Policies
The Groups significant accounting policies are set out in Note 1 of the Notes to the Group Accounts. Of those, the policies which require the most use of managements judgment are as follows:
Stocks
A feature of the orthopaedic business (whose finished goods stock makes up 64% of the Group total finished goods stock) is the high level of product stock required, some of which is located at customer premises and is available for customers immediate use. Complete sets of product, including large and small sizes, have to be made available in this way. These outer sizes are used less frequently than standard sizes and towards the end of the product lifecycle are inevitably in excess of requirements. Adjustments to carrying value are therefore required to be made to orthopaedic stock to anticipate this situation. These adjustments are calculated in accordance with a formula based on levels of stock compared with historical or forecast usage. This formula is applied on an individual product line basis and is first applied when a product group has been on the market for two years. This method of calculation is considered appropriate based on experience, but it does involve management judgements on effectiveness of stock deployment, length of product lives, phase-out of old products and efficiency of manufacturing planning systems.
Intangible Fixed Assets
In carrying out impairment reviews of goodwill and other intangible assets a number of significant assumptions have to be made when preparing cash flow projections. These include the future rate of market growth, the market demand for the products acquired, the future profitability of acquired businesses or products, levels of reimbursement and success in obtaining regulatory approvals. If actual results should differ or changes in expectations arise impairment charges may be required which would adversely impact operating results.
Post-Retirement Benefits
The cost of the Groups defined benefit pension plans are charged to operating profit, so as to spread the expense of providing future pensions to employees over their remaining working lives with the Group, in accordance with SSAP 24. In this way, actuarial variations are charged or credited to operating profit over periods of ten to thirteen years. The principal assumptions used in calculating pension costs are set out in Note 33 of the Notes to the Group Accounts with the most critical being the return on investments and increase in pensionable earnings for the UK and US plans. If actual results should differ from these assumptions the Groups financial position or results of operations could be adversely affected. The optional alternative accounting treatment, FRS 17, which requires immediate recognition of actuarial variations direct to reserves, has not been adopted because management believes that it has the effect of overstating plan deficits since a short-term rate of interest is applied to plan liabilities which are long-term in nature. If FRS 17 had been adopted a liability, net of related deferred tax, of £89.1m would have been recognised on the balance sheet compared with a net liability of £0.5m under SSAP 24.
Contingencies and Provisions
The recognition of provisions for legal disputes is subject to a significant degree of estimation. Provision is made for loss contingencies when it is deemed probable that an adverse outcome will occur and the amount of the loss can be reasonably estimated. In making its estimates management takes into account the advice of internal and external legal counsel. Provisions are reviewed regularly and amounts updated where necessary to reflect developments in the disputes. The ultimate liability may differ from the amount provided depending on the outcome of court proceedings and settlement negotiations or if investigations bring to light new facts.
The estimation of the liability for the costs of the macrotextured product withdrawal for which insurance coverage has been declined is dependent upon two main variables. These are the number of implant revisions that will ultimately be required and the average cost of settlements with patients. In the hypothetical scenario that all implants eventually need to be revised prematurely and that insurance cover continues to be unavailable, the cost to the Group of the declined insurance cover is estimated to be £190m (an additional £110m over the amount provided), assuming the average cost per settlement remains approximately the same and there is a standard rate of mortality. These estimates constitute forward-looking statements that are subject to uncertainties.
The group operates in multiple tax jurisdictions around the world. Group policy is to submit its tax returns to the relevant tax authorities as promptly as possible, but at any time the Group has unagreed years outstanding and is involved in disputes and tax audits. Significant issues may take several years to resolve. In estimating the
31
probability and amount of any tax charge management takes into account the views of internal and external advisors and updates the amount of provision whenever necessary. The ultimate tax liability may differ from the amount provided depending on interpretations of tax law, settlement negotiations or changes in legislation.
The following discussion and analysis is based upon, and should be read in conjunction with, the Group Accounts of Smith & Nephew included elsewhere in this Annual Report. The Groups Accounts are prepared in accordance with UK GAAP, which differ in certain respects from US GAAP. Reconciliations reflecting the effect of the significant differences between UK GAAP and US GAAP are set forth in Note 39 of Notes to the Group Accounts.
New Accounting Policies in 2004
There are no new accounting policies in 2004 but the Groups policy for contingencies and provisions has been added to the disclosures. See International Financial Reporting Standards for information regarding changes to accounting policies in 2005.
Financial Highlights of 2004
Group turnover was £1,248.5m for the year ended 31 December 2004, representing 6% growth compared to 2003. Underlying growth in sales of continuing operations was 11 1 / 2 %.
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation was £177.9m, compared with £230.1m in 2003. Profit before taxation, goodwill amortisation and exceptional items (calculated as set out in the Five Year Record), improved 15% to £278.4m.
Basic earnings per Ordinary Share were 13.39p, a 16% decrease compared to 15.92p for 2003. Adjusted basic earnings per Ordinary Share before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items (as set out in the Five Year Record) were 21.14p compared to 18.49p for 2003, representing a 14% increase.
Fiscal 2004 Compared with Fiscal 2003
The following table sets out certain profit and loss account data for the periods indicated:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Group turnover (i) |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | ||||
Cost of sales |
(334.8 | ) | (345.1 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Gross profit |
913.7 | 833.8 | ||||
Marketing, selling and distribution |
(476.8 | ) | (440.1 | ) | ||
Administration |
(134.0 | ) | (125.5 | ) | ||
Research and development |
(66.4 | ) | (66.8 | ) | ||
BSN agency and management fees |
15.0 | 19.3 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Operating profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items (i) |
251.5 | 220.7 | ||||
Amortisation of goodwill |
(20.5 | ) | (18.5 | ) | ||
Exceptional items |
(80.0 | ) | (22.4 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Group operating profit |
151.0 | 179.8 | ||||
Share of operating profit of joint venture: before exceptional items |
23.8 | 22.7 | ||||
Share of operating profit of joint venture: exceptional items |
| (2.7 | ) | |||
Share of operating profit of associated undertaking |
| 4.8 | ||||
Net profit on disposals |
| 31.5 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Profit on ordinary activities before interest |
174.8 | 236.1 | ||||
Net interest receivable/(payable) |
3.1 | (6.0 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|||
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation |
177.9 | 230.1 | ||||
Taxation |
(52.7 | ) | (82.0 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Attributable profit for the year |
125.2 | 148.1 | ||||
|
|
|
|
(i) | Group turnover and operating profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items are derived wholly from Continuing Operations. |
32
Group Turnover
For the year ended 31 December 2004, underlying sales growth was 11 1 / 2 %. Reported sales benefited by 1 1 / 2 % from the acquisition of MMT but adverse currency translation, particularly the weakness of the US Dollar relative to Sterling, reduced sales by 7%. Reported group sales consequently increased by £69.6m (6%) to £1,248.5m from £1,178.9m.
Cost of Sales
Cost of sales represents 26.8% of sales compared to 29.3% in 2003. This improvement arose from manufacturing cost and efficiency savings and transactional currency benefits from the relative decline in the value of the US Dollar which reduced the cost of purchasing finished goods in many countries, particularly in Europe and Australia. There was also a mix benefit as the fastest growing business, orthopaedics, also has the lowest cost of sales.
Marketing, selling and distribution expenses
These costs represented 38.2% of sales, compared to 37.3% in 2003. This increase is due mainly to additions to sales forces, particularly in orthopaedics in the US.
Administration Expenses
Administration expenses were 7% higher than in 2003 and represented 10.7% of sales compared with 10.6% of sales in 2003. Administration expense items broadly grew in line with sales.
Research and Development
There was no material change in expenditure on research and development. Smith & Nephew continues to invest in innovative technologies and products to differentiate the Group from its competitors. In 2004, 20% of Smith & Nephews sales were from products introduced in the last three years.
BSN Medical Agency and Management Fees
Agency and management fees were received in respect of services provided to BSN Medical for sales force resource, physical distribution and logistics and administration in certain countries. The calculation of the fees is designed to result in a neutral, cost-recovery position for Smith & Nephew and is for a transitional period only. In 2004 recoveries fell by £4.3m (22%) as a number of shared service agreements expired and BSN established its own independent operations.
Operating Profit before Goodwill Amortisation and Exceptional Items
Operating profit before goodwill amortisaton and exceptional items from Continuing Operations was £251.5m, an increase of £30.8m compared to £220.7m in 2003, resulting from an increase in gross profits of £79.9m partly offset by higher expenses. Operating profit margins before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items from Continuing Operations improved from 18.7% to 20.1%.
Goodwill Amortisation
The amortisation charge on acquisition goodwill increased by £2.0m to £20.5m. The increase was due to the acquisition in March 2004 of MMT partly offset by translational currency benefits due to the decline in the value of the US Dollar.
Exceptional Items
Operating exceptional items of £80.0m represents provision of £13.4m for the amount due from excess layer insurers who have declined insurance coverage for claims relating to macrotextured knee revisions together with an estimate of £66.6m for the cost of settlements with patients likely to arise in the future and assuming that insurance cover remains unavailable.
Share of Operating Profit of the Joint Venture
The Groups share of operating profit before exceptional items increased by £1.1m from £22.7m in 2003 to £23.8m in 2004. Operating profit margins improved from 13.8% in 2003 to 14.3% in 2004 as a result of cost and efficiency savings and from the benefits of integrating the fracture casting and splinting business acquired from DePuy Inc. in March 2004.
33
Net Interest Receivable/(Payable)
Interest income increased by £2.9m from £11.0m in 2003 to £13.9m in 2004. Interest expense decreased by £5.4m from £14.8m in 2003 to £9.4m in 2004. The Groups share of the joint ventures and associated undertakings net interest expense was £1.4m and nil respectively compared with £1.5m and £0.7m respectively in 2003. Interest payable on currency swaps amounting to £14.6m was set off against interest receivable on swaps. Overall interest moved favourably by £9.1m from a net interest payable position of £6.0m to a net interest receivable position of £3.1m, due to favourable movements in interest and foreign exchange rates.
Taxation
The taxation charge decreased by £29.3m to £52.7m in 2004. The taxation charge on profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items was £80.7m an increase of £10.5m on the 2003 charge due to higher profits. The effective rate of taxation on profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items was 29.0% the same as 2003. The taxation charge was reduced in 2004 by £28.0m as a consequence of the exceptional item and in 2003 increased by £11.8m as a result of the profit on disposal of the associated undertaking less exceptional costs.
Business Segment Analysis
Group sales by business segment and geographic region and operating profit by business segment are set out below:
2004
|
2003
|
|||
(£ million) | ||||
Sales by business segment | ||||
Orthopaedics |
588.7 | 525.4 | ||
Endoscopy |
304.8 | 300.0 | ||
Advanced wound management |
355.0 | 353.5 | ||
|
|
|||
Continuing Operations |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | ||
|
|
|||
Operating profit by business segment | ||||
Orthopaedics |
138.6 | 118.7 | ||
Endoscopy |
61.8 | 59.5 | ||
Advanced wound management |
51.1 | 42.5 | ||
|
|
|||
Continuing Operations before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
251.5 | 220.7 | ||
|
|
|||
Sales by geographic region | ||||
Europe (Continental Europe and United Kingdom) |
409.7 | 369.9 | ||
United States |
608.5 | 595.6 | ||
Africa, Asia and Australia and other America |
230.3 | 213.4 | ||
|
|
|||
Continuing Operations |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | ||
|
|
Orthopaedics
Sales
Orthopaedics sales were £588.7m in 2004, an increase of £63.3m or 12% compared to £525.4m for 2003. Underlying sales growth was 17%. Growth in sales in the US was 10% (22% underlying less 12% adverse currency translation). Outside the US, growth was 17% (10% underlying less 4% adverse currency translation and including 11% from the acquisition of MMT). Sales pricing in reconstruction and trauma increased by approximately 3% in the US.
In reconstruction, knee sales increased by 12% (21% underlying less 9% adverse currency translation). This comprised 12% in the US (24% underlying less 12% adverse currency translation), and 14% outside the US (16% underlying less 2% adverse currency translation). Hip sales increased globally by 21% (15% underlying less 10% adverse currency and including 16% from the acquisition of MMT), which included 2% growth in the US (14% underlying after 12% adverse currency translation), and 60% outside the US (17% underlying less 2% adverse currency translation plus 45% from the acquisition of MMT). This reflects continuing strong market conditions particularly in the US, the expansion of sales forces and the introduction of minimal incision surgery (MIS) procedures.
Trauma benefited from the substantial investment in creating a dedicated US sales force, achieving a sales increase of 5% in the US, ahead of the market (17% underlying less adverse currency translation of 12%). Sales
34
growth outside the US was 1% (4% underlying growth less 3% adverse currency translation). These result in 3% global growth (11% underlying less 8% adverse currency translation). Clinical Therapy sales, which consist of the SUPARTZ joint fluid therapy and EXOGEN ultrasound bone healing products, also benefited from sales force investment, growing 32% (44% underlying less 12% adverse currency translation) compared with last year.
A number of new orthopaedic products are in the pipeline. Marketing approval in the US for the ceramic on ceramic hip was received in December. Surgical evaluations for a new locking plate trauma product were started during the year and it is expected to launch this product in the first half of 2005. US pre-market approval application for the BHR product has been accepted for consideration by the FDA.
Operating Profit
Operating profit from the orthopaedics business before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items increased by £19.9m (17%) from £118.7m in 2003 to £138.6m in 2004. The operating profit margin increased from 22.6% to 23.5% as a result of improvements to gross margin from cost and efficiency savings, partly offset by investment in sales force.
Endoscopy
Sales
Endoscopy sales in 2004 were £304.8m, an increase of £4.8m or 2% compared to £300.0m for 2003. The underlying growth of 9%, represents a recovery from a problematic 2003. Sales in the US declined 3% (9% underlying growth less 12% adverse currency translation), but grew 7% outside the US (10% underlying less 3% adverse currency translation).
The new progressive scan camera system and the Groups comprehensive integration capability for digital operating rooms increased visualisation sales by 12% (22% underlying less 10% adverse currency translation). Repair product sales grew by 9% (underlying 16% less 7% adverse currency translation), led by the comprehensive range of shoulder products. Radio frequency sales were affected by an injunction imposed on US sales in connection with an ongoing patent dispute with a competitor, and declined by 12% (negative 2% underlying growth and 10% adverse currency translation) (see Legal Proceedings). Blade sales declined 3% (3% underlying growth less 6% adverse currency translation) following a stabilisation of the re-use of blades by US hospitals.
Operating Profit
Operating profit from the endoscopy business before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items increased by £2.3m (4%) from £59.5m in 2003 to £61.8m in 2004. The operating profit margin increased from 19.8% to 20.3% as a result of improved gross margins.
Advanced Wound Management
Sales
Advanced wound management sales were £355.0m for 2004 largely unchanged from £353.5m in 2003. This is equivalent to 5% underlying growth less 5% adverse currency translation. Outside the US, sales grew 5% (8% underlying less 3% adverse currency translation). However, sales in the US declined 14% (negative 4% underlying growth and 10% adverse currency translation), where they were seriously affected by the need to switch to another enzyme debrider product. Loss of sales of the previous enzyme debrider negatively affected underlying global sales growth by 4%.
Globally, sales forces have refocused on the market opportunities for ALLEVYN hydrocellular dressings and ACTICOAT antimicrobial silver dressings. In the US, a targeted approach to DERMAGRAFT tissue engineered dermal replacement has been implemented. The benefits of this approach are evident in the sales of ALLEVYN, which grew 11% (15% underlying less 4% adverse currency translation), ACTICOAT, which grew by 38% (47% underlying less 9% adverse currency translation) and DERMAGRAFT, which grew by 16% (underlying 28% less 12% adverse currency translation).
Operating Profit
Operating profit from the advanced wound management business before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items increased by £8.6m (20%) from £42.5m in 2003 to £51.1m in 2004. The operating profit margin increased from 12.0% to 14.4% principally as a result of higher gross margins due to manufacturing efficiencies and expense control.
35
Financial Highlights of 2003
Group turnover was £1,178.9m for the year ended 31 December 2003, representing 6% growth compared to 2002. Underlying growth in sales of continuing operations was 11%.
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation was £230.1m, compared with £177.9m in 2002. Profit before taxation goodwill amortisation and exceptional items (calculated as set out in the Five Year Record), improved 15% to £242.2m.
Basic earnings per Ordinary Share were 15.92p, a 31% increase compared to 12.11p for 2002. Adjusted basic earnings per Ordinary Share before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items (as set out in the Five Year Record) were 18.49p compared to 16.02p for 2002, representing a 15% increase.
Fiscal 2003 Compared with Fiscal 2002
The following table sets out certain profit and loss account data for the periods indicated:
2003
|
2002
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Group turnover (i) |
1,178.9 | 1,109.9 | ||||
Cost of sales |
(345.1 | ) | (329.9 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Gross profit |
833.8 | 780.0 | ||||
Marketing, selling and distribution |
(440.1 | ) | (414.1 | ) | ||
Administration |
(125.5 | ) | (127.1 | ) | ||
Research and development |
(66.8 | ) | (61.3 | ) | ||
BSN agency and management fees |
19.3 | 20.6 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Operating profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items (ii) |
220.7 | 198.1 | ||||
Amortisation of goodwill |
(18.5 | ) | (17.5 | ) | ||
Exceptional items |
(22.4 | ) | (29.9 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Group operating profit |
179.8 | 150.7 | ||||
Share of operating profit of joint venture: before exceptional items |
22.7 | 19.6 | ||||
Share of operating profit of joint venture: exceptional items |
(2.7 | ) | (2.6 | ) | ||
Share of operating profit of associated undertaking |
4.8 | 4.9 | ||||
Net profit on disposals |
31.5 | 18.0 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Profit on ordinary activities before interest |
236.1 | 190.6 | ||||
Net interest payable |
(6.0 | ) | (12.7 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation |
230.1 | 177.9 | ||||
Taxation |
(82.0 | ) | (65.8 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Attributable profit for the year |
148.1 | 112.1 | ||||
|
|
|
|
(i) | Group turnover comprised £1,178.9m from Continuing Operations (2002 £1,083.7m from Continuing Operations and £26.2m from discontinued operations). |
(ii) | Operating profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items comprised £220.7m from Continuing Operations (2002 £196.0m from Continuing Operations and £2.1m from discontinued operations). |
Group Turnover
For the year ended 31 December 2003, group turnover totalled £1,178.9m, an increase of 6% or £69.0m compared to £1,109.9m for 2002. Underlying growth of Continuing Operations was 11%. Translation of foreign currencies had the effect of decreasing turnover by 2%, primarily due to the depreciation of the US Dollar against Sterling. The loss of revenues from the Groups discontinued rehabilitation business resulted in an adverse impact to the Groups turnover of £26.2m (3%). Selling price increases accounted for approximately 2% of the underlying sales growth.
Cost of Sales
Cost of sales at £345.1m represented 29.3% of sales compared to 29.7% in 2002. This improvement arose from manufacturing cost and efficiency savings and transactional currency benefits from the decline in the value of the US Dollar reducing the product cost in many countries outside the US, notably in Europe and Australia. The reduction in cost of sales would have been greater but for the acquisition, in late 2002, of the remaining DERMAGRAFT interests not already owned which increased the Groups production costs for this product.
36
Marketing, selling and distribution expenses
At £440.1m these costs represented 37.3% of sales, the same percentage as in 2002.
Administration Expenses
At £125.5m, administration expenses were 1.3% lower than in 2002 and represented 10.6% of sales compared with 11.5% of sales in 2002. Administration expenses were broadly kept level despite the increased sales.
Research and Development
Expenditure on research and development increased by £5.5m (9%) compared with 2002. This represented 5.7% of sales compared with 5.5% in 2002. Smith & Nephew continues to invest in innovative technologies and products to differentiate the group from its competitors. In 2003, 20% of Smith & Nephews sales were from products introduced in the last three years.
BSN Medical Agency and Management Fees
Agency and management fees are received in respect of services provided to BSN Medical for sales force resource, physical distribution and logistics and administration in certain countries. The calculation of the fees is designed to result in a neutral, cost-recovery position for Smith & Nephew and is for a transitional period only. In 2003, recoveries fell by £1.3m (6%) as a number of the shared service arrangements expired and BSN Medical established its own stand-alone operations. This trend of lower agency fees is expected to continue as more BSN Medical entities exit the arrangements.
Operating Profit before Goodwill Amortisation and Exceptional Items
Operating profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items from Continuing Operations was £220.7m, an increase of £24.7m compared to £196.0m in 2002, resulting from profit arising from additional sales together with cost and efficiency savings. These two factors more than offset an increase in pension costs of £7.3m due to the need to amortise the deficits of the Groups principal plans and increased DERMAGRAFT costs of £7.2m following the acquisition of 50% of the joint arrangement not already owned.
Operating profit margins before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items from Continuing Operations improved from 18.1% to 18.7% of which 1.5% points was due to cost and efficiency savings and 0.3% points was due to transactional currency benefits offset partly by 0.6% points in respect of higher pension costs and 0.6% points from the effect of acquiring DERMAGRAFT.
Goodwill Amortisation
The amortisation charge on acquisition goodwill increased by £1.0m to £18.5m. The increase was due to a full years amortisation of ORATEC goodwill compared with nine months in 2002, offset partly by the translational currency effect of a weaker US Dollar.
Exceptional Items
Operating exceptional items were a net cost of £22.4m compared to a net cost of £29.9m in 2002. In 2003, £17.6m of net costs were incurred as a consequence of Smith & Nephews unsuccessful public offers to purchase Centerpulse AG and InCentive Capital AG and £4.8m of costs arose on the integration of the ORATEC acquisition, principally in the relocation of manufacturing and development operations. Exceptional items in 2002 consisted of £17.5m for the write down of the Groups trade investment in the common stock of ATS following its filing for bankruptcy, £4.0m for further rationalisation due to the contribution of businesses to BSN Medical and £8.4m for integration in connection with the acquisition of ORATEC and DERMAGRAFT.
Share of Operating Profit of the Joint Venture
The Groups share of operating profit before exceptional items increased by £3.1m from £19.6m in 2002 to £22.7m in 2003. Operating profit margins improved from 12.6% in 2002 to 13.8% in 2003 as a result of cost and efficiency savings arising from continuing manufacturing rationalisation. The Groups share of exceptional items of £2.7m comprised manufacturing rationalisation costs.
Share of Operating Profit of Associated Undertaking
The operating profit of AbilityOne up to the date of disposal on 12 September 2003 was £4.8m. In 2002 operating profit of £4.9m arose in the nine months following formation on 27 March 2002.
37
Net Profit on Disposals of Associated Undertaking
A net profit of £31.5m arose on the disposal of the Groups 21.5% equity interest in AbilityOne to Patterson Dental Inc., after writing off £8.2m of acquisition goodwill previously set-off against reserves and after charging £1.1m of adjustments in respect of previous disposals.
Net Interest Payable
Interest income increased by £4.4m from £6.6m in 2002 to £11.0m in 2003. Interest expense decreased by £2.0m from £16.8m in 2002 to £14.8m in 2003. The Groups share of the joint ventures and associated undertakings net interest expense was £1.5m and £0.7m respectively compared with £1.6m and £0.9m respectively in 2002. Interest payable on currency swaps amounting to £18.5m was set off against interest receivable on swaps. Overall interest payable decreased by £6.7m to £6.0m due to lower average net debt during the year and lower US Dollar and Euro interest rates on borrowings and swap liabilities offset in part by lower Sterling interest rates on cash balances and swap assets.
Taxation
The taxation charge increased by £16.2m to £82.0m in 2003. The taxation charge on profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items was £70.2m an increase of £8.6m on the 2002 charge due to higher profits. The effective rate of taxation on profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items was 29.0% compared with 29.3% in 2002. The taxation charge was reduced in 2003 by £3.5m as a consequence of the exceptional costs, by £0.8m from the exceptional costs in BSN Medical and increased by £16.1m as a result of the gain on disposal of AbilityOne.
Business Segment Analysis
Group sales by business segment and geographic region and operating profit by business segment are set out below:
2003
|
2002
|
|||
(£ million) | ||||
Sales by business segment |
||||
Orthopaedics |
525.4 | 470.2 | ||
Endoscopy |
300.0 | 291.8 | ||
Advanced wound management |
353.5 | 321.7 | ||
|
|
|||
Continuing Operations |
1,178.9 | 1,083.7 | ||
|
|
|||
Operating profit by business segment |
||||
Orthopaedics |
118.7 | 98.2 | ||
Endoscopy |
59.5 | 53.8 | ||
Advanced wound management |
42.5 | 44.0 | ||
|
|
|||
Continuing Operations before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
220.7 | 196.0 | ||
|
|
|||
Sales by geographic region |
||||
Europe (Continental Europe and United Kingdom) |
369.9 | 318.7 | ||
United States |
595.6 | 579.4 | ||
Africa, Asia and Australia and other America |
213.4 | 185.6 | ||
|
|
|||
Continuing Operations |
1,178.9 | 1,083.7 | ||
|
|
Orthopaedics
Sales
Orthopaedics sales were £525.4m in 2003, an increase of £55.2m or 12% compared to £470.2m for 2002. Underlying growth in sales was 16%. This increase demonstrated Smith & Nephews market share gains in the global orthopaedics market (excluding spine), which is estimated to be growing at 13%. Sales pricing contributed approximately 3% to reported growth. Products introduced within the last three years represented 25% of sales in 2003.
During 2003 the business recruited 60 dedicated trauma sales representatives, with further plans for expansion in 2004 in the US.
Reconstructive implant sales grew by 15% (equivalent to an underlying growth rate of 19% after 4% of adverse currency translation) following an aggressive expansion of OXINIUM products into the market. The OXINIUM bearing material continued to be a great success and has helped surgeons successfully treat younger implant patients due to its wear reduction properties.
38
Knee sales grew by 20%, (an underlying rate of 24% after 4% of adverse currency) driven mainly by the promotion and rollout of OXINIUM technology; hip sales grew by 11% (an underlying rate of 16% after 5% of adverse currency effect) driven by the launch of the OXINIUM femoral head.
More than 30,000 knees made of OXINIUM had been implanted into patients and by the end of 2003 it was accounting for 40% of knee units being sold by the business in the US. The joint fluid therapy product SUPARTZ contributed 3% to knee sales growth.
Growth in sales of hips resulted from the continued solid performance of the SYNERGY and ECHELON platform systems and the introduction in 2003 of femoral heads made of OXINIUM, which by the end of 2003 were accounting for 35% of hip heads sold by Smith & Nephew in the US.
Trauma sales increased by 6% (an underlying rate of 10% after 4% of adverse currency effect) benefiting from increased focus following the divisionalisation of the US business. Trauma sales increased in the US by 4% (equivalent to 13% underlying growth after 9% adverse currency). These results were helped by growth in sales of the EXOGEN ultrasound bone stimulation products, of 14% (22% underlying growth after 8% adverse currency) and the introduction of the JET-X unilateral fixator in 2003.
Higher than normal revision rates in respect of the macrotextured femoral knee component prompted a voluntary withdrawal of the product from the market on 18 August 2003. The total number of components implanted was 2,971 and, to 8 March 2004, 190 revisions had been notified to the Group.
Operating Profit
Operating profit from the orthopaedics business before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items increased by £20.5m (21%) from £98.2m in 2002 to £118.7m in 2003. The operating profit margin increased from 20.9% to 22.6% as a result of cost and efficiency savings, additional sales volume and price increases.
Endoscopy
Sales
Endoscopy sales in 2003 were £300.0m, an increase of £8.2m or 3% compared to £291.8m for 2002. Underlying growth in sales was 4%. Sales in the US declined by 7% with an underlying fall of 2% after adjusting for 9% adverse currency and 4% for the benefit of ORATEC. Outside the US sales growth was 19% (14% underlying after 5% adverse currency translation).
Endoscopy was adversely affected in the US by two market issues increased re-use of arthroscopic resection blades and decreased business from one of its largest customers, HealthSouth. With respect to blade re-use, the business launched an educational campaign that features research highlighting the risks of this practice to hospitals and clinicians in the US.
Endoscopy sales growth was also affected by its decision to defer two product launches into 2004 the digital scanning camera and the next generation varicose vein removal system. Clinical evaluations identified the opportunity to make improvements prior to both products broader launch. Both of these products were launched in early 2004.
Sales of knee and shoulder repair products grew by 14% (an underlying rate of 18% after 4% of adverse currency translation) while ORATEC products produced sales growth of 41% (of which 17% arose from underlying growth, 32% was the acquisition effect less 8% adverse currency translation) helping Smith & Nephew to maintain its market leadership position in arthroscopy with a market share of 29%.
Operating Profit
Operating profit from the endoscopy business before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items increased by £5.7m (11%) from £53.8m in 2002 to £59.5m in 2003. The operating profit margin increased from 18.4% to 19.8% as a result of effective expense control and by accelerating the integration of the ORATEC acquisition. During 2003 the manufacturing and development activities of ORATEC at Palo Alto, California were relocated and integrated with endoscopy operations at Andover, Massachusetts.
Advanced Wound Management
Sales
Advanced wound management sales were £353.5m for 2003, an increase of 10% compared to £321.7m for 2002. Underlying sales growth was 9%. The advanced wound management business maintained its leadership
39
position with approximately 20% of the market for advanced treatments of hard-to-heal wounds. It further developed the concept of wound bed preparation as a new clinical and scientific platform. DERMAGRAFT and TRANSCYTE bioengineered human tissue products, acquired in November 2002, were integrated successfully into the US business.
DERMAGRAFT achieved its target sales of £7m. Sales of the ALLEVYN family of products continued to grow strongly at 24% (20% underlying growth plus 4% favourable currency translation) and ACTICOAT silver-based antimicrobial dressing achieved sales growth of 51% (55% underlying less 4% adverse currency).
The business launched a new enzymatic wound bed preparation product, GLADASE, following the termination of a supply arrangement for the previous equivalent US product, SANTYL. This issue adversely impacted sales in the second half of 2003.
Operating Profit
Operating profit from the advanced wound management business before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items decreased by £1.5m (3%) from £44.0m in 2002 to £42.5m in 2003. The operating profit margin decreased from 13.7% to 12.0% principally as a result of acquiring, at the end of 2002, the remaining 50% of the DERMAGRAFT joint venture not already owned and due to increased pension costs in the UK and the US.
40
The discussion below contains statements that express managements expectations about future events or results rather than historical facts. These forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks and uncertainties that could cause the Groups actual results, performance or achievements to differ materially from those projected in forward-looking statements. Smith & Nephew cannot give assurance that such statements will prove correct. These risks and uncertainties include factors related to: the medical devices industry in general; product liability claims and related insurance coverage; the geographical markets in which the Group operates; the nature and efficiency of the Groups products; the Groups ability to research, develop, manufacture and distribute its products; the translation of currencies to Sterling; and the values of international securities markets. For additional information on factors that could cause the Groups actual results to differ from estimates reflected in these forward-looking statements, you should read Risk Factors of this document.
The markets on which the Group focuses continue to demonstrate robust growth and are expected to benefit for many years to come from an ageing population, active lifestyles and the development of less invasive techniques in orthopaedic and endoscopic surgery. Management believe that Smith & Nephews continuing innovation in advanced wound management products and the potential for further penetration of moist wound healing and wound bed preparation techniques should fuel expansion of this market.
The markets in which the Group operates continue to grow strongly and management expects that innovative new product development programmes and sales force investment particularly in orthopaedics and endoscopy will enable the Group to grow market share and drive market expansion.
For 2005, management expects to achieve high teens sales growth in orthopaedics and high single digit sales growth at endoscopy and wound management. Management expects that continued investment and planned margin improvements will contribute to underlying mid-teens EPSA growth going forward.
A significant external influence on Group sales and profits in 2005 and beyond will be the translational effects of currency to the extent that average rates of exchange differ from those in year 2004. Reported sales and profits would benefit from a strengthening in the value of the US Dollar and Euro against Sterling compared with average rates of exchange in 2004 but would be reduced by a strengthening in the value of Sterling against those currencies.
A further influence on profit and on operating profit margin trends in 2005 and beyond will be the transactional effects of currency to the extent that rates of exchange differ from those in 2004. Operating profit margins will improve if the effective rate of exchange of the Euro compared with the US Dollar increases and will be reduced by a relative strengthening of the US Dollar. The effective rate of exchange will determine the average cost of finished goods purchased by the Groups selling operations from its manufacturing operations and will be affected by actual rates of exchange, forward purchases of foreign currency and stock utilisation.
Management does not anticipate that the dispute with certain insurers over their declination of coverage of macrotextured product liability claims will be resolved during 2005. Consequently, it is expected that settlements with patients will not be reimbursed by insurers and that this will have an adverse impact on cash flow of approximately £40m during 2005. There will be no impact on operating profit since these payments will be charged to the provision established in 2004. See Legal Proceedings and Risk Factors.
41
FINANCIAL POSITION, LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES
Cash Flow and Net Debt
The main elements of Group cash flow and movements in net debt can be summarised as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Net cash inflow from operating activities |
226.6 | 214.5 | 211.0 | ||||||
Dividends received from joint venture |
14.1 | 6.8 | 3.9 | ||||||
Net interest received/(paid) |
4.5 | (3.8 | ) | (10.2 | ) | ||||
Taxation paid |
(37.9 | ) | (52.2 | ) | (52.3 | ) | |||
Capital expenditure and financial investment |
(101.1 | ) | (71.4 | ) | (85.4 | ) | |||
Acquisitions and disposals (net of loan notes issued on acquisition of £50.3m in 2004) |
(34.9 | ) | 48.1 | (128.8 | ) | ||||
Equity dividends paid |
(46.7 | ) | (45.1 | ) | (43.5 | ) | |||
Issue of ordinary share capital and own shares purchased |
3.9 | 7.2 | 3.7 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Change in net borrowings from net cash flow |
28.5 | 104.1 | (101.6 | ) | |||||
Loan notes issued on acquisition |
(50.3 | ) | | | |||||
Exchange adjustments |
36.9 | 45.7 | 68.2 | ||||||
Opening net borrowings |
(127.1 | ) | (276.9 | ) | (243.5 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Closing net borrowings |
(112.0 | ) | (127.1 | ) | (276.9 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Groups net debt decreased by £131.5m from £243.5m at the beginning of 2002 to £112.0m at the end of 2004. Translation of foreign currency net debt into Sterling had the effect of decreasing net debt by £150.8m in the three-year period ended 31 December 2004. Closing net borrowings includes £31.6m of net currency swap assets (2003 £43.4m, 2002 £16.7m).
Acquisitions and Disposals
In the three-year period ended 31 December 2004, £165.9m (including the issuance of £50.3m of Loan Notes in 2004) was spent on acquisitions, net of disposal proceeds, funded from net debt. Acquisitions totalled £295.8m and comprised ORATEC £191.2m, MMT £69.6m, Collagenase £9.1m, DERMAGRAFT £7.8m, Acticoat £7.3m and other £10.8m.
In the same three-year period, £129.9m was received from the disposal of businesses and the formation of BSN Medical. This comprised £5.7m on the formation of BSN Medical, £71.8m for the rehabilitation business and £52.4m for AbilityOne.
Capital Expenditure
The Groups ongoing capital expenditure and working capital requirements have been financed through cash flow generated by business operations and, where necessary, through short-term committed and uncommitted bank facilities. In recent years capital expenditure on tangible and intangible fixed assets has represented approximately 7% to 8% of continuing group turnover. Capital expenditure in 2005 is expected to be approximately the same percentage of Group turnover as 2004.
In 2004 capital expenditure of £102.3m (£101.1m net of disposals of fixed assets) was incurred. The principal areas of investment were in the placement of orthopaedics instruments with customers, manufacturing plant and equipment, information technology and intangible assets.
At 31 December 2004, £4.4m of capital expenditure had been contracted but not provided for.
Operating Cash Flow
Management assesses available cash flow in terms of operating cash flow before outgoings on rationalisation, divestment, acquisition integration and other exceptional costs and after capital expenditure and financial investments. This figure (£144.9m for 2004) is after several adjustments to net cash inflow from operating activities, the most comparable UK GAAP figure. Management believes that this figure represents a truer reflection of cash flow generation because it excludes exceptional cash flow items. This measure is used in the Groups management reporting, budgeting and planning. Management also uses as a key indicator the cash
42
conversion ratio i.e. the percentage of cash flow compared to group operating profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items. This was 58% for 2004 (2003 77%, 2002 73%) and was lower than in previous years as a result of an increase in orthopaedic stocks to improve customer service and meet anticipated increases in demand for both existing and new products. Management uses this cash conversion ratio to monitor the efficiency of its use of capital employed and to provide meaningful year-on-year cash flow trend information. Management has set long-term targets for the Group of 70% 75% cash conversion ratio.
The following table presents a reconciliation of net cash inflow from operating activities to operating cash flow before outgoings on rationalisation, divestment, acquisition integration, macrotextured knee settlements unreimbursed by insurers and Centerpulse costs.
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Net cash inflow from operating activities |
226.6 | 214.5 | 211.0 | ||||||
Less: capital expenditure and financial investment |
(101.1 | ) | (71.4 | ) | (85.4 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Operating cash flow |
125.5 | 143.1 | 125.6 | ||||||
Add: exceptional outgoings: |
|||||||||
Rationalisation, acquisition integration and divestment costs |
2.2 | 9.6 | 19.3 | ||||||
Macrotextured knee revisions unreimbursed by insurers |
17.2 | | | ||||||
Centerpulse transaction costs |
| 17.0 | | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Operating cash flow before exceptional outgoings |
144.9 | 169.7 | 144.9 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Liquidity
The Groups policy is to ensure that it has sufficient funding and facilities in place to meet foreseeable borrowing requirements.
At 31 December 2004, the Group held £32.6m in cash and balances at bank and had committed and uncommitted bank facilities of £326m and £212m respectively. Undrawn bank facilities amounted to £414m, of which £225m were committed. Of the undrawn committed facilities, £6m expire within one year and £219m after two but within five years. Of the drawn facilities, £31.9m expires within one year, £0.3m expires in 1-3 years and £93.7 expires within 3-5 years. In addition Smith & Nephew has £50.3m of loan notes payable within 1-3 years. Smith & Nephew intends to repay the amounts due within one year by using available cash and drawing down on the longer-term facilities.
The principal variations in the Groups borrowing requirements normally result from the timing of the bi-annual dividend payments, acquisitions and disposals of businesses, timing of capital expenditure and working capital fluctuations. In 2005 the settlement of macrotextured patient claims will also be a factor.
Smith & Nephew believes that its capital expenditure needs and its working capital funding for 2005, as well as its other known or expected commitments or liabilities, can be met from its existing resources and facilities.
Further information regarding borrowings at 31 December 2004 is set out in Note 19 of the Notes to the Group Accounts. The Group believes that the borrowing facilities do not contain restrictions that are expected to impact on funding or investment policy for the foreseeable future.
Pension Funding
The movements in the stock market values over the last five years have adversely affected the funding levels of Smith & Nephews major defined benefit plans in the UK and US. These plans continue to be accounted for under SSAP 24 and their combined SSAP 24 deficit is estimated as £49m at 31 December 2004 (2003 £55m). This is less than the combined deficit under FRS 17 of £123.7m (2003 £121.2m). The difference is due to the non-investment return discount rate required to be applied to liabilities under FRS 17. The SSAP 24 deficit is to be funded over members average future working lives. Existing provisions and planned increases in future contributions are considered adequate to cover the current under funding position.
Payment Policies
It is Company policy to ensure that suppliers are paid within agreed terms. At the year-end, the Companys trade creditors represented the equivalent of 39 days credit.
43
EXCHANGE AND INTEREST RATE RISK AND FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
The Board of Directors of the Company has established a set of policies to manage funding, currency and interest rate risks. These policies include the use of derivative financial instruments only for the management of the financial risks associated with underlying business activities and their financing.
Foreign Exchange Exposure
The Group trades in over 90 countries and as a consequence has transactional and translational foreign exchange exposure. The Groups policy is to protect shareholders funds by matching foreign currency assets, including acquisition goodwill, with foreign currency liabilities wherever practicable. These liabilities take the form of either borrowings or currency swaps. It is the Groups policy for operating units not to hold unhedged monetary assets or liabilities other than in their functional operating currencies.
Foreign exchange variations affect trading results in two ways. Firstly on translation of overseas sales and profits into Sterling and secondly, the currency cost of purchases by Group companies of finished products and raw materials. The principal flows of currency are purchases of US Dollars and Sterling from Euros, Japanese Yen, Australian and Canadian Dollars, as well as cross purchases between the US and the UK.
The Group partly mitigates the translational impact on profits through the interest arising on foreign currency borrowings or swaps. The impact of currency movements on the cost of purchases is partly mitigated by the use of forward foreign exchange contracts.
The Group managed £320m of foreign currency purchase transactions by using forward foreign exchange contracts, of which the major transaction flow is Euros into US Dollars. The Groups policy is for firm commitments to be fully covered and forecast transactions to be covered between 50% and 90% for up to one year. If the Euro were to weaken against US Dollar by 10% on average over the year, the fair value of forward foreign exchange contracts would increase by £5m (2003 increase by £3m).
Had the Group not transacted forward foreign exchange purchase contracts and if Sterling were to have weakened on average over the year by 10% against all other currencies, Smith & Nephews profit on ordinary activities before taxation in 2004 would have increased by £29m on account of transactional and translational movements; if the Euro were to have weakened on average over the year by 10% against all other currencies, profit on ordinary activities before taxation in 2004 would have reduced by £10m; if the US Dollar were to have weakened on average over the year by 10% against all other currencies, profit before taxation in 2004 would not have changed materially.
The Groups net debt is exposed to movements in exchange rates on foreign currency liabilities. Based upon the net debt position at 31 December 2004 if Sterling were to weaken against the US Dollar by 10%, the increase in the Groups net debt would be £51m. If Sterling were to weaken against all currencies excluding the US Dollar by 10%, the Groups net debt would be increased by £20m. That is, if Sterling were to weaken against all currencies by 10%, the Groups net debt would increase by £71m.
Interest Rate Risk
The Group contracts fixed rate currency swaps and uses simple floating to fixed rate interest rate swaps to meet its objective of protecting borrowing costs and differentials between borrowing and deposit rates within parameters set by the Board. Interest rate swaps and the fixed interest element of currency swaps are accounted for as hedges and, as such, changes in fair values resulting from changes to market rates are not recognised in the Group balance sheet nor in reported profits. The cash flow effects of interest rate swaps match cash flows on the underlying instruments such that there is no net cash flow effect from movements in market interest rates.
As at 31 December 2004, the majority of interest costs and differentials had been protected through to December 2005.
If the Group had not transacted interest rate swaps or fixed interest rate cross currency swaps to hedge its interest rate risk, based upon the net debt position at 31 December 2004, an increase in short-term interest rates across all currencies by one percentage point would increase the Groups annual net interest payable by £1.1m (2003 increase by £1.3m). The Groups financial assets and liabilities, excluding fixed interest rate currency swaps, were principally at floating interest rates and thus their fair values are not directly affected by movements in market rates of interest.
44
At 31 December 2004, an increase of one percentage point in Sterling interest rates would have reduced the fair value of Sterling interest rate swaps and the Sterling fixed interest element of currency swaps by £5m; and an increase of one percentage point in US Dollar interest rates would have increased the fair value of US Dollar interest rate swaps and the US Dollar fixed interest element of currency swaps by £4m. In the case of decreases in interest rates of one percentage point the changes in the fair values of the interest rate and the fixed interest element of currency swaps would have been an increase of £5m relating to Sterling and a decrease of £4m relating to US Dollars.
Financial Instruments
The Groups financial instruments are subject to changes in fair values as a result of changes in market rates of exchange and forward interest rates. All financial instruments are accounted for as hedges. As a result, changes in fair values of financial instruments do not affect the Groups profit on ordinary activities before taxation.
The Group limits exposure to credit risk on counterparties used for financial instruments through a system of internal credit limits which, with certain minor exceptions due to local market conditions, require counterparties to have a minimum A rating from the major ratings agencies. The financial exposure of a counterparty is determined as the total of cash and deposits, plus the risk on derivative instruments, assessed as the fair value of the instrument plus a risk element based on the nominal value and the historic volatility of the market value of the instrument. Smith & Nephew does not anticipate non-performance of counterparties and believes it is not subject to material concentration of credit risk.
Contractual obligations at 31 December 2004 were as follows:
Payments due by period
|
||||||||||
Total
|
Less than 1
year |
1-3 years
|
3-5 years
|
More
than 5 years |
||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||
Short-term debt obligations |
30.4 | 30.4 | | | | |||||
Long-term debt obligations |
93.7 | | | 93.7 | | |||||
Loan Notes |
50.3 | | 50.3 | | | |||||
Finance lease obligations |
1.8 | 1.5 | 0.3 | | | |||||
Operating lease obligations |
92.7 | 20.7 | 23.1 | 14.0 | 34.9 | |||||
Purchase obligations |
2.3 | 2.3 | | | | |||||
Other |
46.6 | 30.8 | 15.8 | | | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
317.8 | 85.7 | 89.5 | 107.7 | 34.9 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
Other contractual obligations consist of credit balances on currency swaps and interest rate swaps, foreign exchange contracts and acquisition consideration.
The agreed contributions for 2005 in respect of the Groups principal pension plans are 11% of pensionable earnings plus a supplementary payment of £4.3m to the UK Plan and 9% of pensionable earnings plus a supplementary payment of £2.7m to the US Plan.
In addition, at 31 December 2004, the Group had contracted but not provided for £4.4m of capital expenditure.
OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS
Management believes that the Group does not have any off-balance sheet arrangements, as defined by the SEC in item 5E of Form 20-F, that have or are reasonably likely to have a current or future effect on the Groups financial condition, changes in financial condition, revenues or expenses, results of operations, liquidity, capital expenditures or capital resources that is material to investors.
Except for BSN Medical and AbilityOne (see Note 36 of Notes to the Group Accounts), no other related party has had material transactions or loans with Smith & Nephew over the last three financial years.
45
INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL REPORTING STANDARDS (IFRS)
Under European regulation, from 2005 Smith & Nephew will be required to publish its financial statements under IFRS. The transition is being managed internally by a Project Committee reporting to a Steering Committee which is chaired by the Finance Director. Quarterly reports have been made to the Audit Committee.
The Project Committee has performed a full assessment of the extant standards and their impact on both the reported financial statements and the underlying business processes, and continues to monitor the standards yet to be finalised by the International Accounting Standards Board and adopted by the European Union. Amendments to internal reporting systems and financial processes have been effected and budgeting for 2005 is on a full IFRS basis. Training has been provided internally and will continue over the transition period.
In November 2004 the Group announced its external communication plan, explaining to investors the impact of IFRS based on managements expectations of the format of the final standards. A summary of the adjustments required to restate each quarters earnings and net debt in 2004 to an IFRS basis was included within the 2004 preliminary announcement issued on 3 February 2004. In parallel with the issue of 2004 financial statements, management has published the revised accounting policies which will be applied from 2005 onwards, together with an unaudited description of the major accounting changes and quantification of how existing UK GAAP reporting reconciles to the IFRS equivalent for 2003 and 2004 full years. This document is available on the Groups website and in printed copy on request from the Groups company secretary. From Quarter 1, 2005, all results will be presented under IFRS.
Based on the standards currently in issue and managements understanding of future developments, the major differences in accounting policies which will impact Smith & Nephew are for employee benefits (in particular pensions accounting and a requirement for the expensing of all share options granted), for acquisition goodwill which will no longer be amortised but will be subject to annual testing for impairment and increased recognition of intangible assets arising on acquisition. In addition, management expects the recognition criteria for deferred tax will change, resulting in a net write back of provisions, principally related to goodwill set off against reserves. The proposed standards and interpretations on financial instruments have necessitated a change in Smith & Nephews accounting practice. The Group continues to hedge the net investment value of foreign subsidiaries and the overall hedging strategy for trading hedges remains essentially unchanged. However, management does not believe that it will be possible to fix forward the reported interest costs of the Group with the same certainty as could be achieved under UK GAAP, resulting in some volatility within financing costs over each quarterly period.
Management expects to be fully prepared for the transition. However, full implementation is dependent on the completion of the standard setting process by the International Accounting Standards Board and the adoption of such standards by the European Commission. The failure of the European Commission to adopt all of these standards in time for financial reporting in 2005, or the issue of further interpretations by the International Financial Reporting Interpretation Committee (IFRIC) in advance of the reporting date, could result in the need to change the basis of accounting or presentation of certain financial information from that presented in this note. In particular, the International Accounting Standards Board has yet to provide definitive rulings and transitional guidance on specific aspects of IAS 39 Recognition and Measurement of Financial Instruments which impact the Group. Management intends to continue monitoring developments as the standards and recognised practices evolve.
Had Smith & Nephew been reporting under IFRS management believe its results and shareholders funds since the transition date would have been as follows:
Results
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
Attributable profit for the financial year |
£ | 138.2m | £ | 172.4m | ||
Basic earnings per Ordinary Share |
14.78p | 18.54p | ||||
Diluted earnings per Ordinary Share |
14.67p | 18.42p |
IFRS attributable profit for the financial year in 2004 is £13.0m (2003 £24.3m) higher than UK GAAP mainly due to the non-amortisation of goodwill of £20.5m (2003 £18.5m), offset partly by higher amortisation of intangible fixed assets of £4.4m (2003 nil). Other principal adjustments to profit include: a net charge of
46
£5.0m under IFRS 2 for share based compensation (2003 £3.5m); a net benefit of £2.7m (2003 £1.2m) for pensions
reflecting a current service cost benefit of £3.6m (2003 £2.7m) and £1.8m (2003 £3.8m) finance cost expense and a credit of £0.9m (2003 £2.3m) on the difference in deferred taxation
Shareholders Funds
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
At 31 December |
£ | 702.0m | £ | 610.4m |
Shareholders funds in 2004 are £25.0m (2003 £30.4m) lower than UK GAAP principally due to the recognition of the full defined benefit pension deficit of £94.1m (2003 £88.6m) net of deferred tax offset by the non-amortisation of goodwill of £36.7m (2003 £17.5m) and the recognition of the final dividend £30.0m (2003 £28.9m) on a declared rather than a proposed basis.
Smith & Nephew prepares its accounts in accordance with UK GAAP which differ in certain respects from US GAAP. Reconciliations of profit for the financial year and shareholders funds are set out in Note 39 of Notes to the Group Accounts. As a consequence of the preparatory work to convert the accounts from UK GAAP to IFRS, management has identified certain adjustments that were needed to the UK/US GAAP reconciliations in prior years and has restated for these as disclosed in Note 39 of the Notes to the Group Accounts.
Results
2004
|
Restated 2003 |
Restated 2002 |
|||||||
Profit for the financial year |
£ | 142.4m | £ | 179.5m | £ | 145.2m | |||
Basic earnings per Ordinary Share |
15.23p | 19.30p | 15.68p | ||||||
Diluted earnings per Ordinary Share |
15.12p | 19.18p | 15.55p |
US GAAP profit for the financial year in 2004 is £17.2m higher than UK GAAP mainly due to the non-amortisation of goodwill of £20.5m, offset partly by higher amortisation of other intangible fixed assets of £13.0m. Other principal adjustments to profit include: a credit of £24.4m on differences in hedge accounting; a charge of £6.5m under FAS 123 for stock based compensation; a charge of £6.4m for pensions reflecting a difference in methodology for calculating the service cost and a credit of £2.1m on the difference in deferred taxation accounting for intangibles and gains deferred into replacement assets.
Shareholders Funds
2004
|
Restated 2003 |
|||||
At 31 December |
£ | 781.9m | £ | 690.7m |
Shareholders funds in 2004 are £54.9m higher than UK GAAP principally due to the non-amortisation of goodwill, £33.3m; different recognition criteria for intangible assets and goodwill, £76.3m; dividends on a declared rather than a proposed basis, £30.0m; inclusion of a minimum pension liability, £93.6m; and lower taxation provision due to these adjustments of £20.9m.
Prospects
Smith & Nephew have published expectations of future results on an IFRS basis in Outlook and Trend Information.
New accounting standards in the US which may affect US GAAP results are detailed in Note 38 of the Notes to the Group Accounts.
47
This section discusses Smith & Nephews structures and governance procedures.
49 | ||
50 | ||
51 | ||
53 | ||
56 |
48
The Board of Directors of Smith & Nephew as at 28 February 2005 comprised:
Director |
Position |
Initially elected or appointed |
Term of
appointment expires at AGM in |
|||
Dudley G. Eustace |
Non-Executive Chairman | 10 November 1999 | 2006 | |||
John Buchanan |
Non-Executive Deputy Chairman | 3 February 2005 | 2005 | |||
Sir Christopher ODonnell |
Executive Director, Chief Executive | 1 September 1992 | 2007 | |||
Peter Hooley |
Executive Director (responsible for Finance and Information Technology) | 2 April 1991 | 2006 | |||
Dr. Pamela J. Kirby |
Non-Executive Director | 1 March 2002 | 2005 | |||
Warren D. Knowlton |
Non-Executive Director | 1 November 2000 | 2007 | |||
Brian Larcombe |
Non-Executive Director | 1 March 2002 | 2005 | |||
Richard De Schutter |
Non-Executive Director | 1 January 2001 | 2007 | |||
Dr. Rolf W. H. Stomberg |
Non-Executive Director | 1 January 1998 | 2007 |
Directors Biographies
Dudley G. Eustace, Chairman, (68) was appointed Deputy Chairman in 1999 and Chairman in January 2000. He is Chairman of the Nominations Committee. He is non-executive Chairman of Sendo Holdings plc and non-executive Vice Chairman of Aegon NV, Hagemeyer NV and Royal KPN NV.
John Buchanan (61) was appointed a director on 3 February 2005. He is the Deputy Chairman. He is a non-executive director of Vodafone Group Plc, AstraZeneca PLC and BHP Billiton.
Sir Christopher ODonnell, Chief Executive, (58) joined the Group in 1988 as managing director of the Groups medical division and was appointed a director of Smith & Nephew in 1992. He was appointed Chief Executive in 1997 and is a member of the Nominations Committee. He is a non-executive director of BOC Group plc. Previously he held senior positions with UK and US companies in the medical engineering and devices industry.
Peter Hooley, Finance Director, (58) joined the Group and was appointed Finance Director in 1991. He is a non-executive director of Cobham plc. Previously he held senior financial positions with Matthew Hall and BICC.
Dr. Pamela J. Kirby (51) was appointed a director in March 2002 and is a member of the Remuneration Committee. She is non-executive Chairman of Oxford Immunotec Limited and a non-executive director of T&F Informa plc, Oscient Pharmaceuticals Corporation and Scynexis Inc.
Warren D. Knowlton (58) was appointed a director in November 2000. He is Chairman of the Audit Committee and a member of the Remuneration Committee. He is Group Chief Executive of Morgan Crucible plc.
Brian Larcombe (51) was appointed a director in March 2002 and is a member of the Audit Committee. He is a non-executive director of F&C Asset Management plc.
Richard De Schutter (64) was appointed a director in January 2001 and is a member of the Audit Committee and the Remuneration Committee. He is non-executive Chairman of Incyte Corporation and a non-executive director of Varian Inc., MedPointe Pharmaceuticals, Ecolab Inc, Metaphore Pharmaceuticals and Navicure Inc.
Dr. Rolf W. H. Stomberg (64) was appointed a director in 1998. He is the Senior Independent Director, Chairman of the Remuneration Committee and a member of the Audit and Nominations Committees. He is Chairman of Management Consulting Group plc and Lanxess AG and a non-executive director of Scania AB, Reed Elsevier plc, Hoyer GmbH, TPG Group plc, Deutsche BP AG and Biesterfeld AG.
49
The Chief Executive of Smith & Nephew and other senior executives are responsible for the day-to-day management of the Group. The Group Executive Committee (GEC), which comprises the executive directors and certain other senior executives of Smith & Nephew (the Executive Officers), assists the Chief Executive in the management of the business. The following are Executive Officers of Smith & Nephew and all, apart from the Company Secretary, are members of the GEC:
Dr. Peter Arnold (43) Group Director of Technology. He joined the Group in 1997 and worked in corporate business development and corporate research and development roles. He was appointed to the GEC in January 2004. Prior to joining the Group he was responsible for research and development for Johnson & Johnsons wound care business.
James L. Dick (52) President Advanced Wound Management. He joined the Group in 1977 and was appointed to the GEC in January 1999. He has worked predominantly in sales, marketing and general management roles with particular emphasis on international marketing, country management and new technology.
Peter W. Huntley (44) Group Director Indirect Markets. He joined the Group and was appointed to the GEC in April 1998, responsible for the Groups strategy and business planning. He was appointed to his current role in December 2003. Prior to joining the Group, he was a consultant with Deloitte Haskins and Sells, and the Business Development Director for Matthew Clark plc.
David Illingworth (51) President Orthopaedics. He joined the Group and was appointed to the GEC in May 2002. Prior to joining the Group he held posts within GE Medical, as Chief Executive Officer of a publicly traded medical devices company, President of a respiratory/critical care company and President of a technology incubator company.
James A. Ralston (58) Chief Legal Officer. He joined the Group in 1998 as Executive VP and Chief Legal Officer for North America and was appointed to the GEC in February 2002. Prior to joining the Group he was in private practice and VP General Counsel and Secretary for Eagle-Picher Industries, Inc.
James M. Taylor (48) President Endoscopy. He joined the Group and was appointed to the GEC in June 2000. Prior to his appointment in 2003 as President of Endoscopy, he was Group Director Indirect Markets. Previously he was President of DePuy International and has held senior positions with British Leyland and Chloride Group.
Paul M. Williams (58) Group Director Human Resources. He joined the Group and was appointed to the GEC in December 1998. Prior to joining the Group he held senior human resources director roles with NCR, Heinz, Glaxo and Rolls-Royce.
Company Secretary
Paul R. Chambers (60) Company Secretary. He joined the Group in 1994 as Assistant Company Secretary and was appointed Company Secretary in April 2002.
50
The new Combined Code on Corporate Governance, as appended to the UK Listing Authoritys Listing Rules, requires UK listed companies to make a disclosure statement on the application of the Principles and Supporting Principles and compliance with the Provisions of the Code.
The Board is committed to the highest standards of Corporate Governance and considers that it has complied with the new Code throughout the year with the exception that no member of the Audit Committee has recent financial experience. However, all members have relevant financial experience and the Board considers that the members of the Audit Committee have the skills and experience of corporate financial matters to discharge properly the Committees responsibilities. All members meet the definition of financial expert in the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.
In accordance with the Code, the following paragraphs describe Smith & Nephews Corporate Governance policies and procedures and how it applies the Principles and Supporting Principles in the new Code.
The Companys American Depositary Shares are listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) and the Company is therefore subject to the rules of the NYSE as well as the US securities laws and the rules of the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) applicable to foreign private issuers. The Board believes that it has complied throughout the year with both SEC and NYSE requirements related to corporate governance with the exception that, in accordance with the Combined Code, the Nominations Committee consists of a majority of independent directors and does not consist wholly of independent directors, as required by the NYSE.
The Board
The Board of Directors of Smith & Nephew consists of an independent non-executive Chairman, two executive directors and six independent non-executive directors. In 2004, the Board met on eight occasions and individual attendance was: Dudley Eustace (8), Sir Christopher ODonnell (8), Peter Hooley (8), Dr Pamela Kirby (8), Warren Knowlton (7), Brian Larcombe (8), Richard De Schutter (8) and Dr Rolf Stomberg (8). John Buchanan joined the Board in February 2005.
The Board is responsible for the strategic direction and overall management of the Group and has a formal schedule of matters reserved for its decisions which include the approval of certain policies, budgets, financing plans, large capital expenditure projects, acquisitions, divestments and treasury arrangements but otherwise delegates specific responsibilities to Board Committees, as described on page 52. It reviews the key activities of the businesses and considers and reviews the work undertaken by the Committees.
Non-executive directors meet regularly without management in attendance and the Senior Independent Director meets with the other non-executive directors annually to evaluate the performance of the Chairman. Board meetings are held at the major business units enabling directors to have a greater understanding of the business and to meet the management of these units. All directors have full and timely access to all relevant information and, if necessary, to independent professional advice. Appropriate directors and officers liability insurance is in place and induction programmes and training are offered to new directors. Further training for all directors, which would include such issues as risk, is available as appropriate. All directors have access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary who is responsible to the Board for ensuring that Board procedures are complied with.
Whilst the Chairman and Chief Executive collectively are responsible for the leadership of the Group, there is a clear division of respective responsibilities which have been agreed by the Board. The Chairmans primary responsibility is for leading the Board, including ensuring its effectiveness and setting its agenda, whilst the Chief Executive is responsible for managing and supervising the day-to-day business of the Group in accordance with the strategy, policies, budgets and business plans approved by the Board. The GEC advises and assists the Chief Executive in the management of the Group.
The Senior Independent Director is Dr Rolf Stomberg, whose role includes consulting with members of the Board on issues relating to the Chairman and chairing Board meetings and meetings of the Nominations and Audit Committee in the absence of the Chairman or Chairman of the Audit Committee. He is available to shareholders if they have concerns that cannot be resolved through the normal channels of contact with the Chairman or Chief Executive.
In 2004, a formal evaluation of the performance of the Board and its Committees was undertaken by an external consultant with the emphasis on continuous improvement and effectiveness of the Board and its Committees. Each director and the Company Secretary were interviewed separately and the result of the review presented to the whole Board. A number of recommendations were made which have been acted upon. Individual evaluation is carried out by the Nominations Committee with particular emphasis on the evaluation of those directors standing for re-appointment at the AGM. The non-executive directors, led by the Senior Independent Director, evaluate the performance of the Chairman.
51
The Board has determined that none of the independent non-executive directors or their immediate families has ever had a material relationship with the Group either directly as an employee or as a partner, shareholder or officer of an organisation that has a relationship with the Group. With the exception of the Chairman, who is provided with healthcare cover, they do not receive additional remuneration apart from directors fees, do not participate in the Groups share option schemes or performance related pay schemes, and are not members of the Groups pension schemes. No director of Smith & Nephew is a director of a company or an affiliate in which any other director of Smith & Nephew is a director.
None of the directors or executive officers (or any relative or spouse of such person, or any relative of such spouse, who has the same address as the director or officer, or who is a director or officer of any subsidiary of Smith & Nephew) has a material interest in any contract to which the Company or any of its subsidiaries are or were a party from the beginning of fiscal year 2003 to 8 March 2005.
Details of the Groups policies on remuneration, service contracts and compensation payments are included in the Remuneration Report.
Board Committees
The Board is assisted by the Audit, Remuneration and Nominations committees, each of which has its own terms of reference, which may be found on the Groups web site at www.smith-nephew.com . The Company Secretary is secretary to each of the committees.
Audit Committee
The Audit Committee met on six occasions in 2004 (individual attendance is shown in parenthesis). The Committee, consisting entirely of independent non-executive directors, is chaired by Warren D. Knowlton (6). He was appointed to the Committee in February 2001 and became Chairman of the Committee in July 2001. The other members of the Committee are Brian Larcombe (6) who was appointed to the Committee in January 2003, Richard De Schutter (6) who was appointed in February 2001 and Dr Rolf Stomberg (5) who was appointed in February 1998. The Chairman of the Committee reports orally to the Board and minutes of the meetings are circulated to all members of the Board.
Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee, consisting entirely of independent non-executive directors, met three times in 2004 (individual attendance is shown in parenthesis) and is chaired by Dr Rolf Stomberg (3). The other members of the Committee are Dr Pamela Kirby (3), Warren Knowlton (2) and Richard De Schutter (3). The Remuneration Committee sets the pay and benefits of the executive directors and members of the GEC, approves their main terms of employment and determines share options and long-term incentive arrangements. It also reviews management succession planning. The Remuneration Report is on pages 57 to 65.
Nominations Committee
The Nominations Committee, consisting of two independent non-executive directors and the Chief Executive, met three times in 2004 and its chairman, Dudley Eustace, and members, Dr Rolf Stomberg and Sir Christopher ODonnell, attended all meetings. It oversees plans for Board of Directors succession, recommends appointments to the Board of Directors and determines the fees of the non-executive directors. It provides a formal and transparent procedure for the appointment of new directors to the Board. Candidate profiles are agreed by the Committee before external consultants are engaged to advise on prospective Board appointees. Shortlisted candidates are interviewed by members of the Committee who then recommend candidates to be interviewed by all members of the Board. The final decision is made by the Board. This procedure was followed for the appointment of John Buchanan as a non-executive director and Deputy Chairman. The Senior Independent Director oversees the process for the appointment of a new Chairman.
Directors Re-appointment
Under Smith & Nephews Articles of Association, any director who has been appointed by the Board of Directors since the previous annual general meeting of shareholders, either to fill a casual vacancy or as an additional director, holds office only until the next annual general meeting and then is eligible for reappointment by the shareholders. Subsequently, directors retire and offer themselves for re-election at the third annual general meeting after the meeting at which they were last reappointed. The directors are subject to removal with or without cause by the Board of Directors or the shareholders. Executive Officers serve at the discretion of the Board of Directors.
On 3 February 2005 John Buchanan joined the Board as a non-executive director and Deputy Chairman and in accordance with the Articles of Association will be proposed for re-election at the AGM to be held on 5 May 2005. Brian Larcombe and Dr Pamela Kirby retire by rotation and, being eligible, will offer themselves for re-election at the AGM.
52
ACCOUNTABILITY, AUDIT AND INTERNAL CONTROL FRAMEWORK
Risk Management and Internal Control
The Board is responsible for the maintenance of the Groups systems of risk management and internal control and for reviewing their effectiveness. These systems, which accord with the Turnbull Guidance, have been in place for 2004 and to the date of approval of the report and accounts, involving: the identification, evaluation and management of key risks through a Risk Committee, which reports to the Board annually; business reviews by the Board; and the review by the Audit Committee of internal financial controls and the risk management process. These systems are reviewed annually by the Board. Whilst not providing absolute assurance against material misstatements or loss, these systems are designed to identify and manage those risks that could adversely impact the achievement of the Groups objectives.
Risk Committee
The Risk Committee comprises the members of GEC and is chaired by the Chief Executive. As an integral part of planning and review, management at each of the business units identify the risks involved in their business, the probability of those risks occurring, the impact if they do occur and the actions being taken to manage those risks. Areas of potential major impact are reported to the Risk Committee for review at its bi-annual meetings.
The most significant Group risks are reported to the Board quarterly, which will include new or increased risks. The annual Group Risk Report by the Risk Committee to the Board details all principal risks categorised by potential financial impact on profit and share price. These are detailed in Risk Factors.
In 2004 the effectiveness of the business unit systems put in place to identify and manage material risk were evaluated and the findings reported to the Audit Committee.
Disclosures Committee and evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures
The Disclosures Committee is chaired by the Chief Executive and also comprises the Finance Director and the Group Director of Corporate Affairs. The secretary is the Company Secretary. The Committee approves the releases of all major communications to investors, to the UK Listing Authority and the London and New York stock exchanges.
The Chief Executive and Finance Director have evaluated the effectiveness of the design and operation of the Groups disclosure controls and procedures as at 31 December 2004. Based upon, and as of the date of, that evaluation, the Chief Executive and Finance Director concluded that the disclosure controls and procedures were effective, in all material respects, to ensure that information required to be disclosed in the reports the Group files and submits under the Exchange Act in the US is recorded, processed, summarised and reported as and when required.
As a consequence of the preparatory work to convert the accounts from UK GAAP to IFRS, management has identified certain adjustments that were needed to the UK/US GAAP reconciliations in prior years and has restated for these as disclosed in Note 39 of the Notes to the Group Accounts. Under US reporting these adjustments, when taken together, are indicators of a material weakness in the disclosure controls relating to US GAAP which management is remediating. This does not affect reporting under UK GAAP. There have been no other changes in the Groups internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by this Annual Report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Groups internal control over financial reporting.
Code of Business Principles
The code of business principles, which is available at www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability and is available on request, applies to all directors, officers and employees. Any breaches of the code are directed in writing to the Company Secretary who is obliged to raise the issue with the Chief Executive or Chairman. During 2004 and up until 8 March 2005 there have been two breaches of the Code alleged, both of which have been investigated and found to be unsubstantiated. No waivers have been put in place nor any amendments made to the Code.
Code of Ethics for Senior Financial Officers
The Board of Directors has adopted a Code of Ethics for Senior Financial Officers, which is available at www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability and is available on request. It applies to the Chief Executive, Finance Director, Group Financial Controller and the Groups senior financial officers. There have been no waivers to any of the Codes provisions nor any amendments made to the Code during 2004 or up until 8 March 2005.
53
Activities of the Audit Committee for 2004
The Audit Committees remit, which is set out in its terms of reference, includes responsibility for:
| monitoring the integrity of the Companys accounts, ensuring that they meet statutory and associated legal and regulatory requirements and reviewing significant financial reporting judgments contained in them; |
| monitoring announcements relating to the Companys financial performance; |
| monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of the Companys internal audit function; |
| making recommendations to the Board, for shareholder approval, regarding the appointment, re-appointment and removal of the external auditors, as appropriate; |
| approving the remuneration and terms of engagement of the external auditors; |
| monitoring and reviewing the external auditors independence and the effectiveness of the audit process; |
| developing policy for and pre-approval of the external auditors to supply non-audit services; |
| monitoring the effectiveness of internal financial controls; |
| reviewing the operation of the risk management process; and |
| reviewing arrangements by which staff may raise complaints against the Company regarding financial reporting or other matters. |
The Group has specific policies which govern:
| the conduct of non-audit work by the external auditors which prohibits the auditors from performing services which would result in the auditing of their own work, participating in activities normally undertaken by management, acting as advocate for the Group and creating a mutuality of interest between the auditors and the Group, for example being remunerated through a success fee structure. Each year, the Audit Committee pre-approves the budget for fees relating to audit and non-audit work, including taxation services, in accordance with a listing of particular services. In the event that limits for these services are expected to be exceeded or the Group wants the external auditors to perform services that have not been pre-approved, approval by the Chairman of the Audit Committee is required, together with a notification to the Audit Committee of the service and the fees involved. All services provided by the independent auditors during the year were pre-approved by the Audit Committee; and |
| audit partner rotation, which is in accordance with the Auditing Practices Board Ethical Standards in the UK and the SEC rules in the US. Partners and senior audit staff may not be recruited by the Group unless two years has expired since their previous involvement with the Group. |
The Chief Executive, the Chief Financial Officer and other members of management attend the meetings when necessary and the external auditors have unrestricted access to the Audit Committee.
The principal activities of the Audit Committee during the year ended 31 December 2004 included:
| consideration of the reports on the quarterly reports, interim and annual accounts; |
| consideration of the proposed changes in UK GAAP and IFRS; |
| consideration of the Groups preparation for the introduction of s404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002; |
| a review of the Groups approach to internal financial control, its processes, outcomes and disclosures; |
| a review of the Internal Review departments activities for the year, together with its resource requirements and findings; |
| a review of whistleblowing procedures; |
| a review of the reports from the auditors, Ernst & Young LLP, on their professional and regulatory compliance in order to maintain independence and objectivity, including the rotation of partners; |
| a review of the audit, audit-related and tax services provided by Ernst & Young LLP; |
| the pre-approval of all non-audit work performed by the auditor together with associated fees, to ensure that the objectivity and independence of Ernst & Young LLP was not compromised. Ernst & Young LLP provided no consultancy work; |
| consideration of Ernst & Young LLPs in-depth reports to the Committee on the scope and outcome of the annual audit and managements response. Their reports included accounting matters, governance and control and accounting developments; |
54
| recommending the re-appointment of Ernst & Young LLP as the Groups auditors; |
| confirmation that no concerns were raised with the Committee about possible improprieties in matters of financial reporting or other matters; |
| reviewing the Committees terms of reference to ensure they reflect recent developments in corporate governance in the UK and the US; and |
| consideration of the Groups risk management process. |
The Committee may obtain legal and other independent professional advice, at the Companys expense, as it deems necessary. During the year, no such advice was sought by the Committee.
Future Reporting Developments
On 2 March 2005 the SEC announced the postponement by a further year for foreign registrants of the deadline for compliance with s404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
When s404 is effective in 2006, management will be required to report on the Groups internal controls over financial reporting. Work has been carried out during 2004 in preparation for reporting in accordance with the Act and will continue to
Principal Accountant Fees and Services
Fees for professional services provided by Ernst & Young LLP, the Groups independent auditors in each of the last two fiscal years, in each of the following categories were:
2004
|
2003
|
|||
(£ million) | ||||
Audit |
1.7 | 1.4 | ||
Audit-related |
0.5 | 0.3 | ||
Tax |
1.0 | 0.6 | ||
Other |
| 3.7 | ||
|
|
|||
3.2 | 6.0 | |||
|
|
Audit fees include fees associated with the annual audit and local statutory audits required internationally. Audit-related fees principally include accounting consultation in relation to International Financial Reporting Standards and advice regarding compliance with Sarbanes-Oxley in 2004. Tax fees include tax compliance, tax advice and tax planning services. The amount included in Other in 2003 related to tax and corporate finance work in relation to the unsuccessful public offer for Centerpulse AG and InCentive Capital AG. No such fees were incurred in 2004. A more detailed breakdown of audit fees may be found in Note 37 of the Notes to the Group Accounts.
55
Shareholders
The Group issues a summary report on the year, the Summary Financial Statement, to shareholders outside the US unless a shareholder requests the Groups full Annual Report. Over 90% of shareholders have chosen to only receive a copy of the Summary Financial Statement. At the half year, an Interim Report is sent to all shareholders and quarterly reports are made available through Stock Exchange announcements and on the Groups web site. Copies of the full Annual Report, the Summary Financial Statement and the Interim Report are also available on the Smith & Nephew web site along with press releases, institutional presentations and audio webcasts.
There is a regular dialogue with individual institutional shareholders, together with results presentations twice a year. To ensure that all members of the Board develop an understanding of the views of major shareholders, the executive directors review significant issues raised by investors with the Board. Non-executive directors are sent copies of analysts and brokers briefings and are offered the opportunity to attend meetings with major shareholders and are expected to do so if shareholders request a meeting. In 2004, no such request was received. There is an opportunity for individual shareholders to question the directors at the AGM, at which the level of proxy votes received are advised, and the Company regularly responds to letters from shareholders on a range of issues. All the shares, including those held by directors and officers, rank pari passu with each other.
Share capital
At the AGM, the Company will be seeking a renewal of its current permission from shareholders to purchase up to 10% of its own shares. No shares have been purchased or contracted for or are the subject of an option under the current expiring authority given by shareholders at the AGM of 6 May 2004.
Auditors
Ernst & Young LLP have expressed their willingness to continue as auditors and resolutions proposing their reappointment and to authorise the directors to fix their remuneration, which have been approved by the Audit Committee, will be proposed at the AGM.
Documents on Display
It is possible to read and copy documents referred to in this Annual Report at the Registered Office of the Company. Documents referred to in this Annual Report that have been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission in the US may be read and copied at the SECs public reference room located at 450 Fifth Street, NW, Washington DC 20549. Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the public reference rooms and their copy charges. The SEC also maintains a web site at www.sec.gov that contains reports and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC. This Annual Report and some of the other information submitted by the Group to the SEC may be accessed through the SEC web site.
56
The Remuneration Report is divided into two sections, audited and unaudited information, in accordance with Schedule 7A to the Companies Act 1985. The audited information may be found on pages 63 to 65. The remaining sections are not subject to audit.
The Remuneration Committee
The compensation of executive directors, members of the GEC and the broad policy for executive remuneration is determined by the Remuneration Committee whose terms of reference are available on the Companys web site at www.smith-nephew.com . The Committee comprises Dr. Rolf Stomberg (Chairman), Dr Pamela Kirby, Warren Knowlton and Richard De Schutter. On behalf of the Board of Directors, it determines the broad policy for executive remuneration. It reviews:
| on an annual basis the remuneration, including pension entitlements, of executive directors and members of the GEC and determines the operation of and the participants in the long-term incentive plans, share option schemes and the executive bonus plan; |
| the relationship between the remuneration of executive directors and that of other employees; |
| the competitiveness of executive remuneration using data from independent consultants on companies of similar size, technologies and international complexity; and |
| plans for management succession. |
The Committee is assisted by Sir Christopher ODonnell, Chief Executive and Paul Williams, Group Human Resources Director, both of whom have advised on all aspects of the Groups reward structures and policies but neither is present at any discussion concerning their own remuneration. The terms of reference enable the Committee to obtain its own external advice on any matter, at the Companys expense.
It received information from a number of independent consultants appointed by the Company: Watson Wyatt on a broad range of remuneration issues; Towers Perrin and Hay Group on salary data and PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP on long-term incentive plan comparative performance. Watson Wyatt also acts as one of the retirement benefit consultants to the Group and PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP provided consultancy services to the Group including project and taxation advice.
Remuneration Policy
The remuneration policy for 2004 and future years, as approved by the Remuneration Committee, is designed to ensure that remuneration is sufficiently competitive to attract, retain and motivate executive directors and GEC members of a calibre that meets the Groups needs to achieve its business objectives. Remuneration includes base pay and benefits which are targeted at median competitive levels for acceptable performance and bonus schemes which are designed to motivate and reward for outperformance. Individual remuneration levels are based on measurable performance against fair and open objectives and there are no automatic pay adjustments unless required by law or local protocol. Major changes to the remuneration policy are discussed with the principal shareholders.
In 2004, a share based incentive plan, approved by shareholders, was introduced for executive directors, members of the GEC and the next level of senior executives. The plan comprises a performance share plan, share option plan and co-investment plan and increases the proportion of executives variable reward that is wholly dependent on the Groups performance. In 2004, excluding pension entitlements, the composition of remuneration for Sir Christopher ODonnell was: base pay (fixed) 41%, annual bonus (variable) 17% and long-term incentives (variable) 42% and for Peter Hooley was base pay (fixed) 40%, annual bonus (variable) 16% and long-term incentives (variable) 44%. Variable long term incentive values are based on those awards vesting in the year.
Variable rewards will continue to be provided through a mix of performance related elements; the annual bonus plan relates to achievement of financial objectives; the performance share plan rewards superior total shareholder return relative to the Groups competitors and FTSE-100 companies; and share options reward share price growth.
Senior executives are expected to build and maintain a personal equity stake in the Company. Executive directors are required to accumulate a personal holding equivalent to 100% of basic salary within five years and members of the GEC are required to accumulate a personal holding equivalent to 75% of basic salary within five years.
57
The principal components of remuneration of executive directors and GEC members are: basic salary and benefits; performance-related bonus; long-term incentives consisting of a performance share plan, co-investment plan and share options; and pensions.
Basic Salary and Benefits
Basic salary reflects the responsibility of the position and individual performance. The Group also provides certain benefits such as private healthcare coverage and a company car or allowance in line with competitive practice.
Performance-Related Bonus
For executive directors, the Group operates an annual bonus scheme, 75% of which is based on annual growth in EPSA and 25% of which is based on improvement in return on operating capital employed (ROCE). The scheme is designed to encourage outstanding performance. In 2004, achievement of 14% EPSA growth and the budgeted improvement in ROCE would have produced a bonus of 30% of annual salary. Achievement of 20% EPSA growth and ROCE 5.5% over budget would have produced a bonus of 100% of annual salary. Bonuses are not pensionable.
The actual bonus earned in 2004 represented 39.6% of annual salary as 15% EPSA growth, inclusive of an adjustment for the dilution arising on the disposal of AbilityOne, was achieved and the budgeted ROCE was exceeded.
For members of the GEC with corporate responsibilities, excluding executive directors, the annual bonus plan is linked to earnings per share, ROCE and personal objectives. For those members with specific business unit responsibilities, targets are linked to EPSA and sales, operating profit and ROCE of their respective business unit.
Long-Term Incentives (New Plan approved by Shareholders in May 2004)
(i) Performance Share Plan
Annual awards over shares are made under the 2004 Performance Share Plan after the announcement of the preliminary results and only vest if defined levels of total shareholder returns are attained over three years beginning in the year of award. There is no retesting.
The award shares are divided equally into two tranches so as to measure total shareholder return (TSR) relative to the FTSE-100 and the major companies in the medical devices industry. TSR performance against both the FTSE-100 companies and the major companies in the medical devices industry was identified as the most suitable measure to encourage high levels of business performance and align the interests of the Group, its shareholders and senior executives.
The medical devices companies for comparison for the 2004 award are:
Arthrocare |
Guidant | |
Bard |
Johnson & Johnson | |
Baxter |
Medtronic | |
Beckton Dickinson |
Nobel Biocare | |
Biomet |
Orthofix | |
Boston Scientific |
Stryker | |
Coloplast Group |
St Jude Medical | |
Conmed |
Synthes-Stratec | |
D J Ortho |
Wright Medical | |
Edwards Life Sciences Corp |
Zimmer |
The shares of each tranche will vest if the Groups TSR is ranked at the median level in that tranche. If, in relation to either tranche, the Group ranks at or above the median, 25% of the award of that tranche will vest and if the Group is at the 75 th centile, then all of the shares of that tranche will vest. Between the median and 75 th centiles, the shares will vest on a straight-line basis. If the Group is above the 75 th centile, then the number of shares increases above the award on a straight-line basis up to a maximum of 150% of the award if the Group is ranked at or above the 90 th centile.
58
In relation to awards made to executive directors, the initial market value of the award shares is equivalent to their basic annual salary and in relation to awards made to other GEC members the initial market value of the awards is equivalent to 75% of their basic annual salary.
The Remuneration Committee has the discretion to reduce the number or percentage of shares which vest, if, notwithstanding the Group is ranked at or above the median level in respect of either tranche of award shares, the Remuneration Committee is of the opinion that the growth in the Groups TSR achieved is not a genuine reflection of the Groups underlying financial performance. The Groups TSR performance and its performance relative to the comparator groups is independently monitored by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP.
(ii) Executive Share Options
In 2004, share options were granted under the 2004 Executive Share Option Plan. Under this plan, the maximum market value of options which may be granted each year is equivalent to the basic annual salary of the executive director or executive. Options are exercisable up to ten years from the date of grant and are only exercisable if graduated target levels of growth in EPSA over the three-year performance period are achieved, beginning with that in which the option is granted.
The target levels of performance are set by the Remuneration Committee for each grant. For 2004 they were: 25% of the option shares will vest if growth in EPSA over the three-year period ending 31 December 2006 is or exceeds 26% (i.e. 8% compounded annually) with 50% vesting if such growth is at least 48% (i.e. 14% compounded annually). Only if growth in EPSA over that period exceeds 73% (i.e. 20% compounded annually) will all of the option shares vest. Option shares will vest pro rata on a straight-line basis if growth in EPSA is between these levels. There is no retesting of performance conditions.
(iii) Co-investment Plan
The 2004 Co-investment Plan enables selected executives to take part of their annual bonus in the form of shares. The participant elects the level of bonus to be used for this purpose up to a maximum of one half of the annual gross bonus capped at 20% of basic annual salary for executive directors and members of GEC. The net amount of the gross amount elected will then be used to purchase shares.
If such shares are held for three years, and the participant remains employed within Smith & Nephew, the participant will be entitled to matching shares if the Company achieves a target level of growth in EPSA over that three-year period of at least 48% (i.e. 14% p.a. compounded annually). At this level, the participant is entitled to one matching share for every share acquired out of the gross equivalent amount of the net bonus used to acquire shares. If growth in EPSA is 60% or more (i.e. 17% p.a. compounded annually) the participant is entitled to two matching shares for each share acquired out of the gross equivalent amount of the net bonus applied to shares. There is no sliding scale nor pro rata vesting of matching awards between these performance levels, nor is there any retesting.
The performance criteria for all incentive schemes will be reviewed in 2005 to achieve a consistent measurement of performance during the transition to International Financial Reporting Standards.
In the event of a change of control of the Company, for the 2004 Plans, the Remuneration Committee will determine what proportion of the awards or options will vest and what proportion of the matching shares will be transferred to the executives having regard to both the proportion of the performance period and the performance of the Company over that period.
59
The following table provides a comparison of variable remuneration of executive directors and GEC members and the next level down (i.e. business unit management) shown as a percentage of salary. Except for the annual bonus, the components are measured over a three year period.
Annual bonus |
Performance share plan |
Share option plan |
Co-investment plan |
|||||
Executive Directors
|
0% to 100%
depending on performance |
Equal to 100%
of salary (75% for GEC members) for 75th centile TSR |
Equal to 50% of
salary for EPSA growth of 48% |
Maximum 20%
of salary with 1 to 1 matching at EPSA growth of 48% |
||||
Business Unit Executives |
0% to 80%
depending on performance |
Equal to 35% of
salary for 75 th centile TSR |
Equal to 50% of
salary for EPSA growth of 48% |
Maximum 18%
of salary with 1 to 1 matching at EPSA growth of 48% |
Previous Long-Term Incentive Plan (superseded by the New 2004 Plan)
The Performance Share Plan adopted in 2004 replaced the long-term incentive plan (LTIP) established in 1997 for executive directors and members of the GEC and no further awards will be made under this LTIP.
The last award through the LTIP was in 2003 and will vest at the end of 2005. Under the plan, shares are transferred to participants depending on the Groups performance relative to a group of 43 UK listed manufacturing companies with substantial international activities, using TSR over a three-year period as the prime measure. The maximum value of shares awarded for executive directors has not exceeded the participants annual rate of basic salary at the date the award was granted, and for members of the GEC it has not exceeded 75% of their annual basic salary. Shares will only be transferred to the participants if the Groups TSR performance is at or above the median performance of the comparator companies, and growth in the Groups EPSA exceeds growth in the United Kingdom Retail Price Index (RPI) in the same three-year period. At the median level, 25% of the award shares will vest. If the Groups performance is in the top quartile, all the shares will vest. For performance between the median and the top quartile, the proportion of shares vesting will vary on a straight-line basis. TSR subject to real EPSA growth was identified and selected as the performance condition that represented a fair measure of the Groups performance and would reflect increases in shareholder value.
For the three-year plan period commencing 2002, the Groups TSR of 58.79% was ranked 10 th in the comparator group and the earnings per share performance criterion was met, enabling the plan participants to be eligible for 100% of the shares awarded conditionally in 2002.
Every encouragement is given to executive directors and senior managers to build up a significant shareholding in the Group. Accordingly, participants in the LTIP who have not left the Group will, at the fifth and seventh anniversaries of the date of the award, be given one additional share for every five so retained.
The comparator group for the LTIP comprises the following companies:
Aga Foodservice Group |
Cookson Group | Invensys | Rolls-Royce | |||
AstraZeneca Group |
Croda International | Johnson Matthey | Scapa Group | |||
BAE Systems |
De La Rue | Laird Group | Smiths Group | |||
Balfour Beatty |
Delta | Low & Bonar | Spirax-Sarco Engineering | |||
BBA Group |
Elementis | Morgan Crucible | Spirent | |||
BOC Group |
FKI | Novar | Tate & Lyle | |||
BPB |
GKN | Pilkington | Tomkins | |||
British Vita |
GlaxoSmithKline | Reckitt Benckiser | TT Electronics | |||
Bunzl | Halma | REXAM | Unilever (UK) | |||
Cadbury Schweppes |
ICI | RMC Group | Weir Group | |||
Charter |
IMI |
The Groups TSR performance and its performance relative to the comparator group is independently monitored by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP. In the event of a change of control of the Company, for the 1997 LTIP, a proportion of the award will vest corresponding to the period of measurement that has elapsed.
60
Executive Share Option Plans established prior to the new 2004 Plan (and for which executives included in the New 2004 Plan are not eligible)
Prior to 2004, executive directors were last granted executive share options in 1996. These were not subject to performance conditions of exercise. Members of the GEC were last granted options in 2001. Under the 2001 UK Approved Share Option Plan, the 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan and the 2001 US Share Plan, the Remuneration Committee each year determines the maximum value of options to be granted to executives by reference to multiples of salary. In 2004, the maximum multiples applied were one times remuneration in the UK and one and a half times remuneration in the US.
With the exception of the 2001 US Share Plan, the exercise of options is subject to EPSA growth of not less than RPI plus 3% per annum, on average, in a period of three consecutive years. From 2005, the retesting of the performance conditions will no longer apply. Performance conditions were selected to be in line with market practice at the time. Options granted under the 2001 US Share Plan, in line with US market practice, are not subject to performance targets but are exercisable cumulatively up to a maximum of 10% after one year, 30% after two years, 60% after three years and the remaining balance after four years.
Executive share options under all schemes are not offered at a discount to the market value at the time of grant. For the 2001 Option Plans, all options will vest on a change in control.
Share Save Schemes
UK executive directors and members of the GEC are eligible to contribute to the Smith & Nephew Employee Share Option Scheme (ShareSave) and US members of the GEC are eligible to participate in the Employee Stock Purchase Plan.
Pensions
Executive directors and the UK based members of GEC have a normal retirement age of 62. Those in service pre-2003 participate in the defined benefit Smith & Nephew UK Pension Fund and UK Executive Pension Scheme, under which pension has been accrued in the year at an annual rate of one-thirtieth of final pensionable salary up to a limit based on service of two-thirds of final pensionable salary, subject to Inland Revenue constraints. Pensions in payment are guaranteed to increase by 5% per annum or the rate of inflation in the UK, if lower. Death in service cover of four times salary and spouses pension at the rate of two thirds of the members pension are provided on death. Those commencing employment post 2002 participate in the defined contribution plan. Death in service cover of seven times salary (of which four times is provided as a lump sum) is provided on death.
A supplementary unfunded defined contribution arrangement partially compensates for the UK Inland Revenue earnings cap on final pensionable salary.
The Remuneration Committee has considered the implications of the impending changes to UK pensions taxation. At this stage, the Remuneration Committee is of the opinion that a non-pensionable non-bonusable salary supplement will be offered as an alternative where an executive does not wish to have further pension provision. Such a salary supplement would be cost neutral to the Company.
The US based members of GEC participate in either the defined benefit Smith & Nephew US Pension Plan or the defined contribution US Savings Plan 401(k) Plus. Any new executives would enter the US Savings Plan 401(k) Plus. Under the US Pension Plan, pensions accrue at an annual rate of approximately one-sixty second of final pensionable salary up to a limit based on service of 60% of final pensionable salary. The plan also provides for a spouses pension at the rate of one half of the members pension on death. Normal retirement age under the plan is 65. A supplementary defined benefit plan is used to enable defined benefits to be payable from age 62 without reduction for early retirement as for UK executives. A supplementary defined contribution plan is used to compensate for the earnings cap imposed by the US Internal Revenue Code and to provide additional retirement benefits.
The Remuneration Committee considers pension consequences and costs to the Company when determining basic salary increases for executive directors and members of GEC.
Service Contracts
Executive directors, in line with Group policy, are appointed on contracts terminable by the Group on not more than twelve months notice. All new appointments of executive directors are intended to have twelve month notice periods, but it is recognised that for some appointments a longer period may initially be necessary for competitive reasons, reducing to twelve months thereafter.
61
Sir Christopher ODonnell, appointed to the Board of Directors in September 1992, has a service agreement with the Company dated January 1992 which expires on his 62 nd birthday in October 2008. Peter Hooley, appointed to the Board of Directors in April 1991 has a service contract with the Company dated January 1992 which expires on his 62 nd birthday in June 2008. Both service agreements are terminable by the Company on not more than twelve months notice and by the executive director on six months notice. There is no enhancement of termination rights on a change of control of the Group. Termination of the contract by the Group, except for cause, would entitle the executive directors to twelve months basic salary, bonus at target of 30%, a contribution of 30% of salary to reflect the loss of pension benefits, an amount to cover other benefits and a time apportionment of the performance share plan entitlement. The Committee has determined not to amend the contracts of the current executive directors for mitigation but will review for the appointment of new executive directors.
External Non-executive Directorships
Non-executive directorships provide executive directors with valuable experience beneficial to the Company. Such appointments are subject to the approval of the Nominations Committee and are restricted to one appointment for each executive director. All fees receivable by a director are paid to the Company.
Non-executive Directors
Non-executive directors do not have service contracts but instead have letters of appointment. Non-executive directors are normally appointed for three terms of three years terminable at will, without notice by either the Group or the director and without compensation. The Chairman has a three month notice period. The remuneration of the non-executive directors is determined by the Nominations Committee who aim to set fees that are competitive with other companies of equivalent size and complexity. Non-executive directors are expected to accumulate a personal holding in the Company equivalent to one times annual basic fee, within three years.
In 2004, the Nominations Committee recommended, and the Board confirmed, a payment structure comprising an additional £5,000 to the Chairmen of the Audit and Remuneration Committees and £5,000 to the Senior Independent Director for their additional responsibilities.
Performance Graph
Schedule 7A to the Companies Act 1985 requires a graph to be published showing the Companys TSR against the TSR performance of a broad equity market index. As a component company of the FTSE-100 index, a graph of the Companys TSR performance compared to that of the TSR of the FTSE-100 index is shown below:
62
DIRECTORS REMUNERATION 2004
Directors Emoluments and Pensions
Salaries and fees |
Benefits(i)
|
Bonus
|
Total
emoluments excluding pension entitlements |
Pension
entitlements |
Total including
pension
|
Total
excluding
|
Total including
pension
2003 |
|||||||||
(£ thousands) | ||||||||||||||||
Chairman (non-executive): |
||||||||||||||||
Dudley G. Eustace |
190 | 1 | | 191 | | 191 | 190 | 190 | ||||||||
Executive Directors: |
||||||||||||||||
Sir Christopher ODonnell |
628 | 19 | 257 | 904 | 50 | 954 | 1,030 | 1,072 | ||||||||
Peter Hooley |
339 | 15 | 137 | 491 | 98 | 589 | 586 | 670 | ||||||||
Non-executive Directors: |
||||||||||||||||
Dr. Rolf W. H. Stomberg |
45 | | | 45 | | 45 | 35 | 35 | ||||||||
Warren D. Knowlton |
40 | | | 40 | | 40 | 35 | 35 | ||||||||
Richard De Schutter |
35 | | | 35 | | 35 | 35 | 35 | ||||||||
Dr. Pamela J. Kirby |
35 | | | 35 | | 35 | 35 | 35 | ||||||||
Brian Larcombe |
35 | | | 35 | | 35 | 35 | 35 | ||||||||
Sir Timothy Lankester (to 29 April 2003) |
| | | | | | 12 | 12 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
Total |
1,347 | 35 | 394 | 1,776 | 148 | 1,924 | 1,993 | 2,119 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | Includes cash allowances and benefits in kind. |
Pensions
Accrued
pension as at 1 Jan 2004 |
Increase in
accrued pension excluding inflation |
Accrued
31 Dec
|
Transfer
value of accrued pension at 1 Jan 2004 |
Directors
2004 |
Increase in
transfer value over year less directors contributions |
Transfer
value of accrued pension at 31 Dec 2004 |
||||||||
(£ per annum) | (£) | (£) | (£) | (£) | ||||||||||
Sir Christopher ODonnell |
195,000 | 45,000 | 245,000 | 2,805,000 | 31,000 | 808,000 | 3,644,000 | |||||||
Peter Hooley |
32,000 | 3,000 | 36,000 | 466,000 | 5,000 | 79,000 | 550,000 |
An amount of £94,000 (2003 £81,000) was provided under the supplementary unfunded defined contribution arrangement for Peter Hooley, bringing his total benefit under the plan to £494,000 (2003 £400,000). The increase in the transfer value is as a result of a change in the underlying factor to reflect current market conditions, the unwinding of the previous years salary increase within the definition of final pensionable salary, the accrual of an additional one year of service and the increase in pension as a result of the salary increase granted during the year.
No amounts have been paid to third parties in respect of directors services and no excess retirement benefits or compensation have been paid to past directors.
63
Directors Share Options
Options
1 Jan
2004 |
Granted
during
|
Exercised
|
Exercise
price |
Market
price at date of exercise |
Profit on
exercise |
Options
31 Dec 2004 |
Average
exercise price |
Range of exercisable dates of
options
held at
31 Dec 2004 |
||||||||||||
(Number) | (Number) | (Number) | (p) | (p) | (£) | (Number) | (p) | (Date) | ||||||||||||
Sir Christopher ODonnell |
170,000 | (i) | | 170,000 | 187.0 | 514.7 | 557,090 | | | | ||||||||||
| 113,140 | (iv) | | | | | 113,140 | 574.5 | 5/07-5/14 | |||||||||||
3,192 | (ii) | | | | | | 3,192 | 296.0 | 11/05-4/06 | |||||||||||
531,620 | (iii) | 118,544 | (vi) | 344,303 | | 517.5 | 1,781,768 | 305,861 | | 7/03-6/11 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||||||||
Total |
704,812 | 231,684 | 514,303 | 2,338,858 | 422,193 | |||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||||||||
Peter Hooley |
167,500 | (i) | | 130,000 | 154.0 | 481.0 | 425,100 | 37,500 | 193.8 | 8/98-9/06 | ||||||||||
| 60,050 | (iv) | | | | | 60,050 | 574.5 | 5/07-5/14 | |||||||||||
3,349 | (ii) | 2,404 | (v) | 3,349 | 289.2 | 476.0 | 6,256 | 2,404 | 394.0 | 11/07-4/08 | ||||||||||
337,323 | (iii) | 92,481 | (vii) | | | | | 429,804 | | 2/01-6/11 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||||||||
Total |
508,172 | 154,935 | 133,349 | 431,356 | 529,758 | |||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | Options granted under Executive Share Option Plans. |
(ii) | Options granted under the UK ShareSave schemes. |
(iii) | Nil cost options acquired through vesting of LTIP awards. |
(iv) | Options granted on 19 May 2004 at an exercise price of 574.5p. |
(v) | ShareSave options granted on 22 September 2004 at an exercise price of 394p. |
(vi) | Comprises vesting of 2001 LTIP award (110,544 shares) and award of fifth anniversary bonus shares (8,000 shares). |
(vii) | Comprises vesting of 2001 LTIP award (69,090 shares) and award of fifth anniversary bonus shares (23,391 shares). |
The range in the market price of the Groups Ordinary Shares during the year was 439p to 614p and the market price at 31 December 2004 was 533p. The total profit on exercise of options during the year was £2,770,214 as set out above (2003 £162,750: Peter Hooley £162,750).
Long-Term Incentive Plan Awards
Maximum
number of shares awarded at 1 Jan 2004 |
Awards
during the year |
Market
price |
Vested
award |
Market
price at date of award 22 Feb 2001 |
Market
price at date of vesting |
Number
2004 |
Latest
performance period |
||||||||||
(Number) | (Number) | (p) | (Number) | (p) | (p) | (Number) | |||||||||||
Sir Christopher ODonnell |
371,032 | | | 110,544 | 327.0 | 535.5 | 260,488 | 31.12.2006 | |||||||||
| 113,140 | (i) | 574.5 | | | | 113,140 | 31.12.2007 | |||||||||
Peter Hooley |
218,978 | | | 69,090 | 327.0 | 535.5 | 149,888 | 31.12.2006 | |||||||||
| 60,050 | (i) | 574.5 | | | | 60,050 | 31.12.2007 |
(i) | Awards during the year awarded on 19 May 2004 under the 2004 Performance Share Plan. Subject to attainment of performance conditions, a further 50% of the award may vest. |
Co-investment Plan Awards
The number of matched shares to be allocated to each Executive Director is subject to the growth in EPSA over a three-year period. Details of the Plan can be found on page 59.
Shares acquired
with
allowable
|
Matched Shares
at 1 x gross
|
Matched
at 2 x gross
|
||||
Sir Christopher ODonnell |
13,057 | 22,286 | 44,572 | |||
Peter Hooley |
6,979 | 11,828 | 23,656 |
64
Directors Interests
Beneficial interests of the Directors in the Ordinary Shares of the Company are as follows:
28 February 2005 (i)
|
31 December 2004
|
1 January 2004
|
||||||||||
Shares(ii)
|
Options
|
Shares(ii)
|
Options
|
Shares(ii)
|
Options
|
|||||||
(Number) | ||||||||||||
Dudley G. Eustace |
51,064 | | 51,064 | | 50,295 | | ||||||
Sir Christopher ODonnell |
178,061 | 422,193 | 178,061 | 422,193 | 123,543 | 704,812 | ||||||
Peter Hooley |
219,861 | 529,758 | 219,861 | 529,758 | 129,594 | 508,172 | ||||||
Brian Larcombe |
5,000 | | 5,000 | | | | ||||||
Dr. Pamela J. Kirby |
8,500 | | 3,500 | | | | ||||||
Dr. Rolf W. H. Stomberg |
13,014 | | 13,014 | | 7,024 | | ||||||
Warren D. Knowlton |
27,001 | | 27,001 | | 18,501 | | ||||||
Richard De Schutter |
250,000 | | 250,000 | | 200,000 | |
(i) | The latest practicable date for this Annual Report. |
(ii) | Holdings of the directors together represent less than 0.1% of the Ordinary Share Capital of the Company. |
In addition to the above, on 8 March 2005, Sir Christopher ODonnell will become entitled to 120,879 Ordinary Shares and Peter Hooley to 70,818 Ordinary Shares in respect of the 100% vesting of the 2002 long-term incentive plan award. On 17 February 2005, Dr Pamela Kirby purchased 5,000 Ordinary Shares. There were no other changes in the interests of Directors between 31 December 2004 and 28 February 2005.
The register of directors interests, which is open to inspection at the Companys registered office, contains full details of Directors shareholdings and share options.
Senior Management Remuneration
For US reporting purposes, it is necessary to provide information on remuneration and interests of directors and members of the Companys administrative, supervisory or management bodies (the senior management). For the purposes of this disclosure, senior management comprises members of GEC. In respect of the financial year 2004 the total compensation (excluding pension emoluments but including payments under the performance related bonus plans) paid to members of GEC for the periods during which they served in that capacity was £3,760,590, the aggregate increase in accrued pension benefits was £81,000, the aggregate payment to defined contribution schemes was £10,000 and the aggregate amounts provided for under the supplementary schemes was £327,000. During 2004 members of the GEC were granted options over 424,451 shares under the 2004 Share Option Plan, over 3,365 shares and 1,255 ADSs under the employee sharesave schemes and awarded 273,708 shares and 17,582 ADSs in the 2004 Performance Share Plan. As of 28 February 2005 members of the GEC (comprised of nine persons) owned 444,307 shares and 164 ADSs, constituting less than 1% of the issued share capital of the Company. Members of the GEC also held, as of this date, options to purchase 1,978,816 shares; 798,633 shares awarded under the LTIP; and 273,708 shares and 17,582 ADSs awarded under the Performance Share Plan and held 37,552 shares and 1,901 ADSs under the Co-investment Plan.
By order of the Board, 8 March 2005:
Paul Chambers
Secretary
65
67 | ||
68 | ||
69 | ||
70 | ||
71 | ||
72 | ||
73 | ||
73 | ||
74 | ||
128 | ||
129 |
66
DIRECTORS RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE ACCOUNTS
The directors are responsible for the preparation of the Annual Report, including the remuneration report, in accordance with relevant UK legislation and other UK requirements. As a consequence of the Companys Ordinary Shares being traded on the New York Stock Exchange (in the form of American Depositary Shares) the directors are responsible for the preparation and filing of an annual report on Form 20-F with the US Securities and Exchange Commission. The directors are required by UK company law to prepare accounts for each financial year that give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Company and of the Group as at the end of the financial year and of the results of the Group for the year. In preparing the accounts, appropriate UK accounting policies have been used and applied consistently, and reasonable and prudent judgements and estimates have been made. Applicable UK accounting standards have been followed. The directors have satisfied themselves from internal forecasts and available bank facilities that the Group continues as a going concern.
The directors are also responsible for the maintenance of the Groups system of internal financial controls. These are designed to give reasonable assurance that proper procedures exist for the maintenance of adequate accounting records, safeguarding the assets of the Group and for preventing and detecting fraud and other irregularities. To this end, the Company has identified and documented minimum internal financial control standards. Annual budgets are prepared and approved by the directors, and the directors have reserved capital expenditure and treasury authority levels to the Board and its delegated committees. The Group operates a system of regular monthly reporting including revised profit and cash forecasts. Business risks are identified and monitored on a regular basis. The Group operates an internal audit function which monitors the adequacy of internal financial controls and systems and compliance with Group standards. The internal auditor provides a report to the Audit Committee annually and the Audit Committee reviews the operation and effectiveness of internal financial controls and reporting of the Group.
A copy of the Annual Report is placed on the Smith & Nephew website. It should be noted that information published on the internet is accessible in many countries with different legal requirements. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of accounts may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.
67
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS UK REPORT
Independent Auditors Report to the Members of Smith & Nephew plc
We have audited the Groups accounts for the year ended 31 December 2004 which comprise the Group profit and loss account, Group balance sheet, Group cash flow statement, Group statement of total recognised gains and losses, Group reconciliation of movements in shareholders funds, parent company balance sheet and the related Notes 1 to 48. These accounts have been prepared on the basis of the accounting policies set out therein. We have also audited the information in the remuneration report that is described as having been audited.
Respective Responsibilities of Directors and Auditors
The directors responsibilities for preparing the annual report, remuneration report and the accounts in accordance with applicable United Kingdom law and accounting standards are set out in the Statement of Directors Responsibilities.
Our responsibility is to audit the accounts and the part of the remuneration report to be audited in accordance with relevant legal and regulatory requirements, United Kingdom Auditing Standards and the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority.
We report to you our opinion as to whether the accounts give a true and fair view and whether the accounts and the part of the remuneration report to be audited have been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 1985. We also report to you if, in our opinion, the directors report is not consistent with the accounts, if the Group has not kept proper accounting records, if we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit, or if the information specified by law or the Listing Rules regarding directors remuneration and transactions with the Group is not disclosed.
We review whether the corporate governance statement reflects the companys compliance with the nine provisions of the 2003 FRC Combined Code specified for our review by the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority, and we report if it does not. We are not required to consider whether the Boards statements on internal control cover all risks and controls, or form an opinion on the effectiveness of the Groups corporate governance procedures or its risk and control procedures.
We read other information contained in the annual report and consider whether it is consistent with the audited accounts. This other information comprises the directors responsibilities for the accounts, unaudited part of the remuneration report, corporate and social responsibility and corporate governance statement. We consider the implications for our report if we become aware of any apparent misstatements or material inconsistencies with the accounts. Our responsibilities do not extend to any other information.
Basis of Audit Opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with United Kingdom Auditing Standards issued by the Auditing Practices Board. An audit includes examination, on a test basis, of evidence relevant to the amounts and disclosures in the accounts and the part of the remuneration report to be audited. It also includes an assessment of the significant estimates and judgements made by the directors in the preparation of the accounts, and of whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Groups circumstances, consistently applied and adequately disclosed.
We planned and performed our audit so as to obtain all the information and explanations which we considered necessary in order to provide us with sufficient evidence to give reasonable assurance that the financial statements and the part of the remuneration report to be audited are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or other irregularity or error. In forming our opinion we also evaluated the overall adequacy of the presentation of information in the accounts and the part of the remuneration report to be audited.
Opinion
In our opinion the accounts give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Company and of the Group as at 31 December 2004 and of the profit of the Group for the year then ended; and the financial statements and the part of the remuneration report to be audited have been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 1985.
Ernst & Young LLP
Registered Auditor
London, England
8 March 2005
68
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS US REPORT
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm to the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Smith & Nephew plc
We have audited the accompanying Group balance sheets of Smith & Nephew plc as of 31 December 2004 and 2003, and the related Group profit and loss accounts and Group statements of total recognised gains and losses, movements in shareholders funds and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2004. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Companys management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with United Kingdom auditing standards and the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Groups internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of the Smith & Nephew Group as at 31 December 2004 and 2003, and the consolidated results of its operations and its consolidated cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2004, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom which differ in certain respects from those generally accepted in the United States (see Note 39 of Notes to the Group Accounts).
Ernst & Young LLP
London, England
8 March 2005
69
Years ended 31 December
|
|||||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million, except per Ordinary Share
amounts) |
|||||||||
Turnover (Note 2) |
|||||||||
Continuing operations |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,083.7 | ||||||
Discontinued operations |
| | 26.2 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Group turnover |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,109.9 | ||||||
Share of joint venture |
165.9 | 163.9 | 155.0 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
1,414.4 | 1,342.8 | 1,264.9 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Operating profit (Notes 2 and 3) |
|||||||||
Continuing operations: |
|||||||||
Before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
251.5 | 220.7 | 196.0 | ||||||
Goodwill amortisation |
(20.5 | ) | (18.5 | ) | (17.5 | ) | |||
Exceptional items (Note 4) |
(80.0 | ) | (22.4 | ) | (29.9 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
151.0 | 179.8 | 148.6 | |||||||
Discontinued operations |
| | 2.1 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Group operating profit |
151.0 | 179.8 | 150.7 | ||||||
Share of operating profit of the joint venture before exceptional items |
23.8 | 22.7 | 19.6 | ||||||
Share of joint venture exceptional items (Note 4) |
| (2.7 | ) | (2.6 | ) | ||||
Share of operating profit of associated undertaking |
| 4.8 | 4.9 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
174.8 | 204.6 | 172.6 | |||||||
Net profit on disposal of discontinued operations (Note 5) |
| | 18.0 | ||||||
Net profit on disposal of the associated undertaking (Note 5) |
| 31.5 | | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Profit on ordinary activities before interest |
174.8 | 236.1 | 190.6 | ||||||
Net interest receivable/(payable) (Note 6) |
3.1 | (6.0 | ) | (12.7 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation |
177.9 | 230.1 | 177.9 | ||||||
Taxation (Note 9) |
(52.7 | ) | (82.0 | ) | (65.8 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Attributable profit for the year (i) |
125.2 | 148.1 | 112.1 | ||||||
Ordinary dividends (Note 10) |
(47.8 | ) | (46.1 | ) | (44.6 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Retained profit for the year |
77.4 | 102.0 | 67.5 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Basic earnings per Ordinary Share (Note 11) |
13.39 | p | 15.92 | p | 12.11 | p | |||
Diluted earnings per Ordinary Share (Note 11) |
13.30 | p | 15.82 | p | 12.02 | p | |||
Earnings before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items: |
|||||||||
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation |
177.9 | 230.1 | 177.9 | ||||||
Continuing operations: goodwill amortisation |
20.5 | 18.5 | 17.5 | ||||||
Continuing operations: exceptional items |
80.0 | 22.4 | 29.9 | ||||||
Share of joint venture exceptional items |
| 2.7 | 2.6 | ||||||
Net profit on disposals |
| (31.5 | ) | (18.0 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Profit before taxation, goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
278.4 | 242.2 | 209.9 | ||||||
Taxation on profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
(80.7 | ) | (70.2 | ) | (61.6 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Earnings before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items (Adjusted) (ii) |
197.7 | 172.0 | 148.3 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Adjusted basic earnings per Ordinary Share |
21.14 | p | 18.49 | p | 16.02 | p | |||
Adjusted diluted earnings per Ordinary Share |
21.01 | p | 18.38 | p | 15.89 | p |
(i) | A summary of the adjustments to attributable profit for the financial year that would be required had accounting principles generally accepted in the US been applied rather than those generally accepted in the UK is set out in Note 39 of the Notes to the Group Accounts. |
(ii) | In order to provide a trend measure of underlying performance, profit before taxation is adjusted to exclude goodwill amortisation and exceptional items and earnings per share has been recalculated. |
70
At 31 December
|
||||||||||||
2004
|
2004
|
2003
|
2003
|
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
Fixed assets: |
||||||||||||
Intangible assets (Note 12) |
332.2 | 269.4 | ||||||||||
Tangible assets (Note 13) |
282.5 | 257.6 | ||||||||||
Investments (Note 14) |
4.9 | 5.0 | ||||||||||
Investment in joint venture (Note 15): |
||||||||||||
Goodwill |
69.5 | 70.7 | ||||||||||
Share of gross assets |
113.4 | 104.8 | ||||||||||
Share of gross liabilities |
(61.9 | ) | (53.9 | ) | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
121.0 | 121.6 | |||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
740.6 | 653.6 | |||||||||||
Current assets: |
||||||||||||
Stocks (Note 17) |
284.9 | 230.6 | ||||||||||
Debtors (Note 18) |
361.8 | 334.5 | ||||||||||
Cash and bank (Note 19) |
32.6 | 26.0 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
679.3 | 591.1 | |||||||||||
Creditors: amounts falling due within one year: |
||||||||||||
Borrowings (Note 19) |
31.9 | 96.9 | ||||||||||
Other creditors (Note 21) |
377.9 | 308.4 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
409.8 | 405.3 | |||||||||||
Net current assets |
269.5 | 185.8 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
Total assets less current liabilities |
1,010.1 | 839.4 | ||||||||||
Creditors: falling due after more than one year: |
||||||||||||
Borrowings (Note 19) |
144.3 | 99.6 | ||||||||||
Other creditors (Note 21) |
15.8 | 8.8 | ||||||||||
Provisions for liabilities and charges (Note 22) |
123.0 | 90.2 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
283.1 | 198.6 | |||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
727.0 | 640.8 | |||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
Equity capital and reserves |
||||||||||||
Shareholders funds: |
||||||||||||
Called up equity share capital (Note 23) |
114.5 | 114.1 | ||||||||||
Share premium account (Note 26) |
159.6 | 152.0 | ||||||||||
Profit and loss account (Note 26) |
457.1 | 376.8 | ||||||||||
Own shares (Note 27) |
(4.2 | ) | (2.1 | ) | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||
Shareholders funds (i) |
727.0 | 640.8 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
Approved by the Board on 8 March 2005.
Dudley Eustace Chairman Christopher ODonnell Chief Executive Peter Hooley Finance Director
(i) | A summary of the adjustments to shareholders funds that would be required had accounting principles generally accepted in the US been applied rather than those generally accepted in the UK is set out in Note 39 of the Notes to the Group Accounts. |
71
Years ended 31 December
|
|||||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Net cash inflow from operating activities (Note 28) |
226.6 | 214.5 | 211.0 | ||||||
Dividends received from joint venture |
14.1 | 6.8 | 3.9 | ||||||
Returns on investments and servicing of finance: |
|||||||||
Interest received |
13.9 | 11.0 | 6.6 | ||||||
Interest paid |
(9.4 | ) | (14.8 | ) | (16.8 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net cash outflow from returns on investments and servicing of finance |
4.5 | (3.8 | ) | (10.2 | ) | ||||
Taxation paid |
(37.9 | ) | (52.2 | ) | (52.3 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
207.3 | 165.3 | 152.4 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Capital expenditure and financial investment: |
|||||||||
Capital expenditure |
(102.0 | ) | (73.2 | ) | (85.2 | ) | |||
Disposal of fixed assets |
1.2 | 2.4 | 1.1 | ||||||
Trade investments |
(0.3 | ) | (0.6 | ) | (1.3 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
(101.1 | ) | (71.4 | ) | (85.4 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Acquisitions and disposals: |
|||||||||
Acquisitions (net of Loan Notes issued of £50.3m in 2004) |
(36.7 | ) | (4.3 | ) | (245.4 | ) | |||
Cash acquired on acquisition of MMT (ORATEC in 2002) |
1.8 | | 39.1 | ||||||
Disposals |
| | 71.8 | ||||||
Disposal of associated undertaking |
| 52.4 | | ||||||
Debt repaid by the joint venture |
| | 5.7 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
(34.9 | ) | 48.1 | (128.8 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Equity dividends paid |
(46.7 | ) | (45.1 | ) | (43.5 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Cash inflow/(outflow) before use of liquid resources and financing |
24.6 | 96.9 | (105.3 | ) | |||||
Financing: |
|||||||||
Issue of ordinary share capital |
8.0 | 8.5 | 6.1 | ||||||
(Decrease)/increase in borrowings due within one year (Note 28) |
(61.9 | ) | (47.4 | ) | 70.6 | ||||
Increase/(decrease) in borrowings due after one year (Note 28) |
1.3 | (52.9 | ) | 18.1 | |||||
Settlement of currency swaps (Note 28) |
39.8 | | | ||||||
Own shares purchased |
(4.1 | ) | (1.3 | ) | (2.4 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing |
(16.9 | ) | (93.1 | ) | 92.4 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Increase/(decrease) in cash net of overdrafts (Note 28) |
7.7 | 3.8 | (12.9 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | The significant differences between the cash flow statement presented above and that required under accounting principles generally accepted in the US are set out in Note 39 of Notes to the Group Accounts. |
72
GROUP STATEMENT OF TOTAL RECOGNISED GAINS AND LOSSES
Years Ended 31 December
|
||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Attributable profit for the financial year (i) |
125.2 | 148.1 | 112.1 | |||
Translation differences on foreign currency net investments |
3.2 | 3.8 | 9.1 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total recognised gains and losses relating to the year |
128.4 | 151.9 | 121.2 | |||
|
|
|
(i) | Included in the attributable profit for the financial year is £15.5m (2003 £12.5m, 2002 £10.3m) profit relating to the joint venture and nil (2003 £2.8m, 2002 £3.0m) profit relating to the associated undertaking. |
(ii) | The statement of comprehensive income required under accounting principles generally accepted in the US is set out in Note 39 of Notes to the Group Accounts. |
GROUP RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENTS IN SHAREHOLDERS FUNDS
Years Ended 31 December
|
|||||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Attributable profit for the financial year |
125.2 | 148.1 | 112.1 | ||||||
Dividends |
(47.8 | ) | (46.1 | ) | (44.6 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Retained profit for the year |
77.4 | 102.0 | 67.5 | ||||||
Translation differences on foreign currency net investments |
3.2 | 3.8 | 9.1 | ||||||
Goodwill on disposals |
| 8.2 | 30.0 | ||||||
Share based expense recognised in the profit and loss account |
1.7 | 2.7 | 1.6 | ||||||
Cost of own shares purchased (Note 27) |
(4.1 | ) | (1.3 | ) | (2.4 | ) | |||
Issue of shares |
8.0 | 8.5 | 8.4 | ||||||
Movements relating to the QUEST (Note 24) |
| | (2.3 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net addition to shareholders funds |
86.2 | 123.9 | 111.9 | ||||||
Opening shareholders funds |
640.8 | 516.9 | 405.0 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Closing shareholders funds |
727.0 | 640.8 | 516.9 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
73
1. | Accounting Policies |
The accounts have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with applicable UK accounting standards and include the disclosures required by Financial Reporting Standard 17 (FRS 17).
In applying these policies management is required to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the accounts and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
Consolidation
The Group accounts include the accounts of Smith & Nephew plc (the Company) and all the subsidiaries and associated undertakings for the periods during which they were members of the Group. In these financial statements, Group means the Company and all its subsidiaries.
Entities in which the Group holds an interest on a long-term basis and which are controlled by the Group and one other under a contractual agreement are joint ventures. Joint ventures are included in the consolidated accounts under the gross equity method.
Entities in which the Group has a beneficial interest of 50% or less in the equity capital and where the Group exercises significant influence over commercial and financial policy decisions are associated undertakings. Associates are included in the consolidated accounts under the equity method.
Turnover
Turnover comprises sales of products and services to third parties at amounts invoiced net of trade discounts and rebates, excluding turnover taxes. Turnover from the sale of products and services is recognised upon transfer to the customer of the significant risks and rewards of ownership. This is generally when goods are dispatched to, or services performed for, customers except that sales of stock located at customer premises and available for customers immediate use are recognised as soon as notification is received that the product has been implanted or used. Appropriate provisions for returns, trade discounts and other allowances are deducted from turnover. Other turnover is recorded as earned or as services are performed.
Foreign Currencies
Balance sheet items of overseas companies and foreign currency borrowings are translated into Sterling at the year end rates of exchange. Profit and loss items and the cash flows of overseas subsidiary undertakings and associated undertakings are translated at the average rates for the year.
Forward currency contracts in respect of contracted and anticipated amounts payable on purchase transactions are accounted for as hedges with the hedged transaction recorded at the rate implicit in the contract. Changes in the fair value of these forward contracts are recognised in the profit and loss account on the ultimate sale of the item purchased.
The following are recorded as movements in reserves: exchange differences on the translation at closing rates of exchange of overseas opening net assets, including acquisition goodwill; the difference on translation of foreign currency borrowings or swaps that are used to finance or hedge Group equity investments; and the differences arising between the translation of profits at average and closing exchange rates. All other exchange differences are dealt with in arriving at profit before taxation.
Intangible Fixed Assets
Prior to 1 January 1998, goodwill representing the excess of purchase consideration over fair value of net assets acquired was set-off against reserves in the year of acquisition. Goodwill acquired since 31 December 1997 and other acquired intangibles are capitalised and amortised on a straight line basis over their estimated useful economic lives, between 3 and 20 years, except for goodwill arising on the formation of the BSN Medical joint venture and acquisition of the Groups share of the AbilityOne associated undertaking, which is not amortised but is subject to an annual impairment review. This treatment, which is a departure from the requirement of the Companies Act 1985 of Great Britain (the Companies Act) to amortise goodwill, is adopted in order to show a true and fair view (See Note 15 and Note 16). Where applicable, goodwill previously set-off against reserves is deducted in the calculation of gains on disposal.
74
1. | Accounting Policies (continued) |
The carrying value of goodwill and acquired intangibles is reviewed for impairment at the end of the first full financial year following acquisition and in other periods if significant events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may be impaired.
Purchased patents, know-how, trademarks, licences and distribution rights are capitalised and amortised over their estimated useful lives of periods between 3 and 15 years.
The carrying values of intangibles are reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may be impaired.
Research and Development
Revenue expenditure on research and development is written off as incurred.
Advertising Costs
Expenditure on advertising costs is written off as incurred.
Tangible Fixed Assets
Tangible fixed assets are stated at cost less depreciation and provision for impairment where appropriate. Freehold land is not depreciated. Freehold and long leasehold buildings are depreciated on a straight-line basis at between 2% and 5% per annum. Short leasehold land and buildings (leases of under 50 years) are depreciated by equal annual instalments over the term of the lease. Plant and equipment is depreciated over lives ranging between three and 20 years by equal annual instalments to write down the assets to their estimated disposal value at the end of their working lives.
Finance costs relating to the purchase of fixed assets are not capitalised.
Leasing Commitments
Assets held under finance leases are capitalised as tangible fixed assets and depreciated accordingly. The capital element of future lease payments is included in borrowings and interest is charged to profit before taxation on a reducing balance basis over the term of the lease.
Rentals payable under operating leases are charged to the profit and loss account as incurred.
Investments
Trade investments are stated at cost less provision for any permanent diminution in value.
Stocks
Finished goods and work-in-progress are valued at factory cost, including appropriate overheads, on a first-in first-out basis. Raw materials are valued at purchase price. All stocks are reduced to net realisable value where lower than cost.
Orthopaedic instruments are generally not sold but loaned to customers and distributors for use in orthopaedic surgery. They are recorded as stock until they are deployed at which point they are transferred to fixed assets and depreciated over their useful lives.
Financial Instruments
Currency swaps to match foreign currency net assets with foreign currency liabilities are translated into Sterling at year-end exchange rates. Changes in the principal values of currency swaps are matched in reserves against changes in the values of the related assets. The fixed rate element of currency swaps and interest rate swaps transacted to protect interest costs and income are accounted for as hedges. Changes in the values of interest rate hedges are recognised against interest in the period relating to the hedge.
Deferred Taxation
Deferred taxation is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date where transactions or events have occurred at that date that will result in an obligation to pay more, or a right to pay less or to receive more, tax.
No provision is made for deferred tax that would arise on the remittance of the retained earnings of overseas subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures except to the extent that, at the balance sheet date, dividends have been accrued as receivable.
75
1. | Accounting Policies (continued) |
Deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that the directors consider that it is likely that taxable income will be available against which future reversals of the underlying timing differences can be made.
Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which timing differences are expected to reverse. These are based on tax rates and laws substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.
Post-Retirement Benefits
The Groups major pension plans are of the defined benefit type. For these plans, in accordance with SSAP 24, costs are charged to operating profit so as to spread the expense of providing future pensions to employees over their working lives with the Group. For defined contribution plans, contributions are charged to operating profit as they become payable. Where the Group provides healthcare benefits after retirement, the expected cost of these is charged to operating profit over the employees working lives with the Group.
Contingencies and Provisions
In the normal course of business the Group is involved in numerous legal disputes. Provision is made for loss contingencies when it is deemed probable that an adverse outcome will occur and the amount of the loss can be reasonably estimated. Where the Group is the plaintiff in pursuing claims against third parties legal and associated expenses are charged to profit and loss account as incurred.
The Group operates in multiple tax jurisdictions around the world and records provisions for taxation liabilities and tax audits when it is deemed probable that a tax charge will arise and the amount can be reasonably estimated.
2(a). | Segmental Analysis Information Required under UK GAAP |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Group turnover by business segment |
||||||
Orthopaedics |
588.7 | 525.4 | 470.2 | |||
Endoscopy |
304.8 | 300.0 | 291.8 | |||
Advanced wound management |
355.0 | 353.5 | 321.7 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Continuing operations |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,083.7 | |||
Discontinued operations |
| | 26.2 | |||
|
|
|
||||
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,109.9 | ||||
|
|
|
Discontinued operations in 2002 comprise the results of the rehabilitation business up until its disposal in March 2002.
76
2(a). | Segmental Analysis Information Required under UK GAAP (continued) |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Group turnover by geographic origin |
|||||||||
United Kingdom |
242.4 | 196.9 | 179.6 | ||||||
Continental Europe |
313.7 | 302.4 | 250.7 | ||||||
United States |
745.2 | 723.5 | 702.1 | ||||||
Other America |
35.4 | 33.4 | 28.6 | ||||||
Africa, Asia and Australasia |
177.9 | 166.5 | 144.3 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Continuing operations |
1,514.6 | 1,422.7 | 1,305.3 | ||||||
Discontinued operations |
| | 26.2 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
1,514.6 | 1,422.7 | 1,331.5 | |||||||
Less: intragroup sales |
(266.1 | ) | (243.8 | ) | (221.6 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,109.9 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Group turnover by geographic market |
|||||||||
United Kingdom |
122.5 | 98.7 | 87.3 | ||||||
Continental Europe |
287.2 | 271.2 | 231.4 | ||||||
United States |
608.5 | 595.6 | 579.4 | ||||||
Other America |
41.0 | 36.7 | 31.1 | ||||||
Africa, Asia and Australasia |
189.3 | 176.7 | 154.5 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Continuing operations |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,083.7 | ||||||
Discontinued operations |
| | 26.2 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,109.9 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Group operating profit by business segment |
|||||||||
Orthopaedics |
138.6 | 118.7 | 98.2 | ||||||
Endoscopy |
61.8 | 59.5 | 53.8 | ||||||
Advanced wound management |
51.1 | 42.5 | 44.0 | ||||||
Amortisation of goodwill |
(20.5 | ) | (18.5 | ) | (17.5 | ) | |||
Exceptional items |
(80.0 | ) | (22.4 | ) | (29.9 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Continuing operations |
151.0 | 179.8 | 148.6 | ||||||
Discontinued operations |
| | 2.1 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
151.0 | 179.8 | 150.7 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Items between Group operating profit of £151.0m (2003 £179.8m, 2002 £150.7m) and profit on ordinary activities before taxation of £177.9m (2003 £230.1m, 2002 £177.9m) comprise share of operating profit of the joint venture £23.8m (2003 £20.0m, 2002 £17.0m), share of operating profit of the associated undertaking of nil (2003 £4.8m, 2002 £4.9m), net profit on disposals of nil (2003 £31.5m, 2002 £18.0m) and net interest receivable of £3.1m (2003 £6.0m payable, 2002 £12.7m payable) which are not allocated segmentally.
Exceptional costs are allocated as follows: Orthopaedics £80.0m (2003 £17.6m, 2002 £0.8m), Endoscopy nil (2003 £4.8 m, 2002 £7.6m) and Advanced wound management nil (2003 nil, 2002 £21.5m). Amortisation of goodwill of £20.5m (2003 £18.5m, 2002 £17.5m) arose as follows: Orthopaedics £6.8m (2003 £4.1m, 2002 £4.7m), Endoscopy £7.8m (2003 £8.5m, 2002 £7.1m) and Advanced wound management £5.9m (2003 £5.9m, 2002 £5.7m).
77
2(a). Segmental Analysis Information Required under UK GAAP (continued)
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Group operating profit by geographic origin |
|||||||||
United Kingdom |
45.0 | 26.7 | 21.7 | ||||||
Continental Europe |
49.1 | 35.3 | 21.1 | ||||||
United States |
126.7 | 131.5 | 129.8 | ||||||
Other America |
2.6 | 1.1 | (0.7 | ) | |||||
Africa, Asia and Australasia |
28.1 | 26.1 | 24.1 | ||||||
Amortisation of goodwill |
(20.5 | ) | (18.5 | ) | (17.5 | ) | |||
Exceptional items |
(80.0 | ) | (22.4 | ) | (29.9 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Continuing operations |
151.0 | 179.8 | 148.6 | ||||||
Discontinued operations |
| | 2.1 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
151.0 | 179.8 | 150.7 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Exceptional costs of £80.0m in 2004 arose as follows: £0.6m in Continental Europe, £74.1m in the United States and £5.3m in Africa, Asia and Australasia (2003 £22.4m: United Kingdom £17.6m and United States £4.8m, 2002 £29.9m: United Kingdom £1.5m, Continental Europe £2.4m, United States £25.8m, Other America £0.1m and Africa, Asia and Australasia £0.1m).
Amortisation of goodwill of £20.5m (2003 £18.5m, 2002 £17.5m) arose as follows: £5.4m (2003 £1.3m, 2002 £1.2m) in the United Kingdom, £2.5m (2003 £2.6m, 2002 £2.1m) in Continental Europe, £12.2m (2003 £14.1m, 2002 £13.7m) in the United States and £0.4m (2003 £0.5m, 2002 £0.5m) in Africa, Asia and Australasia.
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Group operating assets by business segment |
||||||
Orthopaedics |
386.1 | 319.7 | 309.6 | |||
Endoscopy |
236.6 | 248.9 | 275.0 | |||
Advanced wound management |
256.9 | 233.5 | 222.5 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Continuing operations |
879.6 | 802.1 | 807.1 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Group operating assets by geographic origin |
||||||
United Kingdom |
244.1 | 161.6 | 153.2 | |||
Continental Europe |
84.7 | 72.4 | 70.6 | |||
United States |
461.2 | 487.6 | 511.3 | |||
Other America |
16.7 | 14.2 | 13.0 | |||
Africa, Asia and Australasia |
72.9 | 66.3 | 59.0 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Continuing operations |
879.6 | 802.1 | 807.1 | |||
|
|
|
Operating assets reconcile to net assets as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Operating assets |
879.6 | 802.1 | 807.1 | ||||||
Investment in the joint venture |
121.0 | 121.6 | 115.0 | ||||||
Investment in the associated undertaking |
| | 8.5 | ||||||
Net debt |
(112.0 | ) | (127.1 | ) | (276.9 | ) | |||
Current taxation creditor |
(105.8 | ) | (69.4 | ) | (56.9 | ) | |||
Deferred taxation debtor |
6.3 | 4.4 | 4.0 | ||||||
Provision for deferred taxation |
(32.1 | ) | (61.9 | ) | (56.0 | ) | |||
Ordinary share dividends |
(30.0 | ) | (28.9 | ) | (27.9 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net assets |
727.0 | 640.8 | 516.9 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
78
2(b). | Segmental Analysis Information Required under US GAAP |
The following business and geographic segmental information is required by SFAS 131 Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information and has been derived from the Groups management reports.
Group management reviews and monitors business unit performance by use of key performance indicators which differ in certain respects from the way results are reported in the Group Accounts which are determined by UK GAAP and US GAAP.
Business units report sales of continuing operations only and at constant rates of exchange throughout a particular year. The effects of currency movements are excluded by setting at the beginning of each year exchange rates which remain constant throughout the year. These are termed the Management Rates (MR) for the year. These are reset each year and prior year comparative data re-translated to the new rates. Additional sales brought in by acquisitions, for which there are no prior year comparatives, are excluded from the calculation of underlying sales growth which is managements key indicator of sales performance. In the tables below, underlying sales growth can be calculated by dividing current year turnover at MR by comparative prior year turnover at MR.
Business units report operating profit of continuing operations before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items and at constant rates of exchange during the year.
Management believes the Groups internal reporting measures are the most appropriate since they focus on underlying business performance and exclude the distorting effects of exchange rate translation and non-operating items. These measures are used in financial reporting, budgets, planning and incentive plans.
Results in the Group Accounts are reported at the average rates for each year (AR) (See Note 1 and Note 29).
Orthopaedics
|
Endoscopy
|
Advanced
wound management |
Continuing
Operations |
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
Turnover by business segment |
||||||||||||
2004: |
||||||||||||
Turnover at 2004 MR |
585.7 | 313.4 | 363.8 | 1,262.9 | ||||||||
Adjustment for 2004 acquisitions |
20.0 | | | 20.0 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
(17.0 | ) | (8.6 | ) | (8.8 | ) | (34.4 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Turnover at 2004 AR |
588.7 | 304.8 | 355.0 | 1,248.5 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
2003: |
||||||||||||
Turnover at 2004 MR |
499.3 | 286.3 | 347.4 | 1,133.0 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
26.1 | 13.7 | 6.1 | 45.9 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Turnover at 2003 AR |
525.4 | 300.0 | 353.5 | 1,178.9 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
2003: |
||||||||||||
Turnover at 2003 MR |
524.1 | 291.7 | 345.3 | 1,161.1 | ||||||||
Adjustments for 2002 acquisitions |
| 6.9 | | 6.9 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
1.3 | 1.4 | 8.2 | 10.9 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Turnover at 2003 AR |
525.4 | 300.0 | 353.5 | 1,178.9 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
2002: |
||||||||||||
Turnover at 2003 MR |
451.0 | 281.0 | 316.8 | 1,048.8 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
19.2 | 10.8 | 4.9 | 34.9 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Turnover at 2002 AR |
470.2 | 291.8 | 321.7 | 1,083.7 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
79
2(b). | Segmental Analysis Information Required under US GAAP (continued) |
Europe(i)
|
US
|
Africa, Asia,
Australasia and Other America |
Continuing
Operations |
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
Turnover by geographic region |
||||||||||||
2004: |
||||||||||||
Turnover at 2004 MR |
404.5 | 626.0 | 232.4 | 1,262.9 | ||||||||
Adjustment for 2004 acquisitions |
15.4 | | 4.6 | 20.0 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
(10.2 | ) | (17.5 | ) | (6.7 | ) | (34.4 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Turnover at 2004 AR |
409.7 | 608.5 | 230.3 | 1,248.5 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
2003: |
||||||||||||
Turnover at 2004 MR |
373.9 | 547.6 | 211.5 | 1,133.0 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
(4.0 | ) | 48.0 | 1.9 | 45.9 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Turnover at 2003 AR |
369.9 | 595.6 | 213.4 | 1,178.9 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
2003: |
||||||||||||
Turnover at 2003 MR |
356.2 | 601.6 | 203.3 | 1,161.1 | ||||||||
Adjustment for 2002 acquisitions |
| 6.9 | | 6.9 | ||||||||
Exchange differences |
13.7 | (12.9 | ) | 10.1 | 10.9 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Turnover at 2003 AR |
369.9 | 595.6 | 213.4 | 1,178.9 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
2002: |
||||||||||||
Turnover at 2003 MR |
323.7 | 543.7 | 181.4 | 1,048.8 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
(5.0 | ) | 35.7 | 4.2 | 34.9 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Turnover at 2002 AR |
318.7 | 579.4 | 185.6 | 1,083.7 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | Europe comprises Continental Europe and the UK. |
Orthopaedics
|
Endoscopy
|
Advanced
wound management |
Continuing
Operations |
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
Operating profit by business segment |
||||||||||||
2004: |
||||||||||||
Operating profit at 2004 MR |
142.7 | 63.5 | 51.9 | 258.1 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
(4.1 | ) | (1.7 | ) | (0.8 | ) | (6.6 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Operating profit at 2004 AR |
138.6 | 61.8 | 51.1 | 251.5 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
2003: |
||||||||||||
Operating profit at 2004 MR |
111.3 | 56.4 | 43.1 | 210.8 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
7.4 | 3.1 | (0.6 | ) | 9.9 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Operating profit at 2003 AR |
118.7 | 59.5 | 42.5 | 220.7 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
2003: |
||||||||||||
Operating profit at 2003 MR |
119.7 | 60.0 | 40.9 | 220.6 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
(1.0 | ) | (0.5 | ) | 1.6 | 0.1 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Operating profit at 2003 AR |
118.7 | 59.5 | 42.5 | 220.7 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
2002: |
||||||||||||
Operating profit at 2003 MR |
93.8 | 51.6 | 43.5 | 188.9 | ||||||||
Exchange difference |
4.4 | 2.2 | 0.5 | 7.1 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Operating profit at 2002 AR |
98.2 | 53.8 | 44.0 | 196.0 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
80
2(b). | Segmental Analysis Information Required under US GAAP (continued) |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Capital expenditure by business segment |
||||||
Orthopaedics |
70.7 | 42.0 | 47.4 | |||
Endoscopy |
15.6 | 14.8 | 17.2 | |||
Advanced wound management |
15.7 | 16.4 | 20.4 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Continuing operations |
102.0 | 73.2 | 85.0 | |||
Discontinued operations |
| | 0.2 | |||
|
|
|
||||
102.0 | 73.2 | 85.2 | ||||
|
|
|
Capital expenditure comprises additions of tangible and intangible fixed assets. In addition, in 2004, £0.3m of additions to trade investments related to Orthopaedics (2003 £0.6m, 2002 £1.3m).
Amounts comprise depreciation of tangible fixed assets and amortisation of other intangible fixed assets and goodwill as follows:
Depreciation of tangible fixed assets |
58.4 | 54.8 | 51.6 | |||
Amortisation of other intangible fixed assets |
5.7 | 5.0 | 5.1 | |||
|
|
|
||||
64.1 | 59.8 | 56.7 | ||||
Amortisation of goodwill |
20.5 | 18.5 | 17.5 | |||
|
|
|
||||
84.6 | 78.3 | 74.2 | ||||
|
|
|
||||
Long lived assets by geographic origin |
||||||
United Kingdom |
213.1 | 141.6 | 143.4 | |||
Continental Europe |
30.8 | 25.2 | 23.8 | |||
United States |
336.1 | 339.5 | 387.2 | |||
Other America |
3.3 | 3.2 | 3.2 | |||
Africa, Asia and Australasia |
36.3 | 22.5 | 20.4 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Long lived assets |
619.6 | 532.0 | 578.0 | |||
|
|
|
Long lived assets comprise tangible and intangible fixed assets and investments.
81
3. | Operating Profit |
Continuing operations
|
||||||
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Turnover |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | ||||
Cost of sales |
(334.8 | ) | (345.1 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Gross profit |
913.7 | 833.8 | ||||
Marketing, selling and distribution |
(476.8 | ) | (440.1 | ) | ||
Administration |
(134.0 | ) | (125.5 | ) | ||
Research and development |
(66.4 | ) | (66.8 | ) | ||
BSN agency and management fees |
15.0 | 19.3 | ||||
Amortisation of goodwill |
(20.5 | ) | (18.5 | ) | ||
Exceptional items |
(80.0 | ) | (22.4 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Group operating profit |
151.0 | 179.8 | ||||
|
|
|
|
Exceptional items of £80.0m were incurred as follows: administration £80.0m (2003 £22.4m cost of sales £4.8m and administration £17.6m).
2002
|
|||||||||
Continuing
operations |
Discontinued
operations |
Total
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Turnover |
1,083.7 | 26.2 | 1,109.9 | ||||||
Cost of sales |
(313.6 | ) | (16.3 | ) | (329.9 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Gross profit |
770.1 | 9.9 | 780.0 | ||||||
Marketing, selling and distribution |
(408.5 | ) | (5.6 | ) | (414.1 | ) | |||
Administration |
(125.0 | ) | (2.1 | ) | (127.1 | ) | |||
Research and development |
(61.2 | ) | (0.1 | ) | (61.3 | ) | |||
BSN agency and management fees |
20.6 | | 20.6 | ||||||
Amortisation of goodwill |
(17.5 | ) | | (17.5 | ) | ||||
Exceptional items |
(29.9 | ) | | (29.9 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Group operating profit |
148.6 | 2.1 | 150.7 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Exceptional items of £29.9m were incurred as follows: cost of sales £2.8m, marketing, selling and distribution £2.5m, administration £22.6m and research and development £2.0m.
Operating profit is stated after charging the following items:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Amortisation of other intangible fixed assets |
5.7 | 5.0 | 5.1 | |||
Depreciation of tangible fixed assets |
58.4 | 54.8 | 51.6 | |||
Loss on sale of fixed assets |
2.6 | 1.9 | 2.7 | |||
Operating lease rentals for land and buildings |
11.4 | 11.2 | 11.0 | |||
Operating lease rentals for other assets |
11.7 | 10.9 | 9.8 | |||
Advertising costs |
18.7 | 18.9 | 15.1 |
4. | Exceptional Items |
In 2004, the operating exceptional item within continuing operations of £80.0m represents provision of £13.4m for the amount due from excess layer insurers who have declined insurance coverage for claims relating to macrotextured knee revisions together with an estimate of £66.6m for the cost of settlements with patients likely to arise in the future and assuming that insurance cover remains unavailable (see Note 32).
In 2003, operating exceptional items within continuing operations of £22.4m comprise £17.6m of costs, net of a break fee of £10.8m, written off as a consequence of the unsuccessful public offers to purchase Centerpulse AG and Incentive Capital AG and £4.8m of acquisition integration costs. The Groups share of exceptional items of the joint venture relates to its share of manufacturing rationalisation costs.
82
4. | Exceptional Items (continued) |
In 2002, operating exceptional items of £29.9m comprised £17.5m for the write-down of the Groups trade investment in the common stock of Advanced Tissue Sciences, Inc., £8.4m for the acquisition integration of ORATEC and Dermagraft and £4.0m for further rationalisation consequent on the contribution of businesses to BSN Medical in 2001. The Groups share of exceptional items of the joint venture related to its share of manufacturing rationalisation costs.
5. | Net Profit and Loss on Disposals |
In 2003, net cash consideration of £52.4m was received on the disposal of the 21.5% equity interest in AbilityOne Corporation (AbilityOne) to Patterson Dental Inc. A net profit of £31.5m arose after writing off £8.2m of acquisition goodwill previously set-off against reserves and £1.1m of adjustments in respect of previous disposals.
In 2002, a net profit of £17.2m arose on the disposal of the rehabilitation business for a net cash consideration of £71.3m and a 21.5% equity interest in AbilityOne. The net profit consists of a gain of £47.2m less £30.0m of acquisition goodwill previously set-off against reserves. In addition, a net gain of £0.8m arose on adjustments in respect of previous disposals.
6. | Interest |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Interest payable: |
|||||||||
Bank borrowings |
(6.4 | ) | (14.2 | ) | (16.2 | ) | |||
Other |
(1.1 | ) | (0.6 | ) | (0.6 | ) | |||
Loan Notes |
(1.9 | ) | | | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
(9.4 | ) | (14.8 | ) | (16.8 | ) | ||||
Interest receivable |
13.9 | 11.0 | 6.6 | ||||||
Share of joint ventures net interest payable |
(1.4 | ) | (1.5 | ) | (1.6 | ) | |||
Share of associated undertakings net interest payable |
| (0.7 | ) | (0.9 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net interest receivable/(payable) |
3.1 | (6.0 | ) | (12.7 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest payable on currency swaps of £14.6m (2003 £18.5m, 2002 £23.3m) has been set off against interest receivable.
7. | Employees |
The average number of employees during the year was:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(Number) | ||||||
United Kingdom |
1,679 | 1,600 | 1,740 | |||
Continental Europe |
1,374 | 1,317 | 1,279 | |||
United States |
3,437 | 3,177 | 3,090 | |||
Other America |
190 | 200 | 201 | |||
Africa, Asia and Australasia |
1,186 | 1,157 | 1,196 | |||
|
|
|
||||
7,866 | 7,451 | 7,506 | ||||
|
|
|
Staff costs during the year amounted to:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Wages and salaries |
265.8 | 260.0 | 261.1 | |||
Social security costs |
28.9 | 27.2 | 25.1 | |||
Other pension costs (Note 33) |
25.4 | 21.6 | 14.3 | |||
|
|
|
||||
320.1 | 308.8 | 300.5 | ||||
|
|
|
Of the other pension costs £18.8m (2003 £16.9m, 2002 £11.0m) relates to defined benefit plans and £6.6m (2003 £4.7m, 2002 £3.3m) relates to defined contribution plans.
83
8. | Directors Emoluments |
Aggregate emoluments of the directors, including pension entitlements of £148,000 (2003 £126,000, 2002 £106,000), were £1,924,000 (2003 £2,119,000, 2002 £1,823,000). The emoluments of the highest paid director excluding pension entitlement were £904,000 (2003 £1,030,000, 2002 £856,000). Two (2003 two) directors get defined benefit pension entitlements, the accrued pension of the highest paid director at the end of the year was £245,000 (2003 £195,000, 2002 £153,000).
Information concerning individual directors emoluments, pension entitlements, shareholdings and share options is shown in the Remuneration Report.
9. | Taxation |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Current taxation: |
|||||||||
UK corporation tax at 30% (2003 30%, 2002 30%) |
19.9 | 6.8 | 8.9 | ||||||
UK adjustments in respect of prior years |
(4.8 | ) | 0.5 | (2.3 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
15.1 | 7.3 | 6.6 | |||||||
Overseas tax |
57.2 | 53.9 | 38.5 | ||||||
Overseas adjustments in respect of prior years |
(3.7 | ) | 3.6 | (3.0 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
53.5 | 57.5 | 35.5 | |||||||
Share of joint ventures tax charge |
6.4 | 6.0 | 4.5 | ||||||
Share of associated undertakings tax charge |
| 1.3 | 1.0 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Total current taxation |
75.0 | 72.1 | 47.6 | ||||||
Deferred taxation: |
|||||||||
Origination and reversal of timing differences |
(23.7 | ) | 17.1 | 14.6 | |||||
Adjustments to estimated amounts arising in prior periods |
0.9 | (7.2 | ) | 3.0 | |||||
Share of joint ventures deferred taxation |
0.5 | | 0.6 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Total deferred taxation |
(22.3 | ) | 9.9 | 18.2 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
52.7 | 82.0 | 65.8 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
The tax charge was reduced by £28.0m in 2004 as a consequence of the exceptional item relating to the denial of insurance coverage for macrotextured knee revisions, resulting in a tax charge on profit before exceptional items of £80.7m.
In 2003, the tax charge was reduced by £4.3m of which £0.8m arose in the joint venture, as a consequence of the exceptional costs relating to the rationalisation and acquisition integration costs and the unsuccessful public offers to purchase Centerpulse AG and Incentive Capital AG and increased by £16.1m as a result of the exceptional profit on disposal of the associated undertaking, resulting in a tax charge on profits before exceptional items of £70.2m.
In 2002, the tax charge was reduced by £12.7m of which £0.6m arose in the joint venture, as a consequence of the exceptional costs of the write-off of the Advanced Tissue Sciences, Inc., investment and rationalisation and acquisition integration costs and increased by £16.9m as a result of the exceptional profit on disposal, resulting in a tax charge on profits before exceptional items of £61.6m.
84
9. | Taxation (continued) |
The standard rate of tax for the year is based on the United Kingdom standard rate of corporation tax of 30% (2003 30%, 2002 30%). The current and total tax charges differ from the standard rate as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(%) | |||||||||
UK standard rate |
30.0 | 30.0 | 30.0 | ||||||
Non-deductible/non-taxable items |
(0.1 | ) | (4.0 | ) | 3.1 | ||||
Prior year items |
(4.8 | ) | 1.8 | (3.0 | ) | ||||
Overseas income taxed at other than UK standard rate |
4.5 | 7.8 | 6.9 | ||||||
Fixed asset timing differences |
(4.1 | ) | (2.7 | ) | (3.3 | ) | |||
Tax relief on the macrotextured exceptional item |
15.7 | | | ||||||
Other timing differences |
1.0 | (1.6 | ) | (6.9 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Effective total current tax rate |
42.2 | 31.3 | 26.8 | ||||||
Fixed asset timing differences |
4.1 | 2.7 | 3.3 | ||||||
Tax relief on the macrotextured exceptional item |
(15.7 | ) | | | |||||
Other timing differences |
(1.0 | ) | 1.6 | 6.9 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Total tax rate |
29.6 | 35.6 | 37.0 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factors that may Affect Future Total Tax Charges
Tax rates on the Groups overseas profits are generally higher than the UK corporation tax rate so changes in the proportion of profits earned overseas will affect the Groups effective tax rate over time. The current tax charge may also be affected by differences between tax allowances and book depreciation.
No deferred tax is recognised on unremitted earnings of overseas subsidiaries and joint ventures. No significant additional tax charges are expected to arise on amounts that are planned to be remitted in the foreseeable future.
No provision has been made for deferred tax on gains recognised on the sale of assets where potentially taxable gains have been rolled over into replacement assets. Such tax would become payable only if the assets were sold without it being possible to claim rollover relief. The total amount unprovided is £35.8m (2003 £31.4m, 2002 £31.4m). At present, it is not envisaged that any tax will become payable in the foreseeable future.
10. | Dividends |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Ordinary interim of 1.90p (2003 1.85p, 2002 1.80p) paid 12 November 2004 |
17.8 | 17.2 | 16.7 | |||
Ordinary final of 3.20p (2003 3.10p, 2002 3.00p) payable 13 May 2005 |
30.0 | 28.9 | 27.9 | |||
|
|
|
||||
47.8 | 46.1 | 44.6 | ||||
|
|
|
In addition, in 2003 non-equity preference dividends of £14,000 were paid (2002 £15,000).
85
11. | Earnings per Ordinary Share |
The calculation of basic earnings per Ordinary Share of 13.39p (2003 15.92p, 2002 12.11p) is based on profit on ordinary activities after taxation and preference dividends of £125.2m (2003 £148.1m, 2002 £112.1m) and on 935m Ordinary Shares (2003 930m, 2002 926m) being the weighted average number of shares in issue during the year. The calculation of diluted earnings per Ordinary Share of 13.30p (2003 15.82p, 2002 12.02p) is based on the diluted weighted average number of shares which is calculated as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(Shares million) | |||||||||
Basic weighted average number of shares |
935 | 930 | 926 | ||||||
Weighted average number of shares under option |
18 | 19 | 19 | ||||||
Number of shares that would have been issued at fair value |
(12 | ) | (13 | ) | (12 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Diluted weighted average number of shares |
941 | 936 | 933 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
12. | Intangible Fixed Assets |
Goodwill
|
Other
|
Total
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Cost |
|||||||||
At 1 January 2003 |
317.9 | 52.3 | 370.2 | ||||||
Exchange adjustment |
(19.8 | ) | (4.7 | ) | (24.5 | ) | |||
Fair value adjustments |
2.4 | (1.7 | ) | 0.7 | |||||
Acquisitions |
0.1 | 0.3 | 0.4 | ||||||
Additions |
| 1.5 | 1.5 | ||||||
Write back of deferred consideration (Note 30) |
(8.5 | ) | | (8.5 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
At 31 December 2003 |
292.1 | 47.7 | 339.8 | ||||||
Exchange adjustment |
(14.4 | ) | (3.1 | ) | (17.5 | ) | |||
Acquisitions |
92.2 | 2.7 | 94.9 | ||||||
Additions |
| 7.4 | 7.4 | ||||||
Disposals |
| (1.2 | ) | (1.2 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
At 31 December 2004 |
369.9 | 53.5 | 423.4 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Amortisation |
|||||||||
At 1 January 2003 |
35.4 | 17.6 | 53.0 | ||||||
Exchange adjustment |
(2.6 | ) | (2.2 | ) | (4.8 | ) | |||
Charge for the year |
18.5 | 5.0 | 23.5 | ||||||
Write back of deferred consideration (Note 30) |
(1.3 | ) | | (1.3 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
At 31 December 2003 |
50.0 | 20.4 | 70.4 | ||||||
Exchange adjustment |
(2.7 | ) | (1.5 | ) | (4.2 | ) | |||
Charge for the year |
20.5 | 5.7 | 26.2 | ||||||
Disposals |
| (1.2 | ) | (1.2 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
At 31 December 2004 |
67.8 | 23.4 | 91.2 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net book amounts |
|||||||||
At 31 December 2004 |
302.1 | 30.1 | 332.2 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
At 31 December 2003 |
242.1 | 27.3 | 269.4 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
86
13. | Tangible Fixed Assets |
Land and buildings
|
Plant and equipment |
In course of construction |
Total |
||||||||||||
Freehold
|
Leasehold
|
||||||||||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||||||||
Cost |
|||||||||||||||
At 1 January 2003 |
60.8 | 10.0 | 462.9 | 30.3 | 564.0 | ||||||||||
Exchange adjustment |
(4.2 | ) | (0.3 | ) | (22.0 | ) | (1.5 | ) | (28.0 | ) | |||||
Acquisitions |
| | 0.3 | | 0.3 | ||||||||||
Additions |
0.3 | 0.3 | 45.3 | 25.8 | 71.7 | ||||||||||
Disposals |
(1.4 | ) | (0.2 | ) | (23.4 | ) | | (25.0 | ) | ||||||
Transfers |
12.5 | | 24.8 | (37.3 | ) | | |||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
At 31 December 2003 |
68.0 | 9.8 | 487.9 | 17.3 | 583.0 | ||||||||||
Exchange adjustment |
(3.1 | ) | (0.3 | ) | (17.9 | ) | (0.6 | ) | (21.9 | ) | |||||
Acquisitions |
| | 2.5 | | 2.5 | ||||||||||
Additions |
0.7 | 1.2 | 66.1 | 26.6 | 94.6 | ||||||||||
Disposals |
(0.3 | ) | (1.1 | ) | (30.4 | ) | (0.2 | ) | (32.0 | ) | |||||
Transfers |
4.4 | | 18.2 | (22.6 | ) | | |||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
At 31 December 2004 |
69.7 | 9.6 | 526.4 | 20.5 | 626.2 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Depreciation |
|||||||||||||||
At 1 January 2003 |
11.6 | 3.9 | 292.7 | | 308.2 | ||||||||||
Exchange adjustment |
(0.9 | ) | (0.2 | ) | (15.8 | ) | | (16.9 | ) | ||||||
Charge for the year |
1.8 | 0.5 | 52.5 | | 54.8 | ||||||||||
Disposals |
(0.2 | ) | (0.2 | ) | (20.3 | ) | | (20.7 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
At 31 December 2003 |
12.3 | 4.0 | 309.1 | | 325.4 | ||||||||||
Exchange adjustment |
(0.5 | ) | (0.2 | ) | (11.2 | ) | | (11.9 | ) | ||||||
Charge for the year |
2.6 | 0.4 | 55.4 | | 58.4 | ||||||||||
Disposals |
(0.2 | ) | (0.8 | ) | (27.2 | ) | | (28.2 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
At 31 December 2004 |
14.2 | 3.4 | 326.1 | | 343.7 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Net book amounts |
|||||||||||||||
At 31 December 2004 |
55.5 | 6.2 | 200.3 | 20.5 | 282.5 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
At 31 December 2003 |
55.7 | 5.8 | 178.8 | 17.3 | 257.6 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed assets include land with a cost of £6.0m (2003 £5.9m) that is not subject to depreciation. The net book value of leases with less than 50 years to run amounted to £6.2m (2003 £5.8m). Included in the amounts above are assets held under finance leases with a net book amount of £2.8m (2003 £3.0m). There were no properties for resale in 2004 or 2003.
14. | Investments |
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
At 1 January |
5.0 | 5.0 | ||||
Exchange adjustment |
(0.4 | ) | (0.6 | ) | ||
Additions |
0.3 | 0.6 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
At 31 December |
4.9 | 5.0 | ||||
|
|
|
|
The balance is stated at cost.
Investments represent trade investments and are US Dollar denominated. There is no material difference between the fair value and the carrying value.
87
15. | Investment in Joint Venture (BSN Medical) |
2004
|
2003
|
||||
(£ million) | |||||
At 1 January |
121.6 | 115.0 | |||
Retained profit for the financial year |
1.4 | 5.7 | |||
Exchange adjustment |
(2.0 | ) | 0.9 | ||
|
|
|
|||
At 31 December |
121.0 | 121.6 | |||
|
|
|
The investment in joint venture is represented by:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Share of gross assets: |
||||||
Fixed |
40.9 | 28.4 | ||||
Current |
72.5 | 76.4 | ||||
Share of gross liabilities: |
||||||
Due within one year |
(57.4 | ) | (49.2 | ) | ||
Due after one year |
(4.5 | ) | (4.7 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
51.5 | 50.9 | |||||
Goodwill |
69.5 | 70.7 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
121.0 | 121.6 | |||||
|
|
|
|
Goodwill arising on the formation of the joint venture is considered to have an indefinite useful economic life and is capable of separate measurement since the joint venture operates independently of the Group. It operates in a mature sector of the medical devices industry, has high market shares, and long product life cycles. Significant barriers to entry exist in terms of technology, manufacturing know-how, regulatory compliance, market reputation and customer relationships. If the goodwill had been amortised over 20 years, the Groups operating profit would have been lower by £3.4m (2003 £3.6m, 2002 £3.2m) and the investment in the joint venture would have been lower by £12.8m (2003 £9.4m).
16. | Investment in Associated Undertaking (AbilityOne) |
(£ million) | |||
At 1 January 2003 |
8.5 | ||
Exchange adjustment |
0.3 | ||
Retained profit for the financial year |
2.8 | ||
Disposals |
(11.6 | ) | |
|
|
||
At 31 December 2003 |
| ||
|
|
The investment was disposed of in September 2003.
Goodwill in the associated undertaking was considered to have an indefinite useful economic life and to be capable of separate measurement since the associated undertaking operated independently of the Group. It operated in the rehabilitation industry, had high market shares, and long product life cycles. Significant barriers to entry existed in terms of breadth of the product range, sales force size, physical distribution capabilities, key customer and professional relationships and market reputation. If the goodwill had been amortised over 20 years, operating profit would have been lower in 2003 by £0.6m and the profit on disposal of the associated undertaking would have been higher by £1.2m.
17. | Stocks |
2004
|
2003
|
|||
(£ million) | ||||
Raw materials and consumables |
41.0 | 37.8 | ||
Work-in-progress |
15.5 | 10.3 | ||
Finished goods and goods for resale |
228.4 | 182.5 | ||
|
|
|||
284.9 | 230.6 | |||
|
|
88
18. | Debtors |
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Amounts falling due within one year: |
||||||
Trade and other debtors gross debts |
292.7 | 265.9 | ||||
Less: non-returnable proceeds |
(19.2 | ) | (19.9 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Trade and other debtors net |
273.5 | 246.0 | ||||
Amounts owed by joint venture |
1.5 | 2.4 | ||||
Prepayments and accrued income |
23.2 | 20.3 | ||||
Debit balances on currency swaps |
22.0 | 31.4 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
320.2 | 300.1 | |||||
Amounts falling due after more than one year: |
||||||
Deferred taxation |
6.3 | 4.4 | ||||
Pension prepayments (Note 33) |
9.7 | 7.1 | ||||
Other debtors |
1.2 | 1.5 | ||||
Debit balances on currency swaps |
24.4 | 21.4 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
361.8 | 334.5 | |||||
|
|
|
|
The Group utilises a debt factoring facility in Italy. The finance providers agreement states that it cannot seek recourse in any form from the Group in the event of non-payment by the debtors. The Group is not obliged, and does not intend, to support any such losses. The gross amount of trade debtors factored without recourse is £19.2m (2003 £19.9m). £0.9m (2003 £0.9m) of factoring charges were recognised in the period.
Trade and other debtors are stated after deducting provisions for bad and doubtful debts of £7.3m (2003 £7.3m) and a provision for declined macrotextured insurance recoveries of £13.4m.
Deferred tax assets of £6.3m (2003 £4.4m) represent recoverable short-term timing differences. Other debtors falling due after more than one year are non-interest bearing and denominated in various currencies. The fair value of these debtors is the same as book value.
89
19. | Borrowings |
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Borrowings: |
||||||
Due within one year or on demand |
31.9 | 96.9 | ||||
Due after one year |
144.3 | 99.6 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
176.2 | 196.5 | |||||
Cash and bank |
(32.6 | ) | (26.0 | ) | ||
Debit balances on currency swaps |
(46.4 | ) | (52.8 | ) | ||
Credit balances on currency swaps |
14.8 | 9.4 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Net debt |
112.0 | 127.1 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Borrowings are analysed as follows: |
||||||
Bank loans and overdrafts |
124.1 | 195.2 | ||||
Loan Notes |
50.3 | | ||||
Other loans wholly repayable within five years |
1.8 | 1.3 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
176.2 | 196.5 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Borrowings are repayable as follows: |
||||||
Within one year or on demand: |
||||||
Bank loans and overdrafts |
30.4 | 96.4 | ||||
Other loans |
1.5 | 0.5 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Total within one year or on demand |
31.9 | 96.9 | ||||
After one year: |
||||||
Bank loans and overdrafts |
||||||
after one and within two years |
| 25.6 | ||||
after three and within four years |
| 73.2 | ||||
after four and within five years |
93.7 | | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
93.7 | 98.8 | |||||
Other loans: |
||||||
after one and within two years |
0.2 | 0.4 | ||||
after two and within three years |
0.1 | 0.2 | ||||
after three and within four years |
| 0.1 | ||||
after four and within five years |
| 0.1 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
0.3 | 0.8 | |||||
Loan Notes after one and within two years |
50.3 | | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Total after one year |
144.3 | 99.6 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
176.2 | 196.5 | |||||
|
|
|
|
In September 2004 the Group entered into a US$600m 5 year committed bank facility and cancelled its existing syndicated bank facilities.
The acquisition consideration for MMT was settled part in cash and part by the issue of loan notes. The loan notes are denominated in Sterling, pay interest quarterly at floating rates and are repayable in full in 2006.
The Board has established a set of policies to manage funding and currency risks. The Group only uses derivative financial instruments to manage the financial risks associated with underlying business activities and their financing. The Groups policy is to ensure that there is sufficient funding and facilities in place to meet foreseeable borrowing requirements.
Bank loans and overdrafts represent drawings under committed and uncommitted facilities of £326m and £212m, respectively. Of the undrawn committed facilities of £225m, £6m expires within one year and £219m after two but within five years (2003 undrawn committed facilities: £198m of which £9m expired within one year and £189m after two but within five years). Borrowings secured on fixed and current assets were £0.8m (2003 £1.2m). Borrowings are shown at book value which is the same as fair value.
90
19. | Borrowings (continued) |
The Group has currency swaps which have maturities in 2005 and 2006 and are translated at year-end exchange rates. Gross Sterling equivalents of £645.7m (2003 £603.4m) receivable and £614.1m (2003 £560.0m) payable have been netted. £46.4m is reported as debit balances on currency swaps and £14.8m as credit balances on currency swaps the net of which is a debit balance of £31.6m (2003 £52.8m as debit balances on currency swaps and £9.4m as credit balances on currency swaps the net of which is a debit balance of £43.4m). Currency swaps include fixed and floating interest rate contracts and forward foreign exchange contracts and are used for hedging foreign investments.
Currency swaps mature as follows:
Amount receivable |
Amount payable |
|||
(£ million) |
(Currency million) |
|||
At 31 December 2004 |
||||
Within one year: |
||||
US Dollar |
133.7 | US$229.5 | ||
Australian Dollar |
19.2 | Aus$48.7 | ||
Euro |
85.4 | 126.3 | ||
Japanese Yen |
23.9 | Yen4,781 | ||
New Zealand Dollar |
3.1 | NZ$8.0 | ||
Canadian Dollar |
7.7 | C$17.5 | ||
|
||||
273.0 | ||||
After one year and within two years: |
||||
US Dollar |
318.2 | US$564.0 | ||
Euro |
54.5 | 80.0 | ||
|
||||
372.7 | ||||
|
||||
645.7 | ||||
|
||||
At 31 December 2003 |
||||
Within one year: |
||||
US Dollar |
252.7 | US$397.8 | ||
Australian Dollar |
18.2 | Aus$42.7 | ||
Euro |
63.0 | 95.8 | ||
Japanese Yen |
20.9 | Yen3,821 | ||
New Zealand Dollar |
2.8 | NZ$8.0 | ||
Canadian Dollar |
7.9 | C$17.5 | ||
|
||||
365.5 | ||||
After one year and within two years: |
||||
US Dollar |
49.7 | US$75.0 | ||
Euro |
34.2 | 50.0 | ||
|
||||
83.9 | ||||
After two years and within three years: |
||||
US Dollar |
119.9 | US$196.0 | ||
Euro |
34.1 | 50.0 | ||
|
||||
154.0 | ||||
|
||||
603.4 | ||||
|
Where the Groups financial assets and liabilities, including currency swaps, are at floating interest rates, the Group uses simple floating to fixed rate contract interest rate swaps to protect borrowing costs and the differentials between borrowing and deposit rates.
91
20. | Financial Instruments |
The Groups policy is to protect shareholders funds by matching foreign currency assets, including acquisition goodwill, with foreign currency liabilities where practicable. These liabilities take the form of either borrowings or currency swaps. The Group also hedges forward its interest rate risk by fixing rates on currency swaps and using interest rate swap contracts. 66% of the interest costs and 75% of the interest income are protected through 31 December 2005. The Groups risk management policies are detailed in Operating and Financial Review, Liquidity and Prospects Exchange and Interest Rate Risk and Financial Instruments.
Short-term debtors and creditors are
Currency and Interest Rate Profile of Interest Bearing Liabilities:
Fixed rate liabilities
|
||||||||||||||
Gross
borrowings |
Currency
swaps |
Total
liabilities |
Floating
rate liabilities |
Fixed
rate liabilities |
Weighted
average interest rate |
Weighted
average time for which rate is fixed |
||||||||
(£ million) | (%) | (Years) | ||||||||||||
At 31 December 2004: |
||||||||||||||
US Dollar |
100.4 | 413.3 | 513.7 | 72.0 | 441.7 | 2.7 | 1 | |||||||
Euro |
6.4 | 146.0 | 152.4 | 74.6 | 77.8 | 2.5 | 1 | |||||||
Other |
69.4 | 54.8 | 124.2 | 124.2 | | | | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||||
Total interest bearing liabilities |
176.2 | 614.1 | 790.3 | 270.8 | 519.5 | |||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||||
At 31 December 2003: |
||||||||||||||
US Dollar |
152.9 | 373.6 | 526.5 | 50.0 | 476.5 | 2.3 | 1 | |||||||
Euro |
7.9 | 138.0 | 145.9 | 23.3 | 122.6 | 2.9 | 1 | |||||||
Other |
35.7 | 48.4 | 84.1 | 84.1 | | | | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||||
Total interest bearing liabilities |
196.5 | 560.0 | 756.5 | 157.4 | 599.1 | |||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
In addition to the
above, the Group has a liability due after one year for deferred acquisition consideration (denominated in Sterling, US Dollars and Euro) totalling £13.7m (2003 £4.0m) on which no interest is payable (see Note 21). There are no
Currency and Interest Rate Profile of Interest Bearing Assets:
Fixed rate assets
|
||||||||||||||
Cash
and bank |
Currency
swaps |
Total assets |
Floating rate assets |
Fixed
rate assets |
Weighted
average interest rate |
Weighted
average time for which rate is fixed |
||||||||
(£ million) | (%) | (Years) | ||||||||||||
At 31 December 2004: |
||||||||||||||
Sterling |
4.2 | 645.7 | 649.9 | 139.2 | 510.7 | 4.9 | 1 | |||||||
Other |
28.4 | | 28.4 | 28.4 | | | | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||||
Total interest bearing assets |
32.6 | 645.7 | 678.3 | 167.6 | 510.7 | |||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||||
At 31 December 2003: |
||||||||||||||
Sterling |
4.3 | 603.4 | 607.7 | 80.7 | 527.0 | 4.2 | 1 | |||||||
Other |
21.7 | | 21.7 | 21.7 | | | | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||||
Total interest bearing assets |
26.0 | 603.4 | 629.4 | 102.4 | 527.0 | |||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
The above interest rate analysis includes the effect of interest rate swaps.
Floating rates on both assets and liabilities are typically based on the three-month LIBOR interest rate relevant to the currency concerned.
92
20. | Financial Instruments (continued) |
At 31 December 2004, notional principal balances by currency and related interest rates under interest rate swap agreements and the fixed interest element of currency swaps were:
Expected to mature in 2005 |
Fair value
|
|||||
(Currency million,
except interest rates) |
(£ million) | |||||
At 31 December 2004: |
||||||
Principal (Sterling) |
£511 | 0.3 | ||||
Fixed rate receivable |
4.9 | % | ||||
Variable rate payable |
4.8 | % | ||||
Principal (US Dollar) |
US$848 | 1.5 | ||||
Fixed rate payable |
2.7 | % | ||||
Variable rate receivable |
3.1 | % | ||||
Principal (Euro) |
110 | (0.2 | ) | |||
Fixed rate payable |
2.5 | % | ||||
Variable rate receivable |
2.3 | % | ||||
|
|
|||||
1.6 | ||||||
|
|
|||||
Of which: |
||||||
Interest rate swaps |
0.3 | |||||
Fixed interest element of currency swaps |
1.3 | |||||
|
|
|||||
1.6 | ||||||
|
|
The fair values for interest rate swaps and the fixed interest element of currency swaps are calculated as the net present value of the future cash flows as at 31 December 2004, discounted at market rates of interest at that date.
At 31 December 2003, notional principal balances by currency and related interest rates under interest rate swap agreements were:
Expected to mature in years ending 31 December |
Fair value |
|||||||||
2004
|
2005
|
|||||||||
(Currency million,
except interest rates) |
(£ million) | |||||||||
At 31 December 2003: |
||||||||||
Principal (Sterling) |
£527 | £188 | (2.1 | ) | ||||||
Fixed rate receivable |
3.9 | % | 4.8 | % | ||||||
Variable rate payable |
4.4 | % | 4.8 | % | ||||||
Principal (US Dollar) |
US$853 | US | $300 | (3.3 | ) | |||||
Fixed rate payable |
2.0 | % | 3.1 | % | ||||||
Variable rate receivable |
1.4 | % | 2.8 | % | ||||||
Principal (Euro) |
174 | | (0.8 | ) | ||||||
Fixed rate payable |
2.9 | % | | |||||||
Variable rate receivable |
2.3 | % | | |||||||
|
|
|||||||||
(6.2 | ) | |||||||||
|
|
The fair values for interest rate swaps are calculated as the net present value of the future cash flows as at 31 December 2003, discounted at market rates of interest at that date.
93
20. | Financial Instruments (continued) |
Foreign Exchange and Interest Rate Exposures
The Group uses forward foreign exchange contracts to hedge trading creditors and an element of anticipated purchases over the following 12 months. The principal currencies hedged by forward foreign exchange contracts are Sterling and US Dollars. At 31 December 2004, the Group had contracted to exchange within one year the equivalent of £217m.
The Groups operating units hold no material unhedged monetary assets or liabilities other than in their functional operating currency. Therefore, there are no currency exposures on monetary assets and liabilities that could give rise to material gains or losses in the profit and loss account.
Fair Value of Financial Assets and Liabilities
Forward foreign exchange contracts, interest rate swap contracts and the fixed interest rate element of currency swaps taken out as hedges are not marked to market. Gains and losses thereon are recognised only when the exposure that is being hedged is itself recognised. The following table sets out the book and fair values of the Groups derivative financial instruments. Market rates have been used to determine the fair values of interest rate swaps, currency swaps and forward contracts.
Derivative financial instruments held to manage interest rate and currency risk:
31 December 2004
|
31 December 2003
|
|||||||||||||||
Book
value |
Fair
value |
Unrecognised
gain/(loss) |
Book
value |
Fair
value |
Unrecognised
gain/(loss) |
|||||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||||||
Interest rate swaps |
| 0.3 | 0.3 | | (6.2 | ) | (6.2 | ) | ||||||||
Forward foreign exchange contracts |
| (7.1 | ) | (7.1 | ) | | (5.7 | ) | (5.7 | ) | ||||||
Currency swaps |
31.6 | 32.9 | 1.3 | 43.4 | 43.4 | | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||||||
Total unrecognised losses on hedges |
(5.5 | ) | (11.9 | ) | ||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
The fair values of primary financial instruments comprising cash and borrowings which are set out in Note 19 are the same as book values.
The following table shows the amount of unrecognised gains and losses which have been included in the profit and loss account for the year and those gains and losses which are expected to be included in next years or later profit and loss accounts.
Unrecognised
gains |
Unrecognised
losses |
Total net
unrecognised gains/(losses) |
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Unrecognised gains and losses on hedges at 1 January 2003 |
8.6 | (23.2 | ) | (14.6 | ) | ||||
Less: gains and losses arising in previous years that were expected to have been recognised in 2003 |
(8.1 | ) | 22.1 | 14.0 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Gains and losses arising before 31 December 2002 that were not recognised in 2003 |
0.5 | (1.1 | ) | (0.6 | ) | ||||
Gains and losses arising in 2003 that were not recognised in 2003 |
3.0 | (14.3 | ) | (11.3 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Unrecognised gains and losses on hedges at 31 December 2003 |
3.5 | (15.4 | ) | (11.9 | ) | ||||
Less: gains and losses arising in previous years that were expected to have been recognised in 2004 |
(3.5 | ) | 15.0 | 11.5 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Gains and losses arising before 31 December 2003 that were not recognised in 2004 |
| (0.4 | ) | (0.4 | ) | ||||
Gains and losses arising in 2004 that were not recognised in 2004 |
4.2 | (9.3 | ) | (5.1 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Unrecognised gains and losses on hedges at 31 December 2004 that are expected to be recognised in 2005 |
4.2 | (9.7 | ) | (5.5 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
94
21. | Other Creditors |
2004
|
2003
|
|||
(£ million) | ||||
Amounts falling due within one year: |
||||
Trade creditors |
153.2 | 132.8 | ||
Amounts owed to joint venture |
2.9 | 3.4 | ||
Social security costs and other taxes |
13.2 | 13.6 | ||
Accruals and deferred income |
51.7 | 52.7 | ||
Acquisition consideration |
8.4 | 3.0 | ||
Current taxation |
105.8 | 69.4 | ||
Ordinary share dividends |
30.0 | 28.9 | ||
Credit balances on currency swaps |
12.7 | 4.6 | ||
|
|
|||
377.9 | 308.4 | |||
|
|
|||
Amounts falling due after one year: |
||||
Acquisition consideration |
13.7 | 4.0 | ||
Credit balances on currency swaps |
2.1 | 4.8 | ||
|
|
|||
15.8 | 8.8 | |||
|
|
Amounts falling due after more than one year are payable as follows: £15.8m in 2006 (2003 £5.6m in 2005, £3.2m in 2006).
22. | Provisions for Liabilities and Charges |
Deferred taxation |
Rationalisation
and
|
Retirement healthcare |
Liability
|
Total
|
|||||||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||||||||
At 1 January 2003 |
56.0 | 11.6 | 9.4 | 11.1 | 88.1 | ||||||||||
Exchange adjustments |
(2.7 | ) | (0.3 | ) | (0.4 | ) | (0.6 | ) | (4.0 | ) | |||||
Profit and loss account current year |
17.5 | 6.0 | 1.1 | 2.6 | 27.2 | ||||||||||
Profit and loss account prior years |
(7.2 | ) | | | | (7.2 | ) | ||||||||
Fair value adjustments |
(1.7 | ) | | | 2.8 | 1.1 | |||||||||
Utilisation |
| (10.3 | ) | (1.3 | ) | (3.4 | ) | (15.0 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
At 31 December 2003 |
61.9 | 7.0 | 8.8 | 12.5 | 90.2 | ||||||||||
Exchange adjustments |
(3.2 | ) | | (0.3 | ) | (0.2 | ) | (3.7 | ) | ||||||
Profit and loss account current year |
(21.8 | ) | (0.3 | ) | 1.2 | 67.8 | 46.9 | ||||||||
Profit and loss account prior years |
0.9 | | | | 0.9 | ||||||||||
Transfers from current tax |
(5.7 | ) | | | | (5.7 | ) | ||||||||
Utilisation |
| (2.2 | ) | (0.5 | ) | (2.9 | ) | (5.6 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
At 31 December 2004 |
32.1 | 4.5 | 9.2 | 77.2 | 123.0 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At 31 December 2004, rationalisation and integration provisions include acquisition integration of £1.7m (2003 £2.6m). The deferred taxation and retirement healthcare provisions are long-term in nature, as is the timing of their utilisation. Rationalisation and integration and liability provisions are expected to be substantially utilised within two years. There are no provisions for contractual amounts and hence none are treated as financial instruments
Included within the liability provision is £66.6m relating to the declination of insurance coverage for macrotextured knee revisions. In addition £13.4m has been provided against trade and other debtors relating to this issue.
95
22. | Provisions for Liabilities and Charges (continued) |
The provision for deferred taxation is made up as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Goodwill timing differences |
41.1 | 42.6 | ||||
Other fixed asset timing differences |
41.5 | 39.3 | ||||
Other timing differences |
(56.8 | ) | (24.4 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
25.8 | 57.5 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Net deferred taxation liability (above) |
32.1 | 61.9 | ||||
Net deferred taxation asset (Note 18) |
(6.3 | ) | (4.4 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
25.8 | 57.5 | |||||
|
|
|
|
See Note 9 for information on deferred tax assets and liabilities for which no provision has been made.
23. | Called Up Share Capital |
2004
Shares |
2004 |
2003
Shares |
2003
|
2002
Shares |
2002
|
|||||||||
(000) | (£ million) | (000) | (£ million) | (000) | (£ million) | |||||||||
Authorised |
||||||||||||||
Ordinary Shares 12 2 / 9 p |
1,223,591 | 149.5 | 1,223,591 | 149.5 | 1,223,591 | 149.5 | ||||||||
5½% cumulative preference shares £1 |
| | | | 450 | 0.5 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||||
149.5 | 149.5 | 150.0 | ||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||||
Allotted, issued and fully paid |
||||||||||||||
Equity Capital: Ordinary shares 12 2 / 9 p |
||||||||||||||
At 1 January |
933,526 | 114.1 | 928,760 | 113.5 | 924,812 | 113.1 | ||||||||
Share options |
3,610 | 0.4 | 4,766 | 0.6 | 3,948 | 0.4 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
At 31 December |
937,136 | 114.5 | 933,526 | 114.1 | 928,760 | 113.5 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Non-equity capital: 5 1 / 2 % cumulative preference shares £1.00: |
||||||||||||||
At 1 January |
| | 269 | 0.3 | 269 | 0.3 | ||||||||
Cancellation |
| | (269 | ) | (0.3 | ) | | | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
At 31 December |
| | | | 269 | 0.3 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Total called up share capital at 31 December 2004 |
114.5 | 114.1 | 113.8 | |||||||||||
|
|
|
|
On 23 June 2003 the 5 1 / 2 % £1.00 cumulative preference shares were cancelled and in consideration shareholders were paid £1.38 per share on 7 July 2003. The 5 1 / 2 % cumulative preference shares were denominated in Sterling, were non-voting and carried preferential rights to dividends and distribution on winding up.
96
24. | Share Option Plans |
The Smith & Nephew Sharesave Plan (2002) (adopted by shareholders on 3 April 2002) is available to all employees in the UK employed by participating Group companies, subject to three months service. The scheme provides for employees to save up to £250 per month and gives them an option to acquire shares based on the committed amount to be saved. The option price is not less than 80% of the average of middle market quotations of the Ordinary Shares on the three dealing days preceding the date of invitation. The Smith & Nephew International Sharesave Plan (2002) is offered to employees in Australia, Austria, Canada, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Hong Kong, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Puerto Rico, Singapore, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland and the United Arab Emirates. Employees in Belgium, Italy, the Netherlands and France are able to participate respectively in the Smith & Nephew Belgian Sharesave Plan (2002), the Smith & Nephew Italian Sharesave Plan (2002), the Smith & Nephew Dutch Sharesave Plan (2002) and the Smith & Nephew France Sharesave Plan (2002). Participants in Ireland are able to participate in the Smith & Nephew Irish Employee Share Option Scheme. These plans operate on a substantially similar basis to the Smith & Nephew Sharesave Plan (2002). Options are no longer issued under the Smith & Nephew Employee Share Option Scheme (adopted by shareholders on 14 May 1981) and the Smith & Nephew 1991 Overseas Employee Share Option Scheme (adopted by shareholders on 25 May 1990) but options remain to be exercised under these two schemes. Together all of the plans referred to above are termed the Employee Schemes.
Employees in the United States are able to participate in the Employee Stock Purchase Plan, which gives them the opportunity to acquire shares, in the form of ADSs, at a discount of 15% (or more if the shares appreciate in value during the plans quarterly purchase period) to the market price, through a regular savings plan.
The Smith & Nephew 1985 Share Option Scheme (adopted by shareholders on 9 May 1985), the Smith & Nephew 1990 International Executive Share Option Scheme (adopted by shareholders on 15 May 1990), the Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Approved Share Option Plan, the Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan, the Smith & Nephew 2001 US Share Plan (adopted by shareholders on 4 April 2001) and the Smith & Nephew 2004 Executive Share Option Plan (adopted by shareholders on 6 May 2004), together termed the Executive Schemes, are operated at the discretion of the Board of Directors.
Under the terms of the Executive Schemes, the Remuneration Committee, consisting of Non-Executive Directors, may select full-time employees of the Group for the grant of options to acquire Ordinary Shares in the Company. Options granted under the Smith & Nephew 2001 US Share Plan (the US Plan) are to acquire ADSs. For options granted prior to 2001, the option price was not less than the market value of an Ordinary Share, or the nominal value if higher. The market value being the quoted price on the business day preceding the date of grant or the quoted price on the date of grant. For Executive Schemes adopted in 2001 and 2004, the market value is the average quoted price of an Ordinary Share for the three business days preceding the date of grant or, for the US Plan, the average quoted price of an ADS for the three business days preceding the date of grant or the quoted price on the date of grant if higher. With the exception of options granted under the 2001 US Plan, the exercise of options granted from 1997 are subject to achievement of a performance condition. Options granted under the 2001 US Plan are not subject to performance conditions but become exercisable as to 10% after one year, 30% after two years, 60% after three years and the remaining balance after four years. The 1990 International Executive Share Option Scheme and the 2004 Plan are open to senior managers worldwide. The 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan is open to senior managers outside the US and the US Plan is open to senior managers in the US, Canada, Mexico and Puerto Rico.
Under the Executive Schemes, the number of Ordinary Shares over which options may be granted is limited so that the number of shares issued or that may be issued under the Executive Schemes during the ten years preceding the date of grant shall not exceed 5% of the Ordinary Share capital at the date of grant. The total number of Ordinary Shares which may be issuable in any ten-year period under all employee share schemes operated by the Company may not exceed 10% of the Ordinary Share capital at the date of grant.
97
24. | Share Option Plans (continued) |
At 31 December 2004 18,450,000 (2003 17,455,000) options outstanding under share option schemes were as follows:
Employee Schemes |
Number of shares |
Range of option prices |
Weighted
option price |
||||
(Thousand) | (Pence) | (Pence) | |||||
Outstanding at 1 January 2002 |
3,770 | 124.0 289.2 | 184.7 | ||||
Granted |
1,760 | 296.0 372.7 | 300.0 | ||||
Exercised |
(1,017 | ) | 124.0 304.0 | 144.2 | |||
Lapsed or cancelled |
(267 | ) | 124.0 304.0 | 208.1 | |||
|
|
||||||
Outstanding at 31 December 2002 |
4,246 | 124.0 372.7 | 240.7 | ||||
Granted |
1,026 | 321.0 403.0 | 324.1 | ||||
Exercised |
(998 | ) | 124.0 304.0 | 154.7 | |||
Lapsed or cancelled |
(212 | ) | 124.0 389.0 | 278.8 | |||
|
|
||||||
Outstanding at 31 December 2003 |
4,062 | 124.0 403.0 | 280.9 | ||||
Granted |
1,218 | 391.0 498.0 | 395.3 | ||||
Exercised |
(779 | ) | 124.0 321.0 | 213.0 | |||
Lapsed or cancelled |
(248 | ) | 124.0 403.0 | 247.5 | |||
|
|
||||||
Outstanding at 31 December 2004 |
4,253 | 146.8 498.0 | 326.1 | ||||
|
|
||||||
Of which options exercisable at 31 December 2004 |
60 | 146.8 289.2 | 231.8 | ||||
|
|
Weighted average fair value of options granted:
During 2002 |
109.1 | |
During 2003 |
127.6 | |
During 2004 |
165.1 |
Executive Schemes |
Number of shares |
Range of option prices |
Weighted
option price |
||||
(Thousand) | (Pence) | (Pence) | |||||
Outstanding at 1 January 2002 |
15,465 | 133.0 375.0 | 214.9 | ||||
Granted |
3,266 | 359.0 409.5 | 380.4 | ||||
Exercised |
(2,841 | ) | 143.0 327.7 | 161.6 | |||
Lapsed or cancelled |
(317 | ) | 133.0 409.5 | 197.1 | |||
|
|
||||||
Outstanding at 31 December 2002 |
15,573 | 143.0 409.5 | 255.9 | ||||
Granted |
3,459 | 347.2 418.0 | 391.7 | ||||
Exercised |
(3,775 | ) | 143.0 382.3 | 191.3 | |||
Lapsed or cancelled |
(1,864 | ) | 143.0 418.0 | 219.1 | |||
|
|
||||||
Outstanding at 31 December 2003 |
13,393 | 145.0 418.0 | 304.0 | ||||
Granted |
4,059 | 475.0 581.5 | 525.8 | ||||
Exercised |
(2,826 | ) | 145.0 360.0 | 236.4 | |||
Lapsed or cancelled |
(429 | ) | 145.0 521.0 | 270.5 | |||
|
|
||||||
Outstanding at 31 December 2004 |
14,197 | 145.0 581.5 | 377.3 | ||||
|
|
||||||
Of which options exercisable at 31 December 2004 |
4,639 | 145.0 375.0 | 261.1 | ||||
|
|
Weighted average fair value of options granted:
During 2002 |
106.2 | |
During 2003 |
114.2 | |
During 2004 |
154.5 |
98
24. | Share Option Plans (continued) |
Options granted in 2004 under executive schemes were valued using a binomial model provided by an independent actuary. Options granted under employee schemes were valued using the Black-Scholes Option pricing model. This had previously been used for all options granted in 2003 and 2002. The binomial model was used for executive schemes so that proper allowance is made for the presence of performance conditions and the possibility of early exercise. Options granted under each scheme are valued separately and a weighted average fair value calculated.
The following assumptions were used in calculating the fair value of options granted:
Employee schemes
|
Executive schemes |
||||||||||||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
2004 |
2003
|
2002
|
||||||||||||
Dividend yield |
1.1 | % | 1.1 | % | 1.3 | % | 1.1% | 1.1 | % | 1.3 | % | ||||||
Expected volatility |
23.7 | % | 23.3 | % | 19.6 | % | 22.0% | 22.0 | % | 19.6 | % | ||||||
Risk free rate |
4.8 | % | 4.6 | % | 4.5 | % | 3.3%5.1% | 4.6 | % | 5.2 | % | ||||||
Expected life in years |
3.5 | 3.6 | 3.6 | 7.0 | 5.6 | 5.6 |
Because options vest over several years and there are restrictions as to exercise and additional options grants are expected, the effects of these hypothetical calculations are not likely to be representative of similar future calculations.
Summarised information about options outstanding under the share option schemes at 31 December 2004 is as follows:
Options outstanding
|
Options exercisable
|
|||||||||||
Number outstanding |
Weighted average remaining contract life |
Weighted average option price |
Number exercisable |
Weighted
average
price |
Exercisable
in stages up to |
|||||||
(Thousand) | (Years) | (Pence) | (Thousand) | (Pence) | ||||||||
Employee Schemes: |
||||||||||||
146.8p to 321.0p |
2,913 | 2.2 | 295.6 | 60 | 231.8 | 2005 | ||||||
354.1p to 498.0p |
1,340 | 2.2 | 392.5 | | | | ||||||
|
|
|||||||||||
4,253 | 60 | |||||||||||
|
|
|||||||||||
Executive Schemes: |
||||||||||||
145.0p to 326.0p |
5,342 | 4.4 | 254.3 | 3,586 | 232.3 | 2005 to 2010 | ||||||
346.5p to 581.5p |
8,855 | 6.5 | 451.5 | 1,053 | 359.3 | 2005 to 2010 | ||||||
|
|
|||||||||||
14,197 | 4,639 | |||||||||||
|
|
As the employee schemes are UK Inland Revenue approved Save As You Earn schemes or similar schemes, the Company is exempt from accounting for the difference between the share option price and the market value at the grant date.
QUEST
Until 31 December 2002 the Company used a qualifying employee share ownership trust (QUEST) to acquire Smith & Nephew plc Ordinary Shares for transfer to employees exercising options under the Smith & Nephew Employee Share Option Scheme. The QUEST was not used in 2003 and 2004 and the Company does not intend to use it in the future. The trustee of the QUEST was Smith & Nephew Employees Trustees Limited, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company. During 2002, the QUEST subscribed for 950,317 shares at a cost of £2.3m and transferred a total of 950,317 shares to employees on the exercise of options for consideration of £1.4m. All employees of UK Group subsidiary companies, including Executive directors of the Company, were potential beneficiaries under the QUEST.
99
25. | Long-Term Incentive Plans |
The Group has operated a long-term incentive plan (LTIP) for Executive directors and GEC members since 1997. Vesting of LTIP awards is dependent on the Groups relative performance in a group of 43 UK listed manufacturing companies with substantial international activities, using total shareholder return (TSR) over a three year period as the prime measure.
In 2004, a new share based incentive plan was introduced for executive directors, members of the GEC and the next level of senior executives, which replaced the LTIP. The plan includes a Performance Share Plan (PSP) and a Co-Investment Plan (CIP).
Vesting of the PSP award shares is dependent upon performance relative to the FTSE-100 and an index based on major companies in the medical devices industry.
Under the CIP, participants can elect to use up to a maximum of one-half of their annual bonus to purchase shares. If the shares are held for 3 years and the Groups EPSA growth targets are achieved participants receive an award of matching shares for each share purchased.
Further details of these plans are available in the Remuneration Report.
At 31 December 2004 the maximum number of shares that could be awarded under the Groups long-term incentive plans were:
LTIP
|
PSP
|
CIP
|
Total
|
||||||||
(Number of Shares in
thousands) |
|||||||||||
Outstanding at 1 January 2002 |
1,638 | | | 1,638 | |||||||
Awarded |
453 | | | 453 | |||||||
Vested |
(549 | ) | | | (549 | ) | |||||
Lapsed or cancelled |
(132 | ) | | | (132 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Outstanding at 31 December 2002 |
1,410 | | | 1,410 | |||||||
Awarded |
445 | | | 445 | |||||||
Vested |
(660 | ) | | | (660 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Outstanding at 31 December 2003 |
1,195 | | | 1,195 | |||||||
Awarded |
| 924 | 291 | 1,215 | |||||||
Vested |
(362 | ) | | | (362 | ) | |||||
Lapsed or cancelled |
| (11 | ) | | (11 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Outstanding at 31 December 2004 |
833 | 913 | 291 | 2,037 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Costs, based on intrinsic value, are accrued over the vesting periods based on the probability of vesting. The amount charged to profit in 2004 was £1.7m (2003 £2.7m, 2002 £1.6m).
100
26. | Reserves |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||||||||
Share
premium |
Profit
and loss account |
Share
premium |
Profit
and loss account |
Share
premium |
Profit
and loss account |
||||||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||||||||
At 1 January |
152.0 | 376.8 | 143.8 | 262.5 | 135.8 | 158.3 | |||||||||
Translation differences on foreign currency net investments |
| 3.2 | | 3.8 | | 9.1 | |||||||||
Retained profit for the year |
| 77.4 | | 102.0 | | 67.5 | |||||||||
Goodwill on disposals |
| | | 8.2 | | 30.0 | |||||||||
Share based expense recognised in the profit and loss |
| 1.7 | | 2.7 | | 1.6 | |||||||||
Cost of shares transferred to beneficiaries |
| (2.0 | ) | | (2.4 | ) | | (1.7 | ) | ||||||
Share options |
7.6 | | 8.2 | | 8.0 | | |||||||||
Movements relating to the QUEST (Note 24) |
| | | | | (2.3 | ) | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
At 31 December |
159.6 | 457.1 | 152.0 | 376.8 | 143.8 | 262.5 | |||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net exchange gains of £36.9m (2003 gains of £45.7m) arising on foreign currency net borrowings are included within the £3.2m (2003 £3.8m) translational differences on foreign currency net investments. The cumulative amount of goodwill charged to reserves is £271.6m (2003 £275.8m) against which £116.0m of merger relief has been offset. The decrease is due to exchange movements of £4.2m.
On 23 June 2003, following the cancellation of the 5 1 / 2 % £1.00 cumulative preference shares (Note 23), a capital redemption reserve of £0.3m was established in the Parent Company. This reserve was extinguished during 2003.
27. | Own Shares |
Own shares represent the holding of the Parent Companys own shares in respect of the Smith & Nephew Employees Share Trust (Note 35).
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
At 1 January |
2.1 | 3.2 | 2.5 | ||||||
Shares purchased |
4.1 | 1.3 | 2.4 | ||||||
Shares transferred to Group beneficiaries |
(2.0 | ) | (2.4 | ) | (1.7 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
At 31 December |
4.2 | 2.1 | 3.2 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
101
28. | Cash Flow Statement |
Reconciliation of operating profit to net cash flow from operating activities
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Group operating profit |
151.0 | 179.8 | 150.7 | ||||||
Depreciation and amortisation |
84.6 | 78.3 | 74.2 | ||||||
Loss on sale of tangible fixed assets |
2.6 | 1.9 | 2.7 | ||||||
Write-off of investment in Advanced Tissue Sciences, Inc. |
| | 17.5 | ||||||
Increase in stocks |
(59.5 | ) | (9.8 | ) | (11.5 | ) | |||
Increase in debtors |
(43.7 | ) | (24.5 | ) | (21.1 | ) | |||
Increase/(Decrease) in creditors and provisions (i) (ii) |
91.6 | (11.2 | ) | (1.5 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net cash inflow from operating activities (iii) |
226.6 | 214.5 | 211.0 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | Includes £2.2m (2003 £9.6m, 2002 £19.3m) of outgoings on rationalisation, acquisition integration and divestment costs. |
(ii) | 2004 includes a £66.6m exceptional provision relating to macrotextured knee revisions (see Note 4). |
(iii) | After £17.2m unreimbursed by insurers relating to macrotextured knee revisions in 2004 and £17.0m of Centerpulse costs in 2003. |
Analysis | of Net Debt |
Cash
|
Overdrafts
|
Borrowings
due within one year |
Borrowings
one year |
Loan
Notes |
Net
currency swaps |
Total
|
|||||||||||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||||||||||||||
At 1 January 2002 |
26.4 | (3.7 | ) | (90.3 | ) | (161.2 | ) | | (14.7 | ) | (243.5 | ) | |||||||||
Net cash flow |
(4.0 | ) | (8.9 | ) | (70.6 | ) | (18.1 | ) | | | (101.6 | ) | |||||||||
Exchange adjustments |
0.1 | 0.3 | 21.3 | 15.1 | | 31.4 | 68.2 | ||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||
At 31 December 2002 |
22.5 | (12.3 | ) | (139.6 | ) | (164.2 | ) | | 16.7 | (276.9 | ) | ||||||||||
Net cash flow |
3.0 | 0.8 | 47.4 | 52.9 | | | 104.1 | ||||||||||||||
Exchange adjustments |
0.5 | (0.1 | ) | 6.9 | 11.7 | | 26.7 | 45.7 | |||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||
At 31 December 2003 |
26.0 | (11.6 | ) | (85.3 | ) | (99.6 | ) | | 43.4 | (127.1 | ) | ||||||||||
Net cash flow |
6.9 | 0.8 | 61.9 | (1.3 | ) | | (39.8 | ) | 28.5 | ||||||||||||
Loan Notes issued on acquisition |
| | | | (50.3 | ) | | (50.3 | ) | ||||||||||||
Exchange adjustment |
(0.3 | ) | 0.5 | 1.8 | 6.9 | | 28.0 | 36.9 | |||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||||
At 31 December 2004 |
32.6 | (10.3 | ) | (21.6 | ) | (94.0 | ) | (50.3 | ) | 31.6 | (112.0 | ) | |||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reconciliation | of Net Cash Flow to Movement in Net Debt |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Change in cash net of overdrafts in the year |
7.7 | 3.8 | (12.9 | ) | |||||
Settlement of net currency swaps |
(39.8 | ) | | | |||||
Change in borrowings |
60.6 | 100.3 | (88.7 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Change in net debt from net cash flow |
28.5 | 104.1 | (101.6 | ) | |||||
Loan Notes issued on acquisition |
(50.3 | ) | | | |||||
Exchange adjustments |
36.9 | 45.7 | 68.2 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Change in net debt in the year |
15.1 | 149.8 | (33.4 | ) | |||||
Opening net debt |
(127.1 | ) | (276.9 | ) | (243.5 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Closing net debt |
(112.0 | ) | (127.1 | ) | (276.9 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
102
29. | Currency Translation |
The exchange rates used for the translation of currencies into Sterling that have the most significant impact on the Group results were:
Average rates
|
||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
US Dollar |
1.84 | 1.65 | 1.51 | |||
Euro |
1.47 | 1.45 | 1.59 | |||
Year-end rates
|
||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
US Dollar |
1.92 | 1.79 | 1.61 | |||
Euro |
1.41 | 1.42 | 1.53 |
30. | Acquisitions |
Acquisitions in 2004
On 16 March 2004, the Group acquired Midland Medical Technologies (MMT), at a net cost of £78.7m in cash and loan notes. The assets and liabilities acquired are set out below. There was no material difference between the fair value and book value of net assets acquired.
For the year 1 May 2002 to 30 April 2003, MMT earned a profit after tax of £1.9m. For the period 1 May 2003 to 16 March 2004, which was the effective date of acquisition, turnover was £18.6m and the profit after tax of £2.0m comprised £2.9m of operating profit less £0.9m of tax. There were no other recognised gains and losses in the period ended 16 March 2004.
In the period since acquisition MMT contributed £16.2m to turnover and £4.1m to profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items and generated a net operating cash inflow of £0.2m after capital expenditure of £0.5m. Including acquired distributors MMT contributed £20.0m to Group turnover.
103
30. | Acquisitions (continued) |
The impact of other acquisitions, including the MMT distribution business in Australia, is set out below. There was no material difference between the fair value and book value of net assets acquired.
(£ million) | ||
Tangible fixed assets |
0.3 | |
Intangible assets |
2.7 | |
Stock |
1.2 | |
|
||
Net assets |
4.2 | |
Goodwill |
17.3 | |
|
||
Cost of acquisition |
21.5 | |
|
||
Discharged by: |
||
Cash |
13.9 | |
Deferred consideration |
7.6 | |
|
||
21.5 | ||
|
In addition to the cash of £13.9m, deferred consideration of £1.7m in respect of previous years acquisitions was paid in the year.
Acquisitions in 2003
There were no acquisitions in 2003. The impact of additional and deferred consideration in respect of previous years acquisitions was:
(£ million) | ||
Tangible fixed assets |
0.3 | |
Intangible assets |
0.3 | |
|
||
0.6 | ||
Goodwill |
0.1 | |
|
||
Additional consideration in respect of previous years acquisitions |
0.7 | |
Deferred consideration in respect of previous acquisitions |
3.6 | |
|
||
Total cost of acquisitions |
4.3 | |
|
There was no material difference between the fair value and book value of net assets acquired.
£7.2m of deferred consideration, net of amortisation, relating to the Collagenase acquisition in 2000 was written back to goodwill as it was no longer payable (Note 12).
104
30. | Acquisitions (continued) |
Acquisitions in 2002
On 28 March 2002, the Group acquired ORATEC Interventions, Inc., (ORATEC), at a net cost of £191.2m in cash. Further fair value adjustments were made in the first full financial period after acquisition.
Fair values of net assets acquired as reported in 2002 and as adjusted in 2003 including explanations for these changes are set out below:
Net book
value on acquisition |
Fair value
2002 |
Provisional
fair values 2002 |
Adjustment
Revaluation |
Adjustment
Other |
Final
2003 |
|||||||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||||||||
Net assets at date of acquisition: |
||||||||||||||||||
Fixed assets |
6.5 | (1.8 | ) | 4.7 | | | 4.7 | |||||||||||
Intangibles |
2.4 | | 2.4 | (1.7 | ) (i) | | 0.7 | |||||||||||
Stock |
4.5 | 0.3 | 4.8 | | | 4.8 | ||||||||||||
Debtors |
6.1 | (0.2 | ) | 5.9 | 0.4 | (ii) | | 6.3 | ||||||||||
Creditors due within one year |
(4.2 | ) | 0.6 | (3.6 | ) | | | (3.6 | ) | |||||||||
Provisions |
(3.9 | ) | | (3.9 | ) | | (2.8 | ) (iii) | (6.7 | ) | ||||||||
Deferred taxation |
| 15.2 | 15.2 | | 1.7 | (iv) | 16.9 | |||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Net assets |
11.4 | 14.1 | 25.5 | (1.3 | ) | (1.1 | ) | 23.1 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||||||
Goodwill arising on acquisition |
|
165.7 | 168.1 | |||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||||||||
191.2 | 191.2 | |||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||||||||||
Discharged by: |
||||||||||||||||||
Cash consideration |
|
222.5 | ||||||||||||||||
Cash acquired in ORATEC |
|
(39.1 | ) | |||||||||||||||
Costs associated with acquisition |
|
7.8 | ||||||||||||||||
|
|
|||||||||||||||||
191.2 | ||||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
(i) | Book value was used for the provisional fair value of certain intellectual property rights. On final evaluation it was considered that fair value was lower than book value at acquisition. |
(ii) | Adjustment to bad debt provision on final evaluation of debtors. |
(iii) | Change in estimate relating to the expected outcome of legal disputes. |
(iv) | Finalisation of tax losses brought forward and deferred tax on additional fair value adjustments. |
The fair value adjustments in 2002 reflect the adoption of Group accounting policies and deferred taxation arising from available trading losses in the acquired entity.
The impact of other acquisitions, including deferred consideration in respect of previous years acquisitions in the year was:
(£ million) | |||
Tangible fixed assets |
0.6 | ||
Intangible assets |
7.3 | ||
Current assets |
3.7 | ||
Current liabilities |
(3.8 | ) | |
|
|
||
7.8 | |||
Goodwill |
2.0 | ||
|
|
||
Consideration |
9.8 | ||
Associated undertaking formation costs |
1.8 | ||
Deferred consideration in respect of previous years acquisitions |
5.5 | ||
|
|
||
Total cost of acquisition |
17.1 | ||
|
|
£2.0m consideration was accrued in 2002 and paid in cash in 2003. There was no material difference between the fair value and book value of net assets acquired.
105
31. | Financial Commitments |
Group capital expenditure contracted but not provided for amounted to £4.4m (2003 £2.6m).
Under the Groups acquisition and joint development agreements with NUCRYST Pharmaceuticals Corp., amounts of up to £3.9m (2003 £4.2m) could become payable on achievement of certain milestones related to regulatory and reimbursement approvals with a further £18.2m (2003 £25.1m) contingent on achievement of sales milestones.
Under the Groups acquisition agreement with MMT amounts up to a further £20.0m could become payable contingent on the timing of receiving a regulatory product approval.
At 31 December 2004, the Group was committed to making the following payments in respect of operating leases during 2005:
Land and
buildings |
Other assets
|
|||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||||
Operating leases which expire: |
||||||||
Within one year |
2.0 | 2.0 | 2.5 | 2.6 | ||||
After one and within five years |
3.1 | 3.4 | 7.2 | 7.0 | ||||
After five years |
5.9 | 4.9 | | | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||||
11.0 | 10.3 | 9.7 | 9.6 | |||||
|
|
|
|
32. | Contingent Liabilities |
The Group is party to legal proceedings in the normal course of business. Other than as set out below the Group considers that these will not result in any material adverse effect on the Groups results of operations or financial position.
In August 2003 the Group withdrew voluntarily from all markets the macrotextured versions of its OXINIUM femoral knee components. As at that date 2,971 components had been implanted of which approximately 2,471 were in the USA, 450 in Australia and 50 in Europe, the first component having been implanted in December 2001.
The product was withdrawn when management became aware of a higher than usual percentage of reports of early revisions (revisions are implants which need to be replaced). Whilst the cause of the revisions remains uncertain it is apparent that some patients do not achieve adequate initial fixation and that in other patients, while there appears to be good initial fixation, this does not persevere. Extensive testing and modelling has so far failed to identify the precise cause of the failure and, due to the large number of variables involved, it is probable that the precise cause may never be understood fully.
As at 31 December 2004 741 implants had been revised and settlements agreed with patients in respect of 491 of these revisions. The total amount paid out in settlements, legal costs and associated expenses was £45m of which £32m had been or will be recovered from the insurer who provides the primary layer and 65% of the first excess layer in the Groups global product liability programme. The balance of £13m is due from insurers in respect of the balance of the first excess layer and the second excess layer.
On 17 December 2004 the Group was notified that two insurance carriers who comprise 35% of the first and 80% of the second excess layers of the Groups global product liability programme had declined coverage for macrotextured claims. Management intends to take all steps available to it in order to enforce this coverage. Nevertheless, in view of the uncertainty, management cannot assert that it is probable that coverage will be restored and consequently has recorded an exceptional charge of £80.0m representing the amount currently outstanding from these insurers and an estimate of the cost associated with claims likely to arise in the future assuming that insurance cover is unavailable from these and subsequent excess layer insurers.
106
32. | Contingent Liabilities (continued) |
The charge has been calculated based on: (1) the amount outstanding at 31 December 2004 from the insurers who have denied coverage; (2) an estimate of the average cost in respect of revisions where settlements were unresolved at that date; and (3) an estimate of the number of settlements of future revisions based on the current trend and decaying to zero after five years and an estimation of the average future cost per settlement. In the hypothetical scenario that all implants eventually need to be revised prematurely and that insurance cover continues to be unavailable, the cost to the Group of the declined insurance cover is estimated to be £190.0m (an additional £110.0m over the amount provided), assuming the average cost per settlement remains approximately the same and there is a standard rate of mortality.
The Groups assessment of the impact of these revisions and related matters constitute forward-looking statements that are subject to uncertainties, including uncertainties relating to the outcome of settlements as compared to the assumptions made in estimating claim amounts. Smith & Nephew cannot provide assurance that these estimates will prove correct. Depending on the number and average cost of future settlements, costs may be greater or less than the amount provided.
33. | Post-Retirement Benefits |
The Group sponsors pension plans for its employees in most of the countries in which it has major operating companies. Pension plans are established under the laws of the relevant country, funded by the payment of contributions to, and the assets held by, separate trust funds or insurance companies. In those countries where there is no company-sponsored pension plan, state benefits are considered adequate. Employees retirement benefits are the subject of regular management review.
For many years, the Groups major pension plans in the United Kingdom (UK Plan) and the United States (US Plan) were of the defined benefit type. From 2003 all new employees were provided with a defined contribution pension plan.
The pension costs for the UK Plan and the US Plan have been determined by independent qualified actuaries, using the projected unit method. Under the projected unit method, the current service cost will increase as the members of the defined benefit plans approach retirement. The market related actuarial assumptions at the SSAP 24 valuation dates and a breakdown of the pension costs are as follows:
Actuarial assumptions:
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
||||||
(% per annum,
except service lives) |
|||||||
Increase in pensionable earnings |
4.3 | 5.0 | |||||
Increase in pensions |
2.3 | Nil | |||||
Inflation |
2.3 | 3.0 | |||||
Return on investments |
6.8 | 8.0 | |||||
Average remaining service lives |
10 years | 13 years | |||||
Pension costs: | |||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||
(£ million) | |||||||
Principal defined benefit plans in the UK and the US: |
|||||||
Regular cost |
8.1 | 8.3 | 9.8 | ||||
Variations from regular cost (i) |
5.9 | 5.1 | (1.9 | ) | |||
Notional net interest on deficit |
1.3 | 0.8 | (0.1 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
||||
15.3 | 14.2 | 7.8 | |||||
Other plans |
10.1 | 7.4 | 6.5 | ||||
|
|
|
|
||||
25.4 | 21.6 | 14.3 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | Variations from regular costs arise from the surplus/deficit in the two principal plans and are amortised using the percentage of payroll method over the weighted average of expected pensionable payroll and remaining service lives of current employees in the plans. |
107
33. | Post-Retirement Benefits (continued) |
At the dates of the most recent actuarial valuations for the purposes of SSAP 24 in September 2002 and December 2003, the aggregate market value of the assets of the UK Plan and the US Plan was £238m (2003 £230m: valuations in September and December 2002) representing 81% of plan liabilities for accrued benefits, including allowance for projected future increases in salaries, resulting in a net deficit of £57.2m (2003 78% and a net deficit of £64.5m). The estimated deficit of these plans at 31 December 2004 was £49m (2003 £55m).
The unamortised balance of the UK Plan and US Plan deficits was £65.2m (2003 £70.1m).
The contributions made to the UK Plan and the US Plan in the accounting period were £8.6m (2003 £8.5m, 2002 £2.6m) and £9.2m (2003 £10.4m, 2002 £5.2m), respectively. The agreed contribution rates for 2005 are 11% of pensionable earnings plus a supplementary payment of £4.3m to the UK Plan and 9% of pensionable earnings plus a supplementary payment of £2.7m to the US Plan.
Included in debtors due after more than one year are prepayments of £9.7m (2003 £7.1m) and included in creditors are accruals due within one year of £4.7m (2003 £4.0m) relating to the funding of certain Group pension plans.
The Group recharges the UK pension plan with the costs of administration and independent advisers. The amount recharged in the year was £0.6m (2003 £0.6m, 2002 £0.4m). The amount receivable at 31 December 2004 was £0.1m (2003 £0.1m).
The costs of providing healthcare benefits after retirement of £1.2m (2003 £1.1m, 2002 £0.8m) are determined by independent qualified actuaries. The unfunded liability of £9.2m (2003 £8.8m) in respect of the accrued healthcare benefits is included in provisions. The principal actuarial assumptions in determining the cost of providing healthcare benefits are those in the UK and the US:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||||
UK
|
US
|
UK
|
US
|
|||||
(% per annum) | ||||||||
Interest rate |
5.3 | 5.8 | 5.4 | 6.0 | ||||
Medical cost inflation |
6.3 | 7.0 | 6.4 | 7.5 |
34. | Post-Retirement Benefits (FRS 17) |
The disclosures below show the effect on the Groups financial statements had FRS 17 been adopted and relate to the major defined benefit retirement plans in the UK and the US since other plans are not material.
The principal assumptions used by the independent qualified actuaries in valuing the UK and US plans at 31 December for FRS 17 purposes were:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||||||||
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
|||||||
(% per annum) | ||||||||||||
Increase in pensionable earnings |
4.9 | 5.0 | 4.8 | 5.0 | 4.3 | 5.0 | ||||||
Increase in pensions |
2.7 | Nil | 2.6 | Nil | 2.3 | Nil | ||||||
Inflation |
2.9 | 3.0 | 2.8 | 3.0 | 2.3 | 3.0 | ||||||
Discount rate |
5.3 | 5.8 | 5.4 | 6.0 | 5.6 | 7.0 |
108
34. | Post-Retirement Benefits (FRS 17) (continued) |
The assets and liabilities in the plans and the expected rates of return on investments were:
31 December 2004
|
||||||||||
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
|||||||||
Rate of Return |
Value
|
Rate of Return |
Value
|
|||||||
(%) | (£ million) | (%) | (£ million) | |||||||
Equities |
7.5 | 157.7 | 9.0 | 56.1 | ||||||
Government bonds |
4.5 | 35.9 | 6.1 | 5.8 | ||||||
Corporate bonds |
5.3 | | 6.5 | 9.6 | ||||||
Property |
6.0 | 11.5 | | | ||||||
Other |
4.9 | 8.3 | 3.8 | 0.3 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Market value of assets |
213.4 | 71.8 | ||||||||
Present value of liabilities |
(277.2 | ) | (131.7 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Deficit |
(63.8 | ) | (59.9 | ) | ||||||
Post-retirement healthcare |
(3.9 | ) | (7.4 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
(67.7 | ) | (67.3 | ) | |||||||
Related deferred tax asset |
20.3 | 25.6 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Net retirement benefit liability |
(47.4 | ) | (41.7 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
31 December 2003
|
||||||||||
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
|||||||||
Rate of Return |
Value
|
Rate of Return |
Value
|
|||||||
(%) | (£ million) | (%) | (£ million) | |||||||
Equities |
7.8 | 143.7 | 9.0 | 48.2 | ||||||
Government bonds |
4.8 | 32.4 | 5.7 | 6.9 | ||||||
Corporate bonds |
5.4 | | 6.6 | 6.1 | ||||||
Property |
6.6 | 10.1 | | | ||||||
Other |
5.1 | 6.9 | 3.7 | 1.8 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Market value of assets |
193.1 | 63.0 | ||||||||
Present value of liabilities |
(253.0 | ) | (124.3 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Deficit |
(59.9 | ) | (61.3 | ) | ||||||
Post-retirement healthcare |
(3.6 | ) | (6.4 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
(63.5 | ) | (67.7 | ) | |||||||
Related deferred tax asset |
19.0 | 25.7 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Net retirement benefit liability |
(44.5 | ) | (42.0 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
109
34. | Post-Retirement Benefits (FRS 17) (continued) |
31 December 2002
|
||||||||||
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
|||||||||
Rate of Return |
Value
|
Rate of Return |
Value
|
|||||||
(%) | (£ million) | (%) | (£ million) | |||||||
Equities |
7.8 | 114.3 | 8.7 | 34.4 | ||||||
Government bonds |
4.5 | 34.0 | 5.8 | 8.0 | ||||||
Corporate bonds |
5.6 | | 7.0 | 7.0 | ||||||
Property |
6.2 | 9.6 | | | ||||||
Other |
5.0 | 7.0 | 4.2 | 1.1 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Market value of assets |
164.9 | 50.5 | ||||||||
Present value of liabilities |
(221.4 | ) | (105.2 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Deficit |
(56.5 | ) | (54.7 | ) | ||||||
Post-retirement healthcare |
(3.3 | ) | (7.0 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
(59.8 | ) | (61.7 | ) | |||||||
Related deferred tax asset |
17.9 | 23.4 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Net retirement benefit liability |
(41.9 | ) | (38.3 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
The Groups shareholders funds and profit and loss account at 31 December would have been as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||||||||||||||
Shareholders funds |
Profit
account |
Shareholders funds |
Profit
account |
Shareholders
funds |
Profit
and loss account |
|||||||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||||||||
As reported |
727.0 | 457.1 | 640.8 | 376.8 | 516.9 | 262.5 | ||||||||||||
Provided under SSAP 24 |
0.8 | 0.8 | 2.8 | 2.8 | 7.8 | 7.8 | ||||||||||||
Less: related deferred tax |
(0.3 | ) | (0.3 | ) | (1.1 | ) | (1.1 | ) | (3.0 | ) | (3.0 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
727.5 | 457.6 | 642.5 | 378.5 | 521.7 | 267.3 | |||||||||||||
FRS 17 net retirement liability above |
(89.1 | ) | (89.1 | ) | (86.5 | ) | (86.5 | ) | (80.2 | ) | (80.2 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
As adjusted for FRS 17 |
638.4 | 368.5 | 556.0 | 292.0 | 441.5 | 187.1 | ||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following amounts would have been charged to operating profit:
Current service
cost employers position |
Past service
cost |
Total operating
charge |
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
2004: |
||||||
UK Plan |
6.1 | | 6.1 | |||
US Plan |
5.9 | | 5.9 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total |
12.0 | | 12.0 | |||
|
|
|
||||
2003: |
||||||
UK Plan |
6.5 | | 6.5 | |||
US Plan |
4.6 | | 4.6 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total |
11.1 | | 11.1 | |||
|
|
|
||||
2002: |
||||||
UK Plan |
5.9 | 0.1 | 6.0 | |||
US Plan |
5.2 | | 5.2 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total |
11.1 | 0.1 | 11.2 | |||
|
|
|
110
34. | Post-Retirement Benefits (FRS 17) (continued) |
The following amounts would have been charged/(credited) to other finance costs:
Interest cost
|
Expected
return on assets in the plan |
Net finance
cost/(credit) |
||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||
2004: |
||||||||
UK Plan |
13.6 | (13.8 | ) | (0.2 | ) | |||
US Plan |
7.2 | (5.4 | ) | 1.8 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Total |
20.8 | (19.2 | ) | 1.6 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||
2003: |
||||||||
UK Plan |
12.3 | (11.4 | ) | 0.9 | ||||
US Plan |
7.1 | (4.2 | ) | 2.9 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Total |
19.4 | (15.6 | ) | 3.8 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||
2002: |
||||||||
UK Plan |
11.4 | (16.2 | ) | (4.8 | ) | |||
US Plan |
7.1 | (5.3 | ) | 1.8 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Total |
18.5 | (21.5 | ) | (3.0 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
The combined operating and finance costs that would have been charged in 2004 under FRS 17 of £13.6m compares with the cost under SSAP 24 of £15.3m (2003 FRS 17 cost of £14.9m compares with the cost under SSAP 24 of £14.2m, 2002 FRS 17 cost of £8.2m compares with the cost under SSAP 24 of £7.8m).
The following amounts would have been included in the statement of total recognised gains and losses:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||||||||||||||
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
|||||||||||||
Differences between expected and actual return on assets |
||||||||||||||||||
Amount (£ million) |
5.4 | 1.9 | 16.9 | 7.5 | (47.9 | ) | (13.9 | ) | ||||||||||
Percentage of plan assets |
2.5 | % | 2.6 | % | 8.8 | % | 11.9 | % | 29.0 | % | 27.5 | % | ||||||
Experience gains and losses on the plan liabilities |
||||||||||||||||||
Amount (£ million) |
(1.6 | ) | 0.1 | 0.2 | (1.7 | ) | (2.5 | ) | (1.1 | ) | ||||||||
Percentage of plan liabilities |
0.6 | % | 0 | % | 0 | % | 1.4 | % | 1.1 | % | 1.0 | % | ||||||
Effects of changes in demographic and financial assumptions underlying the present value of the plan liabilities |
||||||||||||||||||
Amount (£ million) |
(10.4 | ) | (6.4 | ) | (21.6 | ) | (21.9 | ) | (18.6 | ) | (1.9 | ) | ||||||
Actuarial loss recognised in the statement of total recognised gains and losses |
||||||||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Amount (£ million) |
(6.6 | ) | (4.4 | ) | (4.5 | ) | (16.1 | ) | (69.0 | ) | (16.9 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Percentage of plan liabilities |
2.4 | % | 3.3 | % | 1.8 | % | 13.0 | % | 31.2 | % | 16.1 | % | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
111
34. | Post-Retirement Benefits (FRS 17) (continued) |
The following table reconciles the movement in the plans deficits:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||||||||||||||
UK Plan
|
|
US Plan
|
|
UK Plan
|
|
US Plan
|
|
UK Plan
|
|
US Plan
|
|
|||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||||||||
(Deficit)/surplus in the plan at 1 January |
(59.9 | ) | (61.3 | ) | (56.5 | ) | (54.7 | ) | 10.9 | (41.0 | ) | |||||||
Movement in the year: |
||||||||||||||||||
Current service cost (employees and employers) |
(9.7 | ) | (5.9 | ) | (9.2 | ) | (4.6 | ) | (8.6 | ) | (5.2 | ) | ||||||
Past service cost |
| | | | (0.1 | ) | | |||||||||||
Other finance income/(cost) |
0.2 | (1.8 | ) | (0.9 | ) | (2.9 | ) | 4.8 | (1.8 | ) | ||||||||
Actuarial loss |
(6.6 | ) | (4.4 | ) | (4.5 | ) | (16.1 | ) | (69.0 | ) | (16.9 | ) | ||||||
Contributions paid (including by employees) |
12.2 | 9.2 | 11.2 | 10.4 | 5.5 | 5.2 | ||||||||||||
Currency adjustment |
| 4.3 | | 6.6 | | 5.0 | ||||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||||
Deficit in the plan at 31 December |
(63.8 | ) | (59.9 | ) | (59.9 | ) | (61.3 | ) | (56.5 | ) | (54.7 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The cost of providing healthcare benefits after retirement under FRS 17 of £0.9m (£1.2m charge under SSAP 24), is determined by independent actuaries and would be charged to operating profit in 2004 (2003 £0.8m charged in 2003 compared with a £1.1m charge under SSAP 24). The principal actuarial assumptions in determining the cost of providing healthcare benefits are those in the UK and the US and would be as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||||||||
UK
|
US
|
UK
|
US
|
UK
|
US
|
|||||||
(% per annum) | ||||||||||||
Interest rate |
5.3 | 5.8 | 5.4 | 6.0 | 5.6 | 7.0 | ||||||
Medical cost inflation |
6.3 | 7.0 | 6.4 | 7.5 | 6.6 | 8.0 |
35. | Smith & Nephew Employees Share Trust |
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
At 1 January |
2.1 | 3.2 | ||||
Shares acquired |
4.1 | 1.3 | ||||
Shares vested |
(2.0 | ) | (2.4 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
At 31 December |
4.2 | 2.1 | ||||
|
|
|
|
The Smith & Nephew Employees Share Trust (the Trust) was established to hold shares relating to the long-term incentive plan referred to in the Remuneration Report. Holdings of the Parent Companys Own Shares in respect of the Trust are disclosed in Note 27. The Trust is administered by an independent professional trust company resident in Jersey and is funded by a loan from the Parent Company. The costs of the Trust are charged to the profit and loss account as they accrue. A dividend waiver is in place in respect of those shares held under the long-term incentive plan that are yet to vest. The waiver represents less than 1% of the total dividends paid.
At 31 December 2004, the Trust held 1.9m (2003 1.6m) Ordinary Shares at an aggregate cost of £8.3m (2003 £5.6m). 1.1m shares (2003 1.1m), with an original cost of £4.1m (2003 £3.5m), have vested and are held under option for the benefit of directors and employees. 0.8m shares, at an aggregate cost of £4.2m, are included within shareholders funds on the Group and Parent balance sheets. The market value of these shares at 31 December 2004 was £4.3m (2003 £2.3m).
112
36. | Related Party Transactions with Joint Venture and Associated Undertaking |
In the course of normal operations, the Group traded on an arms-length basis with its joint venture BSN Medical from 1 April 2001 and associated undertaking AbilityOne from 27 March 2002 until 12 September 2003. The aggregated transactions, which have not been disclosed elsewhere in the financial statements, are summarised below:
With BSN Medical |
With BSN Medical |
With BSN Medical |
With
AbilityOne |
With
AbilityOne |
|||||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||||||
Sales to the joint venture/associate |
0.5 | 0.9 | 6.9 | 0.1 | 0.4 | ||||||||
Profit/(loss) made on sales |
0.2 | 0.4 | (0.3 | ) | | 0.1 | |||||||
Agency fees received |
14.3 | 18.2 | 19.0 | | | ||||||||
Management charges received |
0.7 | 1.1 | 1.6 | | | ||||||||
Purchases from the joint venture/associate |
10.7 | 12.2 | 13.2 | 3.0 | 5.3 | ||||||||
(Loss)/profit made by the joint venture on purchases |
(0.6 | ) | (0.3 | ) | (0.1 | ) | | | |||||
Interest receivable from the joint venture |
| | 0.4 | | |
37. | Information About the Nature and Cost of Services Provided by Auditors |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Audit services: |
||||||
Group accounts |
1.1 | 1.0 | 0.9 | |||
Local statutory audit |
0.4 | 0.3 | 0.3 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Statutory audit |
1.5 | 1.3 | 1.2 | |||
Audit-related regulatory reporting |
0.2 | 0.1 | 0.1 | |||
|
|
|
||||
1.7 | 1.4 | 1.3 | ||||
Further assurance services |
0.5 | 1.9 | 0.9 | |||
Tax services: |
||||||
Compliance services |
0.2 | 0.2 | 0.3 | |||
Advisory services |
0.8 | 2.5 | 1.5 | |||
|
|
|
||||
1.0 | 2.7 | 1.8 | ||||
Other services |
| | | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total non-audit services |
1.5 | 4.6 | 2.7 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total auditors remuneration |
3.2 | 6.0 | 4.0 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Arising: |
||||||
In the UK |
1.6 | 4.5 | 2.1 | |||
Outside the UK |
1.6 | 1.5 | 1.9 | |||
|
|
|
||||
3.2 | 6.0 | 4.0 | ||||
|
|
|
||||
Relating to capital transactions (included above) |
0.2 | | 1.6 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Audit fees incurred by Group pension schemes (not included above) |
0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | |||
|
|
|
In 2003 £3.7m related to the unsuccessful public offers to purchase Centerpulse AG and InCentive Capital AG.
113
38. | New Accounting Standards |
Under European regulation, from 2005 Smith & Nephew is required to publish its financial statements under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). This represents a fundamental change in the accounting regime under which the Group will report its results.
New Accounting Standards in the UK FRS 17
FRS 17 retirement benefits was issued in November 2000. Full implementation for UK GAAP purposes is deferred until 1 January 2005. Some disclosure requirements are effective for periods prior to this deadline. The standard requires that financial statements reflect at fair value the assets and liabilities arising from an employers retirement benefit obligations and related funding. Current and past service costs are charged to operating expense in the period in which they are earned, the interest cost on accrued liabilities less expected return on assets is charged as net finance costs and changes in the value of the related assets and liabilities are taken to reserves in the period. Had FRS 17 been implemented at 31 December 2004, the Group would have reported in respect of its two major pension plans a retirement liability, net of related deferred tax, of £89.1m (2003 £86.5m), which compares with £0.5m (2003 £1.7m) recorded in the balance sheet under the existing rules. The impact of FRS 17 on retained earnings for 2004 would have been to reduce Group retained earnings by £88.6m (2003 £84.8m) (Note 34).
New Accounting Standards in the US FAS 123 (R)
On 16 December 2004, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued FASB Statement No. 123 (revised 2004)(Statement 123(R)), Share-Based Payment, which is a revision of FASB Statement No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation. Statement 123(R) supersedes APB Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees, and amends FASB Statement No. 95, Statement of Cash Flows. Generally, the approach in Statement 123(R) is similar to the approach described in FASB Statement No. 123. However, Statement 123(R) requires all share-based payments to employees, to be recognised in the income statement based on their fair values. Pro-forma disclosure and the intrinsic value method are no longer alternatives. Statement 123(R) also requires that the benefits of tax deductions in excess of recognised compensation cost be reported as a financing cash flow, rather than as an operating cash flow as required under current literature.
Statement 123(R) must be adopted no later than 1 July 2005. The Group already adopts the fair-value method of accounting for employee share options for US GAAP reporting purposes and does not anticipate that the adoption of statement 123(R) will have a material impact on its results of operations or financial position.
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US |
The Group accounts are prepared in accordance with UK GAAP which differ in certain respects from US GAAP. Those differences which have a significant effect on the Groups profit for the financial year and shareholders funds are as follows:
Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets
Prior to 1998, goodwill arising on acquisitions was set off against reserves. On disposal of such businesses, goodwill previously set off against reserves is charged to profit or loss on disposal. Since 1998, goodwill and other intangible fixed assets purchased by way of acquisition have been capitalised and written off over a period not exceeding 20 years. Under US GAAP, goodwill and other intangible fixed assets purchased prior to 2002 would have been capitalised and amortised over their expected useful lives. Commencing 2002, goodwill would not be amortised and would be subject to an annual impairment review, whereas other intangible assets with finite lives would continue to be capitalised and amortised over their useful lives.
Fair value adjustments to goodwill may be made in the first full financial period after acquisition. Under US GAAP, these may only be made within one year after acquisition. Thus, any adjustments after this period would be taken to the profit and loss account for the year.
Under UK GAAP, purchase consideration contingent on a future event is estimated and included as part of the cost at the date of acquisition. This estimate is revised each year until the eventual outcome is certain. Under US GAAP, contingent consideration is not recognised until the contingency is resolved or the amount is determinable. Upon the resolution of the contingency, the purchase price may be adjusted, resulting in an adjustment to goodwill.
114
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Joint Venture and Associated Undertaking
One of the components of the goodwill in the joint venture is the difference between the fair value of consideration given and the book value of net assets acquired in the joint venture by the Group. Under US GAAP, this gain would be unrealised and would not be recognised.
The results of the joint venture are included within turnover, operating profit, interest and taxation. The results of the associated undertaking were included within operating profit, interest and taxation. Under US GAAP, the Groups share of the after tax profits of the joint venture and associated undertaking would be reflected in the income statement as a single line item and its net investment in the joint venture would be included as a single line item in the balance sheet with the investment in the Groups associated undertaking.
Post-Retirement Benefits
Projected benefit liabilities are discounted using long-term investment returns and surpluses and deficits are amortised over the employees service lives. Under US GAAP, pension liabilities would be discounted using corporate bond rates and surpluses and deficits within 10% limits would not be amortised and would thus have no immediate impact on pension costs. In addition, under US GAAP where the value of plan assets is below the value of the liabilities valued on an accumulated benefit obligation basis, the deficit on this basis would be recognised immediately through other comprehensive income.
Trade Investments
Trade investments are stated in the balance sheet at cost less provision for any permanent diminution in value and any movements in provisions are taken to the profit and loss account for the year. Under US GAAP, listed trade investments would be stated at market value and movements in market value would be taken to shareholders equity via comprehensive income for the year.
Factoring of Debts
Trade debtors are stated in the balance sheet net of non-returnable proceeds received. Under US GAAP, trade debtors would be stated gross and proceeds received would be included in borrowings.
Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities
Derivative instruments in respect of anticipated future transactions, interest rate risks and intragroup equity investments are accounted for as hedges. Under US GAAP, all derivative instruments (including those imbedded in other contracts) are recognised as either assets or liabilities in the consolidated balance sheet at their fair values. US GAAP prescribes requirements for designation and documentation of hedging relationships and ongoing assessments of effectiveness in order to qualify for hedge accounting. Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as part of a hedge transaction would be recorded each period in current earnings or other comprehensive income, depending on the type of hedge transaction. Changes in the fair value of derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting would be recognised each period in profit for the financial year.
Forward Foreign Exchange Contracts
Forward foreign exchange contracts in respect of anticipated future transactions are treated as hedges and not marked to market. Gains and losses thereon are recognised only when the exposure that is being hedged is itself recognised. Under US GAAP, such contracts would be valued at the forward rates at the balance sheet date and the gains and losses which do not qualify as hedges included in profit for the financial year. On maturity of the contract the gain/loss not recognised to date would be recognised in profit for the financial year.
Interest Rate Swaps
Interest rate swaps used to fix interest rates on the Groups major exposures are treated as hedges and not marked to market. Gains and losses thereon are recognised only when the exposure that is being hedged is itself recognised. Under US GAAP, these swaps would not be treated as hedges, as the requirements to qualify are not met and gains and losses on valuing such contracts at the balance sheet date would be included in profit for the financial year.
115
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Currency Rate Swaps
Currency swaps are used to hedge intra Group equity investments. Realised and unrealised gains/losses are not recognised in profit for the year but are recorded as movements in reserves. Due to the more prescriptive documentary requirements these swaps would not qualify to be treated as hedges under US GAAP and the gains and losses recorded as movements in reserves would be included in the profit for the financial year. Under UK GAAP receivables and payables on currency swaps are included within debtors and creditors respectively. Under US GAAP, these swaps would be separately classified into current asset derivatives, current liabilities derivatives and non-current liabilities derivatives.
Dividends
Dividends are provided in the period to which they relate and, in the case of proposed final dividends, on the basis of proposals by the directors. Under US GAAP, dividends would be provided for in the accounts for the period in which they are declared.
Taxation
Deferred taxation is recognised on most timing differences. This is generally consistent with US GAAP, except that deferred taxation is provided on goodwill acquired prior to 1998, which has been set off against reserves and on which taxation benefits have been received. Under US GAAP, as goodwill acquired prior to 1998 would not have been set off against reserves, the deferred taxation provided under UK GAAP would not be required. Furthermore, under US GAAP, a deferred tax liability would be provided on intangible assets acquired subject to book amortisation where no tax relief is available and a liability would be set up for deferred tax on gains recognised on the sale of assets where potentially taxable gains have been rolled over into replacement assets.
Acquired in-Process Research and Development
Acquired in-process research and development is not separately identified and therefore forms part of the goodwill arising on acquisition. Under US GAAP, acquired in-process research and development would be identified separately from goodwill and charged to the profit and loss account on the date of acquisition.
Leases
Leases which are classified as operating leases under UK GAAP could be capitalised under US GAAP due to different recognition criteria.
Capitalised Interest
The Group does not capitalise interest incurred in financing fixed asset additions. Under US GAAP, interest incurred as part of the cost of constructing fixed assets under long-term projects is capitalised and amortised over the life of the asset.
Staff Costs
Under UK GAAP, the Group does not accrue for the expected cost of future employee absences such as vacations. Under US GAAP, the Group accrues for vacation pay when the employee renders service that increases their entitlement to this benefit.
Stock based Compensation
The Group does not account for the cost of share options whereas it does account for the cost of share awards. Under US GAAP, the cost of share options is recognised under the fair value recognition provisions of FAS 123 Accounting for Stock Based Compensation and charged to the profit and loss account over the vesting periods, along with related deferred taxation movements. Also under US GAAP, the amount of tax deductions for stock based compensation recognised in the profit and loss account is limited to the related FAS 123 charge, the balance is taken directly to additional paid in capital.
Discontinued Operations
The results of operations arising from discontinued operations are presented in the profit and loss account under the relevant captions and the profit/(loss) on their disposal is reported as a separate line item after operating income and before interest. Under US GAAP, the results of operations from discontinued operations and the profit/(loss) on their disposal are reported as separate line items immediately before net income.
116
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Exceptional Items
Certain exceptional items are shown on the face of the profit and loss account after operating profit. These items are mainly gains and losses on the sale of businesses and the cost of fundamental reorganisations. Under US GAAP, these items would be classified as operating profit or expenses.
Restatement of Prior Periods Reconciliations from UK to US GAAP
In the course of preparing to convert the accounts from UK GAAP to IFRS, the Group has identified additional adjustments to its reconciliations to US GAAP. These adjustments relate to vacation pay accruals and deferred taxation thereon, deferred taxation on gains deferred into replacement assets, deferred taxation on tax deductible goodwill, taxation on stock based compensation and the translational effects of net investment hedging. As a result US GAAP reconciliations for prior years have been restated. The adjustment in respect of net investment hedging arises from a review of supporting documentation for IFRS purposes which has indicated that these hedges do not qualify for designation under US GAAP. The adjustment is between the profit and loss account and translation reserves and does not affect shareholders funds. These reconciliation adjustments do not affect the Groups UK GAAP accounts.
117
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Effect of Differences
The effect of the adjustments to attributable profit for the year and to shareholders funds that would be required if US GAAP were to be applied instead of UK GAAP is summarised as follows. The condensed consolidated income presented below reflects the adjustments to attributable profit for the year.
Restated (i) | Restated (i) | ||||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
Profit for the Financial Year | (£ million) | ||||||||
Attributable profit for the year as reported under UK GAAP |
125.2 | 148.1 | 112.1 | ||||||
Adjustments: |
|||||||||
Amortisation of goodwill |
20.5 | 18.5 | 17.5 | ||||||
Amortisation of other intangible fixed assets |
(13.0 | ) | (9.9 | ) | (9.0 | ) | |||
Goodwill fair value adjustments |
| (2.4 | ) | | |||||
Gain on disposals: goodwill and other intangible assets previously written off |
| 7.6 | 15.2 | ||||||
Pension expense |
(6.4 | ) | (8.5 | ) | (3.7 | ) | |||
Stock based compensation |
(6.5 | ) | (4.5 | ) | (3.4 | ) | |||
Staff costs |
(0.3 | ) | 0.1 | (0.7 | ) | ||||
Unrecognised forward foreign exchange (losses)/gains |
(1.4 | ) | 0.1 | (7.9 | ) | ||||
Unrecognised gains/(losses) on interest rate swaps |
7.8 | 2.6 | (1.4 | ) | |||||
Reclassification of gains on net investment hedging |
18.0 | 15.9 | 18.9 | ||||||
Acquired in-process research and development |
(3.9 | ) | | (4.2 | ) | ||||
Leases |
(0.3 | ) | (0.4 | ) | (0.4 | ) | |||
Capitalised interest |
0.3 | 0.4 | 0.5 | ||||||
Current taxation on adjustments |
(1.2 | ) | (1.8 | ) | (1.0 | ) | |||
Deferred taxation on adjustments |
1.5 | 2.3 | 5.2 | ||||||
Deferred taxation methodology |
2.1 | 11.4 | 7.5 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Profit for the financial year as adjusted to accord with US GAAP |
142.4 | 179.5 | 145.2 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Condensed Consolidated Income Statement |
|||||||||
Net sales |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,083.7 | ||||||
Cost of goods sold |
(336.2 | ) | (345.0 | ) | (321.5 | ) | |||
Other operating costs and expenses |
(80.0 | ) | (22.4 | ) | (29.9 | ) | |||
Selling, general and administrative expenses |
(672.0 | ) | (618.0 | ) | (578.0 | ) | |||
Interest expense net |
10.0 | (5.6 | ) | (9.7 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Income before income tax expense and equity in earnings of associated companies |
170.3 | 187.9 | 144.6 | ||||||
Income tax expense |
(43.4 | ) | (46.7 | ) | (30.3 | ) | |||
Equity in earnings of associated companies |
15.5 | 15.3 | 13.3 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Income from continuing operations |
142.4 | 156.5 | 127.6 | ||||||
Discontinued operations: |
|||||||||
Income net of tax of nil (2003 nil, 2002 £0.8m) |
| | 1.3 | ||||||
Gain on sale net of tax of nil (2003 £16.1m, 2002 £16.9m) |
| 23.0 | 16.3 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
| 23.0 | 17.6 | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net income |
142.4 | 179.5 | 145.2 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | 2003 and 2002 income from continuing operations (and profit for the financial year as adjusted to accord with US GAAP) have been restated (see page 119). |
(ii) | The estimated amortisation of intangible assets as at 31 December 2004 for the next five years under US GAAP is as follows: 2005 £18.7m, 2006 £16.9m, 2007 £15.4m, 2008 £15.4m and 2009 £14.9m. |
(iii) | Capitalised interest in 2004 was £0.5m (2003 £0.5m, 2002 £0.5m). |
118
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Restated (i) | Restated (i) | |||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million, except per Ordinary Share and
ADS amounts) |
||||||
Basic earnings as so adjusted Per Ordinary Share: |
||||||
Continuing operations |
15.23p | 16.83p | 13.78p | |||
Discontinued operations |
| 2.47p | 1.90p | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total |
15.23p | 19.30p | 15.68p | |||
|
|
|
||||
Diluted earnings as so adjusted Per Ordinary Share: |
||||||
Continuing operations |
15.12p | 16.72p | 13.66p | |||
Discontinued operations |
| 2.46p | 1.89p | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total |
15.12p | 19.18p | 15.55p | |||
|
|
|
||||
Basic earnings as so adjusted Per ADS (i): |
||||||
Continuing operations |
76.2p | 84.1p | 68.9p | |||
Discontinued operations |
| 12.4p | 9.5p | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total |
76.2p | 96.5p | 78.4p | |||
|
|
|
||||
Diluted earnings as so adjusted Per ADS (i): |
||||||
Continuing operations |
75.6p | 83.6p | 68.3p | |||
Discontinued operations |
| 12.3p | 9.5p | |||
|
|
|
||||
Total |
75.6p | 95.9p | 77.8p | |||
|
|
|
(i) | 2003 and 2002 earnings from continuing operations and net income have been restated (see below). |
Restatement of 2003 and 2002
2003 and 2002 have been restated below to reflect: (1) vacation pay accruals; (2) reclassification of gains on net investment hedging; (3) current taxation on stock based compensation; (4) deferred taxation on vacation pay accruals and on stock based compensation; and (5) deferred taxation on tax deductible goodwill. The effect of the restatement on income and earnings from continuing operations is analysed as follows:
2003
|
2002
|
|||||
(£ million, except per
Ordinary Share and ADS amounts) |
||||||
Income from continuing operations (as previously reported) |
144.4 | 110.8 | ||||
Staff costs (1) |
0.4 | (0.3 | ) | |||
Reclassification of gains on net investment hedging (2) |
15.9 | 18.9 | ||||
Current taxation on adjustments (3) |
(1.8 | ) | (1.0 | ) | ||
Deferred taxation on adjustments (4) |
0.3 | 0.8 | ||||
Deferred taxation methodology (5) |
(2.7 | ) | (1.6 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Income from continuing operations restated |
156.5 | 127.6 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Basic earnings as so adjusted Per Ordinary Share from continuing operations: |
||||||
As previously reported |
15.53p | 11.97p | ||||
Effect of restatements (detailed above) |
1.30p | 1.81p | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Restated total |
16.83p | 13.78p | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Diluted earnings as so adjusted Per Ordinary Share from continuing operations: |
||||||
As previously reported |
15.42p | 11.86p | ||||
Effect of restatements (detailed above) |
1.30p | 1.80p | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Restated total |
16.72p | 13.66p | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Basic earnings as so adjusted per ADS from continuing operations: |
||||||
As previously reported |
77.6p | 59.9p | ||||
Effect of restatements (detailed above) |
6.5p | 9.0p | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Restated total |
84.1p | 68.9p | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Diluted earnings as so adjusted per ADS from continuing operations: |
||||||
As previously reported |
77.1p | 59.3p | ||||
Effect of restatements (detailed above) |
6.5p | 9.0p | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Restated total |
83.6p | 68.3p | ||||
|
|
|
|
119
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Comprehensive Income
The consolidated statement of comprehensive income under US GAAP is as follows:
Restated (i) | Restated (i) | ||||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Profit for the financial year as adjusted to accord with US GAAP |
142.4 | 179.5 | 145.2 | ||||||
Other comprehensive income: |
|||||||||
Minimum pension liability |
3.4 | (5.4 | ) | (69.4 | ) | ||||
Tax on minimum pension liability |
(1.2 | ) | 2.0 | 22.3 | |||||
Other comprehensive income (net of related tax of nil): |
|||||||||
Revaluation of investments |
| | 3.2 | ||||||
Translation adjustment arising on consolidation |
(20.0 | ) | (21.6 | ) | (22.4 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Comprehensive income |
124.6 | 154.5 | 78.9 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Movements in other comprehensive income amounts (net of related tax) are as follows:
Restated (i) | ||||||||||||
Minimum
Pension Liability |
Revaluation
of investments |
Currency
translation differences |
Restated (i) Total |
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
At 1 January 2002 |
| (3.2 | ) | (42.4 | ) | (45.6 | ) | |||||
Movement in the year |
(47.1 | ) | 3.2 | (22.4 | ) | (66.3 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
At 31 December 2002 |
(47.1 | ) | | (64.8 | ) | (111.9 | ) | |||||
Movement in the year |
(3.4 | ) | | (21.6 | ) | (25.0 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
At 31 December 2003 |
(50.5 | ) | | (86.4 | ) | (136.9 | ) | |||||
Movement in the year |
2.2 | | (20.0 | ) | (17.8 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
At 31 December 2004 |
(48.3 | ) | | (106.4 | ) | (154.7 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | 2003 and 2002 profit for the financial year as adjusted to accord with US GAAP, translation adjustments arising on consolidation and currency translation differences have been restated (see page 119). |
120
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Shareholders Funds
Restated (i) | ||||||
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Shareholders funds as reported in the Group balance sheet under UK GAAP |
727.0 | 640.8 | ||||
Adjustments: |
||||||
Goodwill |
||||||
Cost |
(44.0 | ) | (0.9 | ) | ||
Amortisation |
67.8 | 50.0 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
23.8 | 49.1 | |||||
Other intangible fixed assets |
||||||
Cost |
223.7 | 198.8 | ||||
Amortisation |
(108.5 | ) | (104.5 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
115.2 | 94.3 | |||||
Investment in joint venture |
||||||
Cost |
(37.7 | ) | (38.3 | ) | ||
Amortisation |
(1.2 | ) | (1.2 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
(38.9 | ) | (39.5 | ) | |||
Fixed assets capital lease |
||||||
Cost |
10.5 | 10.8 | ||||
Depreciation |
(1.7 | ) | (1.1 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
8.8 | 9.7 | |||||
Debtors: debit balances on currency swaps |
(46.4 | ) | (52.8 | ) | ||
Debtors: pension assets |
(8.0 | ) | (5.6 | ) | ||
Debtors: non-returnable proceeds received from debt factor |
19.2 | 19.9 | ||||
Current asset derivatives |
50.6 | 56.3 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
15.4 | 17.8 | |||||
Creditors: staff costs |
(5.9 | ) | (5.6 | ) | ||
Creditors: acquisition consideration |
9.5 | | ||||
Creditors: proposed final dividend |
30.0 | 28.9 | ||||
Creditors: pension liability |
(85.6 | ) | (88.0 | ) | ||
Credit balances on currency swaps |
12.7 | 4.6 | ||||
Borrowings due within one year: non-returnable proceeds received from debt factor |
(19.2 | ) | (19.9 | ) | ||
Borrowings due within one year: capital lease payments |
(0.2 | ) | (0.2 | ) | ||
Current liabilities derivatives |
(22.4 | ) | (19.6 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
(81.1 | ) | (99.8 | ) | |||
Credit balances on currency swaps |
2.1 | 4.8 | ||||
Non-current liabilities derivatives |
(2.1 | ) | (5.2 | ) | ||
Borrowings due after one year: capital lease payments |
(8.5 | ) | (9.4 | ) | ||
Deferred taxationon adjustments |
41.1 | 40.8 | ||||
Deferred taxationmethodology |
(20.9 | ) | (12.7 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Shareholders funds as adjusted to accord with US GAAP |
781.9 | 690.7 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | 2003 has been restated (see page 122). |
121
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Reconciliation of Changes in Shareholders Funds Under US GAAP
Restated (i) | Restated (i) | ||||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Profit for the financial year under US GAAP |
142.4 | 179.5 | 145.2 | ||||||
Dividends paid |
(46.7 | ) | (45.1 | ) | (43.5 | ) | |||
Currency translation |
(20.0 | ) | (21.6 | ) | (22.4 | ) | |||
Issue of shares |
8.0 | 8.5 | 6.1 | ||||||
Stock based compensation recognised in the profit and loss account |
8.2 | 7.2 | 5.0 | ||||||
Taxation on stock based compensation |
1.2 | 1.8 | 1.0 | ||||||
Cost of shares transferred to beneficiaries |
(4.1 | ) | (1.3 | ) | (2.4 | ) | |||
Revaluation of investments |
| | 3.2 | ||||||
Minimum pension liability |
2.2 | (3.4 | ) | (47.1 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net addition to shareholders funds |
91.2 | 125.6 | 45.1 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Opening shareholders funds |
690.7 | 565.1 | 520.0 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Closing shareholders funds |
781.9 | 690.7 | 565.1 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(i) |
2003 and 2002 profit for the financial year under US GAAP, currency translation, taxation on stock based compensation and shareholders funds have been restated (see page 119
|
Restatement of Shareholders Funds
Shareholders funds have been restated below to reflect: (1) vacation pay accruals; (2) deferred taxation on vacation pay accruals and stock based compensation; and (3) deferred taxation on gains deferred into replacement assets and on tax deductible goodwill. The effects on shareholders funds are as follows:
2003
|
2002
|
2001
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Shareholders funds under US GAAP as previously reported |
709.9 | 582.3 | 536.1 | ||||||
Restatements: |
|||||||||
Creditors: holiday pay (1) |
(3.1 | ) | (3.5 | ) | (3.2 | ) | |||
Deferred taxation on adjustments (2) |
5.2 | 4.9 | 4.1 | ||||||
Deferred taxation methodology (3) |
(21.3 | ) | (18.6 | ) | (17.0 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Shareholders funds as restated |
690.7 | 565.1 | 520.0 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
The US GAAP cash flow statement reports changes in cash and cash equivalents, which includes short-term highly liquid investments. Under UK GAAP, cash flows are presented separately for operating activities, dividends from joint ventures, returns on investments and servicing of finance, taxation, investing activities and financing activities. US GAAP requires only three categories of cash flow activity to be reported: operating, investing and financing. Cash flows from taxation and returns on investments and servicing of finance shown under UK GAAP would be included as operating activities under US GAAP. The payment of dividends would be included as a financing activity under US GAAP.
The categories of cash flow activity under US GAAP are summarised as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Cash flows from operating activities |
207.3 | 165.3 | 152.4 | ||||||
Cash flows from investing activities |
(186.3 | ) | (23.3 | ) | (214.2 | ) | |||
Cash flows from financing activities |
(14.1 | ) | (139.0 | ) | 57.8 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents |
6.9 | 3.0 | (4.0 | ) | |||||
Exchange adjustments |
(0.3 | ) | 0.5 | 0.1 | |||||
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year |
26.0 | 22.5 | 26.4 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year |
32.6 | 26.0 | 22.5 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
122
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Additional Information in Respect of Earnings Per Share
The following table sets out the computation of basic and diluted earnings per Ordinary Share from continuing operations under US GAAP:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Numerator: |
||||||
Profit for the financial year as adjusted to accord with US GAAP(i) |
142.4 | 179.5 | 145.2 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Numerator for diluted earnings per Ordinary Share |
142.4 | 179.5 | 145.2 | |||
|
|
|
|
(i) | 2003 and 2002 profit for the financial year as adjusted to accord with US GAAP have been restated (see page 119). |
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(Shares million) | ||||||
Denominator: |
||||||
Denominator for basic earnings per Ordinary Share |
935 | 930 | 926 | |||
Effect of dilutive securities: share option schemes |
7 | 6 | 8 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Denominator for diluted earnings per Ordinary Share |
942 | 936 | 934 | |||
|
|
|
||||
Basic earnings per Ordinary Share from continuing operations(ii) |
15.23p | 16.83p | 13.78p | |||
Basic earnings per Ordinary Share from discontinued operations |
| 2.47p | 1.90p | |||
Diluted earnings per Ordinary Share from continuing operations(ii) |
15.12p | 16.72p | 13.66p | |||
Diluted earnings per Ordinary Share from discontinued operations |
| 2.46p | 1.89p |
|
(ii) | Earnings from continuing operations for 2003 and 2002 have been restated (see page 119). |
Additional Information in Respect of Deferred Taxation
The analysis of the deferred taxation (liability)/asset required by US GAAP is summarised as follows:
Restated(iii) | ||||||
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Deferred taxation liabilities: |
||||||
Excess of book value over taxation value of fixed assets |
(41.5 | ) | (39.3 | ) | ||
Other temporary differences |
(70.9 | ) | (68.3 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
(112.4 | ) | (107.6 | ) | |||
Deferred taxation assets: |
||||||
Taxation effect of losses carried forward |
4.0 | 5.1 | ||||
Other temporary differences |
102.8 | 73.1 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
106.8 | 78.2 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||
(5.6 | ) | (29.4 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|||
Of which: |
||||||
Current |
50.0 | 21.6 | ||||
Non-current |
(55.6 | ) | (51.0 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
(5.6 | ) | (29.4 | ) | |||
|
|
|
|
|
(iii) | 2003 deferred taxation asset required by US GAAP has been restated (see page 122). |
The losses carried forward of £10.6m expire between 2006 and 2019 of which £0.5m expire between 2006 and 2010.
123
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
Additional Information in Respect of the Groups Two Principal Defined Benefit Pension Plans
The two principal defined benefit pension plans are those in the UK and the US. The pension cost for these plans computed in accordance with the requirements of US GAAP comprises:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
|||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Service cost |
12.2 | 11.3 | 10.9 | ||||||
Interest cost |
21.6 | 20.1 | 19.1 | ||||||
Expected return on plan assets |
(19.5 | ) | (16.0 | ) | (21.2 | ) | |||
Amortisation of prior service cost |
0.6 | 0.6 | 2.3 | ||||||
Amortisation of net actuarial loss/(gain) |
6.8 | 6.6 | 0.6 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||
Net periodic pension cost |
21.7 | 22.6 | 11.7 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
The major assumptions used in computing the pension cost under US GAAP for the two principal plans are:
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(%) | ||||||
UK: |
||||||
Expected long-term rate of return on plan assets for net benefit costs |
7.1 | 6.9 | 6.9 | |||
Discount rate for net benefit costs |
5.4 | 5.6 | 6.0 | |||
Discount rate for year end benefit obligations |
5.3 | 5.4 | 5.6 | |||
Expected long-term rate of earnings increases for net benefit costs |
4.8 | 4.3 | 4.0 | |||
Expected long-term rate of earnings increases for year end benefit obligations |
4.9 | 4.8 | 4.3 | |||
US: |
||||||
Expected long-term rate of return on plan assets for net benefit costs |
8.8 | 8.8 | 8.8 | |||
Discount rate for net benefit costs |
6.0 | 7.0 | 7.0 | |||
Discount rate for year end benefit obligations |
5.8 | 6.0 | 7.0 | |||
Expected long-term rate of earnings increases for net benefit costs |
5.0 | 5.0 | 5.0 | |||
Expected long term rate of earnings increases for year end benefit description |
5.0 | 5.0 | 5.0 |
The assumption for the expected long-term rate of return on assets is based on separate long-term assumptions for each of the major assets classes weighted by the asset allocation. The long-term assumptions for bonds are based on long-term market yields at the accounting date. The long-term rate of return on equities is the Groups best estimate of future returns with consideration having been given to long-term historic real returns achieved on equities.
The following table sets out the funded status and amounts that would be recognised under US GAAP in the balance sheet at 31 December 2004 and 2003 for the Groups two principal plans:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||||||||
UK
Plan |
US
Plan |
UK
Plan |
US
Plan |
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
Fair value of plan assets |
212.3 | 71.8 | 192.1 | 63.0 | ||||||||
Projected benefit obligation |
(287.7 | ) | (131.7 | ) | (265.5 | ) | (124.4 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Projected benefit obligation in excess of plan assets |
(75.4 | ) | (59.9 | ) | (73.4 | ) | (61.4 | ) | ||||
Unrecognised prior service cost |
0.4 | 0.1 | 0.9 | 0.2 | ||||||||
Unrecognised net loss |
66.8 | 49.5 | 67.3 | 50.9 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
(8.2 | ) | (10.3 | ) | (5.2 | ) | (10.3 | ) | |||||
Deficit on accumulated benefit obligation basis |
(48.6 | ) | (18.5 | ) | (51.0 | ) | (21.4 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Accrued pension cost |
(56.8 | ) | (28.8 | ) | (56.2 | ) | (31.7 | ) | ||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
124
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
The following table sets out the accumulated benefit obligation and market value of assets for the Groups two principal plans:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||||||||
UK
|
US
|
UK
|
US
|
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
Accumulated benefit obligation |
(269.1 | ) | (100.6 | ) | (248.3 | ) | (94.7 | ) | ||||
Market value of assets |
212.3 | 71.8 | 192.1 | 63.0 |
The measurement date for both Plans is 31 December.
In the UK plan, the assets principally comprise UK and other listed equities, bank deposits and UK Government index-linked stocks. In the US plan, the assets principally comprise US equities, other listed equities and fixed income securities.
The following table sets out the Companys pension plan asset allocation in the UK for the last two fiscal years, together with the target allocation for 2005:
Target
Allocation |
Percentage of Plan
Assets at 31 December |
|||||||
2005
|
2004
|
2003
|
||||||
(%) | ||||||||
Asset Category |
||||||||
Equity securities |
60 80 | 73.9 | 74.5 | |||||
Debt securities |
15 25 | 16.8 | 16.8 | |||||
Property |
0 8 | 5.4 | 5.2 | |||||
Other |
0 5 | 3.9 | 3.5 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||||
Total |
100 | % | 100 | % | ||||
|
|
|
|
The long-term investment strategy for the Smith & Nephew UK Pension Fund (the UK Plan) is for sufficient index-linked and fixed interest investments to be held to match in the medium-term the excess of benefits over contributions. The balance of the UK Plans investments will be invested in equities and property unit trusts.
The UK Plan is not permitted to have a direct shareholding in Smith & Nephew plc or associated companies.
The following table sets out the companys pension plan asset allocation in the US for the last two fiscal years, together with the target allocation for 2005:
Target
Allocation |
Percentage of Plan
31 December |
|||||||
2005
|
2004
|
2003
|
||||||
(%) | ||||||||
Asset Category |
||||||||
Equity securities |
68 80 | 78.1 | 76.4 | |||||
Debt securities |
20 26 | 21.5 | 20.7 | |||||
Other |
0 5 | 0.4 | 2.9 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||||
Total |
100 | % | 100 | % | ||||
|
|
|
|
The long-term investment strategy for the Smith & Nephew US Pension Plan (the US Plan) is a long-term rate of return on assets that is at least 5% to 6% greater than the rate of inflation as measured by the Consumer Price Index. This target rate of return for the Plan is based upon the assumption that future real rates of return will be close to the historical long run rates of return experienced for each asset class. Market performance varies and a real rate of return of between 5% and 6% may not be achievable during some periods.
The US Plan is not permitted to have a direct shareholding in Smith & Nephew plc or associated companies.
125
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
A reconciliation of the projected benefit obligation and the fair value of plan assets is shown in the following tables:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||||||||
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
UK Plan
|
US Plan
|
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
Projected benefit obligation at beginning of year |
265.5 | 124.4 | 231.7 | 105.2 | ||||||||
Service cost |
6.3 | 5.9 | 6.7 | 4.6 | ||||||||
Interest cost |
14.4 | 7.2 | 13.0 | 7.1 | ||||||||
Plan participant contributions |
3.6 | | 2.7 | | ||||||||
Actuarial loss |
9.0 | 6.2 | 22.6 | 23.5 | ||||||||
Benefits and expenses paid |
(11.1 | ) | (2.9 | ) | (11.2 | ) | (2.9 | ) | ||||
Exchange adjustment |
| (9.1 | ) | | (13.1 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Projected benefit obligation at end of year |
287.7 | 131.7 | 265.5 | 124.4 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Fair value of plan assets at beginning of year |
192.1 | 63.0 | 164.1 | 50.5 | ||||||||
Actual return on assets |
19.1 | 7.2 | 28.0 | 11.6 | ||||||||
Company contributions |
8.6 | 9.2 | 8.5 | 10.4 | ||||||||
Plan participant contributions |
3.6 | | 2.7 | | ||||||||
Benefits and expenses paid |
(11.1 | ) | (2.9 | ) | (11.2 | ) | (2.9 | ) | ||||
Exchange adjustment |
| (4.7 | ) | | (6.6 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Fair value of plan assets at end of year |
212.3 | 71.8 | 192.1 | 63.0 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following table sets out the benefit payments used in the calculation of the expected benefit obligation:
United
Kingdom |
United
States |
|||
£ million | ||||
Actual Payments |
||||
2003 |
11.2 | 2.9 | ||
2004 |
11.1 | 2.9 | ||
Expected Future Payments |
||||
2005 |
12.3 | 2.8 | ||
2006 |
13.0 | 3.0 | ||
2007 |
13.1 | 3.2 | ||
2008 |
14.3 | 3.5 | ||
2009 |
15.1 | 3.8 | ||
2010 2014 |
85.5 | 27.7 |
The employers best estimate of contributions expected to be paid in 2005 to the UK Plan is £8.8m and to the US Plan is £8.9m.
Additional information in respect of the Groups healthcare benefits after retirement in the UK and the US
The movement in the accumulated post retirement benefit obligation under the Groups post-retirement healthcare schemes is as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||||||||
UK
|
US
|
UK
|
US
|
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
At beginning of year |
3.7 | 6.4 | 3.4 | 7.0 | ||||||||
Service cost |
0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | ||||||||
Interest cost |
0.2 | 0.4 | 0.2 | 0.4 | ||||||||
Change in assumptions |
| 0.2 | | | ||||||||
Actuarial loss |
0.1 | 1.2 | 0.2 | | ||||||||
Benefits paid |
(0.2 | ) | (0.4 | ) | (0.2 | ) | (0.4 | ) | ||||
Exchange adjustment |
| (0.5 | ) | | (0.7 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
At end of year |
3.9 | 7.4 | 3.7 | 6.4 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
126
39. | Differences Between Accounting Principles Generally Accepted in the UK and US (continued) |
2004
|
2003
|
|||||||||||
UK
|
US
|
UK
|
US
|
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
Accumulated benefit obligation |
3.9 | 7.4 | 3.7 | 6.4 | ||||||||
Unrecognised net gain |
(0.2 | ) | (2.6 | ) | (0.1 | ) | (1.5 | ) | ||||
Prior service loss |
| 0.1 | | 0.1 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
Accrued healthcare cost |
3.7 | 4.9 | 3.6 | 5.0 | ||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The effect of a one percentage point change in the rate of medical cost inflation would increase/(decrease) the accumulated post retirement benefit obligation as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||||||||
UK
|
US
|
UK
|
US
|
|||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
1% increase |
0.1 | 0.6 | 0.1 | 0.5 | ||||||||
1% decrease |
(0.1 | ) | (0.5 | ) | (0.1 | ) | (0.4 | ) |
The assumed post retirement healthcare cost trend for 2005 and thereafter is expected to be approximately 1% above the discount rate.
Additional Information Relating to Leases
Future lease payments under US GAAP at 31 December 2004 are as follows:
Operating Leases
|
Capital Leases
|
||||||||
Land and
Buildings |
Other
Assets |
Land and
Buildings |
Other
Assets |
||||||
(£ million) | |||||||||
Within one year |
10.1 | 9.7 | 1.2 | 0.3 | |||||
After one and within two years |
7.3 | 5.4 | 0.9 | 0.2 | |||||
After two and within three years |
6.2 | 2.4 | 0.9 | 0.1 | |||||
After three and within four years |
6.0 | 0.3 | 0.9 | | |||||
After four and within five years |
5.9 | | 0.9 | | |||||
After five years |
24.4 | | 10.5 | | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|||||
59.9 | 17.8 | 15.3 | 0.6 | ||||||
|
|
||||||||
Less: imputed interest |
(6.1 | ) | | ||||||
|
|
|
|||||||
Present value of future lease payments |
9.2 | 0.6 | |||||||
|
|
|
Additional Information Regarding Provisions for Bad and Doubtful Debts
Balance
at
|
Additions
to costs
|
Exchange
differences |
Deductions(i)
|
Balance
at end of year |
||||||||
(£ million) | ||||||||||||
Year ended 31 December 2004 |
7.3 | 15.4 | (0.3 | ) | (1.7 | ) | 20.7 | |||||
Year ended 31 December 2003 |
7.0 | 1.3 | (0.2 | ) | (0.8 | ) | 7.3 | |||||
Year ended 31 December 2002 |
7.3 | 0.5 | (0.4 | ) | (0.4 | ) | 7.0 |
|
(i) | Represents the excess of amounts written off over recoveries. |
127
At 31 December
|
||||||
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Fixed assets: |
||||||
Tangible assets (Note 41) |
6.6 | 7.0 | ||||
Investments (Note 42) |
2,377.5 | 756.8 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
2,384.1 | 763.8 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Current assets: |
||||||
Debtors (Note 43) |
421.8 | 1,538.6 | ||||
Cash and bank (Note 44) |
1.6 | 3.1 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
423.4 | 1,541.7 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Creditors: amounts falling due within one year: |
||||||
Borrowings (Note 44) |
24.6 | 67.2 | ||||
Other creditors (Note 45) |
2,181.6 | 1,798.0 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
2,206.2 | 1,865.2 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Net current liabilities |
(1,782.8 | ) | (323.5 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Total assets less current liabilities |
601.3 | 440.3 | ||||
Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year: |
||||||
Borrowings (Note 44) |
144.0 | 98.3 | ||||
Other creditors (Note 45) |
11.6 | 4.8 | ||||
Provisions for liabilities and charges (Note 46) |
| 1.2 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
155.6 | 104.3 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||
445.7 | 336.0 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Capital and reserves |
||||||
Equity shareholders funds: |
||||||
Called up equity share capital (Note 23) |
114.5 | 114.1 | ||||
Share premium account (Note 47) |
159.6 | 152.0 | ||||
Profit and loss account (Note 47) |
175.8 | 72.0 | ||||
Own shares (Note 27) |
(4.2 | ) | (2.1 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
Shareholders funds |
445.7 | 336.0 | ||||
|
|
|
|
Approved by the Board on 8 March 2005.
Dudley Eustace Chairman Christopher ODonnell Chief Executive Peter Hooley Finance Director
128
NOTES TO THE PARENT COMPANY ACCOUNTS
40. | Accounting Policies |
The separate accounts of the parent company are presented as required by the Companies Act 1985. The principal accounting policies are the same as those set out in Note 1 of the Notes to the Group Accounts.
41. | Tangible Fixed Assets |
2004
|
|||
(£ million) | |||
Cost: |
|||
At 1 January |
18.2 | ||
Additions |
0.8 | ||
Disposals |
(1.5 | ) | |
|
|
||
At 31 December |
17.5 | ||
|
|
||
Depreciation: |
|||
At 1 January |
11.2 | ||
Charge for the year |
1.2 | ||
Disposals |
(1.5 | ) | |
|
|
||
At 31 December |
10.9 | ||
|
|
||
Net book amount at 31 December 2004 |
6.6 | ||
|
|
||
Net book amount at 31 December 2003 |
7.0 | ||
|
|
Tangible fixed assets comprise plant and equipment.
42. | Investments |
2004
|
|||
(£ million) | |||
At 1 January |
756.8 | ||
Additions |
1,682.0 | ||
Disposals |
(61.3 | ) | |
|
|
||
At 31 December |
2,377.5 | ||
|
|
Investments represent holdings in subsidiary undertakings and are stated at cost less any provision for impairment.
129
42. | Investments (continued) |
Principal Subsidiary Undertakings
The information provided below is given for principal subsidiary undertakings, all of which are 100% owned, in accordance with Section 231(5)(a) of the Companies Act 1985. A full list will be appended to Smith & Nephews next annual return to Companies House:
Company Name |
Activity |
Country of operation and
|
||
United Kingdom: |
||||
Smith & Nephew Healthcare Limited |
Medical Devices | England & Wales | ||
Smith & Nephew Medical Limited |
Medical Devices | England & Wales | ||
T J Smith & Nephew Limited |
Medical Devices | England & Wales | ||
Continental Europe: |
||||
Smith & Nephew GmbH |
Medical Devices | Austria | ||
Smith & Nephew SA-NV |
Medical Devices | Belgium | ||
Smith & Nephew A/S |
Medical Devices | Denmark | ||
Smith & Nephew OY |
Medical Devices | Finland | ||
Smith & Nephew SAS |
Medical Devices | France | ||
Smith & Nephew GmbH |
Medical Devices | Germany | ||
Smith & Nephew Limited |
Medical Devices | Ireland | ||
Smith & Nephew Srl |
Medical Devices | Italy | ||
Smith & Nephew BV |
Medical Devices | Netherlands | ||
Smith & Nephew A/S |
Medical Devices | Norway | ||
Smith & Nephew Lda |
Medical Devices | Portugal | ||
Smith & Nephew SA |
Medical Devices | Spain | ||
Smith & Nephew AB |
Medical Devices | Sweden | ||
Smith & Nephew AG |
Medical Devices | Switzerland | ||
America: |
||||
Smith & Nephew Inc |
Medical Devices | Canada | ||
Smith & Nephew SA de CV |
Medical Devices | Mexico | ||
Smith & Nephew Inc |
Medical Devices | Puerto Rico | ||
Smith & Nephew Inc |
Medical Devices | United States | ||
Africa, Asia and Australasia: |
||||
Smith & Nephew Pty Limited |
Medical Devices | Australia | ||
Smith & Nephew Limited |
Medical Devices | Hong Kong | ||
Smith & Nephew Healthcare Limited |
Medical Devices | India | ||
Smith & Nephew KK |
Medical Devices | Japan | ||
Smith & Nephew Limited |
Medical Devices | Korea | ||
Smith & Nephew Healthcare Sdn Berhad |
Medical Devices | Malaysia | ||
Smith & Nephew Limited |
Medical Devices | New Zealand | ||
Smith & Nephew Pte Limited |
Medical Devices | Singapore | ||
Smith & Nephew (Pty) Limited |
Medical Devices | South Africa | ||
Smith & Nephew Limited |
Medical Devices | Thailand | ||
Smith & Nephew FZE |
Medical Devices | United Arab Emirates |
Principal Associated Undertakings, Joint Ventures and Other Arrangements
The Group owns 50% of BSN Medical GmbH & Co KG, a medical supplies company incorporated and located in Germany.
In 2002, the Group owned 21.5% of AbilityOne Corporation, a supplier of rehabilitation products to hospitals, nursing homes and clinics incorporated in the United States. During 2003, the Group disposed of this interest.
In 2001, the Group owned interests in two joint arrangements with Advanced Tissue Sciences, Inc., one relating to products for the treatment of diabetic foot ulcers and other wound indications, and the other for cartilage replacement. In 2002, the Group acquired the interests it did not already own in the joint arrangements from Advanced Tissue Sciences, Inc.
130
43. | Debtors |
2004
|
2003
|
|||
(£ million) | ||||
Amounts falling due within one year: |
||||
Trade and other debtors |
2.9 | 1.1 | ||
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings |
365.0 | 1,483.3 | ||
Amounts owed by joint venture |
0.4 | 0.5 | ||
Prepayments and accrued income |
1.9 | 2.1 | ||
Current taxation |
6.0 | | ||
Debit balances on currency swaps |
21.1 | 30.8 | ||
|
|
|||
397.3 | 1,517.8 | |||
Amounts falling due after more than one year: |
||||
Deferred taxation |
0.1 | | ||
Debit balances on currency swaps |
24.4 | 20.8 | ||
|
|
|||
24.5 | 20.8 | |||
|
|
|||
421.8 | 1,538.6 | |||
|
|
44. | Borrowings |
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Borrowings Bank loans and overdrafts: |
||||||
Due within one year or on demand |
24.6 | 67.2 | ||||
Due after one year |
93.7 | 98.3 | ||||
Loan Notes due after one year (in 2006) |
50.3 | | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
168.6 | 165.5 | |||||
Cash and bank |
(1.6 | ) | (3.1 | ) | ||
Debit balances on currency swaps |
(45.5 | ) | (51.6 | ) | ||
Credit balances on currency swaps |
14.8 | 9.4 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Net debt |
136.3 | 120.2 | ||||
|
|
|
|
The parent company has currency swaps that have maturities ranging from 2005 to 2006 and are translated at year-end exchange rates. Gross sterling equivalents of £640.5m (2003 £593.1m) receivable and £609.8m (2003 £550.9m) payable have been netted. £45.5m is reported as debit balances on currency swaps and £14.8m as credit balances on currency swaps the net of which is a debit balance of £30.7m (2003 £51.6m as debit balances on currency swaps and £9.4m as credit balances on currency swaps the net of which is a debit balance of £42.2m). Currency swaps include fixed and floating interest rate contracts and forward foreign exchange contracts and are used for hedging foreign investments.
45. | Other Creditors |
2004
|
2003
|
|||
(£ million) | ||||
Amounts falling due within one year: |
||||
Trade creditors |
2.8 | 3.0 | ||
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings |
2,129.2 | 1,741.7 | ||
Accruals and deferred income |
6.9 | 7.6 | ||
Current taxation |
| 12.2 | ||
Ordinary share dividends |
30.0 | 28.9 | ||
Credit balances on currency swaps |
12.7 | 4.6 | ||
|
|
|||
2,181.6 | 1,798.0 | |||
|
|
|||
Amounts falling due after one year: |
||||
Acquisition consideration |
9.5 | | ||
Credit balances on currency swaps |
2.1 | 4.8 | ||
|
|
|||
11.6 | 4.8 | |||
|
|
Amounts falling due after more than one year are payable as follows: £11.6m in 2006 (2003 £3.6m in 2005 and £1.2m in 2006).
131
46. | Provisions for Liabilities and Charges |
The movement in provisions for liabilities and charges during the year from £1.2m to nil represents utilisation of provisions and changes in deferred taxation. The provision for deferred taxation is made up as follows:
2004
|
2003
|
|||||
(£ million) | ||||||
Other fixed asset timing differences: |
1.2 | 1.4 | ||||
Other timing differences |
(1.3 | ) | (0.8 | ) | ||
|
|
|
|
|||
(0.1 | ) | 0.6 | ||||
|
|
|
|
|||
Net deferred taxation liability |
| 0.6 | ||||
Net deferred taxation asset (Note 43) |
(0.1 | ) | | |||
|
|
|
|
|||
(0.1 | ) | 0.6 | ||||
|
|
|
|
47. | Reserves |
Share premium |
Profit and loss account |
||||
(£ million) | |||||
At 1 January 2004 |
152.0 | 72.0 | |||
Retained profit for the year |
| 104.7 | |||
Share based expense recognised in the profit and loss |
| 1.1 | |||
Cost of shares transferred to beneficiaries |
| (2.0 | ) | ||
Share options |
7.6 | | |||
|
|
|
|||
At 31 December 2004 |
159.6 | 175.8 | |||
|
|
|
In accordance with the exemption permitted by Section 230(3) of the Companies Act 1985, the parent company has not presented its own profit and loss account. The attributable profit for the year dealt with in the accounts of the Parent Company is £104.7m (2003 £21.1m loss).
On 23 June 2003, following the cancellation of the 5½% £1.00 cumulative preference shares (Note 23), a capital redemption reserve of £0.3m was established in the Parent Company. This reserve was extinguished during 2003.
48. | Contingent Liability |
2004
|
2003
|
|||
(£ million) | ||||
Guarantees in respect of subsidiary undertakings |
8.7 | 9.9 | ||
|
|
The parent has given guarantees to banks to support liabilities under foreign exchange contracts and cross guarantees to support overdrafts. Such guarantees are not considered to be liabilities as all subsidiary undertakings are trading as going concerns.
132
This section discusses shareholder return (the return to shareholders in the form of dividends and share price movements) and provides other information for shareholders.
134 | ||
136 | ||
138 | ||
140 | ||
143 | ||
144 | ||
147 |
133
Dividend History
Following the capital restructuring and dividend reduction in 2000 the Group adopted a policy of increasing its dividend cover (the ratio of attributable earnings before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items, as set out in the Five Year Record, to ordinary dividends). This was intended to increase the financing capability of the Group for acquisitions and other investments. Over the last three years the dividend has been increased in line with inflation. Dividend cover has increased from 3.3 times in 2002 to 4.1 times in 2004.
Smith & Nephew has paid dividends on its Ordinary Shares in each year since 1937. An interim dividend in respect of each fiscal year is normally declared in August and paid in November, and the final dividend for each year is normally recommended by the Board of Directors in the following February and paid in May after approval by shareholders at the Companys Annual General Meeting.
Future dividends of Smith & Nephew will be dependent upon: future earnings; the future financial condition of the Group; the Boards dividend policy; and the additional factors that might affect the business of the Group set out in Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements and Risk Factors.
The following table shows the dividends on each Ordinary Share (as increased by the associated UK tax credit of 10%, but before deduction of withholding taxes) for the fiscal years 2000 through 2004. If approved by shareholders, the 2004 final dividend will be payable on 13 May 2005. The dividends are declared in pence per Ordinary Share and have been translated into US cents per share at the Noon Buying Rate on the payment date.
Years ended 31 December
|
|||||||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
2001
|
2000
|
|||||||
Pence per share: |
|||||||||||
Interim |
2.111 | 2.056 | 2.000 | 1.944 | 1.889 | ||||||
Final |
3.556 | 3.444 | 3.333 | 3.222 | 3.111 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Total |
5.667 | 5.500 | 5.333 | 5.166 | 5.000 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
US cents per share: |
|||||||||||
Interim |
3.916 | 3.299 | 3.155 | 2.753 | 2.714 | ||||||
Final |
6.845 | (i) | 5.567 | 5.408 | 4.611 | 4.459 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Total |
10.761 | 8.866 | 8.563 | 7.364 | 7.173 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
(i) | Translated at the Noon Buying Rate on 28 February 2005 of US$ 1.925 = £1. This is equivalent to 34.225 cents per ADS. |
On 11 August 2000, a special dividend of £415.6m (41.27p per old Ordinary 10p Share, including tax credit, equivalent to US$3.105 per ADS) was paid.
134
Share Prices
The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, the highest and lowest middle market quotations for the Ordinary Shares, as derived from the Daily Official List of the UK Listing Authority and the highest and lowest sales prices of ADSs as reported on the New York Stock Exchange composite tape.
Ordinary Shares
|
ADSs
|
||||||||
High
|
Low
|
High
|
Low
|
||||||
£ | £ | US$ | US$ | ||||||
Fiscal Year ended 31 December: |
|||||||||
2000 |
3.30 | (i) | 1.57 | 23.07 | 12.57 | ||||
2001 |
4.20 | 2.91 | 30.46 | 20.90 | |||||
2002 |
4.30 | 3.05 | 32.30 | 23.50 | |||||
2003 |
4.83 | 3.30 | 42.18 | 26.45 | |||||
2004 |
6.14 | 4.39 | 59.20 | 40.36 | |||||
Quarters in the Fiscal Year ended 31 December: |
|||||||||
2003: |
|||||||||
1st Quarter |
4.00 | 3.30 | 31.55 | 26.45 | |||||
2nd Quarter |
4.26 | 3.48 | 34.73 | 28.91 | |||||
3rd Quarter |
4.20 | 3.48 | 34.19 | 28.61 | |||||
4th Quarter |
4.83 | 4.03 | 42.18 | 33.46 | |||||
2004: |
|||||||||
1st Quarter |
5.57 | 4.39 | 52.64 | 40.36 | |||||
2nd Quarter |
5.99 | 5.59 | 55.64 | 49.50 | |||||
3rd Quarter |
6.14 | 4.70 | 59.20 | 41.93 | |||||
4th Quarter |
5.53 | 4.51 | 53.79 | 41.54 | |||||
2005: |
|||||||||
1st Quarter (through 28 February 2005) |
5.58 | 5.11 | 53.25 | 47.86 | |||||
Last Six Months: |
|||||||||
September 2004 |
5.15 | 4.80 | 46.77 | 43.13 | |||||
October 2004 |
5.22 | 4.51 | 47.50 | 41.54 | |||||
November 2004 |
5.40 | 4.64 | 51.95 | 42.71 | |||||
December 2004 |
5.53 | 5.23 | 53.79 | 50.69 | |||||
January 2005 |
5.33 | 5.11 | 51.90 | 47.86 | |||||
February 2005 |
5.58 | 5.31 | 53.25 | 49.68 |
(i) | This does not include the anomalous closing share price of 386p on 31 July 2000 on the London Stock Exchange. |
135
Financial Calendar
Quarter One results and AGM |
5 May 2005 | |
Payment of 2004 final dividend |
13 May 2005 | |
Half year results announced |
4 August 2005 | |
Quarter Three results announced |
27 October 2005 | |
Payment of 2005 interim dividend |
11 November 2005 | |
Full year results announced |
Early February 2006 | |
Annual Report posted |
March 2006 | |
Annual General Meeting |
April 2006 |
Final Dividend
The Ordinary Shares and ADSs will trade ex-dividend on the London and New York Stock Exchanges respectively from 20 April 2005 and the record date will be 22 April 2005 in respect of the proposed 2004 final dividend of 3.20p per Ordinary Share to be paid on 13 May 2005.
Ordinary Shares
Payment of cash dividends
Shareholders who wish their dividends to be paid directly to a bank or building society and who have not already completed an electronic bank transfer mandate should contact the Companys registrars.
Dividend re-investment plan
The Company has a dividend re-investment plan that offers shareholders, except those in North America, the opportunity to invest their cash dividends in further Smith & Nephew Ordinary Shares, which are purchased in the market at competitive dealing costs. Application forms for re-investing the 2004 final dividend are available from Lloyds TSB Registrars who administer the plan on behalf of the Company.
UK capital gains tax
For the purposes of UK capital gains tax the price of Ordinary Shares on 31 March 1982 was 35.04p.
Smith & Nephew share price
The Companys share price is available on the Smith & Nephew website www.smith-nephew.com and at www.londonstockexchange.com where it is updated at intervals throughout the day. It is quoted daily in UK national newspapers, as well as on Ceefax and Teletext. The Financial Times Cityline Service, telephone +44 (0)906 8403 4043, provides an up to the minute share price. A fee (currently 60p per minute) is charged for this service.
Share dealing service
A postal and telephone facility that provides a competitive method of buying and selling Smith & Nephew shares is available through Hoare Govett Limited. For information contact Hoare Govett Ltd., 250 Bishopsgate, London EC2M 4AA, UK. Telephone +44 (0)20 7678 8300. Lloyds TSB Registrars or your bank or building society may also provide a share dealing service.
Smith & Nephew corporate ISA
The Company has a corporate Individual Savings Account (ISA), for UK shareholders, administered by Lloyds TSB Registrars. For information about this service please contact their helpline on telephone +44 (0)870 2424 244.
Shareview
To view information about your shareholdings on the internet, register at www.shareview.com , the Lloyds TSB Registrars enquiry and portfolio management service for shareholders. When you have registered for shareview you will also be able to register your proxy instructions online and elect to receive future shareholder communications via our website at www.smith-nephew.com rather than a copy in the post. Such electronic communications cut down printing and distribution costs and are less harmful to the environment.
Shareholder enquiries
For information about the AGM, shareholdings, dividends and changes to personal details all shareholders should contact Lloyds TSB Registrars, The Causeway, Worthing, West Sussex BN99 6DS, UK. Telephone +44 (0)870 600 3996.
136
American Depositary Receipts (ADRs)
In the US, the Companys Ordinary Shares are traded in the form of ADSs, evidenced by ADRs, and trade on the NYSE under the symbol SNN. Each American Depositary Share represents five Ordinary Shares. Bank of New York is the authorised depositary bank for the Companys ADR programme. A Global BuyDIRECT plan is available for US residents, enabling investment directly in ADSs with reduced brokerage commissions and service costs. For further information contact: Bank of New York on +1-888-BNY-ADRS (toll-free) or visit www.adrbny.com.
The Company furnishes the Bank of New York, as depositary, with this annual report containing Consolidated Financial Statements and the opinion thereon by its independent auditors. Such financial statements are prepared under UK GAAP. The annual report contains reconciliations of net income, cash flow and shareholders funds prepared under UK GAAP to those prepared under US GAAP. The Company also furnishes the Bank of New York with semi-annual reports prepared in conformity with UK GAAP, which contain unaudited interim consolidated financial information. Upon receipt thereof, the Bank of New York mails all such reports to recorded holders. The Company also furnishes to the Bank of New York all notices of shareholders meetings and other reports and communications that are made generally available to shareholders of the Company. The Bank of New York makes such notices, reports and communications available for inspection by recorded holders of ADSs and mails to all recorded holders of ADSs notices of shareholders meetings received by the Bank of New York.
Smith & Nephew ADS price
The Companys ADS price can be obtained from the official New York Stock Exchange website at www.nyse.com and is quoted daily in the Wall Street Journal.
Annual General Meeting
The Companys sixty-eighth Annual General Meeting is to be held on 5 May 2005 at The Institution of Mechanical Engineers, Birdcage Walk, Westminster, London SW1H 9JJ at 1pm. Notice of the meeting is enclosed with an accompanying letter from the Chairman.
Registered office
Smith & Nephew plc, 15 Adam Street, London WC2N
Advisors
Solicitors: |
Ashurst | |
Pinsent Masons | ||
Auditors: |
Ernst & Young LLP | |
Stockbrokers: |
JP Morgan Cazenove | |
Dresdner Kleinwort Wasserstein |
137
The principal trading market for the Ordinary Shares is the London Stock Exchange. The Ordinary Shares were listed on the New York Stock Exchange on 16 November 1999, trading in the form of ADSs evidenced by ADRs. On 15 December 2003 a ratio change was effected whereby the number of Ordinary Shares represented by each ADS changed from ten to five. All prices of ADSs prior to this date have been restated to reflect this ratio change. The ADR facility is sponsored by the Bank of New York acting as depositary.
Shareholdings
As of 28 February 2005, 7,471,787 ADSs equivalent to 37,358,935 Ordinary Shares or approximately 4.0% of the total Ordinary Shares in issue, were outstanding and were held by 59 registered holders.
As of 28 February 2005, to the knowledge of the Group, there were 24,877 registered holders of Ordinary Shares, of whom 92 had registered addresses in the US and held a total of 269,506 Ordinary Shares (less than 0.1% of the total issued). Because certain Ordinary Shares are registered in the names of nominees, the number of shareholders with registered addresses in the US is not representative of the number of beneficial owners of Ordinary Shares resident in the US.
Until 23 June 2003 Smith & Nephew had in issue 268,500 5 1 / 2 % Cumulative Preference Shares of £1 each, whose right to a dividend of 5 1 / 2 % per annum was preferred over the rights to dividends of the holders of Ordinary Shares. The Cumulative Preference Shares were cancelled and repaid on 7 July 2003.
Major Shareholders
As far as is known to Smith & Nephew, the Group is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled by another corporation or by any government.
As of 28 February 2005, no persons are known to Smith & Nephew to have any interest (as defined in the Companies Act 1985) in 3% or more of the Ordinary Shares, other than AXA Investment Managers (5.2%, 48,966,535 Ordinary Shares) and Legal & General Investment Management (3.8%, 35,284,264 Ordinary Shares).
The following table shows changes over the last three years in the percentage of the issued share capital owned by shareholders holding 3% or more of Ordinary Shares, as notified to the Company under the Companies Act 1985:
As at 31 December
|
||||||
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
||||
(%) | ||||||
FMR Corp & Fidelity |
5.5 | 7.9 | 6.8 | |||
AXA Investment Managers |
3.7 | 3.7 | 5.0 | |||
Legal and General Investment Management |
3.3 | 3.4 | | |||
Capital Group of Companies Inc. |
| 8.0 | |
Purchase of Ordinary Shares on behalf of the Company
Total
shares
|
Average
paid per
|
|||
(Number) | (p) | |||
Date Purchased: |
||||
31 March 2004 |
447,709 | 540 | ||
15 December 2004 |
304,772 | 549 | ||
|
||||
Total |
752,481 | 545 | ||
|
The shares detailed above were purchased in the open market by Mourant & Co Trustees Limited, trustees of the Smith & Nephew Employees Share Trust Limited in connection with the long-term incentive plan referred to in the Remuneration Report. No shares were purchased or contracted for or are subject of an option under the company share repurchase programme approved by shareholders on 6 May 2004.
138
Exchange Controls and Other Limitations Affecting Security Holders
There are no UK governmental laws, decrees or regulations that restrict the export or import of capital or that affect the payment of dividends, interest or other payments to non-resident holders of Smith & Nephews securities, except for certain restrictions imposed from time to time by Her Majestys Treasury of the United Kingdom pursuant to legislation, such as the United Nations Act 1946 and the Emergency Laws Act 1964, against the government or residents of certain countries.
There are no limitations, either under the laws of the UK or under the Articles of Association of Smith & Nephew, restricting the right of non-UK residents to hold or to exercise voting rights in respect of Ordinary Shares, except that where any overseas shareholder has not provided to the Company a UK address for the service of notices, the Company is under no obligation to send any notice or other document to an overseas address. It is, however, the current practice of the Company to send every notice or other document to all shareholders regardless of the country recorded in the register of members, with the exception of details of the Companys dividend re-investment plan, which are not sent to shareholders with recorded addresses in the US and Canada.
139
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
2001
|
2000
|
|||||||||||
(£ million, except per Ordinary Share amounts) | |||||||||||||||
Amounts in accordance with UK GAAP: |
|||||||||||||||
Group Profit and Loss Account |
|||||||||||||||
Turnover: |
|||||||||||||||
Continuing operations |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,083.7 | 978.3 | 911.5 | ||||||||||
Discontinued operations |
| | 26.2 | 103.4 | 223.2 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Group turnover |
1,248.5 | 1,178.9 | 1,109.9 | 1,081.7 | 1,134.7 | ||||||||||
Share of joint venture |
165.9 | 163.9 | 155.0 | 123.6 | | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
1,414.4 | 1,342.8 | 1,264.9 | 1,205.3 | 1,134.7 | |||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Operating profit: |
|||||||||||||||
Continuing operations: |
|||||||||||||||
Before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
251.5 | 220.7 | 196.0 | 174.4 | 156.9 | ||||||||||
Goodwill amortisation |
(20.5 | ) | (18.5 | ) | (17.5 | ) | (10.4 | ) | (6.9 | ) | |||||
Exceptional items |
(80.0 | ) | (22.4 | ) | (29.9 | ) | (21.1 | ) | (12.4 | ) | |||||
Discontinued operations: |
|||||||||||||||
Before exceptional items |
| | 2.1 | 11.1 | 29.0 | ||||||||||
Exceptional items |
| | | | (3.9 | ) | |||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
151.0 | 179.8 | 150.7 | 154.0 | 162.7 | |||||||||||
Share of operating profit of the joint venture: |
|||||||||||||||
Before exceptional items |
23.8 | 22.7 | 19.6 | 12.8 | | ||||||||||
Exceptional items |
| (2.7 | ) | (2.6 | ) | (5.0 | ) | | |||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
174.8 | 199.8 | 167.7 | 161.8 | 162.7 | |||||||||||
Share of operating profit of the associated undertaking |
| 4.8 | 4.9 | | | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
174.8 | 204.6 | 172.6 | 161.8 | 162.7 | |||||||||||
Profit on disposals |
| 31.5 | 18.0 | 49.2 | 109.5 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Profit on ordinary activities before interest |
174.8 | 236.1 | 190.6 | 211.0 | 272.2 | ||||||||||
Net interest receivable/(payable) |
3.1 | (6.0 | ) | (12.7 | ) | (17.4 | ) | (7.0 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation |
177.9 | 230.1 | 177.9 | 193.6 | 265.2 | ||||||||||
Taxation |
(52.7 | ) | (82.0 | ) | (65.8 | ) | (64.0 | ) | (57.7 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Attributable profit for the year |
125.2 | 148.1 | 112.1 | 129.6 | 207.5 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Basic earnings per Ordinary Share |
13.39p | 15.92p | 12.11p | 14.07p | 20.07p | ||||||||||
Diluted earnings per Ordinary Share |
13.30p | 15.82p | 12.02p | 13.95p | 19.95p | ||||||||||
Results before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
|
||||||||||||||
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation |
177.9 | 230.1 | 177.9 | 193.6 | 265.2 | ||||||||||
Adjustments: |
|||||||||||||||
Continuing operations: goodwill amortisation |
20.5 | 18.5 | 17.5 | 10.4 | 6.9 | ||||||||||
Continuing operations: exceptional items |
80.0 | 22.4 | 29.9 | 21.1 | 12.4 | ||||||||||
Discontinued operations: exceptional items |
| | | | 3.9 | ||||||||||
Share of joint venture exceptional items |
| 2.7 | 2.6 | 5.0 | | ||||||||||
Net profit on disposals |
| (31.5 | ) | (18.0 | ) | (49.2 | ) | (109.5 | ) | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Profit before taxation, goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
278.4 | 242.2 | 209.9 | 180.9 | 178.9 | ||||||||||
Taxation on profit before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items |
(80.7 | ) | (70.2 | ) | (61.6 | ) | (52.3 | ) | (52.9 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Earnings before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items (Adjusted) |
197.7 | 172.0 | 148.3 | 128.6 | 126.0 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Average number of shares |
935 | 930 | 926 | 921 | 1,034 | ||||||||||
Adjusted basic earnings per Ordinary Share(i) |
21.14p | 18.49p | 16.02p | 13.96p | 12.19p | ||||||||||
Adjusted diluted earnings per Ordinary Share(ii) |
21.01p | 18.38p | 15.89p | 13.84p | 12.12p |
140
2004
|
2003
|
2002
|
2001
|
2000
|
|||||||||||
(£ million, except per Ordinary Share amounts) | |||||||||||||||
Group Profit and Loss Account (continued) |
|||||||||||||||
Dividends per Ordinary Share |
5.10 | p | 4.95 | p | 4.80 | p | 4.65 | p | 4.50 | p | |||||
Special dividends per Ordinary Share |
| | | | 37.14 | p | |||||||||
Operating profit (before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items) to Group turnover |
20.1 | % | 18.7 | % | 17.8 | % | 17.1 | % | 16.4 | % | |||||
Research and development costs to Group turnover |
5.3 | % | 5.7 | % | 5.5 | % | 4.7 | % | 4.0 | % | |||||
Capital expenditure (including intangibles) to Group turnover |
8.2 | % | 6.2 | % | 7.7 | % | 6.9 | % | 5.6 | % | |||||
Group Balance Sheet |
|||||||||||||||
Fixed assets |
740.6 | 653.6 | 701.5 | 570.0 | 426.0 | ||||||||||
Net current assets |
269.5 | 185.8 | 74.0 | 99.8 | 132.8 | ||||||||||
Creditors falling due after more than one year |
(160.1 | ) | (108.4 | ) | (170.5 | ) | (169.5 | ) | (187.2 | ) | |||||
Provisions |
(123.0 | ) | (90.2 | ) | (88.1 | ) | (95.3 | ) | (103.5 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Capital employed |
727.0 | 640.8 | 516.9 | 405.0 | 268.1 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Called up equity and non-equity share capital |
114.5 | 114.1 | 113.8 | 113.4 | 112.7 | ||||||||||
Reserves |
616.7 | 528.8 | 406.3 | 294.1 | 158.3 | ||||||||||
Investment in own shares |
(4.2 | ) | (2.1 | ) | (3.2 | ) | (2.5 | ) | (2.9 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Capital and reserves |
727.0 | 640.8 | 516.9 | 405.0 | 268.1 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Operating profit (before goodwill amortisation and exceptional items) to average capital employed plus net debt |
34 | % | 32 | % | 29 | % | 34 | % | 36 | % | |||||
Group Cash Flow |
|||||||||||||||
Cash flow from operating activities |
226.6 | 214.5 | 211.0 | 193.5 | 204.0 | ||||||||||
Capital expenditure net of disposals |
(101.1 | ) | (71.4 | ) | (85.4 | ) | (73.0 | ) | (63.8 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
125.5 | 143.1 | 125.6 | 120.5 | 140.2 | |||||||||||
Interest, taxation and dividends |
(66.0 | ) | (94.3 | ) | (102.1 | ) | (134.7 | ) | (529.4 | ) | |||||
Acquisitions and disposals (iii) |
(85.2 | ) | 48.1 | (128.8 | ) | 5.0 | 158.7 | ||||||||
Movements in share capital and own shares |
3.9 | 7.2 | 3.7 | 7.8 | 4.8 | ||||||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
(21.8 | ) | 104.1 | (101.6 | ) | (1.4 | ) | (225.7 | ) | |||||||
Exchange adjustments |
36.9 | 45.7 | 68.2 | (5.8 | ) | (32.9 | ) | ||||||||
Opening net borrowings |
(127.1 | ) | (276.9 | ) | (243.5 | ) | (236.3 | ) | 22.3 | ||||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Closing net borrowings |
(112.0 | ) | (127.1 | ) | (276.9 | ) | (243.5 | ) | (236.3 | ) | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Gearing |
15 | % | 20 | % | 54 | % | 60 | % | 88 | % |
(i) | Adjusted basic earnings per Ordinary Share is calculated by dividing profit before taxation, goodwill amortisation and exceptional items less taxation on profit before exceptional items by the average number of shares. |
(ii) | Adjusted diluted earnings per Ordinary Share is calculated by dividing profit before taxation, goodwill amortisation and exceptional items less taxation on profit before exceptional items by the diluted number of shares. |
(iii) | 2004 includes £50.3m of loan notes issued on acquisition. |
141
Amounts in accordance with US GAAP:
Smith & Nephew prepares its accounts in accordance with UK GAAP which differ in certain respects from US GAAP. Reconciliations of profit for the financial year and shareholders funds are set out in Note 39 of Notes to the Group Accounts. Key Profit and Loss and Balance Sheet data are as follows:
Years ended 31 December
|
||||||||||
2004
|
Restated
2003(v) |
Restated
2002(v) |
2001(vi)
|
2000(vi)
|
||||||
(£ million, except per Ordinary Share and per ADS
amounts) |
||||||||||
Profit from continuing operations |
142.4 | 156.5 | 127.6 | 68.5 | 76.3 | |||||
Profit from discontinued operations |
| 23.0 | 17.6 | 38.4 | 125.9 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Profit for the financial year |
142.4 | 179.5 | 145.2 | 106.9 | 202.2 | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Ordinary dividends per Ordinary Share |
5.00p | 4.85p | 4.70p | 4.55p | 5.70p | |||||
Special dividend per Ordinary Share |
| | | | 37.14p | |||||
Basic earnings as so adjusted per Ordinary Share: |
||||||||||
Continuing operations |
15.23p | 16.83p | 13.78p | 7.44p | 7.38p | |||||
Discontinued operations |
| 2.47p | 1.90p | 4.16p | 12.18p | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Total |
15.23p | 19.30p | 15.68p | 11.60p | 19.56p | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Diluted earnings as so adjusted per Ordinary Share (i): |
||||||||||
Continuing operations |
15.12p | 16.72p | 13.66p | 7.36p | 7.33p | |||||
Discontinued operations |
| 2.46p | 1.89p | 4.13p | 12.09p | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Total |
15.12p | 19.18p | 15.55p | 11.49p | 19.42p | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Basic earnings so adjusted per ADS(ii): |
||||||||||
Continuing operations |
76.2p | 84.1p | 68.9p | 37.2p | 36.9p | |||||
Discontinued operations |
| 12.4p | 9.5p | 20.8p | 60.9p | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Total |
76.2p | 96.5p | 78.4p | 58.0p | 97.8p | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Diluted earnings as so adjusted per ADS (ii): |
||||||||||
Continuing operations |
75.6p | 83.6p | 68.3p | 36.8p | 36.6p | |||||
Discontinued operations |
| 12.3p | 9.5p | 20.7p | 60.5p | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
||||||
Total |
75.6p | 95.9p | 77.8p | 57.5p | 97.1p | |||||
|
|
|
|
|
Group Balance Sheet Data
Amounts in accordance with UK GAAP: |
||||||||||
Total assets |
1,419.9 | 1,244.7 | 1,234.2 | 1,095.4 | 959.8 | |||||
Net assets (iv) |
727.0 | 640.8 | 516.9 | 405.0 | 268.1 | |||||
Share capital (iii) |
114.5 | 114.1 | 113.5 | 113.1 | 112.4 | |||||
Amounts in accordance with US GAAP: |
||||||||||
Total assets |
1,544.2 | 1,376.1 | 1,379.2 | 1,173.9 | 1,091.1 | |||||
Net assets |
781.9 | 690.7 | 565.1 | 536.1 | 460.9 |
(i) | Diluted earnings per Ordinary Share is calculated on the weighted average of 942m shares, (2003 936m shares, 2002 934m shares, 2001 930m shares and 2000 1,041m shares) after allowing for the allotment of shares under option schemes. |
(ii) | In 2002, 2001 and 2000 per ADS amounts have been restated to reflect each ADS representing five Ordinary Shares as the ratio changed from ten to five in 2003. |
(iii) | Included in net assets. |
(iv) | Net assets includes non-equity capital of £0.3m in 2002, 2001 and 2000. |
(v) | 2003 and 2002 profit from continuing operations, earnings per share and net assets in accordance with US GAAP have been restated as detailed in Note 39 of Notes to the Group Accounts. |
(vi) | 2001 and 2000 have not been restated as detailed in (v) above because it is considered impractical. |
142
The following table sets forth, for the periods and dates indicated, the Noon Buying Rates expressed in US Dollars per £1:
Year end
|
Average(ii)
|
High
|
Low
|
|||||
Fiscal year: |
||||||||
2000 |
1.49 | 1.51 | 1.65 | 1.40 | ||||
2001 |
1.45 | 1.44 | 1.50 | 1.37 | ||||
2002 |
1.61 | 1.51 | 1.61 | 1.41 | ||||
2003 |
1.78 | 1.65 | 1.78 | 1.55 | ||||
2004 |
1.92 | 1.84 | 1.95 | 1.75 |
(ii) | The average of the Noon Buying Rates on the last day of each month during the fiscal year. |
High
|
Low
|
|||
Month: |
||||
February 2005(i) |
1.93 | 1.86 | ||
January 2005 |
1.91 | 1.86 | ||
December 2004 |
1.95 | 1.91 | ||
November 2004 |
1.91 | 1.83 | ||
October 2004 |
1.84 | 1.78 | ||
September 2004 |
1.81 | 1.77 |
(i) | As of 28 February 2005, the latest practicable date, the Noon Buying Rate was 1.925. |
143
TAXATION INFORMATION FOR SHAREHOLDERS
The comments below are of a general and summary nature and are based on the Groups understanding of certain aspects of current UK and US federal income tax law and practice relevant to the ADSs and Ordinary Shares not in ADS form. The comments address the material US and UK tax consequences generally applicable to a person who is the beneficial owner of ADSs or Ordinary Shares and who, for US federal income tax purposes, is a US citizen or resident, a corporation (or other entity taxable as a corporation) created or organised in or under the laws of the United States, or an estate or trust the income of which is included in gross income for US federal income tax purposes (each a US Holder). The comments set out below do not purport to address all tax consequences of the ownership of ADSs or Ordinary Shares which may be material to a particular holder and in particular do not deal with the position of shareholders who directly or indirectly own 10% or more of the issued Ordinary Shares. This discussion does not apply to persons operating clearance and/or depository services and those whose holding of ADSs or Ordinary Shares is effectively connected with or pertains to either (i) a permanent establishment in the United Kingdom through which a US Holder carries on a business in the United Kingdom, or (ii) a fixed base from which a US Holder performs independent personal services in the United Kingdom. This discussion does not apply to certain investors such as tax-exempt entities, insurance companies, broker-dealers, traders in securities that elect to mark to market, US Holders holding ADSs or Ordinary Shares as part of a hedging, conversion or other integrated transaction or whose functional currency is other than the US Dollar and investors liable for alternative minimum tax. In addition, the comments below do not address US state, local or non-US (other than UK) taxes. The summary deals only with US Holders who hold ADSs or Ordinary Shares as capital assets. The summary is based on current UK and US law and practice which is subject to change, possibly with retroactive effect. US Holders are recommended to consult their own tax advisors as to the particular consequences to them of the ownership of ADSs or Ordinary Shares.
This discussion is based in part on representations by the depositary and assumes that each obligation under the deposit agreement and any related agreement will be performed in accordance with its terms. For the purpose of the US/UK Double Taxation Treaty (the Treaty) and the prior US/UK Double Taxation Treaty (the Prior Treaty) and US federal income tax law, US Holders of ADSs will generally be treated as owners of the Ordinary Shares represented by the ADSs. However, the US Treasury has expressed concerns that parties to whom depositary shares are pre-released may be taking actions that are inconsistent with the claiming of foreign tax credits by owners of ADSs. Such actions would also be inconsistent with the claiming of the reduced rate of tax, described below, applicable to dividends received by certain noncorporate US Holders. Accordingly, the analysis of the creditability of UK taxes, described below, and the availability of the reduced tax rate for dividends received by certain noncorporate US Holders could be affected by future actions that may be taken by parties to whom ADSs are pre-released.
Taxation of Dividends in the United Kingdom and the United States
Under the Prior Treaty, certain US Holders who are the beneficial owners of dividends on Ordinary Shares or ADSs were generally entitled to a tax credit payment in respect of dividends equal to one-ninth of the dividend paid (the Tax Credit Amount). This tax credit payment is reduced by a UK withholding (the UK withholding) of up to 15% of the gross dividend paid. Therefore, a US Holder will not actually receive any payment of this credit.
Under the Treaty, US Holders are no longer entitled to the Tax Credit Amount because the Treaty does not provide for that entitlement. Furthermore, the UK does not currently impose a withholding tax on dividends paid by a UK corporation. The Treaty applies to dividend payments after 1 May 2003. However, if a US Holder would have been entitled to greater benefits under the Prior Treaty, the US Holder may elect to continue to apply the Prior Treaty until 1 May 2004.
Dividends paid and, if a US Holder elects under the Prior Treaty to claim a foreign tax credit with respect to the UK withholding, the associated Tax Credit Amount will be treated for US federal income tax purposes as foreign source ordinary income to a US Holder when the dividend is received to the extent paid out of the Companys current or accumulated earnings and profits as determined for US federal income tax purposes. Such dividends will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to corporate US Holders. The amount of the dividend which is includible in taxable income of a US Holder is the US Dollar value of the dividend, converted using the exchange rate on the date the depositary receives the dividend in the case of ADSs, or the date the US Holder receives the dividend in the case of Ordinary Shares. Conversion by a US Holder of Sterling received as a dividend into US Dollars may result in US source ordinary income to the US Holder to the extent attributable to fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates between the date of receipt, as discussed in the previous sentence, and the date of conversion.
144
Dividends paid to certain noncorporate US Holders of Ordinary Shares or ADSs in taxable years beginning before 1 January 2009 may be subject to US federal income tax at lower rates than other types of ordinary income if certain conditions are met. Noncorporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisors to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at this favourable rate.
The limitation of foreign taxes eligible for the foreign tax credit is calculated separately with respect to specific classes of income. The UK withholding tax under the Prior Treaty is treated as foreign income tax which may, subject to certain limitations and restrictions, be eligible for credit against a US Holders US federal income tax liability for a US Holder that elects to include the associated Tax Credit Amount in income. US Holders should consult their own tax advisors regarding the availability of foreign tax credits in their particular circumstances.
Taxation of Capital Gains
US Holders, who are not resident or ordinarily resident for tax purposes in the UK, will not generally be liable for UK capital gains tax on any capital gain realised upon the sale or other disposition of ADSs or Ordinary Shares unless held in connection with a trade carried on in the UK through a permanent establishment (or in the case of individuals through a branch or agency). Furthermore, UK resident individuals who acquire ADSs or Ordinary Shares before becoming temporarily non-UK resident, may remain subject to UK taxation of capital gains on gains realised while non-resident.
For US federal income tax purposes, gains realised upon the sale or disposition of ADSs or Ordinary Shares by US Holders generally will be US source capital gains and will be long-term US source capital gains if the ADSs or Ordinary Shares were held for more than one year.
Inheritance and Estate Taxes
The UK Inland Revenue imposes inheritance tax on capital transfers which occur on death, and in the seven years preceding death. The UK Inland Revenue considers that the US/UK Double Taxation Convention on Estate and Gift Tax applies to inheritance tax. Consequently, a US citizen who is domiciled in the United States and is not a UK national or domiciled in the United Kingdom will not be subject to UK inheritance tax in respect of ADSs and Ordinary Shares. A UK national who is domiciled in the United States will be subject to both UK inheritance tax and US federal estate tax but will be entitled to a credit for US federal estate tax charged in respect of ADSs and Ordinary Shares in computing the liability to UK inheritance tax. Conversely, a US citizen who is domiciled or deemed domiciled in the United Kingdom will be entitled to a credit for UK inheritance tax charged in respect of ADSs and Ordinary Shares in computing the liability for US federal estate tax. Special rules apply where ADSs and Ordinary Shares are business property of a permanent establishment of an enterprise situated in the United Kingdom.
US Information Reporting and Backup Withholding Tax
A US Holder may be subject to US information reporting and backup withholding tax on dividends paid or the proceeds of sales made within the US or through certain US-related financial intermediaries, unless the shareholder is a corporation or other exempt recipient or, in the case of backup withholding, provides a correct US taxpayer identification number and certain other conditions are met. US backup withholding tax may also apply if there has been a notification from the US Internal Revenue Service of a failure to report all interest or dividends.
Backup withholding tax deducted may be credited against the US Holders US federal income tax liability, and, where the withholding tax exceeds the actual liability, the US Holder may obtain a refund by timely filing the appropriate refund claim with the US Internal Revenue Service.
UK Stamp Duty and Stamp Duty Reserve Tax
UK stamp duty is charged on documents and in particular instruments for the transfer of registered ownership of Ordinary Shares. Transfers of Ordinary Shares will generally be subject to UK stamp duty at the rate of ½% of the consideration given for the transfer with the duty rounded up to the nearest £5 if necessary.
UK stamp duty reserve tax (SDRT) arises when there is an agreement to transfer shares in UK companies for consideration in money or moneys worth, and so an agreement to transfer Ordinary Shares for money or other consideration may give rise to a charge to SDRT at the rate of ½% (rounded up to the nearest penny). If an instrument of transfer of the Ordinary Shares is subsequently executed, the instrument of transfer will generally be subject to stamp duty. The charge of SDRT will be cancelled, and any SDRT already paid will be refunded, if within six years of the agreement an instrument of transfer is produced to the United Kingdom Inland Revenue and the appropriate stamp duty paid.
145
Transfers of Ordinary Shares into CREST (an electronic transfer system) are exempt from stamp duty so long as the transferee is a member of CREST who will hold the Ordinary Shares as a nominee for the transferor and the transfer is in a form that will ensure that the securities become held in uncertificated form within CREST. Paperless transfers of Ordinary Shares within CREST for consideration in money or moneys worth are liable to SDRT rather than stamp duty. SDRT on relevant transactions will be collected by CREST at ½%, and this will apply whether or not the transfer is effected in the United Kingdom and whether or not the parties to it are resident or situated in the United Kingdom.
A charge of stamp duty or SDRT at the rates of 1 1 / 2 % of the consideration (or, in some circumstances, the value of the shares concerned) will arise on a transfer or issue of Ordinary Shares to the Depositary or to certain persons providing a clearance service (or their nominees or agents) and will generally be payable by the Depositary or person providing clearance service. In accordance with the terms of the Deposit Agreement, any tax or duty payable by the Depositary on deposits of Ordinary Shares will be charged by the Depositary to the party to whom ADRs are delivered against such deposits. No liability for SDRT will arise on any agreement to transfer an ADS or beneficial interest in an ADS.
No liability for stamp duty will arise on any transfer of, or agreement to transfer, an ADS or beneficial ownership of an ADS, provided that the ADS and any instrument of transfer or written agreement to transfer remains at all times outside the United Kingdom, and provided further that any instrument of transfer or written agreement to transfer is not executed in the United Kingdom and the transfer does not relate to any matter or thing done or to be done in the United Kingdom (the location of the custodian as a holder of Ordinary Shares not being relevant in this context). In any other case, any transfer of, or agreement to transfer, an ADS or beneficial ownership of an ADS could, depending on all the circumstances of the transfer, give rise to a charge to stamp duty.
146
MEMORANDUM AND ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION
The following summarises certain material rights of holders of the Companys Ordinary Shares under the material provisions of the Companys memorandum and articles of association and English law. This summary is qualified in its entirety by reference to the Companies Act 1985 and the Companys memorandum and articles of association.
The Companys Ordinary Shares may be held in certificated or uncertificated form. No holder of the Companys shares will be required to make additional contributions of capital in respect of the Companys shares in the future. In accordance with English law the Companys Ordinary Shares rank equally.
In the following description, a shareholder is the person registered in the Companys register of members as the holder of an Ordinary Share.
The Company is incorporated under the name Smith & Nephew plc and is registered in England and Wales with registered number 324357. The fourth clause of the Companys memorandum of association provides that its objects include to carry on business as an investment holding company, to carry on all or any of the businesses of dealers in and manufacturers of surgical dressings and instruments, pharmaceutical preparations or articles, proprietary articles of all kinds, surgical and scientific apparatus and materials of all kinds and buyers and sellers of goods of all kinds. The memorandum grants to the Company a range of corporate capabilities to effect these objects.
Directors
Under the Companys articles of association, a director may not vote in respect of any contract, arrangement, transaction or proposal in which he, or any person connected with him, has any material interest other than by virtue of his interests in securities of, or otherwise in or through, the Company. This is subject to certain exceptions relating to proposals (a) indemnifying him in respect of obligations incurred on behalf of the Company, (b) indemnifying a third party in respect of obligations of the Company for which the director has assumed responsibility under an indemnity or guarantee, (c) relating to an offer of securities in which he will be interested as an underwriter, (d) concerning another body corporate in which the director is beneficially interested in less than one percent of the issued shares of any class of shares of such a body corporate, (e) relating to an employee benefit in which the director will share equally with other employees and (f) relating to any insurance that the Company is empowered to purchase for the benefit of directors of the Company in respect of actions undertaken as directors (and/or officers) of the Company.
A director shall not vote or be counted in any quorum concerning his own appointment or terms of his appointment.
The directors are empowered to exercise all the powers of the Company to borrow money, subject to the limitation that the aggregate amount of all monies borrowed after deducting cash and current asset investments by the Company and its subsidiaries shall not exceed an amount equal to two and one half times the Companys consolidated share capital and aggregate reserves, but after: adjustments for the variation to share capital and aggregate reserves since the latest audited consolidated balance sheet; deducting distributed and proposed distributions not previously provided out of profits earned prior to the date of the latest audited consolidated balance sheet, any amount attributable to non-Group shareholders in subsidiaries of the Company and any debit balance on the combined or Group profit and loss account, unless sanctioned by an ordinary resolution of the Company; adding back any goodwill on the acquisition of businesses that had been previously set off against reserves to the extent that the businesses have not been discontinued or disposed of and after deducting any permanent decrease in the value of these businesses; and making such adjustments as the auditors may consider appropriate.
Any director who has been appointed by the directors since the previous Annual General Meeting of shareholders, either to fill a casual vacancy or as an additional director, holds office only until the next Annual General Meeting and then shall be eligible for re-election by the shareholders. The other directors retire and are eligible for re-appointment at the third Annual General Meeting after the meeting at which they were last re-appointed. The directors are subject to removal with or without cause by the Board or the shareholders. Any director attaining 70 years of age retires at the next Annual General Meeting following their birthday. Such a Director may be re-appointed at the next Annual General Meeting. Directors are not required to hold any shares of the Company by way of qualification.
147
Rights Attaching to Shares
Under English law, dividends are payable on the Companys Ordinary Shares only out of profits available for distribution, as determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom and by the Companies Act 1985. Holders of the Companys Ordinary Shares are entitled to receive final dividends as may be declared by the shareholders in general meeting, rateable according to the amounts paid up on such shares, provided that the dividend cannot exceed the amount recommended by the Directors.
The Companys Board of Directors may declare such interim dividends as appear to them to be justified by the Companys financial position. If authorised by an ordinary resolution of the shareholders, the Board may also direct payment of a dividend in whole or in part by the distribution of specific assets (and in particular of paid up shares or debentures of the Company).
Any dividend unclaimed after 12 years from the date the dividend was declared, or became due for payment, will be forfeited and will revert to the Company.
Voting Rights
Voting at any general meeting of shareholders is by a show of hands unless a poll, which is a written vote, is duly demanded and held. On a show of hands, every shareholder who is present in person at a general meeting has one vote regardless of the number of shares held. On a poll, every shareholder who is present in person or by proxy has one vote for each Ordinary Share held by that shareholder. A poll may be demanded by any of the following:
| the chairman of the meeting; |
| at least five shareholders present or by proxy entitled to vote at the meeting; |
| any shareholder or shareholders representing in the aggregate not less than one-tenth of the total voting rights of all shareholders entitled to vote at the meeting; or |
| any shareholder or shareholders holding shares conferring a right to vote at the meeting on which there have been paid-up sums in aggregate equal to not less than one-tenth of the total sum paid up on all the shares conferring that right. |
A proxy form will be treated as giving the proxy the authority to demand a poll, or to join others in demanding one, as above.
The necessary quorum for a general meeting is two shareholders present in person or by proxy carrying the right to vote upon the business to be transacted.
Matters are transacted at general meetings of the Company by the processing and passing of resolutions of which there are three kinds of which the most frequent will be ordinary or special resolutions:
| an ordinary resolution, which includes resolutions for the re-election of directors, the approval of financial statements, the declaration of dividends, the appointment and re-appointment of auditors, the increase of authorised share capital or the grant of authority to allot shares; |
| a special resolution, which includes resolutions amending the Companys memorandum and articles of association, disapplying statutory pre-emption rights or changing the Companys name; and |
| an extraordinary resolution, which includes resolutions modifying the rights of any class of the Companys shares at a meeting of the holders of such class or relating to certain matters concerning the Companys winding up. |
An ordinary resolution requires the affirmative vote of a majority of the votes of those persons voting at the meeting at which there is a quorum.
Special and extraordinary resolutions require the affirmative vote of not less than three-quarters of the persons voting at the meeting at which there is a quorum.
In the case of an equality of votes, whether on a show of hands or on a poll, the chairman of the meeting is entitled to cast the deciding vote in addition to any other vote he may have as proxy.
Annual General Meetings must be convened upon advance written notice of 21 days. Other meetings must be convened upon advance written notice of 21 days for the passing of a special resolution and 14 days for any
148
other resolution, depending on the nature of the business to be transacted. The days of delivery or receipt of notice are not included. The notice must specify the nature of the business to be transacted. Meetings are convened by the Board of Directors. Members with 10% of the Ordinary Share capital of the Company may requisition the Board to convene a meeting.
Variation of Rights
If, at any time, the Companys share capital is divided into different classes of shares, the rights attached to any class may be varied, subject to the provisions of the Companies Act, with the consent in writing of holders of three-quarters in value of the shares of that class or upon the adoption of an extraordinary resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the shares of that class. At every such separate meeting, all of the provisions of the articles of association relating to proceedings at an Extraordinary General Meeting apply, except that the quorum is to be the number of persons (which must be two or more) who hold or represent by proxy not less than one-third in nominal value of the issued shares of the class and at any such meeting a poll may be demanded in writing by any five persons who hold or represent by proxy not less than one fortieth of the nominal value of the shares of that class.
Rights in a Winding-Up
Except as the Companys shareholders have agreed or may otherwise agree, upon the Companys winding up, the balance of assets available for distribution:
| after the payment of all creditors including certain preferential creditors, whether statutorily preferred creditors or normal creditors; and |
| subject to any special rights attaching to any other class of shares; |
is to be distributed among the holders of Ordinary Shares according to the amounts paid-up on the shares held by them. This distribution is generally to be made in cash. A liquidator may, however, upon the adoption of any extraordinary resolution of the shareholders and any other sanction required by law, divide among the shareholders the whole or any part of the Companys assets in kind.
Limitations on Voting and Shareholding
There are no limitations imposed by English law or the Companys memorandum or articles of association on the right of non-residents or foreign persons to hold or vote the Companys Ordinary Shares or ADSs, other than the limitations that would generally apply to all of the Companys shareholders.
149
This table has been provided as a cross reference from the information included in this Annual Report to the requirements of Form 20-F.
PART I |
Page
|
|||||
Item 1 |
Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisors | n/a | ||||
Item 2 |
Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable | n/a | ||||
Item 3 |
Key Information | |||||
A | Selected Financial Data | 140-143 | ||||
B | Capitalisation and Indebtedness | n/a | ||||
C | Reason for the Offer and Use of Proceeds | n/a | ||||
D | Risk Factors | 12, 23-26 | ||||
Item 4 |
Information on the Company | |||||
A | History and Development of the Company | 5 | ||||
B | Business Overview | 3, 6-15, 76-78 | ||||
C | Organisational Structure | 6, 130 | ||||
D | Property, Plants and equipment | 15 | ||||
Item 5 |
Operating and Financial Review and Prospects | |||||
A | Operating results | 28-40, 44-45 | ||||
Under International Financial Reporting Standards | 46 | |||||
Under US accounting principles | 47 | |||||
B | Liquidity and Capital Resources | 42-45 | ||||
C | Research and Development; Intellectual Property | 14-15 | ||||
D | Trend Information | 41 | ||||
E | Off Balance Sheet Arrangements | 45 | ||||
F | Tabular Disclosure of Contractual Obligations | 45 | ||||
G | Safe Harbor | 3 | ||||
Item 6 |
Directors, Senior Management and Employees | |||||
A | Directors and Senior Management | 49-50 | ||||
B | Compensation | 57-65 | ||||
C | Board Practices | 51-55 | ||||
D | Employees | 22, 83 | ||||
E | Share Ownership | 22, 56-65, 97-100 | ||||
Item 7 |
Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions | |||||
A | Major Shareholders | 56, 138 | ||||
Host Country Shareholders | 138 | |||||
B | Related Party Transactions | 45, 113 | ||||
Item 8 |
Financial Information | |||||
A | Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information | 67-132 | ||||
Legal Proceedings | 16 | |||||
Dividends | 134 | |||||
B | Significant Changes | n/a | ||||
Item 9 |
The Offer and Listing | |||||
A | Offer and Listing details | 135 | ||||
B | Plan of Distribution | n/a | ||||
C | Markets | 138 | ||||
D | Selling Shareholders | n/a | ||||
E | Dilution | n/a | ||||
F | Expenses of the Issue | n/a | ||||
Item 10 |
Additional Information | |||||
A | Share capital | n/a | ||||
B | Memorandum and Articles of Association | 147-149 | ||||
C | Material Contracts | None | ||||
D | Exchange Controls | 139 | ||||
E | Taxation | 144-146 | ||||
F | Dividends and Paying Agents | n/a | ||||
G | Statement by Experts | n/a | ||||
H |
Documents on Display |
56 | ||||
I |
Subsidiary Information |
130 |
150
151
Unless the context indicates otherwise, the following terms have the meanings shown below:
Term |
Meaning |
|
ADR |
In the US, the Companys Ordinary Shares are traded in the term of ADSs evidenced by American Depository Receipts (ADRs). | |
ADS |
In the US, the Companys Ordinary Shares are traded in the term of American Depositary Shares (ADSs). | |
Access |
A product group within endoscopy comprising fluid management and insufflation devices for better surgical access. | |
Advanced wound management products |
A product group comprising products associated with the treatment of skin wounds, ranging from products that provide moist wound healing using breathable films and polymers to products providing active wound healing by biochemical or cellular action. | |
AGM |
Annual general meeting of the Group. | |
Arthroscopy |
Endoscopy of the joints is termed arthroscopy, with the principal applications being the knee and shoulder. | |
Bandaging |
A product group comprising traditional adhesive and support bandaging. | |
Cannula |
A sleeve which allows an entry point for surgeons to introduce endoscopic devices into a body cavity. | |
Casting |
A product group comprising products that are used externally to immobilise a bone fracture or damaged joint, usually made of plaster of paris or synthetic materials. | |
Chronic and acute wounds |
Chronic wounds are those with long or unknown healing times including leg ulcers, pressure sores and diabetic foot ulcers. Acute wounds are those for which healing times can be reasonably predicted such as surgical and post-operative wounds. | |
Company |
Smith & Nephew plc or, where appropriate, the Companys Board of Directors, unless the context otherwise requires. | |
Class III medical device |
A medical device that requires pre-market approval by the relevant regulatory body in the US or Europe. | |
Companies Act |
Companies Act 1985, as amended, of Great Britain. | |
Debridement |
A medical treatment or surgical procedure to remove dead tissue and other unwanted material from a wound to aid healing. | |
Demineralised bone matrix |
Cortical bone processed from donors; primarily used as a bone void filler. | |
Endoscopy |
Endoscopy allows surgeons to operate through coin-sized openings in the body, rather than large incisions. | |
Endoscopy products |
A product group comprising specialised viewing and access devices, surgical instruments and powered equipment used in minimally invasive surgical procedures. Through a small incision surgeons are able to see inside the body using a monitor and identify and repair defects. | |
Euro or |
References to the common currency used in the majority of the countries of the European Union. | |
External fixation |
The use of wires or pins transfixed through bone to hold the position of a fracture. | |
FDA |
US Food and Drug Administration. | |
FAS |
A Financial Accounting Standard which is part of US GAAP. | |
FRS |
A Financial Reporting Standard which is part of UK GAAP. | |
Financial statements |
Refers to the consolidated Group Accounts of Smith & Nephew plc. |
152
Term |
Meaning |
|
Group or Smith & Nephew |
Used for convenience to refer to the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries, unless the context otherwise requires. | |
IDET procedure |
Intradiscal Electrothermal Therapy (IDET) is a thermal procedure intended for the shrinkage and decompression of the spinal disc to treat patients with annular disruption of contained herniations. | |
IFRS and IAS |
International Financial Reporting Standards and International Accounting Standards issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. | |
Insufflation |
The use of carbon dioxide to inflate body cavities during endoscopic surgery to enable surgeons to view internal organs. | |
Intramedullary nail system |
Stainless or titanium implants shaped like a nail implanted in the intramedullary canal in diaphyseal fractures. | |
Metal-on-metal hip resurfacing |
A less invasive surgical approach to treating arthritis in younger patients whereby only the surfaces of the hip joint are replaced leaving the hip head substantially preserved. | |
Obturator |
A blunt or dull tipped instrument that gently introduces a cannula into a body orifice. | |
Orthobiologic products |
Any product that is primarily intended to act as a scaffold and/or actively stimulates bone growth. | |
Orthopaedic products |
Products that comprise implants, devices and systems to replace diseased or injured hip, knee and shoulder joints, and trauma devices such as rods, pins, screws, plates and external frames used to treat bone fractures. | |
Papain urea |
Papain urea is a compound of an enzyme extracted from papaya and an organic wound softening agent. | |
Parent |
Smith & Nephew plc. | |
Pound Sterling, Sterling,
|
References to UK currency. 1p is equivalent to one hundredth of £1. | |
Rehabilitation |
A business segment comprising products equipment and systems used to increase, maintain or improve patient functional capabilities after surgery, or stroke or of individuals with disabilities. | |
Repair |
A product group within endoscopy comprising specialised devices, fixation systems and bioabsorbable materials to repair joints and associated tissue. | |
Resection |
Products that cut or ablate tissue within endoscopy comprising mechanical blades, radio frequency wands, electromechanical and hand instruments for resecting tissue. | |
SSAP |
A Statement of Standard Accounting Practice which is part of UK GAAP. | |
Sales |
Turnover. | |
Traditional woundcare |
Product group comprising medical textile products, adhesive tapes and fixative sheets to secure wound management products to the body. | |
UK |
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland. | |
UK GAAP |
Accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom. | |
US |
United States of America. | |
US Dollars, US $ or cents |
References to US currency. 1 cent is equivalent to one hundredth of US$1. | |
US GAAP |
Accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. | |
Visualisation |
Products within endoscopy comprising digital cameras, light sources, monitors, scopes, image capture, central control and multimedia broadcasting systems for use in endoscopic surgery with visualisation. | |
Wound bed |
An area of healthy dermal and epidermal tissue of a wound. |
153
SIGNATURE
The Registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this Annual Report on its behalf.
SMITH & NEPHEW plc (Registrant) |
||
By: |
/s/ PAUL CHAMBERS |
|
Name: |
Paul Chambers |
|
Title: |
Company Secretary |
London, England
March 16, 2005
EXHIBIT INDEX
Exhibit No. |
Description of Document |
Incorporated Herein by Reference To |
Filed
Herewith |
||||||||
1 |
(a) | Memorandum of Association | Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2000 filed on April 26, 2001 | ||||||||
(b) | Articles of Association | X | |||||||||
4 |
(a) |
(i | ) | Material contract: Agreement and Plan of Merger dated as of February 13, 2002, by and among Smith & Nephew, Inc., Orchid Merger Corp. and ORATEC Interventions, Inc. | Exhibit 2.2 to the Form 8-K of ORATEC Interventions, Inc. filed with Securities and Exchange Commission on February 19, 2002 (File No. 000-26745) | ||||||
4 |
(c) |
(i | ) | Service Agreement of Sir Christopher ODonnell | X | ||||||
(ii | ) | Service Agreement of Peter Hooley | X | ||||||||
(iii | ) | The Smith & Nephew 1985 Share Option Scheme | Registration Statement on Form S-8 No. 33-39802 filed on April 15, 1991 | ||||||||
(iv | ) | The Smith & Nephew 1990 International Executive Share Option Scheme | Registration Statement on Form S-8 No. 33-39814 filed on April 26, 1991 | ||||||||
(v | ) | The Smith & Nephew Long Term Incentive Plan | Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2000 filed on April 26, 2001 | ||||||||
(vi | ) | The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Approved Share Option Plan (as amended in 2004) | X | ||||||||
(vii | ) | The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan (as amended in 2004) | X | ||||||||
(viii | ) | The Smith & Nephew 2001 US Share Plan | Registration Statement on Form S-8 No. 333-13694 filed on July 9, 2001 | ||||||||
(ix | ) | The Smith & Nephew Sharesave Plan (2002) | Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed on April 25, 2003 | ||||||||
(x | ) | The Smith & Nephew International Sharesave Plan (2002) (as amended in 2004) | X | ||||||||
(xi | ) | The Smith & Nephew Italian Sharesave Plan (2002) | Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed on April 25, 2003 | ||||||||
(xii | ) | The Smith & Nephew Dutch Sharesave Plan (2002) | Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed on April 25, 2003 | ||||||||
(xiii | ) | The Smith & Nephew Belgian Sharesave Plan (2002) | Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed on April 25, 2003 | ||||||||
(xiv | ) | The Smith & Nephew French Sharesave Plan (2002) | Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed on April 25, 2003 | ||||||||
(xv | ) | Smith & Nephew Irish Employee Share Option Scheme | Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2003 filed on March 26, 2004 | ||||||||
(xvi | ) | Smith & Nephew 2004 Executive Share Option Scheme | Registration Statement on Form S-8 No. 333-122801 filed on February 14, 2005 | ||||||||
(xvii | ) | Smith & Nephew 2004 Performance Share Plan | Registration Statement on Form S-8 No. 333-122801 filed on February 14, 2005 | ||||||||
(xviii | ) | Smith & Nephew 2004 Co-investment Plan | Registration Statement on Form S-8 No. 333-122801 filed on February 14, 2005 | ||||||||
8 |
Principal Subsidiaries | X | |||||||||
12 |
(a) | Certification of Sir Christopher ODonnell, filed Pursuant to Securities Exchange Act of 1934 as amended (the Exchange Act), Rule 13a 14(a) | X | ||||||||
(b) |
Certification of Peter Hooley filed pursuant to Exchange Act rule 13a 14(a) | X | |||||||||
13 |
(a) |
Certification of Sir Christopher ODonnell and Peter Hooley furnished pursuant to Exchange Act Rule 13a 14(a) | X |
Exhibit 1 (b)
No. 324357
THE COMPANIES ACT 1985
- to -
THE COMPANIES ACT 1989
COMPANY LIMITED BY SHARES
ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION
- of -
SMITH & NEPHEW plc
(adopted by Special Resolution at a general meeting of the
Company held on 6 May 2004)
CONTENTS
41. | Notice of refusal | 14 | ||
42. | Suspension of registration | 14 | ||
43. | No fee for registration | 14 | ||
44. | Retention of transfers | 14 | ||
45. | Renunciation deemed to be a transfer | 14 | ||
TRANSMISSION OF SHARES | 14 | |||
46. | Transmission on death | 14 | ||
47. | Election of person entitled by transmission | 14 | ||
48. | Rights of person entitled by transmission | 15 | ||
UNTRACEABLE SHAREHOLDERS | 15 | |||
49. | Power to sell shares | 15 | ||
50. | Procedure on sale | 16 | ||
DISCLOSURE OF INTERESTS | 16 | |||
51. | Disclosure of interests | 16 | ||
ALTERATION OF SHARE CAPITAL | 19 | |||
52. | Increase, consolidation, sub-division and cancellation | 19 | ||
53. | Fractions arising on consolidation | 19 | ||
54. | Reduction of capital | 20 | ||
PURCHASE OF OWN SHARES | 20 | |||
55. | Purchase of own shares | 20 | ||
GENERAL MEETINGS | 20 | |||
56. | Annual general meetings | 20 | ||
57. | Calling of general meetings | 20 | ||
NOTICE OF GENERAL MEETINGS | 21 | |||
58. | Length of notice | 21 | ||
59. | Contents of notice | 21 | ||
60. | Omission or non-receipt of notice | 21 | ||
PROCEEDINGS AT GENERAL MEETINGS | 21 | |||
61. | Special business | 21 | ||
62. | Quorum | 22 | ||
63. | Procedure if quorum not present | 22 | ||
64. | Security arrangements | 22 | ||
65. | Chairman | 22 | ||
66. | Directors right to attend and speak | 23 | ||
67. | Adjournment | 23 | ||
68. | Meeting at more than one place | 23 | ||
69. | Amendments to resolutions | 24 | ||
70. | Method of voting and demand for a poll | 24 | ||
71. | Declaration by chairman | 25 | ||
72. | Withdrawal of demand for a poll | 25 | ||
73. | Method of taking a poll | 25 | ||
74. | Casting vote | 25 | ||
75. | When poll to be taken | 25 | ||
76. | Notice of a poll | 25 | ||
77. | Written resolutions | 25 | ||
VOTES OF MEMBERS | 26 | |||
78. | Votes of members | 26 | ||
79. | Joint holders | 26 | ||
80. | Votes on behalf of incapable members | 26 | ||
81. | No right to attend or vote where sums overdue | 26 | ||
82. | Objections to voters | 26 | ||
PROXIES | 27 | |||
83. | Appointment of proxy | 27 | ||
84. | Form of proxy | 27 | ||
85. | Delivery of proxies | 27 | ||
86. | Multiple proxies | 28 | ||
87. | Determination of proxys authority | 28 |
REPRESENTATIVES OF CORPORATIONS | 29 | |||
88. |
Representatives of corporations | 29 | ||
NUMBER OF DIRECTORS | 29 | |||
89. |
Number of Directors | 29 | ||
APPOINTMENT AND RETIREMENT OF DIRECTORS | 29 | |||
90. |
Directors to retire at third annual general meeting | 29 | ||
91. |
Timing of vacation of office | 29 | ||
92. |
Persons eligible as Directors | 29 | ||
93. |
Power of the company to appoint Directors | 30 | ||
94. |
Power of the board to appoint Directors | 30 | ||
95. |
Age of Directors | 30 | ||
DISQUALIFICATION AND REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS | 30 | |||
96. |
Vacation of office | 30 | ||
ALTERNATE DIRECTORS | 31 | |||
97. |
Appointment of Alternate Directors | 31 | ||
98. |
Termination of appointment | 31 | ||
99. |
Effect of appointment | 31 | ||
100. |
Expenses and remuneration | 31 | ||
101. |
Alternate Director to be an officer | 31 | ||
102. |
Method of appointment and removal | 32 | ||
103. |
Appointee acting in more than once capacity | 32 | ||
POWERS OF DIRECTORS | 32 | |||
104. |
General powers of the company vested in the board | 32 | ||
105. |
Local board | 32 | ||
106. |
Appointment of attorneys and agents | 32 | ||
DELEGATION OF DIRECTORS POWERS | 33 | |||
107. |
Delegation of Directors powers | 33 | ||
BORROWING POWERS |
33 | |||
108. |
Borrowing powers | 33 | ||
EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS | 35 | |||
109. |
Appointment to executive offices | 35 | ||
110. |
Managing director/chief executive to be a Director | 35 | ||
111. |
Other executive office not linked to directorship | 35 | ||
112. |
Emoluments of Executive Directors | 36 | ||
113. |
Delegation to Executive Directors | 36 | ||
ASSOCIATE DIRECTORS | 36 | |||
114. |
Associate directors | 36 | ||
REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS | 36 | |||
115. |
Directors fees | 36 | ||
116. |
Extra remuneration | 36 | ||
DIRECTORS EXPENSES AND INSURANCE | 37 | |||
117. |
Directors expenses | 37 | ||
118. |
Insurance | 37 | ||
DIRECTORS GRATUITIES AND PENSIONS | 37 | |||
119. |
Directors gratuities and pensions | 37 | ||
DIRECTORS INTERESTS | 37 | |||
120. |
Interests to be disclosed | 37 | ||
121. |
Permitted interests | 38 | ||
122. |
Director may act in a professional capacity | 38 | ||
123. |
Voting on matters where a director is interested | 38 | ||
124. |
Quorum when a director is not entitled to vote | 39 | ||
125. |
Proposals may be considered separately | 39 | ||
126. |
Chairman to decide whether a director may vote | 39 | ||
127. |
Suspension or ratification by ordinary resolution | 40 |
No 324357
THE COMPANIES ACT 1985
- and -
THE COMPANIES ACT 1989
PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED BY SHARES
ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION
OF
SMITH & NEPHEW plc
(adopted by Special Resolution passed on 6 May 2004)
PRELIMINARY
1. | Exclusion of Table A |
No regulations for management of a company set out in, or in any subordinate legislation made under, any statute concerning companies shall apply as the articles or regulations of the Company.
2. | Definitions and construction |
In these Articles:-
2.1 | if not inconsistent with the subject or context:- |
Act |
means the Companies Act 1985 (as amended by the Companies Act 1989) | |
Acts |
means the Act, the Companies Act 1989, the Regulations and all other statutes, orders, regulations or other subordinate legislation for the time being in force concerning companies registered under the Act so far as they apply to the Company |
- 1 -
address |
in relation to electronic communications, includes any number or address used for the purposes of such communications | |
Alternate Director |
means an alternate director appointed in accordance with Article 97 | |
these Articles |
means these Articles of Association as from time to time altered | |
Auditors |
means the auditors for the time being of the Company | |
Board |
means the Directors or any of them acting as the board of directors of the Company | |
calendar year |
means a year from 1 January to 31 December inclusive | |
clear days |
means in relation to the period of a notice that period excluding the day when the notice is given or deemed to be given and the day for which it is given or on which it is to take effect | |
connected with |
in relation to a Director has the meaning given by section 346 of the Act | |
Directors |
means the directors for the time being of the Company, or, as the case may be, the board of directors for the time being of the Company or the persons present at a duly convened meeting of the board of directors or any duly authorised committee thereof at which a quorum is present | |
dividend |
means dividend or bonus | |
electronic communication |
means, unless the contrary is stated, an electronic communication (as defined in the Act) comprising writing | |
Executive Director |
means a Director holding any office or employment or providing any services as referred to in Article 109 | |
Group |
means the Company and its subsidiaries for the time being | |
holder |
means in relation to any share the member whose name is entered in the Register as the holder of that share |
- 2 -
member |
means a member of the Company | |
Office |
means the registered office of the Company | |
Operator |
means a person approved by the Treasury under the Regulations | |
paid |
means paid or credited as paid | |
Register |
means the register of members of the Company and shall so long as the Regulations so permit or require, include a related Operator register of members | |
Regulations |
means the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001 (SI 2001 No 3755) | |
Relevant Time |
means in relation to any particular dividend the close of business on the record date for that dividend | |
Seal |
means the common seal of the Company | |
Secretary |
means the secretary of the Company or any other person appointed by the Board to perform the duties of the secretary of the Company including a joint, assistant or deputy secretary | |
Subsidiary Undertaking |
means a subsidiary undertaking of the Company | |
Transfer Office |
means the place where the Companys issuer register of members is for the time being situated | |
UKLA |
means the UK Listing Authority, a division of the Financial Services Authority in its capacity as competent authority for the purposes of section 72 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 | |
United Kingdom |
means Great Britain and Northern Ireland | |
in writing |
means the representation or reproduction of words, symbols or other information in a visible form by any method or combination of methods, whether comprised in an electronic communication or otherwise, and written shall be construed accordingly | |
year |
means any period of 12 consecutive months |
- 3 -
2.2 | words denoting the masculine gender shall include the feminine and neuter genders; words denoting the singular number shall include the plural number and vice versa; words denoting persons shall include corporations and unincorporated associations; |
2.3 | save as provided above any words or expressions defined in the Act or the Regulations shall, if not inconsistent with the subject or context, bear the same meaning; |
2.4 | all references to the Act, to any section or provision of the Act or to any other statute or statutory provision or subordinate legislation shall be deemed to include a reference to any statutory re-enactment or modification thereof for the time being in force (whether coming into force before or after the adoption of these Articles); |
2.5 | references to a share (or a holding of a share) being in uncertificated form or in certificated form are references, respectively, to that share being an uncertificated unit of a security or a certificated unit of a security; |
2.6 | any reference to a meeting shall not be taken as requiring more than one person to be present in person if any quorum requirement can be satisfied by one person; |
2.7 | any reference to a signature or to something being signed or executed includes an electronic signature or other means of verifying the authenticity of an electronic communication which the Board may from time to time approve, a signature printed or reproduced by mechanical or other means or any stamp or other distinctive marking made by or with the authority of the person required to sign the document to indicate it is approved by such person; |
2.8 | any reference to an instrument means, unless the contrary is stated, a written document having tangible form and not comprised in an electronic communication; |
2.9 | subject to the Acts, a special or extraordinary resolution shall be effective for any purpose for which an ordinary resolution is expressed to be required and a special resolution shall be effective for any purpose for which an extraordinary resolution is required under these Articles; and |
2.10 | headings to these Articles are inserted for convenience only and shall not affect construction. |
SHARE CAPITAL
3. | Share Capital |
The share capital of the Company on the adoption of these Articles is £149,550,000 divided into [1,223,590,909] ordinary shares of 12 2 / 9 pence each ( Ordinary Shares ).
4. | Rights Attaching to Shares |
The special rights and restrictions attached to and imposed on each class of share capital of the Company are as set out in these articles.
- 4 -
VARIATION OF RIGHTS
5. | Sanction required for variation |
If at any time the share capital is divided into different classes of shares, the rights attached to any class or any of such rights may, subject to the provisions of the Acts, whether or not the Company is being wound up, be modified, abrogated or varied with the consent in writing of the holders of three-quarters in nominal value of the issued shares of that class, or with the sanction of an extraordinary resolution passed at a separate general meeting of the holders of the shares of that class.
6. | Class meetings |
Any meeting for the purpose of the last preceding Article shall be convened and conducted in all respects as nearly as possible in the same way as an extraordinary general meeting of the Company; provided that no member, not being a Director, shall be entitled to notice thereof or to attend thereat, unless he be a holder of shares of the class intended to be affected by the resolution, and that no vote shall be given except in respect of a share of that class, and that the quorum at any such meeting shall (subject to the provisions as to an adjourned meeting herein contained) be members holding or representing by proxy one-third of the issued shares of that class, and that at any such meeting a poll may be demanded in writing by any five members present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote at the meeting and holding together shares of that class of a nominal amount of not less than one-fortieth of the nominal amount of the shares of that class.
7. | Pari passu issues |
The rights attached to any class of shares shall, unless otherwise expressly provided by the terms of issue of the shares of that class or by the terms upon which such shares are for the time being held, be deemed not to be modified, abrogated or varied by the creation or issue of further shares ranking pari passu therewith.
SHARES
8. | Rights attached to shares |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts and without prejudice to any rights attached to any existing shares, any share may be issued with such rights or restrictions as the Company may by ordinary resolution determine, or in the absence of such determination, or so far as any such resolution does not make specific provision, as the Board may determine.
9. | Unissued shares |
9.1 | Subject to the provisions of the Acts and to any resolution of the Company in general meeting, all unissued shares of the Company shall be at the disposal of the Board which may allot, grant options over or otherwise dispose of them to such persons, on such terms and at such times as it may think fit. |
9.2 | The Board is generally and unconditionally authorised, pursuant to section 80 of the Act, to exercise all powers of the Company to allot relevant securities up to an aggregate nominal amount equal to the section 80 amount, for each section 80 period. |
- 5 -
9.3 | The Board is empowered, pursuant to section 95 of the Act, to |
(a) | allot equity securities pursuant to the authority conferred by Article 9.2, as if section 89(1) of the Act did not apply to such allotment, for each section 89 period; and |
(b) | sell relevant shares (as defined in section 94(5) of the Act) in the Company if, immediately before the sale such shares are held by the Company as treasury shares (as defined in section 162A(3) of the said Act) ( treasury shares ) for cash (as defined in section 162D(2) of the said Act), as if section 89(1) of the said Act did not apply to any such sale; |
This power is limited to:
(a) | to deal with equity securities representing fractional entitlements; and |
(b) | to deal with legal or practical problems under the laws of, or the requirements of a recognised regulatory body or a stock exchange in, any territory; and |
9.3.2 | the allotment of equity securities other than pursuant to Article 9.3.1 up to an aggregate nominal amount equal to the section 89 amount. |
9.4 | By the authority and power conferred by Articles 9.2 and 9.3, the Board may during the section 80 period or the section 89 period make offers or agreements which would or might require securities to be allotted after such period and may allot securities in pursuance of such offers or agreements. |
9.5 | In this Article: |
9.5.1 | section 80 period means, first, the period from 29 April 2003 to the date of the annual general meeting in 2004 and, after expiry of that section 80 period, any subsequent period (not exceeding five years on any occasion) for which the authority conferred by Article 9.2 is renewed by ordinary or special resolution stating the section 80 amount; |
9.5.2 | section 89 period means, first, the period from 29 April 2003 to the date of the annual general meeting in 2004 and, after expiry of that section 89 period, any subsequent period (not exceeding five years on any occasion) for which the power conferred by Article 9.3 is renewed by special resolution stating the section 89 amount; |
- 6 -
9.5.3 | section 80 amount means, for the first section 80 period, £37,214,217 and, for a subsequent section 80 period, the amount stated in the relevant ordinary or special resolution or, in either case, another amount fixed by resolution of the Company; |
9.5.4 | section 89 amount means, for the first section 89 period, £5,576,228 and, for a subsequent period, the amount stated in the relevant special resolution; |
9.5.5 | the nominal amount of securities is, in the case of rights to subscribe for or convert any securities into shares of the Company, the nominal amount of shares which may be allotted pursuant to those rights. |
10. | Redeemable shares |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, shares may be issued which are to be redeemed or are liable to be redeemed at the option of the Company or the holder on such terms and in such manner as may be provided by or in accordance with these Articles.
11. | Payment of commission |
In addition to all other powers of paying commissions the Company may exercise the powers of paying commissions conferred by the Acts. Subject to the provisions of the Acts, any such commission may be satisfied by the payment of cash or by the allotment of fully or partly paid shares or partly in one way and partly in the other.
12. | Trusts not recognised |
Except as required by law, no person shall be recognised by the Company as holding any share upon any trust and (except as otherwise provided by these Articles or by law) the Company shall not be bound to recognise any interest in any share except an absolute right to the entirety of the share in the holder.
13. | Number of holders |
Shares may not be registered in the names of more than four persons jointly.
UNCERTIFICATED SHARES
14. | Shares in dematerialised form |
The Company may:-
14.1 | issue shares and other securities which do not have certificates; |
14.2 | permit existing shares and other securities to be held without certificates; and |
14.3 | permit any shares or other securities held without certificates to be transferred without an instrument of transfer |
in each case in dematerialised form pursuant to the Regulations.
- 7 -
15. | Application of Articles |
If the Company has any shares in issue which are in uncertificated form, these Articles will continue to apply to such shares, but only insofar as they are consistent with:-
15.1 | holding those shares in uncertificated form; |
15.2 | transferring ownership of those shares by using a relevant system; |
15.3 | any of the provisions of the Regulations; and |
15.4 | any regulation laid down by the Board under Article 18 |
and, without prejudice to the generality of this Article, no provision of these Articles shall apply or have effect to the extent that it is in any respect inconsistent with the maintenance, keeping or entering up by the Operator, so long as that is permitted or required by the Regulations, of an Operator register of securities in respect of that class of shares in uncertificated form.
16. | Forfeiture, lien and other entitlements |
Where any class of shares in the capital of the Company is a participating security and the Company is entitled under any provisions of the Acts or the rules made and practices instituted by the Operator or under these Articles to dispose of, forfeit, enforce a lien or sell or otherwise procure the sale of any shares which are held in uncertificated form, such entitlement (to the extent permitted by the Regulations and the rules made and practices instituted by the Operator) shall include the right to:-
16.1 | require the conversion of any shares held in uncertificated form which are the subject of any exercise by the Company of any such entitlement into certificated form to enable the Company to effect the disposal, sale or transfer of such shares; |
16.2 | direct the holder to take such steps, by instructions given by means of a relevant system or otherwise, as may be necessary to sell or transfer such shares; |
16.3 | appoint any person to take such other steps, by instruction given by means of a relevant system or otherwise, in the name of the holder of shares as may be required to effect the transfer of such shares and such steps shall be as effective as if they had been taken by the holder of the shares concerned; |
16.4 | transfer any shares which are the subject of any exercise by the Company of any such entitlement by entering the name of the transferee in the Register in respect of that share as a transferred share; |
16.5 | otherwise rectify or change the Register in respect of that share in such manner as may be appropriate; and |
16.6 | take such other action as may be necessary to enable those shares to be registered in the name of the person to whom the shares have been sold or disposed of or as directed by him. |
- 8 -
17. | Issuer record of securities |
The Company shall be entitled to assume that the entries on any record of securities maintained by it in accordance with the Regulations and regularly reconciled with the relevant Operator register of securities are a complete and accurate reproduction of the particulars entered in the Operator register of securities and shall accordingly not be liable in respect of any act or thing done or omitted to be done by or on behalf of the Company in reliance upon such assumption; in particular, any provision of these Articles which requires or envisages that action will be taken in reliance on information contained in the Register shall be construed to permit that action to be taken in reliance on information contained in any relevant record of securities (as so maintained and reconciled).
18. | Additional regulation |
The Board may also lay down regulations which:-
18.1 | govern the issue, holding and transfer and, where appropriate, the mechanics of conversion and redemption of shares held in uncertificated form; |
18.2 | govern the mechanics for payments involving the relevant system; and |
18.3 | make any other provisions which the Board considers are necessary to ensure that these Articles are consistent with the Regulations, and with any rules or guidance of an Operator under the Regulations. |
If stated expressly, such regulations will apply instead of other relevant provisions in these Articles relating to certificates and the transfer, conversion and redemption of shares and other securities and any other provisions which are not consistent with the Regulations.
SHARE CERTIFICATES
19. | Right to share certificate |
Every member (other than a person who is not entitled to a certificate under the Acts) upon becoming the holder of any shares in certificated form shall be entitled without payment to one certificate for all the shares of each class held by him in certificated form and, upon transferring a part of the shares comprised in a certificate, to a certificate for the balance of such shares held in certificated form. Shares of different classes may not be included in the same certificate. The Company shall not be bound to issue more than one certificate for shares held jointly by several persons and delivery of a certificate to one joint holder shall be a sufficient delivery to all of them.
20. | Execution of share certificates |
Share certificates of the Company (other than letters of allotment, scrip certificates and other like documents) shall, unless the Board by resolution otherwise determines, either generally or in any particular case or cases, be issued under the Seal or under any official seal kept by the Company by virtue of section 40 of the Act. Whether or not share certificates are issued under a seal, the Board may by resolution determine, either generally or in any particular case or cases, that any signatures on any certificates for shares, stock or debenture or loan stock (except where the trust deed constituting any
- 9 -
stock or debenture or loan stock provides to the contrary) or representing any other form of security of the Company need not be autographic but may be applied to the certificates by some mechanical means or may be printed thereon or that such certificates need not be signed by any person. Every share certificate shall specify the number and class of the shares to which it relates and the amount paid up on such shares.
21. | Replacement of share certificates |
If a share certificate is worn out, defaced, lost, stolen or destroyed, it may be renewed without payment of any fee but on such terms (if any) as to evidence and indemnity with or without security and otherwise as the Board requires and, in the case of a worn out or defaced certificate, on delivery up of that certificate. In the case of loss, theft or destruction, the person to whom the new certificate is issued may be required to pay to the Company any exceptional out of pocket expenses incidental to the investigation of evidence of loss, theft or destruction and the preparation of the requisite form of indemnity.
LIEN ON SHARES
22. | Companys lien on shares not fully paid |
The Company shall have a first and paramount lien on every share (not being a fully paid share) for all moneys (whether presently payable or not) payable at a fixed time or called in respect of that share. The Board may at any time declare any share to be wholly or in part exempt from the provisions of this Article. The Companys lien on a share shall extend to any amount payable in respect of it and to any share or security issued in right of it.
23. | Enforcing lien by sale |
The Company may sell in such manner as the Board determines any share on which the Company has a lien if the sum in respect of which the lien exists is presently payable and is not paid within 14 clear days after notice has been given to the holder of the share or to the person entitled to it in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of the holder or otherwise by operation of law, demanding payment and stating that if the notice is not complied with the shares may be sold.
24. | Giving effect to a sale |
To give effect to a sale the Board may authorise some person to execute an instrument of transfer or otherwise effect the transfer of the shares sold to, or in accordance with the directions of, the purchaser. The purchaser shall not be bound to see to the application of the purchase moneys, and the title of the transferee to the shares shall not be affected by any irregularity in or invalidity of the proceedings relating to the sale.
25. | Application of proceeds of sale |
The net proceeds of the sale, after payment of the costs of sale, shall be applied in or towards payment of so much of the sum for which the lien exists as is presently payable, and any residue shall (upon surrender to the Company for cancellation of the certificate, if any, for the shares sold and subject to a like lien for any moneys not presently payable as existed upon the shares before the sale) be paid to the person entitled to the shares at the date of the sale.
- 10 -
CALLS ON SHARES
26. | Calls |
Subject to the terms of allotment, the Board may make calls upon the members in respect of any moneys unpaid on their shares (whether in respect of nominal value or premium) and each member shall (subject to at least 14 clear days notice having been given specifying when and where payment is to be made) pay to the Company as required by the notice the amount called on his shares. A call may be required to be paid by instalments. A call may, before receipt by the Company of any sum due thereunder, be revoked in whole or part and payment of a call may be postponed in whole or part. A person upon whom a call is made shall remain liable jointly and severally with the successors in title to his shares for calls made upon him notwithstanding the subsequent transfer of the shares in respect of which the call was made.
27. | When call made |
A call shall be deemed to have been made at the time when the resolution of the Board authorising the call was passed.
28. | Liability of joint holders |
The joint holders of a share shall be jointly and severally liable to pay all calls in respect of that share.
29. | Interest due on non-payment |
If a call remains unpaid after it has become due and payable the person from whom the sum is due and payable shall pay interest on the amount unpaid from the day it became due and payable until it is paid at the rate fixed by the terms of allotment of the share or in the notice of the call or, if no rate is fixed, at the appropriate rate, but the Board may waive payment of the interest wholly or in part.
30. | Sums payable treated as calls |
An amount payable in respect of a share on allotment or at any fixed date, whether in respect of nominal value or premium or as an instalment of a call, shall be deemed to be a call and if it is not paid the provisions of these Articles shall apply as if that amount had become due and payable by virtue of a call.
31. | Power to differentiate |
Subject to the terms of allotment, the Board may make arrangements on the issue of shares for a difference between the holders in the amounts and times of payment of calls on their shares.
32. | Payment of calls in advance |
The Board may, if it thinks fit, receive from any member willing to advance it, all or any part of the moneys uncalled and unpaid upon any shares held by him, and may pay upon all or
- 11 -
any of the moneys so advanced (until the same would but for such advance become presently payable) interest at the appropriate rate or at such other rate as may be agreed between the Board and such member, subject to any directions of the Company in general meeting.
FORFEITURE AND SURRENDER OF SHARES
33. | Notice if call not paid |
If a call remains unpaid after it has become due and payable the Board may give to the person from whom it is due not less than 14 clear days notice requiring payment of the amount unpaid together with any interest which may have accrued and any costs, charges and expenses incurred by the Company by reason of such non-payment. The notice shall name the place where payment is to be made and shall state that if the notice is not complied with the shares in respect of which the call was made will be liable to be forfeited.
34. | Forfeiture on non-compliance with notice |
If the notice is not complied with any share in respect of which it was given may, before the payment required by the notice has been made, be forfeited by a resolution of the Board and the forfeiture shall include all dividends or other moneys payable in respect of the forfeited share and not paid before the forfeiture. The Board may accept upon such terms and conditions as may be agreed a surrender of any share liable to be forfeited and, subject to such terms and conditions, a surrendered share shall be treated as if it had been forfeited.
35. | Disposal of forfeited shares |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, a forfeited share may be sold, re-allotted or otherwise disposed of on such terms and in such manner as the Board determines either to the person who was before the forfeiture the holder or to any other person and at any time before sale, re-allotment or other disposition, the forfeiture may be cancelled on such terms as the Board thinks fit. Where for the purposes of its disposal a forfeited share is to be transferred to any person the Board may authorise some person to execute an instrument of transfer or otherwise effect the transfer of the share to that person.
36. | Effect of forfeiture |
A person any of whose shares have been forfeited shall cease to be a member in respect of them and shall surrender to the Company for cancellation the certificate, if any, for the shares forfeited but shall remain liable to the Company for all moneys which at the date of forfeiture were presently payable by him to the Company in respect of those shares with interest at the rate at which interest was payable on those moneys before the forfeiture or, if no interest was so payable, at the appropriate rate from the date of the forfeiture until payment but the Board may waive payment wholly or in part or enforce payment without any allowance for the value of the shares at the time of forfeiture or for any consideration received on their disposal.
- 12 -
37. | Statutory declaration as to forfeiture |
A statutory declaration by a Director or the Secretary that a share has been forfeited or sold to satisfy a lien of the Company on a specified date shall be conclusive evidence of the facts stated in it as against all persons claiming to be entitled to the share and the declaration shall (subject to the execution of an instrument of transfer if necessary) constitute a good title to the share and the person to whom the share is disposed of shall not be bound to see to the application of the consideration, if any, nor shall his title to the share be affected by any irregularity in or invalidity of the proceedings relating to the forfeiture, sale or disposal of the share.
TRANSFER OF SHARES
38. | Form of transfer |
A share held in certificated form may be transferred by an instrument of transfer in any usual form or in any other form which the Board may approve, which shall be executed by or on behalf of the transferor and, unless the share is fully paid, by or on behalf of the transferee. A share held in uncertificated form may be transferred by means of a relevant system. The transferor shall be deemed to remain the holder of the share until the transferee is entered on the Register as its holder.
39. | Refusal of registration of partly-paid share |
The Board may, in the case of shares held in certificated form, in its absolute discretion refuse to register the transfer of a share which is not fully paid but shall not be bound to specify the grounds upon which such registration is refused provided that, where any such shares are admitted to the Official List of the UKLA, such discretion may not be exercised in such a way as to prevent dealings in the shares of that class from taking place on an open and proper basis.
40. | Rights to refuse registration of certificated shares |
The Board may also refuse to register a transfer of shares held in certificated form unless the instrument of transfer is:-
40.1 | duly stamped or duly certified or otherwise shown to the satisfaction of the Board to be exempt from stamp duty, lodged at the Transfer Office or at such other place as the Board may appoint and (save in the case of a transfer by a person to whom no certificate was issued in respect of the shares in question) accompanied by the certificate for the shares to which it relates, and such other evidence as the Board may reasonably require to show the right of the transferor to make the transfer and, if the instrument of transfer is executed by some other person on his behalf, the authority of that person so to do; |
40.2 | in respect of only one class of shares; and |
40.3 | in favour of not more than four transferees. |
- 13 -
41. | Notice of refusal |
If the Board refuses to register a transfer of shares held in certificated form, it shall within two months after the date on which the transfer was lodged with the Company send to the transferee notice of the refusal.
42. | Suspension of registration |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, the registration of transfers of shares or of transfers of any class of shares may be suspended and the Register closed at such times and for such periods (not exceeding 30 days in any calendar year) as the Board may determine.
43. | No fee for registration |
No fee shall be charged for the registration of any instrument of transfer or other document relating to or affecting the title to any share or for making any entry in the Register affecting the title to any share.
44. | Retention of transfers |
The Company shall be entitled to retain any instrument of transfer which is registered, but any instrument of transfer which the Board refuses to register shall be returned to the person lodging it when notice of the refusal is given.
45. | Renunciation deemed to be a transfer |
For all purposes of these Articles relating to the registration of transfers of shares, the renunciation of the allotment of any shares by the allottee in favour of some other person shall be deemed to be a transfer and the Board shall have the same powers of refusing to give effect to such a renunciation as if it were a transfer.
TRANSMISSION OF SHARES
46. | Transmission on death |
If a member dies the survivor or survivors where he was a joint holder, and his personal representatives where he was a sole holder or the only survivor of joint holders, shall be the only persons recognised by the Company as having any title to his interest; but nothing contained in these Articles shall release the estate of a deceased member from any liability in respect of any share which had been held (whether solely or jointly) by him.
47. | Election of person entitled by transmission |
A person becoming entitled to a share in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of a member or otherwise by operation of law may, upon such evidence being produced as the Board may properly require and subject as subsequently provided in these Articles, elect either to become the holder of the share or to have some person nominated by him registered as the transferee. If he elects to become the holder he shall give notice to the Company to that effect. If he elects to have another person registered he shall, if the share is held in certificated form, execute an instrument of transfer of the share to that person or, if the share is held in uncertificated form, transfer the share to that person by way of a
- 14 -
relevant system. All the provisions of these Articles relating to the transfer and the registration of transfers of shares (including any right to refuse to register any transfer) shall apply to the notice or transfer as if it were a transfer by the member and the death or bankruptcy of the member or other event giving rise to the entitlement had not occurred.
48. | Rights of person entitled by transmission |
Subject to any other provisions of these Articles, a person becoming entitled to a share in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of a member or otherwise by operation of law shall have the rights to which he would be entitled if he were the holder of the share, except that he shall not, before being registered as the holder of the share, be entitled in respect of it to receive notice of or to attend or vote at any meeting of the Company or at any separate meeting of the holders of any class of shares in the Company. The Board may at any time give notice requiring any such person to elect either to be registered himself or to transfer the share and if the notice is not complied with within 60 days the Board may thereafter withhold payment of all dividends or other moneys payable in respect of the share until the requirements of the notice have been complied with.
UNTRACEABLE SHAREHOLDERS
49. | Power to sell shares |
The Company shall be entitled to sell at the best price reasonably obtainable any shares of a member or the shares to which a person is entitled by virtue of transmission on death or bankruptcy or otherwise by operation of law if and provided that:-
49.1 | for a period of twelve years, no cash dividend payable in respect of the shares has been claimed, no cheque or warrant sent by the Company through the post in a pre-paid envelope addressed to the member or to the person entitled to the shares at his address on the Register or (if different) the last known address given by the member or the person so entitled to which cheques and warrants are to be sent has been paid, each attempt to make a payment in respect of the shares by means of bank transfer or other method for the payment of dividends or other moneys in respect of shares has failed and no communication has been received by the Company from the member or the person so entitled (in his capacity as member or person entitled); |
49.2 | in such period of twelve years at least three dividends (whether interim or final) have become payable on the shares; |
49.3 | the Company has at the expiration of the said period of twelve years by advertisement in both a national newspaper and in a newspaper circulating in the area in which the address referred to in Article 49.1 is located given notice of its intention to sell such shares; and |
49.4 | during the period of three months following the publication of the said advertisements the Company has received no communication in respect of such share from such member or person entitled. |
If at any time during or after the said period of twelve years further shares have been issued in right of those held at the commencement of that period or of any issued in right
- 15 -
during that period and, since the date of issue, the requirements of Articles 49.1 to 49.4 have been satisfied in respect of such further shares, the Company may also sell the further shares.
50. | Procedure on sale |
To give effect to a sale pursuant to the preceding Article the Board may authorise some person to execute an instrument of transfer or otherwise effect the transfer of the shares to be sold. If the shares concerned are in uncertificated form, in accordance with the Regulations, the Company may issue a written notification to the Operator requiring conversion of the shares into certificated form. The purchaser shall not be bound to see to the application of the purchase moneys and the title of the transferee to the shares shall not be affected by any irregularity in or invalidity of the proceedings relating to the sale. The net proceeds of sale shall belong to the Company which shall be obliged to account to the former member or other person previously entitled to the shares for an amount equal to the net proceeds, which shall be a debt of the Company, and shall enter the name of such former member or other person in the books of the Company as a creditor for such amount. No trust shall be created and no interest shall be payable in respect of the debt, and the Company shall not be required to account for any money earned on the net proceeds, which may be employed in the business of the Company or invested in such investments for the benefit of the Company as the Board may from time to time determine.
DISCLOSURE OF INTERESTS
51. | Disclosure of interests |
51.1 | For the purposes of this Article, unless the context otherwise requires:- |
51.1.1 | disclosure notice means a notice issued by or on behalf of the Company requiring disclosure of interests in shares pursuant to section 212 of the Act; |
51.1.2 | specified shares means all or, as the case may be, some of the shares specified in a disclosure notice; |
51.1.3 | restrictions means one or more, as the case may be, of the restrictions referred to in Article 51.3; |
51.1.5 | restricted shares means all or, as the case may be, some of the specified shares referred to in a restriction notice; |
51.1.6 | a person other than the member holding a share shall be treated as appearing to be interested in that share if:- |
(a) |
the member has informed the Company, whether under any statutory provision relating to disclosure of interests or otherwise, that the person is, or may be, or has been at any time during the three years immediately |
- 16 -
preceding the date upon which the disclosure notice is issued, so interested; or |
(b) | the Board (after taking account of any information obtained from the member or, pursuant to a disclosure notice, from any other person) knows or has reasonable cause to believe that the person is, or may be, or has been at any time during the three years immediately preceding the date upon which the disclosure notice is issued, so interested; or |
(c) | in response to a disclosure notice, the member or any other person appearing to be so interested has failed to establish the identities of all those who are so interested and (after taking into account the response and any other relevant information) the Board has reasonable cause to believe that such person is or may be so interested; |
51.1.7 | connected shall have the meaning given to it in section 839 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988; |
51.1.8 | interested shall be construed as it is for the purpose of section 212 of the Act; |
51.1.9 | recognised investment exchange shall have the same meaning as in the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000; and |
51.1.10 | for the purposes of Articles 51.2.2 and 51.4 the Company shall not be treated as having received the information required by the disclosure notice in accordance with the terms of such disclosure notice in circumstances where the Board knows or has reasonable cause to believe that the information provided is false or materially incorrect. |
51.2 | Notwithstanding anything in these Articles to the contrary, if:- |
51.2.1 | a disclosure notice has been served on a member or any other person appearing to be interested in the specified shares; and |
then the Board may (subject to Article 51.7) determine that the member holding the specified shares shall, upon the issue of a restriction notice referring to those specified shares in respect of which information has not been received, be subject to the restrictions referred to in such restriction notice, and upon the issue of such restriction notice such member shall be so subject. As soon as practicable after the issue of a restriction notice the Company shall serve a copy of the notice on the member holding the specified shares.
51.3 | The restrictions which the Board may determine shall apply to restricted shares pursuant to this Article shall be one or more, as determined by the Board, of the following:- |
51.3.1 |
that the member holding the restricted shares shall not be entitled, in respect of the restricted shares, to attend or be counted in the quorum or vote either personally or by proxy at any general meeting or at any separate meeting of the holders of any |
- 17 -
class of shares or upon any poll or to exercise any other right or privilege in relation to any general meeting or any meeting of the holders of any class of shares; |
51.3.2 | that no transfer of the restricted shares shall be effective or shall be registered by the Company, provided that where the restricted shares are held in uncertificated form registration of a transfer may only be refused if permitted by the Regulations; |
51.3.3 | that no dividend (or other moneys payable) shall be paid in respect of the restricted shares and that, in circumstances where an offer of the right to elect to receive shares instead of cash in respect of any dividend is or has been made, any election made thereunder in respect of such specified shares shall not be effective. |
51.4 | The Board may determine that one or more of the restrictions imposed on restricted shares shall cease to apply at any time. If the Company receives in accordance with the terms of the relevant disclosure notice the information required therein in respect of the restricted shares all restrictions imposed on the restricted shares shall cease to apply seven days after receipt of the information. In addition, in the event that the Company receives notice of a transfer in respect of all or any restricted shares, which would otherwise be given effect to, pursuant to a sale:- |
51.4.1 | on a recognised investment exchange; or |
51.4.2 | on any stock exchange outside the United Kingdom on which the Companys shares are normally dealt; or |
51.4.3 | on the acceptance of a takeover offer (as defined in section 428 of the Act) for the shares of the class of which such restricted shares form part, |
to a party not connected with the member holding such restricted shares or with any other person appearing to be interested in such restricted shares, then all the restrictions imposed on such restricted shares shall cease to apply with effect from the date on which any such notice as aforesaid is received by the Company provided always that if, within ten days after such receipt, the Board decides that it has reasonable cause to believe that the change in the registered holder of such restricted shares would not be as a result of an arms length sale resulting in a material change in the beneficial interests in such restricted shares, the restrictions imposed on the restricted shares shall continue to apply.
51.5 | Where the Board makes a decision pursuant to the proviso to Article 51.4, the Company shall notify the purported transferee of such decision as soon as practicable and any person may make representations in writing to the Board concerning any such decision. The Company shall not be liable to any person as a result of having imposed restrictions or deciding that such restrictions shall continue to apply if the Board acted in good faith. |
51.6 | Where dividends or other moneys are not paid as a result of restrictions having been imposed on restricted shares, such dividends or other moneys shall accrue and, upon the relevant restriction ceasing to apply, shall be payable (without interest) to the person who would have been entitled had the restriction not been imposed. |
51.7 |
Where the aggregate number of shares of the same class as the specified shares in which any person appearing to be interested in the restricted shares (together with persons connected with him) appears to be interested represents less than 0.25 per cent. (in |
- 18 -
nominal value) of the shares of that class in issue at the time of service of the disclosure notice in respect of such specified shares only the restriction referred to in Article 51.3.1 may be determined by the Board to apply. |
51.8 | Shares issued in right of restricted shares shall on issue become subject to the same restrictions whilst held by that member as the restricted shares in right of which they are issued. For this purpose, shares which are allotted or offered or for which applications are invited (whether by the Company or otherwise) pro rata (or pro rata ignoring fractional entitlements and shares not allocated to certain members by reason of legal or practical problems associated with offering shares outside the United Kingdom) shall be treated as shares issued in right of restricted shares. |
51.9 | The Board shall at all times have the right, at its discretion, to suspend, in whole or in part, any restriction notice given pursuant to this Article either permanently or for any given period and to pay to a trustee any dividend payable in respect of any restricted shares or in respect of any shares issued in right of restricted shares. Notice of any suspension, specifying the sanctions suspended and the period of suspension, shall be given to the relevant holder in writing within seven days after any decision to implement such a suspension. |
ALTERATION OF SHARE CAPITAL
52. | Increase, consolidation, sub-division and cancellation |
The Company may by ordinary resolution:-
52.1 | increase its share capital by new shares of such amount as the resolution prescribes; |
52.2 | consolidate and divide all or any of its share capital into shares of larger amount than its existing shares; |
52.3 | subject to the provisions of the Acts, sub-divide its shares, or any of them, into shares of smaller amount and the resolution may determine that, as between the shares resulting from the sub-division, any of them may have any preference or advantage or deferred rights or be subject to any restrictions as compared with the others; and |
52.4 | cancel or reduce the nominal value of shares which, at the date of the passing of the resolution, have not been taken or agreed to be taken by any person and diminish the amount of its share capital by the amount of the shares so cancelled or the amount of the reduction. |
53. | Fractions arising on consolidation |
Upon any consolidation of shares into shares of larger amount the Board may settle any difficulty which may arise with regard to such consolidation and in particular may, as
- 19 -
between the holders of shares so consolidated, determine which shares are consolidated into each consolidated share and in the case of any shares registered in the name of one member being consolidated with shares registered in the name of another member the Board may make such arrangements for the allotment, acceptance and/or sale of shares representing fractional entitlements to the consolidated share or for the sale of the consolidated share and may sell the fractions or the consolidated share either upon the market or otherwise to such person at such time and at such price as it may think fit. For the purposes of giving effect to any such sale the Board may authorise some person to execute an instrument of transfer of the shares or fractions sold to, or in accordance with the directions of, the purchaser. The purchaser shall not be bound to see to the application of the purchase moneys nor shall his title to such shares be affected by any irregularity in or invalidity of the proceedings relating to the sale. The Board shall distribute the net proceeds of sale among such members rateably in accordance with their rights and interests in the consolidated share or the fractions provided that the Board shall have power when making such arrangements to determine that no member shall be entitled to receive such net proceeds of sale unless his entitlement exceeds such amount as the Board shall determine (not exceeding £3 per holding) and if the Board exercises such power the net proceeds of sale not distributed to members as a result shall belong absolutely to the Company.
54. | Reduction of capital |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, the Company may by special resolution reduce its share capital, any capital redemption reserve and any share premium account or other undistributable reserve in any way.
PURCHASE OF OWN SHARES
55. | Purchase of own shares |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, the Company may purchase its own shares (including any redeemable shares) and any shares to be so purchased may (subject to any resolution of the Company in general meeting) be selected by the Board in any manner.
GENERAL MEETINGS
56. | Annual general meetings |
All general meetings other than annual general meetings shall be called extraordinary general meetings.
57. | Calling of general meetings |
The Board may call general meetings and, on the requisition of members pursuant to the provisions of the Acts, shall forthwith convene an extraordinary general meeting. If there are not sufficient Directors capable of acting to call a general meeting, any Director may call a general meeting. If there is no Director able to act, any two members may call a general meeting for the purpose of appointing Directors.
- 20 -
NOTICE OF GENERAL MEETINGS
58. | Length of notice |
Unless consent to short notice is obtained in accordance with the provisions of the Acts, an annual general meeting or an extraordinary general meeting called for the passing of a special resolution shall be called by at least 21 clear days notice. All other extraordinary general meetings shall be called by at least 14 clear days notice. Subject to the provisions of these Articles and to any restrictions imposed on any shares, every notice of meeting shall be given to all the members, all other persons who are at the date of the notice entitled to receive notices from the Company and to the Directors and Auditors.
59. | Contents of notice |
Every notice of meeting shall specify the place, the day and the time of the meeting and, in the case of special business (within the meaning of Article 61), the general nature of the business to be transacted and, in the case of an annual general meeting, shall specify the meeting as such. Every notice calling a meeting for the passing of an extraordinary or special resolution shall specify the intention to propose the resolution as an extraordinary or special resolution (as the case may be) and the terms of the resolution. Every notice of meeting shall state with reasonable prominence that a member entitled to attend and vote is entitled to appoint one or more proxies to attend and (on a poll) vote instead of him and that a proxy need not be a member.
60. | Omission or non-receipt of notice |
The accidental omission to give notice of a meeting, or to send an instrument of proxy or invitation to appoint a proxy as provided by these Articles, to any person entitled to receive the same, or the non-receipt of a notice of meeting or instrument of proxy or invitation to appoint a proxy by such a person, shall not invalidate the proceedings at that meeting.
PROCEEDINGS AT GENERAL MEETINGS
61. | Special business |
All business shall be deemed special that is transacted at an extraordinary general meeting, and all business that is transacted at an annual general meeting shall also be deemed special with the exception of:-
61.1 | the laying and consideration of the reports of the Directors and Auditors, the annual accounts and any other documents required to accompany or to be annexed to them; |
61.2 | the sanction and declaration of dividends; |
61.3 | the election and re-election of Directors to fill vacancies caused by Directors retiring under these Articles; |
61.4 | the appointment of auditors where special notice of such appointment is not required by the Act and the fixing or determination of the manner of fixing of their remuneration; |
- 21 -
61.5 | the giving, variation or renewal of any authority to the Board for the purpose of section 80 of the Act; and |
61.6 | the approval of the remuneration report of the Directors. |
62. | Quorum |
No business shall be transacted at any general meeting unless a quorum is present when the meeting proceeds to business. The absence of a quorum shall not preclude the appointment of a chairman in accordance with the provisions of these Articles, which shall not be treated as part of the business of the meeting. Two members present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote upon the business to be transacted at the meeting shall be a quorum.
63. | Procedure if quorum not present |
If such a quorum is not present within 15 minutes (or such longer time not exceeding one hour as the chairman of the meeting may decide to wait) from the time appointed for the meeting, the meeting, if convened on the requisition of or by members, shall be dissolved. In any other case it shall stand adjourned to the same place and time one week later, or to such day (not being more than 28 days after the date appointed for the meeting) and to such time and place as the Board may determine. If the meeting is adjourned for 14 days or more, not less than five days notice thereof shall be given by advertisement in one national newspaper, but no other notice shall be required. If at any such adjourned meeting a quorum is not present within 15 minutes from the time appointed for the meeting, the member present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote upon the business to be transacted at the meeting shall be a quorum.
64. | Security arrangements |
The Board may make any security arrangements which it considers appropriate relating to the holding of a general meeting of the Company including, without limitation, requirements for evidence of identity to be produced by those attending the meeting, arranging for any person attending a meeting to be searched and for items of personal property which may be taken into a meeting to be restricted. A Director or the Secretary may:
(a) | refuse entry to a meeting to any person who refuses to comply with any such arrangements; and |
(b) | eject from a meeting any person who causes the proceedings to become disorderly. |
65. | Chairman |
The chairman (if any) of the Board or in his absence the deputy chairman (if any) shall preside as chairman at every general meeting of the Company. If there is no such chairman or deputy chairman present and willing to act as chairman at any meeting within five minutes after the time appointed for holding the meeting the Directors present shall choose one of their number to be chairman and, if there is only one Director present and willing to act, he shall be chairman. If no Director is willing to act as chairman, or if no Director is present within five minutes after the time appointed for holding the meeting, the
- 22 -
members present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote shall choose one of their number to be chairman of the meeting.
66. | Directors right to attend and speak |
A Director shall, be entitled to attend and speak at any general meeting and at any separate meeting of the holders of any class of shares in the Company, notwithstanding that he is not a member, or not a holder of the class of shares in question.
67. | Adjournment |
The chairman of a meeting at which a quorum is present may, with the consent of the meeting (and shall if so directed by the meeting), adjourn the meeting from time to time and from place to place and if it appears to the chairman that it is likely to be impracticable to hold or continue the meeting, because the number of persons attending or wishing to attend cannot be conveniently accommodated in the place appointed for the meeting, or the unruly conduct of persons attending the meeting prevents or is likely to prevent the continuation of the business of the meeting, he may adjourn the meeting to another time and place without the consent of the meeting. No business shall be transacted at any adjourned meeting other than business which might properly have been transacted at the meeting had the adjournment not taken place. When a meeting is adjourned for 30 days or more (otherwise than due to the absence of a quorum) or without a time and place for the adjourned meeting being fixed, at least seven clear days notice of the adjourned meeting shall be given in the same manner as in the case of the original meeting. Otherwise it shall not be necessary to give any such notice.
68. | Meeting at more than one place |
A general meeting may be held at more than one place if:
68.1 | the notice convening the meeting specifies that it shall be held at more than one place; or |
68.2 | the Board resolves, after the notice convening the meeting has been given, that the meeting shall be held at more than one place; or |
68.3 | it appears to the chairman of the meeting that the place of the meeting specified in the notice convening the meeting is inadequate to accommodate all persons entitled and wishing to attend. |
A general meeting held at more than one place is duly constituted and its proceedings are valid if (in addition to the other provisions of these Articles relating to general meetings) the chairman of the meeting is satisfied that there are adequate facilities to enable each person present at each place to participate in the business for which the meeting has been convened, hear and see all persons present who speak, whether by the use of microphones, loudspeakers, audio-visual communications equipment or otherwise (whether in use when these Articles are adopted or developed subsequently) and have access to all documents which are required by the Acts and these Articles to be made available at the meeting. Each person present at each place in person or by proxy and entitled to vote shall be counted in the quorum for, and shall be entitled to vote at, the
- 23 -
meeting. The meeting is deemed to take place at the place at which the chairman of the meeting is present.
69. | Amendments to resolutions |
No amendment or proposed amendment to a resolution shall be considered or voted upon by the members at any general meeting or adjourned general meeting unless:
69.1 | in the case of a resolution duly proposed as a special or extraordinary resolution it is a mere clerical amendment to correct a patent error; or |
69.2 | in the case of a resolution duly proposed as an ordinary resolution either the Company shall have received written notice of the amendment or proposed amendment and of the intention of the proposer to attend and propose it at least 48 hours before the time fixed for the general meeting or the chairman of the meeting in his absolute discretion shall decide that the amendment or amended resolution should be considered and put to the vote. |
With the consent of the chairman, an amendment may be withdrawn by its proposer before it is put to the vote. If the chairman of the meeting in good faith rules an amendment to a resolution out of order, the proceedings on the substantive resolution shall not be invalidated by any error in such ruling.
70. | Method of voting and demand for a poll |
At any general meeting a resolution put to the vote of the meeting shall be decided on a show of hands unless before, or on the declaration of the result of, the show of hands, or on the withdrawal of any other demand for a poll, a poll is demanded by:-
70.1 | the chairman of the meeting; or |
70.2 | at least five members present in person or by proxy having the right to vote at the meeting; or |
70.3 | a member or members present in person or by proxy and representing not less than one-tenth of the total voting rights of all the members having the right to vote at the meeting; or |
70.4 | a member or members present in person or by proxy holding shares in the Company conferring a right to vote at the meeting, being shares on which an aggregate sum has been paid up equal to not less than one-tenth of the total sum paid up on all the shares conferring that right; or |
70.5 | any member present in person or by proxy in the case of a resolution to confer, vary, revoke or renew authority or approval for an off-market purchase by the Company of its own shares, |
and a demand by a person as proxy for a member shall be the same as a demand by the member.
- 24 -
71. | Declaration by chairman |
Unless a poll is duly demanded and the demand is not withdrawn, a declaration by the chairman of the meeting that a resolution has been carried or carried unanimously, or by a particular majority, or lost, or not carried by a particular majority and an entry to that effect in the minutes of the meeting shall be conclusive evidence of the fact without proof of the number or proportion of the votes recorded in favour of or against the resolution.
72. | Withdrawal of demand for a poll |
The demand for a poll may, before the poll is taken, be withdrawn but only with the consent of the chairman of the meeting and a demand so withdrawn shall not be taken to have invalidated the result of a show of hands declared before the demand was made.
73. | Method of taking a poll |
A poll shall be taken as the chairman of the meeting directs and he may appoint scrutineers (who need not be members) and fix a time and place for declaring the result of the poll. The result of the poll shall be deemed to be the resolution of the meeting at which the poll was demanded.
74. | Casting vote |
In the case of an equality of votes, whether on a show of hands or on a poll, the chairman of the meeting at which the show of hands takes place or at which the demand for the poll is made shall be entitled to a casting vote in addition to any other vote he may have.
75. | When poll to be taken |
A poll demanded on the election of a chairman of the meeting or on a question of adjournment shall be taken forthwith. A poll demanded on any other question shall be taken either forthwith or at such time and place as the chairman directs not being more than 30 days after the poll is demanded. The demand for a poll (other than on the election of a chairman of the meeting or on a question of adjournment) shall not prevent the continuance of a meeting for the transaction of any business other than the question on which the poll has been demanded. If a poll is demanded before the declaration of the result of a show of hands and the demand is duly withdrawn, the meeting shall continue as if the demand had not been made.
76. | Notice of a poll |
No notice need be given of a poll not taken forthwith if the time and place at which it is to be taken are announced at the meeting at which it is demanded. In any other case at least seven clear days notice shall be given specifying the time and place at which the poll is to be taken.
77. | Written resolutions |
A resolution in writing executed or approved in writing by or on behalf of each member who would have been entitled to vote upon it if it had been proposed at a general meeting at which he was present shall be as effectual as if it had been passed at a general meeting
- 25 -
duly convened and held and may consist of several documents in the like form each executed or approved in writing by or on behalf of one or more members.
VOTES OF MEMBERS
78. | Votes of members |
Subject to any rights or restrictions attached to any shares, on a show of hands every member who (being an individual) is present in person or (being a corporation) is present by a duly authorised representative, not being himself a member entitled to vote, shall have one vote, and on a poll every member shall have one vote for every share of which he is the holder.
79. | Joint holders |
In the case of joint holders the vote of the senior who tenders a vote, whether in person or by proxy, shall be accepted to the exclusion of the votes of the other joint holders; and for this purpose seniority shall be determined by the order in which the names of the holders stand in the Register in respect of the joint holding.
80. | Votes on behalf of incapable members |
A member in respect of whom an order has been made by any court having jurisdiction (whether in the United Kingdom or elsewhere) in matters concerning mental disorder may vote, whether on a show of hands or on a poll, and otherwise exercise all his rights as a member by his receiver or other person authorised in that behalf appointed by that court, and any such receiver or other person may, on a poll, vote by proxy. Evidence to the satisfaction of the Board of the authority of the person claiming to exercise the right to vote or act shall be deposited at the Office, or at such other place as is specified in accordance with these Articles for the deposit of instruments of proxy, not less than 48 hours before the time appointed for holding the meeting or adjourned meeting at which the right to vote is to be exercised, or, in the case of a poll, at least 48 hours before the time appointed for the taking of the poll and in default the right to vote shall not be exercisable.
81. | No right to attend or vote where sums overdue |
Unless the Board otherwise determines, no member shall attend or vote at any general meeting or at any separate meeting of the holders of any class of shares in the Company or upon a poll, either in person or by proxy, in respect of any share held by him or exercise any other right or privilege conferred by membership in relation to any such meeting or poll unless all moneys presently payable by him in respect of that share have been paid.
82. | Objections to voters |
No objection shall be raised to the qualification of any voter except at the meeting or adjourned meeting or poll at which the vote objected to is tendered, and every vote not disallowed at the meeting or poll shall be valid. Any objection made in due time shall be referred to the chairman of the meeting whose decision shall be final and conclusive.
- 26 -
PROXIES
83. | Appointment of proxy |
On a poll votes may be given either personally or by proxy. A member may appoint more than one proxy to attend on the same occasion and a person entitled to more than one vote need not use all his votes or cast all the votes he uses in the same way. No proxy shall in that capacity be entitled to speak at any general meeting, except to demand or join in a demand for a poll. A person appointed to act as a proxy need not be a member of the Company.
84. | Form of proxy |
The appointment of a proxy shall be in any common form or in any other form which the Board shall approve and may:
84.1 | be by means of an instrument executed by or on behalf of the appointor or, if the appointor is a corporation, under the hand of duly authorised officer or attorney; or |
84.2 | where an address has been specified for such purpose as set out in the following Article, be by electronic communication, subject to such terms and conditions, including as to execution, as the Board may from time to time prescribe. |
In respect of any general meeting the board may, if it thinks fit, but subject to the Acts, at the Companys expense send instruments of proxy for use at the meeting and issue invitations contained in electronic communications to appoint a proxy in relation to the meeting in such a form as may be approved by the Board. The appointment of a proxy shall be deemed (subject to any contrary intention contained in the appointment) to confer authority to demand or join in demanding a poll and to vote on a poll on any resolution or amendment of a resolution put to, or any other business which may properly come before, the meeting for which it is given as the proxy thinks fit. The appointment of a proxy shall, unless the contrary is stated therein, be valid as well for an adjournment of the meeting as for the meeting to which it relates. If a member appoints more than one person to act as his proxy the appointment of each such proxy shall specify the shares held by the member in respect of which each such proxy is authorised to vote and no member may appoint more than one proxy (save in the alternative) to vote in respect of any one share held by that member.
85. | Delivery of proxies |
The appointment of a proxy and (unless the Board otherwise decides) any authority under which it is executed or a copy of such authority certified notarially or in accordance with the Powers of Attorney Act 1971 or in some other way approved by the Board shall:
85.1 | in the case of an instrument and any authority or copy thereof be deposited at the Office or at such other place in the United Kingdom as may be specified in or by way of note to the notice of meeting or any form of proxy or other document accompanying the same not less than 48 hours before the time appointed for holding the meeting or adjourned meeting or the taking of the poll at which the person named in the appointment proposes to vote; |
- 27 -
85.2 | in the case of an appointment contained in an electronic communication be received at the address (if any) specified for the purpose of receiving such electronic communications: |
85.2.1 | in or by way of note to the notice of meeting; |
85.2.2 | in any form of proxy sent by or on behalf of the Company in relation to the meeting; or |
85.2.3 | in any invitation contained in an electronic communication to appoint a proxy issued by or on behalf of the Company in relation to the meeting; |
not less than 48 hours before the time appointed for holding the meeting or adjourned meeting or the taking of the poll at which the person named in the appointment proposes to vote;
85.3 | in either case, where a poll is taken more than 48 hours after it is demanded, be deposited or received as aforesaid not less than 24 hours before the time appointed for the taking of the poll; or |
85.4 | in the case only of an instrument or any authority or copy thereof, where the poll is not taken forthwith but is taken not more than 48 hours after it was demanded, be delivered at the meeting at which the poll was demanded to the chairman of the meeting or to the Secretary or any Director |
and an appointment which is not, or in respect of which the authority or copy thereof is not, deposited, received or delivered in a manner so permitted shall be invalid.
86. | Multiple proxies |
Where two or more valid but differing appointments of proxies are deposited or received in respect of the same share for use at the same meeting or poll, the one which is last deposited or received (regardless of its date or the date of its execution) shall be treated as replacing and revoking the other as regards that share; if the Company is unable to determine which was last deposited or received, none of them shall be treated as valid in respect of that share. No appointment of a proxy shall be valid after the expiration of twelve months from the date stated in it as the date of its execution.
87. | Determination of proxys authority |
A vote given or poll demanded by a proxy or by the duly authorised representative of a corporation shall be valid notwithstanding the previous determination of the authority of the person voting or demanding a poll unless notice of the determination was deposited or received not less than two hours before the time for holding the meeting or adjourned meeting at which the vote is given or the poll demanded or (in the case of a poll taken otherwise than at or on the same day as the meeting or adjourned meeting) the time appointed for taking the poll. Such notice of determination shall be by means of instrument deposited at the place, or contained in an electronic communication received at the address (if any), specified in accordance with these Articles for the deposit or receipt of appointments of a proxy at the meeting in question.
- 28 -
REPRESENTATIVES OF CORPORATIONS
88. | Representatives of corporations |
Any corporation which is a member of the Company may, by resolution of its directors or other governing body, authorise any person it thinks fit to act as its representative at any meeting of the Company. The person so authorised shall be entitled to exercise the same powers on behalf of the corporation which he represents as that corporation could exercise if it were an individual member of the Company present in person and shall for the purposes of these Articles be regarded as a member present in person. Such representative may be required to produce a copy of such resolution certified by a proper officer of such corporation.
NUMBER OF DIRECTORS
89. | Number of Directors |
Unless otherwise determined by ordinary resolution of the Company, the number of Directors shall not be subject to any maximum but shall not be less than three.
APPOINTMENT AND RETIREMENT OF DIRECTORS
90. | Directors to retire at third annual general meeting |
Each Director shall retire from office and shall be eligible for reappointment at the third annual general meeting after the meeting at which he was appointed or last reappointed. If the Company, at the meeting at which a Director retires under this Article, does not fill the vacancy the retiring Director shall, if willing to act, be deemed to have been reappointed unless at the meeting it is resolved not to fill the vacancy or unless a resolution for the reappointment of the Director is put to the meeting and lost.
91. | Timing of vacation of office |
A Director retiring at a meeting who is not reappointed shall retain office until the meeting appoints someone in his place or, if it does not do so, until the end of the meeting or of any adjournment thereof.
92. | Persons eligible as Directors |
No person other than a Director retiring at the meeting shall be appointed or reappointed a Director at any general meeting unless:-
92.1 | he is recommended by the Board; or |
92.2 | not less than seven nor more than 21 clear days before the date appointed for the meeting, notice executed by a member qualified to vote at the meeting has been given to the Company of his intention to propose that person for appointment or reappointment stating the particulars which would, if he were so appointed or reappointed, be required to be included in the Companys register of directors together with notice executed by that person confirming his willingness to be appointed or reappointed. |
- 29 -
93. | Power of the company to appoint Directors |
Subject to the provisions of these Articles, the Company may by ordinary resolution appoint a person who is willing to act to be a Director either to fill a vacancy or as an additional Director.
94. | Power of the board to appoint Directors |
The Board may appoint a person who is willing to act to be a Director, either to fill a vacancy or as an additional Director. A Director so appointed shall hold office only until the next following annual general meeting when he shall retire from office and be eligible for reappointment. If not reappointed at such annual general meeting, he shall vacate office at its conclusion.
95. | Age of Directors |
The provisions of section 293 of the Act (which regulate the appointment and continuation in office of directors who have attained the age of 70) shall apply to the Company.
DISQUALIFICATION AND REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS
96. | Vacation of office |
The office of a Director shall be vacated if:-
96.1 | he becomes bankrupt or makes any arrangement or composition with his creditors generally; or |
96.2 | he becomes incapable by reason of physical incapacity or mental disorder of discharging his duties as a Director and the Board resolves that his office be vacated; or |
96.3 | he is absent from meetings of the Board during a continuous period of six months without permission of the Board and his Alternate Director (if any) shall not during such period have attended in his stead, and the Board resolves that his office be vacated; or |
96.4 | he ceases to be a Director by virtue of any provision of the Acts, is removed from office or becomes prohibited by law from being a Director; or |
96.5 | he resigns his office by notice to the Company; or |
96.6 | he ceases to be a Director by virtue of section 293 of the Act; or |
96.7 | he is removed from office by notice in writing signed by all the other Directors. |
- 30 -
ALTERNATE DIRECTORS
97. | Appointment of Alternate Directors |
Any Director may appoint any other Director, or any other person approved by resolution of the Board and willing to act, to be an Alternate Director and may remove from office an Alternate Director so appointed by him.
98. | Termination of appointment |
The appointment of an Alternate Director shall automatically determine in any of the following events:-
98.1 | if his appointor terminates the appointment; |
98.2 | on the happening of any event which, if he were a Director, would cause him to vacate the office of Director; |
98.3 | if he resigns his appointment by notice to the Company; |
98.4 | if his appointor ceases for any reason to be a Director otherwise than by retiring and being reappointed or deemed to be reappointed at the meeting at which he retires; or |
98.5 | if he is not a Director and the Board revokes its approval of him by resolution. |
99. | Effect of appointment |
An Alternate Director shall (subject to his giving to the Company an address within the United Kingdom at which notices may be served upon him) be entitled at his appointors request to receive notice of all meetings of the Board and of all meetings of committees of the Board of which his appointor is a member, to attend and vote and (save as provided in these Articles) be counted in the quorum at any such meeting at which the Director appointing him is not personally present, and generally to perform all the functions of his appointor as a Director in his absence.
100. | Expenses and remuneration |
An Alternate Director may be repaid by the Company such expenses as might properly have been repaid to him if he had been a Director and in respect of his office of Alternate Director may receive such remuneration from the Company as the Board may determine. An Alternate Director shall be entitled to be indemnified by the Company to the same extent as if he were a Director.
101. | Alternate Director to be an officer |
An Alternate Director shall, during his appointment, be an officer of the Company and shall alone be responsible for his own acts and defaults and he shall not be deemed to be the agent of the Director appointing him.
- 31 -
102. | Method of appointment and removal |
Any appointment or removal of an Alternate Director shall be in writing signed by the Director making or revoking the appointment or in any other manner approved by the Board and shall take effect (subject to any approval required by these Articles) upon receipt of such written appointment or removal at the Office or by the Secretary.
103. | Appointee acting in more than once capacity |
A Director or any other person may act as Alternate Director to represent more than one Director and an Alternate Director shall be entitled at meetings of the Board or any committee of the Board to one vote for every Director whom he represents in addition to his own vote (if any) as a Director.
POWERS OF DIRECTORS
104. | General powers of the company vested in the board |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, the Memorandum of Association of the Company and these Articles and to any directions given by special resolution, the business of the Company shall be managed by the Board who may exercise all the powers of the Company. No alteration of the Memorandum or these Articles and no such direction shall invalidate any prior act of the Board which would have been valid if that alteration had not been made or that direction had not been given. The powers given by this Article shall not be limited by any special power given to the Board by these Articles and a duly convened meeting of the Board at which a quorum is present may exercise all powers exercisable by the Board.
105. | Local board |
The Board may make such arrangements as the Board thinks fit for the management and transaction of the Companys affairs and may for that purpose appoint local boards, managers and agents and delegate to them any of the powers of the Board with power to sub-delegate.
106. | Appointment of attorneys and agents |
The Board may from time to time, by power of attorney executed by the Company or otherwise, appoint any company, firm or person, or any fluctuating body of persons, whether nominated directly or indirectly by the Board, to be the attorney or agent of the Company for such purposes and with such powers, authorities and discretions (not exceeding those vested in or exercisable by the Board under these Articles) and for such period and subject to such conditions as it may think fit. Any such power of attorney or other authority may contain such provisions for the protection and convenience of persons dealing with any such attorney or agent as the Board may think fit and may also authorise any such attorney or agent to sub-delegate all or any of the powers, authorities and discretions vested in him.
- 32 -
DELEGATION OF DIRECTORS POWERS
107. | Delegation of Directors powers |
The Board may delegate any of its powers, authorities and discretions (including, without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, all powers, authorities and discretions whose exercise involves or may involve agreement of the terms of service or termination of employment or appointment of or the payment of remuneration to or the conferring of any other benefit on all or any of the Directors) to any committee consisting of one or more Directors together with any other person or persons approved by the Board, with power to sub-delegate. Any such delegation may be made subject to any conditions the Board may impose, and either collaterally with or to the exclusion of its own powers and may be revoked or altered. Subject to any such conditions, the proceedings of a committee with two or more members shall be governed by the provisions of these Articles regulating the proceedings of the Board so far as they are capable of applying. Insofar as any power, authority or discretion is delegated to a committee, any reference in these Articles to the exercise by the Board of such power, authority or discretion shall be read and construed as if it were a reference to the exercise of such power, authority or discretion by such committee.
BORROWING POWERS
108. | Borrowing powers |
108.1 | Subject as hereinafter provided the Directors may exercise all the powers of the Company to borrow money, and to mortgage or charge its undertaking, property and uncalled capital, or any part thereof, and, subject to the provisions of the Acts and Article 9 to issue debentures, debenture stock, and other securities whether outright or as security for any debt, liability or obligation of the Company or of any third party. |
108.2 | The Directors shall restrict the borrowings of the Company and exercise all voting and other rights or powers of control exercisable by the Company in relation to its subsidiaries (if any) so as to secure (so far, as regards subsidiaries, as by such exercise they can secure) that the aggregate amounts for the time being remaining undischarged of all moneys borrowed by the Group and for the time being owing to persons outside the Group shall not at any time, without the previous sanction of an ordinary resolution of the Company in general meeting, exceed a sum equal to two and one half times the aggregate of:- |
108.2.1 | the nominal amount of the share capital of the Company for the time being issued and paid up; and |
108.2.2 | the total of the consolidated reserves of the Company (including any share premium account, capital redemption reserve and profit and loss account but not including any sums set aside for taxation) all as shown in the then latest audited consolidated balance sheet of the Group as determined in accordance with historic accounting principles but after:- |
(a) | making such adjustments as may be necessary in respect of any variation in the amount of such share capital, share premium account or capital redemption reserve since the date of such latest audited consolidated balance sheet; |
- 33 -
(b) | deducting (to the extent included):- |
| any amounts distributed or proposed to be distributed by the Company out of the profits earned prior to the date of such balance sheet declared, recommended or made since that date (but not provided in such latest audited consolidated balance sheet); |
| any amount attributable to non-Group shareholders in subsidiaries of the Company in respect of such subsidiaries; and |
| any debit balance on the combined profit and loss account; |
(c) | adding back any goodwill on the acquisition of businesses that has been previously set off against such reserves to the extent that the businesses have not been discontinued or disposed of and after deducting any permanent decrease in the value of these businesses; |
(d) | making such adjustments (if any) as the Auditors may consider appropriate; and |
(e) | deducting (to the extent not already deducted) any debit balance on the Group profit and loss account. |
108.3 | For the purpose of the foregoing limit the aggregate amounts of moneys borrowed shall be reduced by cash and current asset investments and shall be deemed to include the following except in so far as otherwise taken into account (together in each case with any fixed or minimum premium payable on final repayment):- |
108.3.1 | the principal amount for the time being owing (other than to a member of the Group) in respect of any debenture, whether secured or unsecured, issued by a member of the Group in whole or in part for cash or otherwise; |
108.3.2 | the principal amount raised by any member of the Group by acceptances or under any acceptance credit opened on its behalf by any bank or accepting house other than acceptances relating to the purchase or sale of goods in the ordinary course of trading and outstanding for not more than ninety days; |
108.3.3 | the nominal amount of any share capital and the principal amount of any moneys borrowed or other indebtedness the redemption or repayment of which is guaranteed or secured or is the subject of an indemnity given by any member of the Group and the beneficial interest in the redemption or repayment of which is not owned within the Group; and |
108.3.4 | the nominal amount of any share capital (not being equity share capital which as regards capital has rights no more favourable than those attached to its ordinary share capital) of any subsidiary of the Company owned otherwise than by other members of the Group; |
- 34 -
but moneys borrowed shall not include and shall be deemed not to include:-
108.3.5 | amounts borrowed for the purpose of repaying (with or without premium) any moneys borrowed by any member of the Group then outstanding and so to be applied within six months of being so borrowed, pending their application for such purpose within such period; and |
108.3.6 | the proportion of the excess outside borrowing of a partly owned subsidiary which corresponds to the proportion of its equity share capital owned otherwise than by members of the Group and so that, for this purpose, the expression excess outside borrowing shall mean so much of the borrowings of such partly owned subsidiary otherwise than from members of the Group as exceeds the amounts (if any) borrowed from it by other members of the Group. |
EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
109. | Appointment to executive offices |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, the Board may:-
109.1 | appoint one or more of its body to the office of managing director or chief executive or to any other executive office (except that of auditor) of the Company and may enter into an agreement or arrangement with any Director for his employment by the Company or any Subsidiary Undertaking or for the provision by him of any services outside the scope of the ordinary duties of a Director. Any such appointment, agreement or arrangement may be made upon such terms as the Board determines and it may remunerate any such Director for his services as it thinks fit; and |
109.2 | permit any person appointed to be a Director to continue in any other office or employment held by him with the Company or any Subsidiary Undertaking before he was so appointed. |
110. | Managing director/chief executive to be a Director |
Any appointment of a Director to the office of managing director or chief executive shall terminate if he ceases to be a Director but without prejudice to any claim for damages for breach of contract of service between the Director and the Company and he shall not (unless any agreement between him and the Company shall otherwise provide) cease to hold his office as Director by reason only of his ceasing to be managing director or chief executive.
111. | Other executive office not linked to directorship |
Save as provided in the foregoing Article, an Executive Director shall not (unless any agreement between him and the Company shall otherwise provide) cease to hold his office or employment with the Company by reason only of his ceasing to be a Director nor cease to be a Director if he ceases from any cause to hold the office or employment by virtue of which he is termed an Executive Director.
- 35 -
112. | Emoluments of Executive Directors |
The emoluments and benefits of any Executive Director for his services as such shall be determined by the Board and may be of any description, and (without limiting the generality of the foregoing) may include membership of any scheme or fund instituted or established or financed or contributed to by the Company for the provision of pensions, life assurance or other benefits for employees or their dependants or, apart from membership of any such scheme or fund, the payment of a pension or other benefits to him or his dependants on or after retirement or death.
113. | Delegation to Executive Directors |
The Board may delegate or entrust to and confer upon any Executive Director any of the powers, authorities and discretions exercisable by it (with power to sub-delegate) upon such terms and conditions and with such restrictions as it thinks fit and either collaterally with or to the exclusion of its own powers and may from time to time revoke, withdraw or vary all or any part of such powers.
ASSOCIATE DIRECTORS
114. | Associate directors |
The Board may at any time and from time to time appoint any person to be an associate director having such title, including the word director , as the Board may decide and may at any time remove any person so appointed. A person so appointed shall not be a Director of the Company and shall not be a member of the Board. Subject as aforesaid, the Board may define and limit the powers and duties of any associate director and may determine his remuneration which may be in addition to any other remuneration receivable by him from the Company or any Subsidiary Undertaking.
REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS
115. | Directors fees |
The ordinary remuneration of the Directors (other than any Executive Directors appointed under these Articles) shall be such amount as the Directors shall from time to time determine provided that, unless otherwise approved by the Company in general meeting, the aggregate of the ordinary remuneration of such Directors shall not exceed £450,000 per year. The ordinary remuneration shall be divided among such Directors in such manner as the Directors may determine. A Director holding office for part only of a year shall be entitled to a proportionate part of a full years remuneration.
116. | Extra remuneration |
Any Director who serves on any committee of the Board or, by request of the Board, performs special services or goes or resides abroad for any purposes of the Company may be paid such extra remuneration by way of salary, percentage of profits or otherwise as the Board may determine.
- 36 -
DIRECTORS EXPENSES AND INSURANCE
117. | Directors expenses |
The Directors may be paid all travelling, hotel and other expenses as they may incur in connection with their attendance at meetings of the Board or of committees of the Board or general meetings or separate meetings of the holders of any class of shares or debentures of the Company or otherwise in connection with the discharge of their duties.
118. | Insurance |
Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 168 the Directors shall have power to purchase and maintain insurance for or for the benefit of any persons who are or were at any time Directors, officers or employees of the Company, or of any other company which is its holding company or in which the Company or such holding company or any of the predecessors of the Company or of such holding company has any interest whether direct or indirect or which is in any way allied to or associated with the Company, or of any subsidiary undertaking of the Company or of any such other company, or who are or were at any time trustees of any pension fund in which any employees of the Company or of any such other company or subsidiary undertaking are interested, including (without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing) insurance against any liability incurred by such persons in respect of any act or omission in the actual or purported execution and/or discharge of their duties and/or in the exercise or execution and/or discharge of their duties and/or in the exercise or purported exercise of their powers and/or otherwise in relation to their duties, powers or offices in relation to the Company or any such other company, subsidiary undertaking or pension fund.
DIRECTORS GRATUITIES AND PENSIONS
119. | Directors gratuities and pensions |
The Board may provide benefits, whether by the payment of gratuities or pensions or by insurance or otherwise, for any Director who has held but no longer holds any executive office or employment with the Company or with any body corporate which is or has been a Subsidiary Undertaking or a predecessor in business of the Company or of any Subsidiary Undertaking, and for any member of his family (including a spouse and a former spouse) or any person who is or was dependent on him and may (as well before as after he ceases to hold such office or employment) contribute to any fund and pay premiums for the purchase or provision of any such benefit.
DIRECTORS INTERESTS
120. | Interests to be disclosed |
A Director who is in any way, whether directly or indirectly, interested in a transaction or arrangement with the Company shall, at a meeting of the Board, declare in accordance with the Acts the nature of his interest. For the purposes of this Article and Articles 121 and 123:-
120.1 |
a general notice given to the Board that a Director is to be regarded as having an interest of the nature and extent specified in the notice in any transaction or |
- 37 -
arrangement in which a specified person or class of persons is interested shall be deemed to be a disclosure that the Director has an interest in any such transaction of the nature and extent so specified; |
120.2 | an interest of which a Director has no knowledge shall not be treated as an interest of his; and |
120.3 | an interest of a person who is connected with a Director shall be treated as an interest of the Director. |
121. | Permitted interests |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, and provided that he has disclosed to the Board the nature and extent of any interest of his in accordance with Article 120, a Director notwithstanding his office:-
121.1 | may be a party to, or otherwise interested in, any transaction or arrangement with the Company or in which the Company is otherwise interested; |
121.2 | may be a director or other officer of, or employed by, or a party to any transaction or arrangement with, or otherwise interested in, any body corporate promoted by the Company or in which the Company is otherwise interested; and |
121.3 | shall not, by reason of his office, be accountable to the Company for any benefit which he derives from any such office or employment or from any such transaction or arrangement or from any interest in any such body corporate and no such transaction or arrangement shall be liable to be avoided on the ground of any such interest or benefit. |
122. | Director may act in a professional capacity |
Any Director may act by himself or his firm in a professional capacity for the Company (otherwise than as auditor) and he or his firm shall be entitled to remuneration for professional services as if he were not a Director.
123. | Voting on matters where a director is interested |
Save as otherwise provided in these Articles, a Director shall not vote at a meeting of the Board or of a committee of the Board on any resolution concerning a matter in which he has, directly or indirectly, an interest which is material (otherwise than by virtue of his interest in shares, debentures or other securities of, or otherwise in or through, the Company) unless his interest or duty arises only because the case falls within one or more of the following paragraphs:-
123.1 | the resolution relates to the giving to him or a person connected with him of a guarantee, security or indemnity in respect of money lent to, or an obligation incurred by him or such a person at the request of or for the benefit of, the Company or any Subsidiary Undertaking; |
123.2 |
the resolution relates to the giving to a third party of a guarantee, security or indemnity in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company or any Subsidiary |
- 38 -
Undertaking for which the Director or a person connected with him has assumed responsibility in whole or part and whether alone or jointly with others under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security; |
123.3 | his interest arises by virtue of him or a person connected with him subscribing or agreeing to subscribe for any shares, debentures or other securities of the Company or any Subsidiary Undertaking or by virtue of him or a person connected with him being, or intending to become, a participant in the underwriting or sub-underwriting of an offer of any such shares, debentures, or other securities by the Company or any Subsidiary Undertaking for subscription, purchase or exchange; |
123.4 | the resolution relates in any way to any other company in which he is interested, directly or indirectly and whether as an officer or shareholder or otherwise howsoever, provided that he and any persons connected with him do not to his knowledge hold an interest in shares (as that term is used in sections 198 to 211 of the Act) representing one per cent or more of any class of the equity share capital of such company or of the voting rights available to members of such company; |
123.5 | the resolution relates in any way to an arrangement in whole or in part for the benefit of the employees of the Company or any Subsidiary Undertakings which does not award him as such any privilege or advantage not generally awarded to the employees to whom such arrangement relates; |
123.6 | the resolution relates in any way to the purchase or maintenance for the Directors of insurance against any liability which by virtue of any rule of law would otherwise attach to all or any of them in respect of any negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust in relation to the Company or any Subsidiary Undertaking. |
124. | Quorum when a director is not entitled to vote |
A Director shall not be counted in the quorum present at a meeting in relation to a resolution on which he is not entitled to vote.
125. | Proposals may be considered separately |
Where proposals are under consideration concerning the appointment (including fixing or varying the terms of appointment) of two or more Directors to offices or employments with the Company or a body corporate in which the Company is interested the proposals may be divided and considered in relation to each Director separately and (provided he is not for another reason precluded from voting) each of the Directors concerned shall be entitled to vote and be counted in the quorum in respect of each resolution except that concerning his own appointment.
126. | Chairman to decide whether a director may vote |
If a question arises at a meeting of the Board or of a committee of the Board as to the right of a Director to vote and such question is not resolved by his voluntarily agreeing to abstain from voting, the question may (unless the Director concerned is the chairman of the meeting in which case he shall withdraw from the meeting and the Board shall elect a vice chairman to consider the question in place of the chairman), before the conclusion of the meeting, be referred to the chairman of the meeting and his ruling in relation to any
- 39 -
Director other than himself shall be final and conclusive except in a case where the nature or extent of the interest of the Director concerned has not been fairly disclosed and provided that any such question shall, for the purposes of disclosure of the interest in the accounts of the Company, be finally and conclusively decided by a majority of the Board (other than the Director concerned).
127. | Suspension or ratification by ordinary resolution |
The Company may by ordinary resolution suspend or relax to any extent, either generally or in respect of any particular matter, any provision of these Articles prohibiting a Director from voting at a meeting of the Board or of a committee of the Board or ratify any transaction not duly authorised by reason of a contravention of such Articles.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD
128. | Notice of board meetings |
Subject to the provisions of these Articles, the Board may regulate its proceedings as it thinks fit. A Director may, and the Secretary at the request of a Director shall, call a meeting of the Board. Notice of a board meeting may be given to a director personally or by word of mouth or sent by instrument to him at such address as he may from time to time specify for this purpose (or if he does not specify an address, at his last known address) or sent using electronic communications to such address (if any) as may for the time being be notified by him or on his behalf to the Company for that purpose. A Director absent or intending to be absent from the United Kingdom may request the Board that notices of board meetings shall during his absence be given by instrument or electronic communication to him (or to his alternate) at an address given by him to the Company for this purpose, but if no such request is made it shall not be necessary to give notice of a board meeting to any Director who is for the time being absent from the United Kingdom. A Director may waive notice of any meeting either prospectively or retrospectively.
129. | Voting at board meetings |
Questions arising at a meeting shall be decided by a majority of votes. In the case of an equality of votes, the chairman of the meeting shall have a second or casting vote.
130. | Quorum |
The quorum for the transaction of the business of the Board may be fixed by the Board and unless so fixed at any other number shall be two. A person who holds office as an Alternate Director shall, if his appointor is not present, be counted in the quorum provided that a Director or Alternate Director who attends a meeting of the Board shall for the purposes of a quorum be counted as one person notwithstanding that he also attends such meeting as an Alternate Director or that he attends as an Alternate Director appointed by more than one Director.
131. | Participation in meetings by telephone |
Any Director or other person may participate in a meeting of the Board by means of conference telephone or similar communications equipment whereby all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other and any person participating in the
- 40 -
meeting in this manner shall be deemed to be present in person at that meeting. Such a meeting shall be deemed to take place where the largest group of those participating is assembled, or, if there is no such group, at the place where the chairman of the meeting is at the time the meeting is held.
132. | Number of directors below quorum |
The continuing Directors or a sole continuing Director may act notwithstanding any vacancies in the Board but, if the number of Directors is less than the number fixed as the quorum, the continuing Directors or Director may act only for the purpose of filling vacancies in the Board or of calling a general meeting.
133. | Chairman |
The Board may appoint one of its number to be the chairman of the Board and one or more deputy chairmen and may at any time remove them from office. Unless he is unwilling to do so, the chairman of the Board shall preside at every meeting of the Board at which he is present. But if there is no chairman of the Board or deputy chairman holding office, or if at any meeting neither the chairman of the Board nor a deputy chairman is present and willing to preside within five minutes after the time appointed for the meeting, the Directors present may appoint one of their number to be chairman of the meeting.
134. | Resolution in writing |
A resolution in writing signed by all the Directors entitled to receive notice of a meeting of the Board (not being less than the number required to form a quorum of the Board) or all members of a committee of the Board shall be as valid and effectual as if it had been passed at a meeting of the Board or (as the case may be) a committee of the Board duly convened and held and may consist of several instruments or electronic communications in the like form each signed by one or more Directors; but a resolution signed by an Alternate Director need not also be signed by his appointor and, if it is signed by a Director who has appointed an Alternate Director, it need not be signed by the Alternate Director in that capacity.
135. | Validity of acts |
All acts done by a meeting of the Board, or of a committee of the Board, or by a person acting as a Director, Alternate Director or member of a committee shall, notwithstanding that it be afterwards discovered that there was a defect in the appointment or continuance in office of any Director, Alternate Director or person acting as aforesaid, or that any of them were disqualified from holding office, or had vacated office, or were not entitled to vote, be as valid as if every such person had been duly appointed and was qualified and had continued to be a Director, Alternate Director or member of a committee and had been entitled to vote.
SECRETARY
136. | Secretary |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, the Secretary shall be appointed by the Board for such term, at such remuneration and upon such conditions as it may think fit and any
- 41 -
Secretary so appointed may be removed by the Board. Two or more persons may be appointed as joint secretaries and the Board may also appoint from time to time on such terms as it may think fit one or more temporary or assistant or deputy secretaries.
MINUTES
137. | Minutes |
The Board shall cause minutes to be kept:-
137.1 | of all appointments of officers made by the Board; and |
Any such minutes, if purporting to be signed by the chairman of the meeting to which they relate or of the meeting at which they are approved, shall be sufficient evidence without any further proof of the facts stated in them.
THE SEAL
138. | Use of seal |
If the Company has a Seal it shall only be used by the authority of the Board or of a committee of the Board authorised by the Board. The Board may determine who shall sign any instrument to which the Seal is affixed and unless otherwise so determined it shall be signed by a Director and by the Secretary or by a second Director.
139. | Official seal |
The Company may exercise the powers conferred by the Acts with regard to having an official seal for use abroad, and such powers shall be vested in the Board.
DIVIDENDS
140. | Declaration of dividends by the company |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, the Company may by ordinary resolution declare dividends in accordance with the respective rights of the members, but no dividend shall exceed the amount recommended by the Board.
141. | Calculation of dividends |
Except as otherwise provided by the rights attached to the shares, all dividends shall be declared and paid according to the amounts paid up on the shares on which the dividend is paid but (for the purposes of this Article only) no amount paid on a share in advance of calls shall be treated as paid on the share. All dividends shall be apportioned and paid proportionately to the amounts paid up on the shares during any portion or portions of the period in respect of which the dividend is paid; but, if any share is issued on terms
- 42 -
providing that it shall rank for dividend as from a particular date, that share shall rank for dividend accordingly.
142. | Board may pay interim and fixed dividends |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts, the Board may pay interim dividends if it appears to the Board that they are justified by the profits of the Company available for distribution. If the share capital is divided into different classes of shares, the Board may pay interim dividends on shares which confer deferred or non-preferred rights with regard to dividend as well as on shares which confer preferential rights with regard to dividend, but no interim dividend shall be paid on shares carrying deferred or non-preferred rights if, at the time of payment, any preferential dividend is in arrears. The Board may also pay at intervals settled by it any dividend payable at a fixed rate if it appears to it that the profits available for distribution justify the payment. Provided the Board acts in good faith the Directors shall not incur any liability to the holders of shares conferring preferred rights for any loss that they may suffer by the lawful payment of an interim dividend on any shares having deferred or non-preferred rights. Dividends may be declared or paid in any currency.
143. | Amounts due on shares may be deducted |
The Board may deduct from any dividend or other moneys payable on or in respect of a share to any member all sums of money (if any) presently payable by him to the Company on account of calls or otherwise in relation to shares of the Company.
144. | No interest on dividends |
No dividend or other moneys payable in respect of a share shall bear interest as against the Company unless otherwise provided by the rights attached to the share. All unclaimed dividends may be retained by the Company or invested or made use of by the Company as the Board may think fit until they are claimed and so that the Company shall not be obliged to account for any interest or other income derived from them nor shall it be constituted a trustee in respect of them or be responsible for any loss thereby arising. Any interest or profits earned on unclaimed dividends invested or otherwise made use of shall belong to the Company. Any dividend which has remained unclaimed for twelve years from the date when it became due for payment shall be forfeited and cease to remain owing by the Company.
145. | Record dates |
Without prejudice to any rights attached to any shares, the Company or the Board may fix a date, or a particular time on a date, as the record date by reference to which a dividend will be declared or paid or a distribution, allotment or issue made, and that date may be before, on or after the date on which the dividend, distribution, allotment or issue is declared, paid or made. In the absence of a record date being fixed, entitlement to any dividend, distribution, allotment or issue shall be determined by reference to the date on which the dividend is declared or the distribution, allotment or issue is made.
146. | Payment to persons entitled by transmission |
The Board may pay the dividends or other moneys payable on shares in respect of which any person is entitled to be registered as holder by transmission to such person upon
- 43 -
production of such evidence as would be required if such person desired to be registered as a member in respect of such shares.
147. | Payment procedure |
Any dividend or other moneys payable in respect of a share may be paid :-
147.1 | in cash; |
147.2 | by cheque or warrant sent by post to the address in the Register of the person entitled to the moneys or, if two or more persons are the holders of the share or are jointly entitled to it by reason of the death or bankruptcy of the holder or otherwise by operation of law, to the address in the Register of that one of those persons who is first named in the Register in respect of the joint holding or to such person and to such address as the person or persons entitled to the moneys may in writing direct. Every such cheque or warrant shall be made payable to the person or persons entitled to the moneys or to such other person as the person or persons so entitled may in writing direct and shall be sent at the risk of the person or persons so entitled. Any such cheque or warrant may be crossed account payee although the Company shall not be obliged to do so; |
147.3 | by bank transfer to such account (of a type approved by the Board) as the person or persons entitled to the moneys may in writing direct; or |
147.4 | by such other method of payment approved by the Board as the person or persons entitled to the moneys may in writing agree to. |
Payment of a cheque or warrant by the bank on which it was drawn or the transfer of funds by the bank instructed to make the transfer shall be a good discharge to the Company.
148. | Uncashed dividends |
If in respect of dividends or other moneys payable in respect of any shares cheques or warrants have been sent through the post in accordance with the provisions of the preceding article but have been returned undelivered or left uncashed during the periods for which they are valid or bank transfers or other methods of payment have failed either:-
148.1 | on two consecutive occasions; or |
148.2 | on any one occasion and reasonable enquiries have failed to establish another address or account of the person entitled to the moneys, |
the Company need not thereafter despatch further cheques or warrants or give instructions for bank transfers or other methods of payment in payment of dividends or other moneys payable on or in respect of the shares in question until the member or other person entitled thereto shall have communicated with the Company and supplied in writing to the Transfer Office a new address or account to be used for the purpose.
- 44 -
149. | Dividends other than in cash |
Any general meeting declaring a dividend may, upon the recommendation of the Board, direct payment or satisfaction of such dividend wholly or in part by the distribution of specific assets and in particular of fully paid shares or debentures of any other company, and the Board shall give effect to such directions. Where any difficulty arises in regard to the distribution, the Board may settle the same as it thinks expedient, and in particular may fix the value for distribution of such specific assets or any part thereof and may determine that cash payment shall be made to any members upon the footing of the value so fixed in order to adjust the rights of those entitled to participate in the dividend, and may vest any such specific assets in trustees, upon trust for the members entitled to the dividend, as may seem expedient to the Board.
150. | Scrip dividends |
The Board may, with the sanction of an ordinary resolution of the Company, offer the holders of shares the right to elect to receive shares, credited as fully paid, instead of cash in respect of the whole (or some part, to be determined by the Board) of such dividend or dividends as are specified by such resolution. The following provisions shall apply:-
150.1 | the resolution may specify a particular dividend, or may specify all or any dividends declared or paid within a specified period, but such period shall end not later than the beginning of the annual general meeting in the fifth year following that in which such resolution is passed; |
150.2 | the entitlement of each holder of shares to new shares shall be such that the value of such new shares shall be as nearly as possible equal to (but not in excess of) the cash amount that such holder would otherwise have received by way of dividend. For this purpose the value of a share shall be the average of the middle market quotations for such a share as derived from the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List on such five consecutive dealing days as the Directors shall determine provided that the first of such dealing days shall be on or after the day when the shares are first quoted ex the relevant dividend; |
150.3 | no fraction of a share may be allotted and the Board may make such provision as it thinks fit for any fractional entitlements including provision:- |
150.3.1.1 | for the whole or part of the benefit of fractional entitlements to be disregarded or to accrue to the Company; or |
150.3.1.2 | for the value of fractional entitlements to be accumulated on behalf of a member (without entitlement to interest) and applied in paying up new shares in connection with a subsequent offer by the Company of the right to receive shares instead of cash in respect of a future dividend; |
150.4 |
the Board, after determining the basis of allotment, shall notify the holders of shares in writing of the right of election offered to them and (except in the case of any holder from whom the Company has received written notice in such form as the Board may require which is effective for the purposes of the relevant dividend that such holder wishes to receive shares instead of cash in respect of all future dividends in respect of which the Board offers the holders of shares the right to elect |
- 45 -
to receive shares as aforesaid) shall send with, or following, such notification, forms of election and specify the procedure to be followed and place at which, and the latest date and time by which, duly completed forms of election must be lodged in order to be effective; |
150.5 | the dividend (or that part of the dividend in respect of which a right of election has been offered) shall not be payable on shares in respect of which such election has been duly made (the elected shares) and instead additional shares shall be allotted to the holders of the elected shares on the basis of allotment determined as provided above. For such purpose the Board shall capitalise out of such of the sums standing to the credit of reserves (including any share premium account or capital redemption reserve) or any of the profits which could otherwise have been applied in paying dividends in cash as the Board may determine a sum equal to the aggregate nominal amount of the additional shares to be allotted on such basis and shall apply the same in paying up in full the appropriate number of unissued shares for allotment and distribution to and amongst the holders of the elected shares on such basis; |
150.6 | the additional shares so allotted shall rank pari passu in all respects with the fully-paid shares of that class then in issue save only as regards participation in the relevant dividend; and |
150.7 | the Board may on any occasion determine that rights of election shall only be made available subject to such exclusions, restrictions or other arrangements as it may in its absolute discretion deem necessary or desirable in order to comply with legal or practical problems under the laws of, or the requirements of any recognised regulatory body or any stock exchange in, any territory. |
151. | Joint holders |
If several persons are entered in the Register as joint holders of any share or are jointly entitled to a share, any one of them may give receipts for any dividend or other moneys payable in respect of the share and the Board may deduct from the dividends or other moneys payable in respect of any share held jointly by several persons all sums of money (if any) presently payable to the Company from any one or more of the registered holders on account of calls or otherwise in relation to shares in the Company held in the joint names of all (but not some only) of such registered holders.
ACCOUNTS
152. | Members have no right to inspect records |
No member shall (as such) have any right of inspecting any accounting records or other book or document of the Company except as conferred by the Acts or authorised by the Board or by ordinary resolution of the Company.
153. | Delivery of accounts |
153.1 |
Save as provided in this Article, a copy of the annual accounts of the Company together with a copy of the Auditors report and the Directors report shall, not less than 21 days before the date of the general meeting at which copies of those documents are to be laid, |
- 46 -
be sent to every member and to every debenture holder of the Company and to every other person who is entitled to receive notices from the Company of general meetings. |
153.2 | Copies of the documents referred to in Article 153.1 need not be sent:- |
153.2.1 | to a person who is not entitled to receive notices of general meetings and of whose address the Company is unaware; or |
153.2.2 | to more than one of the joint holders of shares or debentures in respect of those shares or debentures, |
provided that any member or debenture holder to whom a copy of such documents has not been sent shall be entitled to receive a copy free of charge on application at the Office.
CAPITALISATION OF PROFITS
154. | Procedure |
The Board may with the authority of an ordinary resolution of the Company:-
154.1 | subject as subsequently provided in these Articles, resolve to capitalise all or any part of the profits of the Company to which this Article applies; |
154.2 | appropriate the sum resolved to be capitalised to the members who would have been entitled to it if it were distributed by way of dividend and in the same proportions and apply such sum on their behalf either:- |
154.2.1 | in or towards paying up the amounts, if any, for the time being unpaid on any shares held by them respectively; or |
or partly in one way and partly in the other;
154.3 | make such provision by the issue of fractional securities or by payment in cash or otherwise as it determines in the case of shares or debentures otherwise becoming distributable under this Article in fractions; and |
154.4 |
authorise any person to enter on behalf of all the members concerned into an agreement with the Company providing for the allotment to them respectively, credited as fully paid, of any shares or debentures to which they are entitled upon |
- 47 -
such capitalisation, any agreement made under such authority being binding on all such members. |
155. | Profits which may be capitalised |
The profits of the Company to which the preceding Article applies shall be any undivided profits of the Company not required for paying fixed dividends on any preference shares or other shares issued on special conditions and shall be deemed to include:-
155.1 | any reserves arising from appreciation in capital assets or ascertained by valuation; and |
155.2 | any other amounts for the time being standing to any reserve or reserves including capital redemption reserve and share premium account, |
provided that to the extent required by the Acts the Company shall not apply an unrealised profit in paying up debentures or any amounts unpaid on any of its issued shares and the only purpose to which sums standing to share premium account or capital redemption reserve shall be applied pursuant to the preceding Article shall be the payment up in full of unissued shares to be allotted and distributed as aforesaid.
NOTICES
156. | Form of notice |
Any notice or other document to be sent or given pursuant to these Articles shall be in writing except that a notice calling a meeting of the Board need not be in writing. Any such notice or other document may be sent using electronic communications to such address (if any) as may for the time being be notified for that purpose to the person sending the notice or other document by or on behalf of the person to whom the notice or document is sent. The Board may from time to time specify the form and manner in which a notice may be given by or to the Company by electronic communications and may prescribe such procedures as it thinks fit for verifying the authenticity or integrity of any such electronic communication. A notice may be given to the Company by electronic communication only if it is given to an address specified for the receipt of electronic communications of that type and in accordance with the requirements specified by the Board.
157. | Method of service |
The Company may give any notice in writing, document or other communication to a member:
157.1 | personally; |
157.2 | by sending it by post in a prepaid envelope addressed to the member at his address in the Register; |
157.3 | by leaving it at that address; |
- 48 -
157.4 | by sending it using electronic communication to such address (if any) as may for the time being be notified to the Company by or on behalf of the member for that purpose; or |
157.5 | by publishing it on a web site and notifying the member, in accordance with the Acts, in such manner as the member may from time to time agree. |
In the case of joint holders of a share, all notices and other documents shall be given to the joint holder whose name stands first in the Register in respect of the joint holding and notice so given shall be sufficient notice to all the joint holders.
158. | Members with overseas addresses |
A member whose postal address in the Register is not within the United Kingdom and who gives to the Company a postal address within the United Kingdom at which notices may be given to him shall be entitled to have notices given to him at that postal address, but otherwise no such member shall be entitled to receive any notice from the Company through the postal system.
159. | Member present deemed to have received notice |
A member present, either in person or by proxy, at any meeting of the Company or of the holders of any class of shares in the Company (and, where such person is one of the joint holders of a share, all the joint holders) shall be deemed to have received notice of the meeting and, where requisite, of the purposes for which it was called.
160. | Service of notice on person entitled by transmission |
A notice or other document may be given by the Company to the persons entitled to a share in consequence of the death or bankruptcy of a member or otherwise by operation of law by sending or delivering it, in any manner authorised by these Articles for the giving of notice to a member, addressed to them by name, or by the title of representatives of the deceased, or trustee of the bankrupt or by any like description at the address, if any, within the United Kingdom supplied for that purpose by the persons claiming to be so entitled. Until such an address has been supplied, a notice may be given in any manner in which it might have been given if the death or bankruptcy or other event giving rise to the transmission of the share by operation of law had not occurred. Every person who becomes entitled to a share shall be bound by any notice in respect of that share which, before his name is entered in the Register, has been duly given to a person from whom he derives his title.
161. | Untraced member not entitled to notices |
If the Company has suspended the despatch of cheques or warrants to any member or other person entitled thereto in accordance with the provisions of these Articles or, if on two consecutive occasions notices have been sent through the post to any member or other person entitled thereto at his registered address or address for service but have been returned undelivered, such member or other person entitled thereto shall not thereafter be entitled to receive notices from the Company until he shall have communicated with the Company and supplied in writing to the Transfer Office a new registered address or address within the United Kingdom for the service of notices.
- 49 -
162. | When notice deemed served |
Proof that an envelope containing a notice in writing, document or other communication was properly addressed, prepaid and put into the post shall be conclusive evidence that the notice, document or communication was sent. Proof that a notice in writing, document or other communication contained in an electronic communication was sent in accordance with guidance issued by the Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators shall be conclusive evidence that the notice, document or communication was sent. A notice in writing, document or other communication shall be deemed to have been given:
162.1 | if left at a registered address or address at which a notice in writing, document or other communication may be given, on the day on which it was so left; |
162.2 | if sent by first class post, on the day following that on which the envelope containing it was put into the post; |
162.3 | if sent by second class post, on the second day following that on which the envelope containing it was put into the post; |
162.4 | if sent by an electronic communication, on the day following that on which the electronic communication was sent; and |
162.5 | if given by way of newspaper advertisement, at noon on the day when the advertisement appears or, if it appears on different days, at noon the first of the days when it appears. |
163. | Notice when post not available |
Without prejudice to the Article governing the accidental omission to give notice and to the presumption of service by post and the presumed date of service by post in the last preceding Article, if at any time, by reason of the suspension or curtailment of postal services within all or any part of the United Kingdom, the Board reasonably believes that a notice of a general meeting, if sent by post, is unlikely to be delivered within seven days of posting, the Company may at its sole discretion and either in addition to or in substitution for notice by post, convene a general meeting by a notice advertised in at least one national newspaper and such notice shall be deemed to have been duly served on all members and other persons entitled thereto on the day when the advertisement has appeared in at least one such newspaper. If in any such case notices have not been posted the Company shall send confirmatory copies of the notice by post if at least seven days prior to the meeting the delivery by post of notices to addresses throughout the United Kingdom again becomes practicable.
AUTHENTICATION OF DOCUMENTS
164. | Authentication of documents |
Any Director or the Secretary or any person appointed by the Board for the purpose may authenticate any document affecting the constitution of the Company and any resolution passed by the Company or the Board or any committee of the Board, and any books, records, documents and accounts relating to the business of the Company and may certify
- 50 -
copies thereof or extracts therefrom as true copies or extracts. Except in the case of manifest error a document which is certified as aforesaid shall be conclusive evidence in favour of all persons dealing with the Company in good faith that the document is true and complete and in the case of a copy of a resolution or an extract from the minutes of the Board or any committee of the Board that such copy or extract is a true and accurate record of proceedings at a duly constituted meeting.
DESTRUCTION OF DOCUMENTS
165. | Destruction of documents |
165.1 | It shall be presumed conclusively in favour of the Company that every entry on the Register purporting to have been made on the basis of an instrument of transfer or other document destroyed by the Company was duly and properly made and that every instrument of transfer so destroyed was a valid and effective instrument duly and properly registered, and that every share certificate so destroyed was a valid and effective certificate duly and properly cancelled and that every other document mentioned in Article 165.1.1 so destroyed was a valid and effective document in accordance with the recorded particulars of it in the books and records of the Company and that every paid dividend warrant and cheque so destroyed was duly paid; provided always that:- |
165.1.1 | six years shall have elapsed since the date of registration of the relevant instrument of transfer of shares and two years shall have elapsed since the date of recording of the relevant dividend mandate or notification of change of name or address and one year shall have elapsed since the recorded date of payment of the relevant dividend cheque or cancellation of the relevant cancelled share certificate; and |
165.1.2 | the Company is not shown to have destroyed a document in bad faith or with actual notice of any claim (regardless of the parties) to which the document might be relevant. |
165.3 | References in this Article to the destruction of any document include references to its disposal in any manner. |
PROVISION FOR EMPLOYEES
166. | Provision for employees |
The power conferred upon the Company by section 719 of the Act to make provision for the benefit of persons employed or formerly employed by the Company or any of its subsidiaries, in connection with the cessation or the transfer to any person of the whole or part of the undertaking of the Company or any subsidiary shall only be exercised by the Company with the prior sanction of a special resolution. If at any time the capital of the Company is divided into different classes of shares, the exercise of such power as aforesaid shall be deemed to be a variation of the rights attached to each class of shares and shall accordingly require either (a) the prior consent in writing of the holders of
- 51 -
three-fourths of the issued shares or (b) the prior sanction of an extraordinary resolution passed at a separate general meeting of the holders of the shares, of each class, in accordance with the provisions of Article 5.
WINDING UP
167. | Winding up |
If the Company is wound up, the liquidator may, with the sanction of an extraordinary resolution of the Company and any other sanction required by the Acts, divide among the members in specie the whole or any part of the assets of the Company and may, for that purpose, value any assets and determine how the division shall be carried out as between the members or different classes of members. The liquidator may, with the like sanction, vest the whole or any part of the assets in trustees upon such trusts for the benefit of the members as he with the like sanction determines, but no member shall be compelled to accept any assets upon which there is a liability.
INDEMNITY
168. | Indemnity |
Subject to the provisions of the Acts but without prejudice to any indemnity to which he may otherwise be entitled, every Director, Alternate Director, Secretary or other officer of the Company other than the Auditors shall be indemnified out of the assets of the Company against all costs, charges, expenses, losses, damages and liabilities incurred by him in or about the execution of his duties or the exercise of his powers or otherwise in relation thereto including (without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing) any liability incurred by him in defending any proceedings, whether civil or criminal, which relate to anything done or omitted or alleged to have been done or omitted by him as an officer or employee of the Company in which judgment is given in his favour or in which he is acquitted, or which are otherwise disposed of without any finding or admission of material breach of duty on his part or in connection with any application in which relief is granted to him by the court from liability for negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust in relation to the affairs of the Company.
- 52 -
Exhibit 4(c)(i)
SERVICE AGREEMENT
AN AGREEMENT made the First day of January 1992 BETWEEN:-
(1) | SMITH & NEPHEW plc whose registered office is at 2 Temple Place, Victoria Embankment, London WC2R 3BP (the Company); and |
(2) | Christopher J ODonnell, 6 Stratton Park, Swanland, North Ferriby. (the Executive). |
1. | DEFINITIONS & INTERPRETATION |
1.1 | In this Agreement unless the context otherwise requires:- |
Appointment means the Appointment of the Executive under Clause 2 below;
the Board means the Board of Directors of the Company and includes any duly constituted committee of the Board;
Associated Company means a company which is a holding company (as defined by Section 736 of the Companies Act 1985) or a subsidiary (as so defined) of the Company or a subsidiary of the Companys holding company or any company which is treated as such for the purposes of Statement of Standard Accounting Practice No. 1 of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of England and Wales.
Commencement Date means the date hereof;
Company Invention means any improvement, invention or discovery made by the Executive which, applying the provisions of Section 39 of the Patents Act 1977 in the determination of ownership is, as between the parties, the property of the Company or any Associated Company;
Model Code means the Model Code for Securities Transactions by Directors of Listed Companies as issued from time to time by The Stock Exchange;
The Stock Exchange means the International Stock Exchange of the United Kingdom and the Republic of Ireland Limited.
Term means the period of the Appointment as provided for in Clause 2 subject to the provisions of Clause 13.
1.2 | The headings used in this Agreement are for convenience only and shall not affect its construction or interpretation. |
1.3 | Any reference in this Agreement to a statutory provision shall be construed as a reference to any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof (whether before or after the date hereof) for the time being in force. |
1.4 | Reference to the masculine excludes the feminine and vice versa; except where inconsistent with the subject matter or context, the singular includes the plural and vice versa. |
2 | TERM AND APPOINTMENT |
2.1 | The Company hereby confirms the appointment of the Executive and the Executive shall continue to serve the Company as Managing Director UK Medical as provided in this Agreement. This Agreement and the Appointment shall commence on the Commencement Date and shall continue (subject as provided herein) unless and until either party gives to the other written notice in accordance with Clause 2.2 below Provided Always that this Agreement and the Appointment hereunder shall in any event terminate automatically on the Executives sixty-second (62nd) birthday without either party having to give written notice to effect termination on such date. |
2.2 | For the purposes of Clause 2.1 above the requisite notice periods to be given by the respective parties are: |
2.2.1 | on the part of the Executive, not less than six months written notice of termination to the Company; |
2.2.2 | on the part of the Company, not less than twelve months written notice of termination to the Executive. |
3. | DUTIES |
3.1. | The Executive shall devote the whole of his time and attention to the duties assigned to him and shall well and faithfully serve the Company and its Associated Companies and use his best endeavours, skill and ability to promote the business and interests of the Company and its Associated Companies and shall obey all reasonable and lawful directions given to him by or under the authority of the Board. |
3.2 | The Executive may be required in pursuance of his duties hereunder (and if so required, the Executive agrees) (a) to perform services not only for the Company but also for any Associated Company and without further remuneration (except as otherwise agreed) to accept such offices in any Associated Company as the Board may from time to time reasonably require; (b) to work at such places within the United Kingdom as the Board may require, the Company reimbursing the Executive in respect of all reasonable relocation expenses; and (c) to travel to such places whether in or outside the United Kingdom by such means and on such occasions as the Board may from time to time require. |
4. | HOLIDAY ENTITLEMENT |
The Executive is entitled to twenty-five working days holiday (in addition to public holidays) in each calendar year January to December at full salary to be taken at such time or times as may be approved by the Board. Holidays not taken cannot be carried over to a subsequent year.
5. | DISCLOSURE OF INTERESTS |
Except as a representative of the Company or with the previous approval of the Board the Executive shall not during the Appointment whether directly or indirectly whether paid or unpaid be engaged or concerned in the conduct of any other business or profession or be or become an employee, agent, partner or director of any
other company or firm or assist or have any financial interest in any other business or profession (save as a holder of shares or securities of a company any of whose shares or securities are quoted or dealt in on The Stock Exchange provided that any such holding shall not exceed five per cent of the issued share capital of the company concerned and is held by way of bona fide investment only) and shall disclose to the Board any like matters relating to his spouse, their children or their parents.
6. | REMUNERATION |
As remuneration for his services hereunder the Executive shall be paid a fixed salary at the rate of £86,000 per annum or such other rate as may from time to time be agreed in writing. Such salary shall be inclusive of any fees or remuneration which he would otherwise be entitled to receive from the Company or any Associated Company, shall be payable in equal monthly installments in arrear on or before the last working day of each calendar month and shall be reviewed once in each year by the Board. The Executive shall be eligible for bonus according to the rules from time to time of the Executive Bonus Scheme.
7. | EXPENSES |
The Executive shall be entitled to be repaid all travelling hotel and other expenses properly authorised by the Board and incurred in or about the performance of the duties hereunder, which expenses shall be evidenced in such manner as the Company may specify from time to time.
8. | BENEFITS |
8.1 | Motor Car |
To assist in the performance of his duties the Company shall during the Term provide the Executive with a motor car of a cost and type to be determined from time to time by the Board and subject to any terms and conditions which the Company may from time to time impose on the Executive in relation thereto. Subject to such terms and conditions the Company shall bear the cost of insuring testing taxing repairing and maintaining the car and shall reimburse to the Executive all running expenses of the car properly incurred in connection with the performance of duties
hereunder. The Executive shall take good care of the car and not permit such car to be taken out of the United Kingdom without the written consent of the Board and will return the car and its keys to the Company immediately upon the termination of the Appointment for whatever reason.
8.2 | Pension and Insurance |
8.2.1 | The Executive shall be entitled to participate in the Smith & Nephew UK Executive Pension Scheme and the Smith & Nephew Executive Salary Security Scheme and to receive medical insurance for himself and his family, in each case subject always to the rules of the relevant schemes {full details of which are available from the Company Secretary). |
8.2.2 | The Executive undertakes to comply with the rules of the schemes referred to in Clause 8.2.1 and to submit himself for annual medical examinations as required by the Board. |
9. | CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION |
9.1 | The Executive shall not during the Appointment or at any time thereafter (except under legal process and save with the prior written consent of the Board):- |
(a) | disclose to any person whatsoever directly or indirectly any of the trade secrets or confidential information of or relating to the Company or any Associated Company (including but not limited to details of customers, potential customers, suppliers, designs, product details, future product ideas and marketing strategies) which he may have created developed received or obtained whilst in the service of the Company or any Associated Company; |
(b) |
use any of the said trade secrets or |
confidential information for the benefit of himself or others or to the detriment or possible detriment of the Company or any Associated Company and the Executive will immediately upon termination of the Appointment for whatever reason deliver up to the Company all documents minutes records files lists papers books and other property of or concerning the business or affairs of the Company or any Associated Company which shall then be in his possession or under his control. |
10. | INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY |
10.1 | It shall be part of the normal duties of the Executive to create or develop designs, inventions, ideas, discoveries and improvements, whether in products, processes, procedures or services relating to or furthering the business or any interests of the Company or its Associated Companies or capable of so doing howsoever. |
10.2 | If at any time during the Appointment the Executive (whether alone or with any other person) makes any invention or originates, conceives, writes or makes any copyright works or designs relating directly or indirectly to the business or interests of the Company or any Associated Company, the Executive shall promptly dislose full details of the same to the Company to enable the Company to determine whether it is a Company Invention and pending such determination the Executive shall keep the same confidential and not disclose the same to any person. |
10.3 |
If the invention is a Company Invention the Executive shall hold it on trust for the Company and at the request and expense of the Company do all things necessary or desirable to enable the Company or its nominee to obtain the benefit of the Company Invention and to secure patent protection (or such other forms of protection for it as the Company may see fit) in such territories as the Company may see fit. Decisions as to the patenting and exploitation of any Company |
Invention shall be in the sole discretion of the Company. |
10.4 | The Executive hereby assigns to the Company by way of future assignment all copyright design right and other proprietary rights if any for the full terms thereof throughout the world in respect of all copyright works and designs originated conceived written or made by the Executive during the Appointment. |
10.5 | The Executive hereby irrevocably and unconditionally waives in favour of the Company any and all moral rights conferred on him by Chapter IV of Part 1 of the Copyright Designs and Patents Act 1988 for any work in which copyright or design right is vested in the Company whether by this Clause 10 or otherwise. The Executive will at the request of the Company do all things necessary or desirable to substantiate the rights of the Company under this Clause 10. For the avoidance of doubt the provisions of this Clause 10 are without prejudice to such compensation (if any) as the Executive may be or become entitled to under Section 40(1) of the Patents Act 1977. |
11. | RESTRICTIONS AFTER TERMINATION |
The Executive shall not after the termination of the Appointment howsoever arising:-
11.1 | for six months solicit or interfere with or endeavour to entice away from the Company or any Associated Company any person firm or company who at any time during the twelve months prior to the said termination shall be a customer or supplier to or in the habit of dealing with the Company or any Associated Company or induce or seek to induce any employee of the Company or any Associated Company to leave its service; |
11.2 | for six months accept employment with or enter into any contract for services with any person, firm or company which is in competition with the Company or any Associated Company in relation to products or services with which the Executive shall have been directly concerned in the period of twelve months prior to the said termination; |
11.3 | for six months engage (whether alone or as partner or as a director or major shareholder of a company) in any business which is in competition with the Company or any Associated Company as described in paragraph 11.2 above. |
12. | DEALINGS IN SECURITIES |
The Executive undertakes that (a) he will at all times during the Term observe and comply with the Model Code; and (b) he will not deal in any securities of the Company as defined in Section 12 of the Company Securities (Insider Dealing) Act 1985 unless prior written notice of such proposed dealings has been given to the Board and a written acknowledgement of such notice is received by the Executive from the Board.
13. | TERMINATION |
13.1 | The Company may terminate the Appointment at any time by summary notice in writing:- |
(i) | if the Executive commits any material breach or (after written warning) repeated breach of any of the terms of this Agreement; or |
(ii) | if the Executive shall (whether or not in the course of his employment) commit any serious misconduct or conduct tending to bring the Company or any Associated Company into disrepute or any conduct calculated or likely to affect prejudicially the interests of the Company or any Associated Company; or |
(iii) | if the Executive commits any act of bankruptcy or compounds with his creditors; or |
(iv) | if the Executive is convicted of any criminal offence other than an offence which in the reasonable opinion of the Board does not affect his position as an Executive of the Company; or |
(v) | pursuant to Clause 14 below. |
13.2 |
Upon the termination of the Appointment howsoever arising the Executive shall at any time or from time to time thereafter upon the request of the Company, resign without claim |
for compensation from all offices held in the Company or any Associated Company and from membership of any organisation acquired by reason of or in connection with the Appointment and should he/she fail to do so the Company is hereby irrevocably authorised to appoint some person in his name and on his behalf to sign any documents or do any things necessary or requisite to give effect thereto. |
13.3 | On serving notice for any reason to terminate this Agreement (whether pursuant to Clause 13.1 or otherwise howsoever) or at any time thereafter during the currency of such notice, the Company shall be entitled to pay to the Executive his remuneration pursuant to Clause 6 (at the rate then current) for the unexpired portion of the duration of his appointment or entitlement to notice as may be the case. |
13.4 | Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the Company shall not be under any obligation during this Agreement (including during any period of notice) to give to the Executive any powers or duties and may at any time require the Executive to perform all of his normal duties, part only thereof, such other duties as the Company may elect, or no duties and may from time suspend the Executive from the Companys premises but the Executive shall in all the foregoing circumstances (save those involving misconduct) be entitled to his normal salary and benefits until such time as his employment under this Agreement terminates. |
14. | INCAPACITY |
14.1 | If the Executive shall be incapacitated as defined in the Rules of the Executive Salary Security Scheme during the Term from performing his duties hereunder for a period or periods aggregating 26 weeks or more in any period of twelve months. |
14.1.1 | the Executive shall be entitled to receive full salary and benefits for the next 26 weeks of any such incapacity; |
14.1.2 |
in the event that the incapacity shall continue for more than 12 months the Company shall be entitled to |
terminate this Agreement and the Appointment hereunder at any time by written notice to the Executive; |
14.1.3 | in the event of the Company terminating this Agreement pursuant to Clause 14.1.2, the Executive shall be entitled to a continuing permanent disability payment in accordance with the terms of the Scheme, details of which are available from the Company Secretary. |
15 | MISCELLANEOUS |
15.1 | Any notice to be given hereunder shall be in writing. Notices may be given by either party by personal delivery or first class prepaid post addressed to the other party at (in the case of the Company) its registered office for the time being and (in the case of the Executive) his last known address and any such notice given by letter shall be deemed to have been served at the time at which the letter was delivered personally or if sent by post would be delivered in the ordinary course of post. |
15.2 | This Agreement is in substitution for any previous contract of service between the Company or any Associated Company and the Executive which shall be deemed to have been terminated by mutual consent as from the commencement of the Appointment. |
15.3 | This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in all respects in accordance with English law. |
15.4 | Schedule 1 constitutes a written statement as at the date hereof of the terms of employment of the Executive in compliance with the provisions of the Employment Protection (Consolidation) Act 1978; it does not form part of the contract of employment and may be varied by the Company by notice in writing to the Executive of any changes applicable to his employment. |
15.5 | Headings to clauses and paragraphs of this Agreement are for ease of reference only and shall be ignored in the construction and interpretation of this Agreement. |
AS WITNESS the hands of the Parties hereto the day and year first before written.
SCHEDULE 1
(1) | Date of Commencement of Period of Employment - |
(2) | Rate of Remuneration and the intervals at which it is paid are contained in Clause 6. |
(3) | There are no specific terms and conditions relating to hours of work except as provided in Clause 3.1. |
(4) | The terms and conditions relating to holidays are contained in Clause 4 and those relating to sickness are contained in Clause 14. |
(5) | The Executive is also (entitled to become) a member of the Smith & Nephew UK Pension Scheme, the Smith & Nephew Executive Salary Security Scheme and to receive medical insurance for the Executive and his family according to the Companys scheme from time to time, (subject always to the rules of each thereof as amended from time to time) full details of which are available from the Company Secretary. |
(6) | Particulars as to the length of notice to terminate are contained in Clause 2. |
(7) | There are no disciplinary rules applicable to the Executive except as provided in this Agreement and if the Executive is dissatisfied with any disciplinary decision he should apply orally or in writing to the Board. |
(8) | The Smith & Nephew UK Pension Scheme is not contracted out of the State Earnings Related Pension Scheme. |
Signed by |
) | |
for and on behalf of |
) | |
SMITH & NEPHEW PLC |
) | |
Signed by the Executive |
) |
Exhibit 4 (c)(ii)
SERVICE AGREEMENT
AN AGREEMENT made the First day of January 1992 BETWEEN:-
(1) | SMITH & NEPHEW plc whose registerted office is at 2 Temple Place, Victoria Embankment, London WC2R 3BP (the Company); and |
(2) | Peter Hooley of Cartref, Longhurst Road, East Horsley, Surrey, (the Executive). |
1. | DEFINITIONS & INTERPRETATION |
1.1 | In this Agreement unless the context otherwise requires:- |
Appointment means the Appointment of the Executive under Clause 2 below;
the Board means the Board of Directors of the Company and includes any duly constituted committee of the Board;
Associated Company means a company which is a holding company (as defined by Section 736 of the Companies Act 1985) or a subsidiary (as so defined) of the Company or a subsidiary of the Companys holding company or any company which is treated as such for the purposes of Statement of Standard Accounting Practice No. 1 of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of England and Wales.
Commencement Date means the date hereof;
Company Invention means any improvement, invention or discovery made by the Executive which, applying the provisions of Section 39 of the Patents Act 1977 in the determination of ownership is, as between the parties, the property of the Company or any Associated Company;
Model Code means the Model Code for Securities Transactions by Directors of Listed Companies as issued from time to time by The Stock Exchange;
The Stock Exchange means the International Stock Exchange of the United Kingdom and the Republic of Ireland Limited.
Term means the period of the Appointment as provided for in Clause 2 subject to the provisions of Clause 13.
1.2 | The headings used in this Agreement are for convenience only and shall not affect its construction or interpretation. |
1.3 | Any reference in this Agreement to a statutory provision shall be construed as a reference to any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof (whether before or after the date hereof) for the time being in force. |
1.4 | Reference to the masculine excludes the feminine and vice versa; except where inconsistent with the subject matter or context, the singular includes the plural and vice versa. |
2 | TERM AND APPOINTMENT |
2.1 | The Company hereby confirms the appointment of the Executive and the Executive shall continue to serve the Company as Finance Director as provided in this Agreement. This Agreement and the Appointment shall commence on the Commencement Date and shall continue (subject as provided herein) unless and until either party gives to the other written notice in accordance with Clause 2.2 below Provided Always that this Agreement and the Appointment hereunder shall in any event terminate automatically on the Executives sixty-second (62nd) birthday without either party having to give written notice to effect termination on such date. |
2.2 | For the purposes of Clause 2.1 above the requisite notice periods to be given by the respective parties are: |
2.2.1 | on the part of the Executive, not less than six months written notice of termination to the Company; |
2.2.2 | on the part of the Company, not less than twelve months written notice of termination to the Executive. |
3. | DUTIES |
3.1. | The Executive shall devote the whole of his time and attention to the duties assigned to him and shall well and faithfully serve the Company and its Associated Companies and use his best endeavours, skill and ability to promote the business and interests of the Company and its Associated Companies and shall obey all reasonable and lawful directions given to him by or under the authority of the Board. |
3.2 | The Executive may be required in pursuance of his duties hereunder (and if so required, the Executive agrees) (a) to perform services not only for the Company but also for any Associated Company and without further remuneration (except as otherwise agreed) to accept such offices in any Associated Company as the Board may from time to time reasonably require; (b) to work at such places within the United Kingdom as the Board may require, the Company reimbursing the Executive in respect of all reasonable relocation expenses; and (c) to travel to such places whether in or outside the United Kingdom by such means and on such occasions as the Board may from time to time require. |
4. | HOLIDAY ENTITLEMENT |
The Executive is entitled to twenty-five working days holiday (in addition to public holidays) in each calendar year January to December at full salary to be taken at such time or times as may be approved by the Board. Holidays not taken cannot be carried over to a subsequent year.
5 . | DISCLOSURE OF INTERESTS |
Except as a representative of the Company or with the previous approval of the Board the Executive shall not during the Appointment whether directly or indirectly whether paid or unpaid be engaged or concerned in the conduct of any other business or profession or be or become an employee, agent, partner or director of any
other company or firm or assist or have any financial interest in any other business or profession (save as a holder of shares or securities of a company any of whose shares or securities are quoted or dealt in on The Stock Exchange provided that any such holding shall not exceed five per cent of the issued share capital of the company concerned and is held by way of bona fide investment only) and shall disclose to the Board any like matters relating to his spouse, their children or their parents.
6. | REMUNERATION |
As remuneration for his services hereunder the Executive shall be paid a fixed salary at the rate of £108,000 per annum or such other rate as may from time to time be agreed in writing. Such salary shall be inclusive of any fees or remuneration which he would otherwise be entitled to receive from the Company or any Associated Company, shall be payable in equal monthly instalments in arrear on or before the last working day of each calendar month and shall be reviewed once in each year by the Board. The Executive shall be eligible for bonus according to the rules from time to time of the Executive Bonus Scheme.
7. | EXPENSES |
The Executive shall be entitled to be repaid all travelling hotel and other expenses properly authorised by the Board and incurred in or about the performance of the duties hereunder, which expenses shall be evidenced in such manner as the Company may specify from time to time.
8. | BENEFITS |
8.1 | Motor Car |
To assist in the performance of his duties the Company shall during the Term provide the Executive with a motor car of a cost and type to be determined from time to time by the Board and subject to any terms and conditions which the Company may from time to time impose on the Executive in relation thereto. Subject to such terms and conditions the Company shall bear the cost of insuring testing taxing repairing and maintaining the car and shall reimburse to the Executive all running expenses of the car properly incurred in connection with the performance of duties
hereunder. The Executive shall take good care of the car and not permit such car to be taken out of the United Kingdom without the written consent of the Board and will return the car and its keys to the Company immediately upon the termination of the Appointment for whatever reason.
8.2 | Pension and Insurance |
8.2.1 | The Executive shall be entitled to participate in the Smith & Nephew UK Executive Pension Scheme and the Smith & Nephew Executive Salary Security Scheme and to receive medical insurance for himself and his family, in each case subject always to the rules of the relevant schemes (full details of which are available from the Company Secretary). |
8.2.2 | The Executive undertakes to comply with the rules of the schemes referred to in Clause 8.2.1 and to submit himself for annual medical examinations as required by the Board. |
9. | CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION |
9.1 | The Executive shall not during the Appointment or at any time thereafter (except under legal process and save with the prior written consent of the Board):- |
(a) | disclose to any person whatsoever directly or indirectly any of the trade secrets or confidential information of or relating to the Company or any Associated Company (including but not limited to details of customers, potential customers, suppliers, designs, product details, future product ideas and marketing strategies) which he may have created developed received or obtained whilst in the service of the Company or any Associated Company; |
(b) |
use any of the said trade secrets or |
confidential information for the benefit of himself or others or to the detriment or possible detriment of the Company or any Associated Company and the Executive will immediately upon termination of the Appointment for whatever reason deliver up to the Company all documents minutes records files lists papers books and other property of or concerning the business or affairs of the Company or any Associated Company which shall then be in his possession or under his control. |
10. | INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY |
10.1 | It shall be part of the normal duties of the Executive to create or develop designs, inventions, ideas, discoveries and improvements, whether in products, processes, procedures or services relating to or furthering the business or any interests of the Company or its Associated Companies or capable of so doing howsoever. |
10.2 | If at any time during the Appointment the Executive (whether alone or with any other person) makes any invention or originates, conceives, writes or makes any copyright works or designs relating directly or indirectly to the business or interests of the Company or any Associated Company, the Executive shall promptly dislose full details of the same to the Company to enable the Company to determine whether it is a Company Invention and pending such determination the Executive shall keep the same confidential and not disclose the same to any person. |
10.3 |
If the invention is a Company Invention the Executive shall hold it on trust for the Company and at the request and expense of the Company do all things necessary or desirable to enable the Company or its nominee to obtain the benefit of the Company Invention and to secure patent protection (or such other forms of protection for it as the Company may see fit) in such territories as the Company may see fit. Decisions as to the patenting and exploitation of any Company |
Invention shall be in the sole discretion of the Company. |
10.4 | The Executive hereby assigns to the Company by way of future assignment all copyright design right and other proprietary rights if any for the full terms thereof throughout the world in respect of all copyright works and designs originated conceived written or made by the Executive during the Appointment. |
10.5 | The Executive hereby irrevocably and unconditionally waives in favour of the Company any and all moral rights conferred on him by Chapter IV of Part 1 of the Copyright Designs and Patents Act 1988 for any work in which copyright or design right is vested in the Company whether by this Clause 10 or otherwise. The Executive will at the request of the Company do all things necessary or desirable to substantiate the rights of the Company under this Clause 10. For the avoidance of doubt the provisions of this Clause 10 are without prejudice to such compensation (if any) as the Executive may be or become entitled to under Section 40(1) of the Patents Act 1977. |
11. | RESTRICTIONS AFTER TERMINATION |
The Executive shall not after the termination of the Appointment howsoever arising:-
11.1 | for six months solicit or interfere with or endeavour to entice away from the Company or any Associated Company any person firm or company who at any time during the twelve months prior to the said termination shall be a customer or supplier to or in the habit of dealing with the Company or any Associated Company or induce or seek to induce any employee of the Company or any Associated Company to leave its service; |
11.2 | for six months accept employment with or enter into any contract for services with any person, firm or company which is in competition with the Company or any Associated Company in relation to products or services with which the Executive shall have been directly concerned in the period of twelve months prior to the said termination; |
11.3 | for six months engage (whether alone or as partner or as a director or major shareholder of a company) in any business which is in competition with the Company or any Associated Company as desribed in paragraph 11.2 above. |
12. | DEALINGS IN SECURITIES |
The Executive undertakes that (a) he will at all times during the Term observe and comply with the Model Code; and (b) he will not deal in any securities of the Company as defined in Section 12 of the Company Securities (Insider Dealing) Act 1985 unless prior written notice of such proposed dealings has been given to the Board and a written acknowledgement of such notice is received by the Executive from the Board.
13. | TERMINATION |
13.1 | The Company may terminate the Appointment at any time by summary notice in writing:- |
(i) | if the Executive commits any material breach or (after written warning) repeated breach of any of the terms of thisAgreement; or |
(ii) | if the Executive shall (whether or not in the course of his employment) commit any serious misconduct or conduct tending to bring the Company or any Associated Company into disrepute or any conduct calculated or likely to affect prejudicially the interests of the Company or any Associated Company; or |
(iii) | if the Executive commits any act of bankruptcy or compounds with his creditors; or |
(iv) | if the Executive is convicted of any criminal offence other than an offence which in the reasonable opinion of the Board does not affect his position as an Executive of the Company; or |
(v) | pursuant to Clause 14 below. |
13.2 |
Upon the termination of the Appointment howsoever arising the Executive shall at any time or from time to time thereafter upon the request of the Company, resign without claim |
for compensation from all offices held in the Company or any Associated Company and from membership of any organisation acquired by reason of or in connection with the Appointment and should he/she fail to do so the Company is hereby irrevocably authorised to appoint some person in his name and on his behalf to sign any documents or do any things necessary or requisite to give effect thereto. |
13.3 | On serving notice for any reason to terminate this Agreement (whether pursuant to Clause 13.1 or otherwise howsoever) or at any time thereafter during the currency of such notice, the Company shall be entitled to pay to the Executive his remuneration pursuant to Clause 6 (at the rate then current) for the unexpired portion of the duration of his appointment or entitlement to notice as may be the case. |
13.4 | Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the Company shall not be under any obligation during this Agreement (including during any period of notice) to give to the Executive any powers or duties and may at any time require the Executive to perform all of his normal duties, part only thereof, such other duties as the Company may elect, or no duties and may from time suspend the Executive from the Companys premises but the Executive shall in all the foregoing circumstances (save those involving misconduct) be entitled to his normal salary and benefits until such time as his employment under this Agreement terminates. |
14. | INCAPACITY |
14.1 | If the Executive shall be incapacitated as defined in the Rules of the Executive Salary Security Scheme during the Term from performing his duties hereunder for a period or periods aggregating 26 weeks or more in any period of twelve months. |
14.1.1 | the Executive shall be entitled to receive full salary and benefits for the next 26 weeks of any such incapacity; |
14.1.2 |
in the event that the incapacity shall continue for more than 12 months the Company shall be entitled to |
terminate this Agreement and the Appointment hereunder at any time by written notice to the Executive; |
14.1.3 | in the event of the Company terminating this Agreement pursuant to Clause 14.1.2, the Executive shall be entitled to a continuing permanent disability payment in accordance with the terms of the Scheme, details of which are available from the Company Secretary. |
15 | MISCELLANEOUS |
15.1 | Any notice to be given hereunder shall be in writing. Notices may be given by either party by personal delivery or first class prepaid post addressed to the other party at (in the case of the Company) its registered office for the time being and (in the case of the Executive) his last known address and any such notice given by letter shall be deemed to have been served at the time at which the letter was delivered personally or if sent by post would be delivered in the ordinary course of post. |
15.2 | This Agreement is in substitution for any previous contract of service between the Company or any Associated Company and the Executive which shall be deemed to have been terminated by mutual consent as from the commencement of the Appointment. |
15.3 | This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in all respects in accordance with English law. |
15.4 | Schedule 1 constitutes a written statement as at the date hereof of the terms of employment of the Executive in compliance with the provisions of the Employment Protection (Consolidation) Act 1978; it does not form part of the contract of employment and may be varied by the Company by notice in writing to the Executive of any changes applicable to his employment. |
15.5 | Headings to clauses and paragraphs of this Agreement are for ease of reference only and shall be ignored in the construction and interpretation of this Agreement. |
AS WITNESS the hands of the Parties hereto the day and year first before written.
SCHEDULE 1
(1) | Date of Commencement of Period of Employment - |
(2) | Rate of Remuneration and the intervals at which it is paid are contained in Clause 6. |
(3) | There are no specific terms and conditions relating to hours of work except as provided in Clause 3.1. |
(4) | The terms and conditions relating to holidays are contained in Clause 4 and those relating to sickness are contained in Clause 14. |
(5) | The Executive is also (entitled to become) a member of the Smith & Nephew UK Pension Scheme, the Smith & Nephew Executive Salary Security Scheme and to receive medical insurance for the Executive and his family according to the Companys scheme from time to time, (subject always to the rules of each thereof as amended from time to time) full details of which are available from the Company Secretary. |
(6) | Particulars as to the length of notice to terminate are contained in Clause 2. |
(7) | There are no disciplinary rules applicable to the Executive except as provided in this Agreement and if the Executive is dissatisfied with any disciplinary decision he should apply orally or in writing to the Board. |
(8) | The Smith & Nephew UK Pension Scheme is not contracted out of the State Earnings Related Pension Scheme. As you are subject to the cap introduced by the Finance Act 1989 the Company has agreed to augment your pension to the maximum permitted by the cap at any time. In addition the Company will provide you with an unfunded compensation plan as detailed to you in correspondence with the Alexander Consulting Group. |
Signed by |
) | |
for and on behalf of |
) | |
SMITH & NEPHEW PLC |
) | |
Signed by the Executive |
) |
Exhibit 4 (c) (vi)
SMITH & NEPHEW PLC
THE SMITH & NEPHEW 2001 UK
APPROVED SHARE OPTION PLAN
Inland Revenue Ref No X21778
This is a copy of the rules of
The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Approved Share Option Plan
as amended from time to time
INDEX
Rule |
Page
|
|||
1. |
This Plan |
1 | ||
2. |
Grant of Options |
6 | ||
3. |
Exercise Price |
8 | ||
4. |
Relationship with Contract of Employment |
8 | ||
5. |
Non-Transferability of Options |
9 | ||
6. |
Performance Targets |
9 | ||
7. |
Overall Limits on the Granting of Options |
10 | ||
8. |
Statutory Limit on the Grant of Options |
11 | ||
9. |
Exercise of Options |
11 | ||
10. |
Manner of Exercise of Options |
15 | ||
11. |
Demerger |
17 | ||
12. |
Statutory Reconstruction of the Company |
17 | ||
13. |
Winding-up of the Company |
17 | ||
14. |
Voluntary Arrangement |
17 | ||
15. |
Administration Order |
18 | ||
16. |
Change in Control |
18 | ||
17. |
Variation of Share Capital |
20 | ||
18. |
Alteration of the Plan |
21 | ||
19. |
Service of Documents |
22 | ||
20. |
Miscellaneous |
22 | ||
21. |
Jurisdiction |
23 | ||
22. |
Data Protection |
23 | ||
23. |
Third Party Rights |
23 | ||
Option Certificate |
24 | |||
Form of Acceptance of Grant |
26 | |||
Notice of Exercise of Option |
28 |
RULES OF
THE SMITH & NEPHEW 2001 UK APPROVED SHARE OPTION PLAN
1. | THIS PLAN |
1.1 | This Plan is an employees share scheme approved by ordinary resolution of the shareholders of the Company and established by resolution of the directors of the Company on 4 April 2001, and was approved by the Inland Revenue pursuant to s185 and Schedule 9 of the Taxes Act on 10 April 2001. |
1.2 | In this Plan the following words and expressions shall have the meanings given below and words and expressions not otherwise defined shall have the same meanings as in section 187 of the Taxes Act and Schedule 9:- |
Announcement | the preliminary announcement to the London Stock Exchange of the annual or half yearly results of the Company for a year | |
the Approval Date | the date on which the Company receives notice that this Scheme has been approved by the Inland Revenue pursuant to Schedule 9 | |
Associated Company | subject to Rule 8.3, any company which, in relation to the Company, is an associated company as that term is defined in section 416 of the Taxes Act except that, for the purposes of this Plan, subsection (1) of that section shall have effect with the omission of the words or at any time within one year previously | |
the Auditors | the auditors for the time being of the Company or in the event of there being joint auditors, such one of them as the Committee may decide | |
Close Company | has the same meaning as in Chapter I of Part XI of the Taxes Act SAVE THAT in determining whether a company is a close company for the purposes of this Scheme, sections 414(1)(a) and 415 of that Act shall be disregarded | |
the Committee | the Remuneration Committee of the Directors, or such other committee comprising a majority of non-executive directors of the Company to which the Directors delegate responsibility for the operation of this Plan or following a change of control of the Company, those persons who comprised the Remuneration Committee or such other committee of the Directors immediately before such change of control |
1
the Company | Smith & Nephew plc (registered in England no. 324357) | |
control | has the meaning given in section 840 of the Taxes Act | |
Daily Official List | the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange | |
the Date of Grant | in relation to any Option, means the date on which that Option is granted in accordance with Rule 2.8 | |
Dealing Day | a day on which the London Stock Exchange is open for business | |
the Directors | the board of directors of the Company or a duly authorised committee of the directors | |
Eligible Employee |
(a) an employee of a Participating Company who is a director of any Participating Company and required under his contract of employment to work for not less than 25 hours per week (excluding meal breaks) disregarding holiday entitlement; or
(b) any other employee of a Participating Company |
|
other Employees Share Scheme |
(a) the Smith & Nephew 1985 Share Option Scheme;
(b) the Smith & Nephew 1990 International Executive Share Option Scheme;
(c) the Smith & Nephew Employee Share Option Scheme;
(d) the Smith & Nephew 1991 Overseas Employee Share Option Plan; and
(e) any other employee share option or share incentive scheme (except this Plan) established by the Company under which shares may be issued by the Company |
|
the Exercise Price | the price per Share payable upon the exercise of an Option (as determined in accordance with Rule 3) | |
Good Reason |
means, in relation to an Optionholder ceasing to hold office or employment within the Group, ceasing to do so by reason of:-
(a) injury, ill-health or disability (evidenced to the satisfaction of the Committee); or |
2
(b) dismissal by reason of redundancy (within the meaning of the Employment Rights Act 1996); or
(c) retirement on or after reaching the age of 65 or the age at which the Optionholder is anticipated to retire in accordance with the terms of his contract of employment; or
(d) the fact that the office or employment by virtue of which he is eligible to participate in this Plan relates to a business or part of a business which is transferred to a person who is neither an Associated Company nor a member of the Group; or
(e) the fact that the company with which he holds the office or employment by virtue of which he is eligible to participate in this Plan is no longer a member of the Group or an Associated Company |
||
the Grantor | in relation to an Option, the Company or such other person as intends to grant or has granted that Option | |
the Group | the Company and any company which is for the time being a Subsidiary | |
ITEPA | the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 | |
Jointly-owned Company | a company (and any subsidiary as defined in section 736 of the Companies Act 1985 of such a company) of which the whole of the issued ordinary share capital is jointly owned by a member of the Group and another person (not being a member of the Group) but which is not a Subsidiary and is not under the control of such other company | |
Key Feature | a provision of this Plan which is necessary to comply with the requirements of Schedule 4 | |
the London Stock Exchange | London Stock Exchange plc | |
Market Value | in relation to any Share in respect of which an Option is to be, or has been, granted means the average of the middle market quotations of a Share as derived from the Daily Official List for the 3 consecutive Dealing Days last preceding the Date of Grant |
3
Material Interest | has the meaning given in paragraph 10 of Schedule 4 | |
the Model Code | the code adopted by the Company which contains provisions similar in purpose and effect to the provisions of the Model Code for Securities Transactions by Directors of Listed Companies issued by the UK Listing Authority from time to time | |
a New Joiner Option | the first Option granted to an individual after he first becomes an Eligible Employee | |
NICs | National Insurance Contributions | |
NI Regulations | the laws, regulations and practices currently in force relating to liability for, and the collection of, NICs | |
Option | a right to acquire Shares granted in accordance with and subject to the rules of this Plan which has not lapsed and ceased to be exercisable | |
Option Certificate | a certificate issued pursuant to Rule 2.8 evidencing the grant of an Option | |
Option Gain | the amount of any gain realised upon the exercise, or acquisition of Shares pursuant to, an Option, being a gain that is treated as remuneration derived from the Optionholders employment by virtue of section 4(4)(a) of the Social Security Contributions and Benefits Act 1992 | |
Optionholder | a person who has been granted an Option or, if that person has died and where the context requires, his Personal Representatives | |
Optionholders Employer | in relation to an Optionholder, such member of the Group as is the Optionholders employer or, if he has ceased to be employed within the Group, was his employer or such other member of the Group, or other person as, under the PAYE Regulations or, as the case may be, the N.I. Regulations, or any other statutory or regulatory enactment (whether in the United Kingdom or any other jurisdiction) is obliged to account for any Option Tax Liability | |
Option Shares | the Shares over which an Option subsists | |
Option Tax Liability | in relation to an Optionholder, means any liability of the Optionholders Employer to account to the Inland Revenue or other tax authority for any amount of, or representing, income tax or NICs |
4
(which shall, to the extent provided for in Rule 2.10 include secondary Class I NICs) or any equivalent charge in the nature of tax or social security contributions (whether under the laws of the United Kingdom or of any other jurisdiction) which may arise upon the exercise of, or the acquisition of Shares pursuant to, an Option | ||
Ordinary Share Capital | the issued ordinary share capital of the Company other than fixed-rate preference shares | |
Participating Company | a member of the Group to which the Directors have resolved that this Plan shall extend for the time being | |
PAYE Regulations | means the rules and regulations governing the obligation of an employer or other person to account for income tax as mentioned in ITEPA or regulations made under section 684 of Part 11 of ITEPA | |
Performance Option | an Option the exercise of which is normally subject to the attainment of a Performance Target | |
Performance Period | in relation to an Option, the period over which performance is to be judged for the purpose of determining whether, or to what extent, a Performance Target is met or, in the case of an Option which is not a Performance Option, the period of 3 years beginning with the Date of Grant or such other period as the Grantor shall specify at the time of grant of the Option | |
Performance Target | the condition or conditions imposed on the exercise of an Option pursuant to Rule 6 as varied from time to time | |
Personal Representatives | in relation to an Optionholder, the personal representatives of the Optionholder (being either the executors of his will to whom a valid grant of probate has been made or, if he dies intestate, the duly appointed administrator(s) of his estate) who have produced to the Company evidence of their appointment as such | |
this Plan | The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Approved Share Option Plan as set out in these rules and amended from time to time pursuant to Rule 18 | |
Schedule 4 | Schedule 4 to ITEPA | |
Shares | fully-paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company which satisfy the requirements of paragraphs 16-20 (inclusive) of Schedule 4 |
5
Subscription Option | a right to subscribe for Shares granted in accordance with and subject to the rules of this Plan | |
Subsidiary | any company which is for the time being a subsidiary (as defined in section 736 of the Companies Act 1985) of the Company and under the control of the Company | |
the Taxes Act | the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988 | |
UK Listing Authority | the Financial Services Authority in its capacity as the competent authority for the purposes of Part IV of the Financial Services Act 1986 | |
year | a financial year of the Company |
1.3 | For the purposes of this Plan, unless the context otherwise requires:- |
(a) | references to an Option vesting or being or becoming vested in respect of any number or proportion of the Shares over which it subsists are to be read as references to the Option becoming capable of being exercised either immediately or, subject to the Optionholder continuing to hold office or employment within the Group (or with any Associated Company), at some future time in respect of such Shares; |
(b) | references to Shares in respect of which an Option subsists at any time are to be read and construed as references to the Shares over which the Option is then held (and in respect of which it has not then lapsed and ceased to be exercisable); |
(c) | any reference to any enactment includes a reference to that enactment as from time to time modified extended or re-enacted; |
(d) | words denoting the masculine gender shall include the feminine; |
(e) | words denoting the singular shall include the plural and vice versa; and |
(f) | references to rules, schedules and appendices are to the rules, schedules and appendices of this Plan and no account should be taken of the rule headings which have been inserted for ease of reference only. |
2. | GRANT OF OPTIONS |
Eligibility
2.1 | Subject to the following provisions of this Rule 2, the Committee shall have an absolute discretion as to the selection of persons to whom Options may be granted. |
2.2 | An Option may only be granted to an Eligible Employee. |
2.3 |
An Option shall not be granted to any individual at any time when he has, or has within the preceding 12 months had, a Material Interest in a Close Company being either the |
6
Company or a company which has control of the Company or is a member of a consortium which owns the Company. |
Time of grant
2.4 | An Option may only be granted:- |
(a) | during the period ending 42 days after the Approval Date, and thereafter |
(b) | during the period of 42 days beginning with the fourth Dealing Day following an Announcement; or |
(c) | within a period of 28 days immediately after the person to whom it is granted first becomes an Eligible Employee; or |
(d) | at any other time but only if, in the opinion of the Committee, the circumstances are exceptional. |
2.5 | If the Grantor is restricted by statute, order or regulation (including any regulation, order or requirement imposed on the Company by the London Stock Exchange or any other regulatory authority) from granting an Option within any period as mentioned in Rule 2.4, the Grantor may, subject to Rule 2.6, grant an Option at any time during the period of 42 days (or, in the circumstances referred to in Rule (c), 28 days) beginning with the date on which all such restrictions are removed. |
2.6 | An Option may not be granted at any time if to do so would be a breach of the Model Code. |
2.7 | No Option may be granted after 4 April 2011. |
Manner of grant
2.8 | An Option shall be granted by the Grantor executing as a deed and issuing to the Optionholder an Option Certificate which specifies:- |
(a) | the Date of Grant; |
(b) | the number of Option Shares; |
(c) | the Exercise Price; |
(d) | the Performance Target (if any) imposed pursuant to Rule 6 or any other condition imposed under Rule 2.12; |
(e) | the last date on which the Option may be exercised by reason of Rule 9.1; |
(f) | that it is a condition of exercise of the Option that the Optionholder agrees to indemnify the Grantor and the Optionholders Employer in respect of any Option Tax Liability |
and is otherwise in such form as the Grantor may from time to time specify.
2.9 |
Unless the Grantor otherwise determines in relation to the grant of Options on any occasion, any person to whom an Option is granted must confirm his acceptance of such grant by executing as a deed and delivering to the Grantor a duly completed form of acceptance in such form as the Grantor may from time to time specify and if no such |
7
form of acceptance is received by the Grantor within the period of 30 days after the Date of Grant (or such later time as the Grantor may notify to the Optionholder at the Date of Grant) the Option shall thereupon lapse and cease to be exercisable. |
2.10 | Subject to Rule 2.11, in accepting the grant of an Option the Optionholder shall, if required by the Grantor, agree with and undertake to the Company and any other company which is the Optionholders Employer that:- |
2.10.1 | the Optionholders Employer may recover from the Optionholder as mentioned in Rule 10.6, the whole or any part of any secondary Class I NICs payable in respect of any Option Gain; and |
2.10.2 | the Optionholder shall join with the Optionholders Employer in making an election (in such terms and such form and subject to such approval by the Inland Revenue as provided in paragraph 3B of Schedule 1 to the Social Security Contributions and Benefits Act 1992) for the transfer to the Optionholder of the whole, or such part as the Company may determine, of any liability of the Optionholders Employer to secondary Class I NICs on any Option Gain. |
2.11 | The provisions of Rule 2.10 shall apply only in relation to Options granted after the date on which this Scheme was amended to include the provisions of that rule. |
2.12 | The Directors may specify that the exercise of any Option shall be subject to such other objective conditions (in addition to any Performance Target) as may be specified in the Option Certificate at the time of grant. |
2.13 | An Option shall not be granted by any person other than the Company without the prior approval of the Directors. |
2.14 | An Option shall not be granted to a director of the Company without the prior approval of the Committee. |
3. | EXERCISE PRICE |
3.1 | Subject to Rule 3.2 and any adjustment being made pursuant to Rule 17, the Exercise Price of an Option shall be determined by the Committee (with the prior consent of the Grantor, if appropriate) but shall be not less than Market Value. |
3.2 | The Exercise Price of a Subscription Option shall not (except as mentioned in sub-paragraph (c)(iii) of Rule 17.1) in any event be less than the nominal value of a Share. |
4. | RELATIONSHIP WITH CONTRACT OF EMPLOYMENT |
4.1 | The grant of an Option does not form part of the Optionholders entitlement to remuneration or benefits pursuant to his contract of employment nor does the existence of a contract of employment between any person and the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company, give such person any right or entitlement to have an Option granted to him in respect of any number of Shares or any expectation that an Option might be granted to him whether subject to any conditions or at all. |
4.2 | The rights and obligations of an Optionholder under the terms of his contract of employment with the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company shall not be affected by the grant of an Option or his participation in this Plan. |
8
4.3 | The rights granted to an Optionholder upon the grant of an Option shall not afford the Optionholder any rights or additional rights to compensation or damages in consequence of the loss or termination of his office or employment with the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company for any reason whatsoever (whether or not such termination is ultimately held to be wrongful or unfair). |
4.4 | An Optionholder shall not be entitled to any compensation or damages for any loss or potential loss which he may suffer by reason of being unable to exercise an Option in consequence of the loss or termination of his office or employment with the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company for any reason whatsoever (whether or not termination is ultimately held to be wrongful or unfair). |
5. | NON-TRANSFERABILITY OF OPTIONS |
5.1 | During his lifetime only the individual to whom an Option is granted may exercise that Option. |
5.2 | An Option shall immediately lapse and cease to be exercisable if:- |
(a) | it is transferred or assigned (other than to the Personal Representatives of the Optionholder), mortgaged, charged or otherwise disposed of by the Optionholder; or |
(b) | the Optionholder is adjudged bankrupt or an interim order is made because he intends to propose a voluntary arrangement to his creditors under the Insolvency Act 1986; or |
(c) | the Optionholder makes or proposes a voluntary arrangement under the Insolvency Act 1986, or any other scheme or arrangement in relation to his debts, with his creditors or any section of them; or |
(d) | the Optionholder is otherwise deprived (except on death) of the legal or beneficial ownership of the Option by operation of law or doing or omitting to do anything which causes him to be so deprived. |
6. | PERFORMANCE TARGETS |
6.1 | Except in the case of a New Joiner Option, an Option which is not a Performance Option may only be granted if the Directors are satisfied that individual performance targets set in relation to the year preceding the Date of Grant have been met or exceeded. |
6.2 | When an Option is granted, the Grantor may determine and specify in the Option Certificate that the exercise of such Option shall be conditional upon the attainment of such one or more targets relating to the performance of the Company and, if the Committee so determines, upon the performance of a Subsidiary and/or division and/or the Optionholder measured over such period and against such objective criteria as may be determined by the Committee PROVIDED THAT , subject to Rules 6.4 and 6.5 the question of whether an Option can or cannot be exercised on any occasion shall not be determined or determinable at the discretion of any person. |
6.3 | Any such Performance Target may provide that the Option shall become vested in respect of a given number or proportion of the Shares over which it subsists according to whether, and the extent to which, any given Performance Target is met or exceeded. |
9
6.4 | After an Option has been granted the Committee may (with the consent of the Grantor, where appropriate), in appropriate circumstances, amend the Performance Target PROVIDED THAT no such amendment shall be made unless an event has occurred or events have occurred in consequence of which the Committee reasonably considers that the terms of the existing Performance Target should be so amended for the purpose of ensuring that either the objective criteria against which the performance of the Company and/or any Subsidiary or division and/or the Optionholder will then be measured will be a fairer measure of such performance or that any amended Performance Target will afford a more effective incentive to the Optionholder and will be no more difficult to satisfy than was the original Performance Target when first set. |
6.5 | After an Option has been granted the Committee (with the consent of the Grantor, where appropriate) may, in appropriate circumstances, waive in whole or in part any requirement that a Performance Target be met as a condition of exercise of such Option PROVIDED THAT no such waiver shall be made unless an event or events have occurred in consequence of which the Committee reasonably considers that the terms of the existing Performance Target no longer afford an effective incentive to the Optionholder. |
6.6 | The Directors shall, within the period of 60 days beginning with either the end of the Performance Period or, if later, the Announcement for the last year of the Performance Period, notify the Grantor, if it is not the Company, and the Optionholder of the number or proportion of the Option Shares (if any) in respect of which the Option lapses and ceases to be exercisable in consequence of a Performance Target not being met. |
6.7 | If, in consequence of a Performance Target being met, an Option becomes vested in respect of some but not all of the Shares over which it is held, it shall thereupon lapse and cease to be exercisable in respect of the balance of the Option Shares. |
6.8 | A Performance Target imposed pursuant to this Rule 6 shall not apply in relation to the exercise of a right to acquire shares granted (as mentioned in Rule 16.4) in consequence of a change of control of the Company. |
6.9 | The number of Shares in respect of which an Option shall become vested on any occasion shall be rounded to the nearest whole number. |
7. | OVERALL LIMITS ON THE GRANTING OF OPTIONS |
10% in 10 years for all plans
7.1 | The number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options may be granted in any year, when added to:- |
(a) | the number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options have previously been granted (and which, if not exercised, have not ceased to be exercisable); and |
(b) | the number of Shares issued or in respect of which rights to subscribe for Shares have previously been granted (and which have neither been exercised, nor have ceased to be exercisable) pursuant to any other Employees Share Scheme |
in that year and the preceding nine years shall not exceed 10 per cent of the Ordinary Share Capital.
10
5% in 10 years for executive plans
7.2 | The number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options may be granted in any year, when added to:- |
(a) | the number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options have previously been granted (and which, if not exercised, have not ceased to be exercisable); and |
(b) | the number of Shares issued or in respect of which rights to subscribe for Shares have previously been granted (and which have neither been exercised, nor have ceased to be exercisable) pursuant to any other executive share option or incentive plan |
in that year and the preceding nine years shall not exceed 5 per cent of the Ordinary Share Capital.
8. | STATUTORY LIMIT ON THE GRANT OF OPTIONS |
Statutory limitation
8.1 | The number of Shares in respect of which an Option is granted to an Eligible Employee shall be limited, and such Option shall take effect so that the aggregate Market Value of Shares which may be acquired upon the exercise of that Option, when added to:- |
(a) | the aggregate Market Value of Shares in respect of which Options have previously been granted (and have not then been exercised nor ceased to be exercisable); and |
(b) | the aggregate Market Value of Shares in respect of which rights to acquire such Shares have been obtained by that Eligible Employee under any other share option scheme approved under Schedule 9 of the Taxes Act or Schedule 4, in either case (not being a savings-related share option scheme) which has been established by the Company or by any company which, in relation to the Company, is an Associated Company (and have not then been exercised nor ceased to be exercisable) |
shall not exceed or further exceed £30,000 or such other limit as may from time to time be specified in the legislation governing Inland Revenue approved share option schemes.
8.2 | For the purposes of this Rule 8 the market value of Shares in respect of which other rights to acquire Shares have been granted shall have the same meaning as in Part VIII of the Taxation of Chargeable Gains Act 1992 and shall be calculated as at the time such other rights were granted. |
8.3 | For the purposes of Rule 8.1 Associated Company shall have the meaning given in section 416 of the Taxes Act. |
9. | EXERCISE OF OPTIONS |
9.1 | Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, an Option shall not in any event be exercisable on or after the tenth anniversary of the Date of Grant or such earlier date as the Grantor may specify when the Option is granted. |
11
9.2 | Save as otherwise provided in the following provisions of this Rule 9 and Rules 11 and 16, a Performance Option may only be exercised after the Directors have given notice to the Optionholder as mentioned in Rule 6.6. |
9.3 | Except as otherwise provided in the following provisions of this Rule 9 and Rule 16, an Option may not be exercised at any time unless the Optionholder then holds office or employment with a member of the Group or an Associated Company or a Jointly-owned Company. |
9.4 | An Option shall not be exercised at any time when the Optionholder has or has within the preceding 12 months had, a Material Interest in a Close Company being either the Company or a company which has control of the Company or is a member of a consortium which owns the Company. |
9.5 | Save as otherwise provided in Rule 6 and in the following provisions of this Rule 9 and Rules 11 to 16 , an Option may be exercised only in respect of such proportions of the Option Shares and at such times as the Grantor shall determine and specify in the Option Certificate. |
9.6 | An Option may not be exercised on any occasion if such exercise would not be in compliance with the Model Code. |
Injury, ill-health, disability, redundancy, retirement etc
9.7 | If an Optionholder ceases to hold office or employment within the Group for a Good Reason then, subject to Rule 9.10:- |
9.7.1 | an Option granted to him at any time prior to 3 August 2004 may, within the period of 6 months beginning with the date of such cessation, be exercised in respect of:- |
(a) | Shares in respect of which the Option was vested immediately before the Optionholder so ceased to hold office or employment within the Group (or if, in the case of a Performance Option the Optionholder so ceases after the end of the Performance Period but before the date on which the Optionholder is notified as mentioned in Rule 6.6, such of the Option Shares in respect of which the Option becomes vested when such notification is given); and |
(b) | if the Optionholder so ceased to hold office or employment within the Group before the end of the Performance Period, a proportion (corresponding to such proportion of the Performance Period as fell before the date of such cessation) of such of the Option Shares (if any) in respect of which the Option is then deemed to be vested as mentioned in Rule 9.13; |
9.7.2 | an Option granted on or after 3 August 2004 may:- |
(a) | if such cessation occurs after the end of the Performance Period, be exercised within the period of 6 months (or, for an Option granted on or after 1 February 2005 and if the Committee so decides, such longer period not exceeding 18 months as the Committee may determine) beginning with the date of such cessation (or, if later, the third anniversary of the Date of Grant), but only in respect of Option Shares in respect of which the Option has become vested; |
12
(b) | if such cessation occurs during the Performance Period, be retained and exercised within the period of 6 months (or, for an Option granted on or after 1 February 2005 and if the Committee so decides, such longer period not exceeding 18 months as the Committee may determine) beginning with the third anniversary of the Date of Grant, or such longer period (not exceeding 12 months beginning with the third anniversary of the Date of Grant) as the Committee may determine, but only in respect of:- |
(i) | a proportion, corresponding to such proportion of the Performance Period as fell before the date of such cessation, of the Option Shares in respect of which the Option has become vested; and |
(ii) | if, in the exercise of their discretion (acting fairly and reasonably), the Directors (with the consent of the Grantor, where appropriate) so determine, such additional number, or additional proportion, of the Option Shares in respect of which the Option has become vested as may be notified to the Optionholder. |
If and to the extent that an Option is not exercised within the relevant period, as mentioned in Rule (a) or (b), such Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of such period.
Leaving for other reasons
9.8 | If an Optionholder gives or receives notice to terminate his office or employment with any member of the Group or any Associated Company or ceases to hold office or employment within the Group or any Associated Company for any reason other than those set out in Rules 9.7 or 9.9 then, subject to Rules 9.10 and 16, an Option granted to him may only be exercised (if at all) in relation to such proportion of the Option Shares, and (subject to Rule 9.1) within such period, as the Committee shall (with the consent of the Grantor, if appropriate) determine and notify to the Optionholder and shall otherwise lapse and cease to be exercisable SAVE THAT :- |
(a) | unless such determinations have been made by the Committee within the period of three months beginning with the date on which the Optionholder so ceases (or, if earlier, gives or is given notice of such cessation) then such Option may not be exercised and shall be deemed to have lapsed and ceased to be exercisable as from the date of such cessation or, if earlier, the date on which notice of such termination was given or received; and |
(b) | in relation to a Performance Option, unless the Committee is of the opinion that the Performance Target is then likely to be met in full, such proportion of the Option Shares shall not exceed such proportion of the Performance Period as fell before the date of such cessation. |
Death in service
9.9 | If an Optionholder dies in service an Option granted to him may be exercised by his Personal Representatives within the period of 12 months beginning with the date of his death in respect of all of the Option Shares and the Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of that period of 12 months. |
13
Death after leaving
9.10 | If an Optionholder dies after ceasing to hold office or employment within the Group, his Personal Representatives:- |
9.10.1 | may exercise any Option granted prior to 3 August 2004 (which has not lapsed and ceased to be exercisable) within the period of 12 months beginning with the date of death in respect of such of the Option Shares over which it could have been exercised immediately before the Optionholder died and shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of that period; |
9.10.2 | may exercise any Option granted on or after 3 August 2004:- |
(a) | within the period of 12 months beginning with the date of death in respect of such of the Option Shares over which it could have been exercised immediately before the Optionholder died; or |
(b) | if, in relation to a Performance Option, the Optionholder dies before the end of the Performance Period, and the Option was not, immediately before his death, capable of exercise in respect of any of the Option Shares within the period of 12 months beginning with the date of death, but only in respect of:- |
(i) | a proportion, corresponding to such proportion of the Performance Period as fell before the date of such cessation, of such of the Option Shares in respect of which the Option is deemed to be vested at the date of death; and |
(ii) | if, in the exercise of their discretion (acting fairly and reasonably), the Directors (with the consent of the Grantor, where appropriate) so determine, such additional number, or additional proportion, of such of the Option Shares in respect of which the Option is deemed to be vested at the date of death. |
9.11 | For the purposes of this Rule 9 an Optionholder shall not be treated as having ceased to hold office or employment within the Group unless and until he no longer holds any office or employment with any member of the Group or with any Associated Company or any Jointly-owned Company. |
9.12 | A female Eligible Employee whose office or employment has been terminated in circumstances such that, pursuant to the Employment Rights Act 1996 she has a right to return to work, shall be deemed for the purposes of this Rule 9 as not having ceased to hold office or employment within the Group or with any Associated Company until such time as she is no longer capable, pursuant to that Act, of exercising a right to return to work and shall be deemed not to have ceased to hold such office or employment if she exercises that right. |
9.13 | For the purposes of Rule 9.10 an Option shall be deemed to be vested only if and to the extent that the Committee is of the opinion that the performance of the Company, judged as at the date of death, is such that the Performance Target is likely to be met to a particular extent so that a given percentage of the Option Shares would be likely to become vested, and accordingly the Option may only be exercised in respect of the said proportion of such percentage of the Option Shares. |
14
10. | MANNER OF EXERCISE OF OPTIONS |
10.1 | An Option shall be exercised only by the Optionholder serving a written notice upon the Grantor which:- |
(a) | specifies the number of Shares in respect of which that Option is exercised which in any event shall not:- |
(i) | exceed the number of Shares in respect of which that Option subsists and which have not been specified for this purpose in a prior notice served by the Optionholder in accordance with this Rule 10; nor |
(ii) | be less than 1000 Shares or, if less, the number of Shares over which the Option subsists and has vested; and |
(b) | is accompanied by payment of an amount equal to the product of the number of Shares specified in the notice and the Exercise Price; and |
(c) | unless the Committee (or the Grantor, as appropriate) otherwise permits, is accompanied by the Option Certificate in respect of that Option |
and is otherwise in such form as the Committee (with the agreement of the Grantor, where appropriate) may from time to time determine.
10.2 | The Optionholder shall indemnify the Grantor and the Optionholders Employer against any liability of any such person to account for any Option Tax Liability in respect of anything done pursuant to this Scheme. |
10.3 | Upon receipt of a notice of exercise of an Option, the Grantor (if it is not the Company) shall as soon as practicable notify the Company of the name of the Optionholder and the number of Shares in respect of which the Option is exercised on that occasion. |
10.4 | Upon receipt of a notice as mentioned in Rule 10.3 the Company shall, as soon as practicable, notify the Optionholders Employer of the amount of any Option Tax Liability. |
Satisfaction of Optionholders Option Tax Liability
10.5 | If in any jurisdiction an Option Tax Liability arises on the exercise of, or acquisition of Shares pursuant to, an Option then, unless either:- |
10.5.1 | within the period of 30 days beginning with the date on which the Option is exercised, the Optionholders Employer is able to withhold the amount of such liability from payment of the Optionholders remuneration; |
10.5.2 | the Optionholder has indicated (either in the form of notice of exercise or in such other manner as the Company may specify) that he or she will make a payment to the Company of an amount equal to the Option Tax Liability and the Optionholder does, within 14 days of being notified by the Company of the amount of the Option Tax Liability, make such payment to the Company; or |
10.5.3 |
the Optionholder has authorised (either in the form of notice of exercise or in such other manner as the Company may specify) the Grantor to the extent necessary to reimburse the Optionholders Employer, to sell as agent for the Optionholder (at the best price which can reasonably be expected to be obtained at the time of sale) a sufficient number of the Shares then acquired |
15
pursuant to such Option, and to procure payment to the Optionholders Employer out of the net proceeds of sale of such Shares (after deduction of all fees, commissions and expenses incurred in relation to such sale) of monies sufficient to satisfy the indemnity mentioned in Rule 10.2 |
the Grantor shall, to the extent necessary to reimburse the Optionholders Employer, have the right to sell as agent for the Optionholder (at the best price which can reasonably expect to be obtained at the time of sale) a sufficient number of the Shares then acquired in pursuance of such Option, and to procure payment to the Optionholders Employer, out of the net proceeds of sale of such Shares (after deduction of all fees, commissions and expenses incurred in relation to such sale), of monies sufficient to satisfy the indemnity mentioned in Rule 10.2.
10.6 | Within the period of 30 days beginning with the date on which the Company receives a notice of exercise which complies with Rule 10.1, the Company (if it is the Grantor) shall allot transfer or procure the transfer, or the Grantor (if it is not the Company) shall transfer or procure the transfer to the Optionholder of such number of Shares as is specified in the notice. |
10.7 | If the Grantor is restricted from issuing, transferring or procuring the transfer of Shares upon the exercise of an Option by reason of any statutory, regulatory or other legal provision or rule or the Model Code or any other requirement or guidance issued by the London Stock Exchange or on behalf of institutional investors in the Company or any other body and which relates to dealings in Shares by directors or employees or any member of the Group, the Grantor shall not be obliged to issue, transfer or procure the transfer of Shares in consequence of such exercise until all such restrictions are lifted and shall do so within the period of 30 days thereafter. |
10.8 | Subject to Rule 10.9, as soon as reasonably practicable after allotting or procuring the transfer of any Shares pursuant to Rule 10.6, the Grantor shall procure:- |
(a) | the issue to the Optionholder of a definitive share certificate or such acknowledgement of shareholding as is prescribed from time to time in respect of the Shares so allotted or transferred; and |
(b) | where Shares are to be allotted and if on that date Shares of the same class are listed on the Daily Official List, that any Shares so allotted are admitted to the Daily Official List; and |
(c) | if the Option remains partially unexercised, that either the relevant Option Certificate is amended so as to indicate the number of Shares in respect of which the Option subsists, or that the Optionholder is issued with a new Option Certificate which contains all the information which would have been contained in such amended Option Certificate. |
10.9 | Some or all of the Shares acquired upon the exercise of an Option may, if the Optionholder so requests, be issued or transferred to a nominee of the Optionholder provided that beneficial ownership of such Shares shall be vested in the Optionholder. |
10.10 | The allotment or transfer of any Shares under this Scheme shall be subject to the Memorandum and Articles of Association of the Company and to any necessary consents of any governmental or other authorities (whether in the United Kingdom or otherwise) under any enactments or regulations from time to time in force and it shall be the responsibility of the Optionholder to comply with any requirements to be fulfilled in order to obtain or obviate the necessity of any such consent. |
16
11. | DEMERGER |
If notice is given to shareholders of the Company of a proposed demerger of the Company or of any Subsidiary, Options which are not capable of immediate exercise may then be exercised (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) over such number or proportion of the Option Shares as the Committee (with the consent of the Grantor, if it is not the Company) may acting fairly, reasonably and objectively then determine and notify to Optionholders and within such period as the Committee may specify in such notice to Optionholders SAVE THAT no such notice to Optionholders shall be given unless the Auditors have confirmed in writing to the Grantor that (disregarding any Performance Target subject to which any Option is then exercisable) the interests of Optionholders would or might be substantially prejudiced if before the proposed demerger has effect Optionholders could not exercise their Options and be registered as the holders of the Shares thereupon acquired.
12. | STATUTORY RECONSTRUCTION OF THE COMPANY |
12.1 | If the court sanctions a compromise or arrangement proposed for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation pursuant to section 425 of the Companies Act 1985 an Option may within the period commencing on the date on which the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement and ending with the date upon which it becomes effective be exercised (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) over such number or proportion of the Option Shares as the Committee (with the consent of the Grantor, if it is not the Company) may then determine and notify to the Optionholder and to the extent that the Option remains unexercised when the compromise or arrangement becomes effective, the Option shall lapse. |
12.2 | In making any such determination as is mentioned in Rule 12.1 the Committee shall act fairly and reasonably and shall apply the same criteria to the holders of all Options granted on the same occasion. |
13. | WINDING-UP OF THE COMPANY |
13.1 | If notice is given to holders of Shares of a resolution for the voluntary winding-up of the Company, an Option may, notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended, be exercised in respect of all the Option Shares at any time before the commencement of the winding-up or within such other period as the Grantor notifies to the Optionholder. |
13.2 | An Option shall immediately lapse and cease to be exercisable upon the commencement of a winding-up of the Company. |
14. | VOLUNTARY ARRANGEMENT |
If a proposal is made to the Company and to its creditors for a voluntary arrangement under Part I of the Insolvency Act 1986, an Option may (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) be exercised in respect of all of the Option Shares at any time not later than 14 days before the date of the meeting summoned in accordance with section 3 of the Insolvency Act 1986 and the Option shall thereafter lapse and cease to be exercisable.
17
15. | ADMINISTRATION ORDER |
If an administration order is made in relation to the Company under Part II of the Insolvency Act 1986, an Option may (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) be exercised in respect of all of the Option Shares within the period of 28 days after the administration order is made and the Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of that period.
16. | CHANGE IN CONTROL |
16.1 | If, as a result of either:- |
(a) | a general offer to acquire the whole of the Ordinary Share Capital which is made on a condition such that if it is satisfied the person making the offer will have control of the Company; or |
(b) | a general offer to acquire all the shares in the Company of the same class as the Shares |
the Company shall come under the control of another person or persons, the Optionholder shall, whether or not he subsequently or in consequence of the change in control ceases to hold office or employment within the Group for any reason, be entitled to exercise his Option notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended in respect of all of the Option Shares over which the Option subsists within the period of six months of the date when the person making the offer has obtained control of the Company and any condition subject to which the offer is made has been satisfied and to the extent that the Option is not exercised it shall, subject to Rules 16.2 and 16.4, lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of that period.
16.2 | If, before an option has lapsed and ceased to be exercisable, any person becomes entitled or bound to acquire shares in the Company under sections 428-430F (inclusive) of the Companies Act 1985, the optionholder shall be entitled to exercise his option notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended in respect of all of the Option Shares over which the Option subsists at any time when that person remains so entitled or bound and, to the extent that the Option is not exercised, it shall, subject to clause 16.4, lapse and cease to be exercisable. |
16.3 | For the purposes of the preceding provisions of this Rule 16 a person shall be deemed to have control of the Company if he and others acting in concert with him have together obtained control of it. |
16.4 | If any company (in this rule referred to as the acquiring company):- |
(a) | obtains control of the Company as mentioned in Rule 16.1; or |
(b) | obtains control of the Company in pursuance of a compromise or arrangement sanctioned by the court under section 425 of the Companies Act 1985; or |
(c) | becomes bound or entitled to acquire shares under sections 428 to 430F (inclusive) of the Companies Act 1985 |
an Optionholder may, at any time within the appropriate period as defined in Rule 16.5, by agreement with the acquiring company and notwithstanding that any Performance Target subject to which an Option is then exercisable is not then satisfied, release his rights under his Option in consideration of the grant to him of rights to acquire shares in
18
the acquiring company or any other company falling within sub-paragraphs (b) or (c) of paragraph 10 of Schedule 9 (read and construed as if references in those provisions to the company were references to the acquiring company) PROVIDED THAT :-
(i) | such rights will be exercisable only in accordance with the provisions of this Scheme as it had effect immediately before the release of the rights referred to above (read and construed as mentioned in Rule 16.6); and |
(ii) | the shares to which the new rights relate satisfy the provisions of paragraphs 10 to 14 (inclusive) of Schedule 9; and |
(iii) | the total market value, immediately before such release, of the Shares in respect of which the Option then subsists is equal to the total market value, immediately after such grant, of the shares in respect of which the new rights are granted to the Optionholder; and |
(iv) | the total amount payable by the Optionholder for the acquisition of shares upon exercise of the new rights is equal to the total amount that would have been payable for the acquisition of Shares upon exercise of the Option. |
16.5 | In Rule 16.4 the appropriate period means:- |
(a) | in a case falling within Rule 16.4(a), the period of six months beginning with the time when the person making the offer has obtained control of the Company and any condition or conditions subject to which the offer is made has or have been satisfied or waived; |
(b) | in a case falling within Rule 16.4(b), the period of six months beginning with the time when the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement; and |
(c) | in a case falling within Rule 16.4(c), the period during which the acquiring company remains bound or entitled as mentioned in that paragraph. |
16.6 | For the purposes mentioned in Rule (i) the provisions of this Scheme shall be read and construed as if:- |
(a) | references to the Company in Rules 1, 2, 4, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17, 19 and 20 were references to the company in respect of whose shares the new rights are granted; |
(b) | references to Shares in Rules 1, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17, 18 and 20 were references to such shares; |
(c) | references to Option in Rules 1, 2, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17, 18 and 20 were references to such rights; |
(d) | references to Optionholder in Rules 1, 4, 5, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17, 18 and 19 were references to the persons to whom such rights are granted; |
(e) | references to Ordinary Share Capital in Rules 1, 16, 17 and 18 were references to the ordinary share capital (other than fixed rate preference shares) of such company; |
19
(f) | references to the Exercise Price in Rules 1, 10 and 17 were references to the price per share payable upon the exercise of such new rights |
16.7 | Rights granted pursuant to Rule 16.4 shall be regarded for the purposes of section 185 to the Taxes Act and Schedule 9 and for the purposes of the subsequent application of the provisions of this Scheme as having been granted on the Date of Grant of the corresponding rights as mentioned in Rule 16.4. |
16.8 | If, in consequence of the Company coming under the control of an Acquiring Company shares in respect of which an Option has been granted cease to satisfy the requirements of paragraphs 1014 of Schedule 9, the Company may apply in writing to the Inland Revenue for Inland Revenue approval of this Scheme for the purposes of section 185 and Schedule 9 of the Taxes Act to be withdrawn and, in that event, these rules shall be read and construed as if in the definition of Shares the words which satisfy the requirements of paragraphs 10 - 14 (inclusive) of Schedule 9 were omitted. |
17. | VARIATION OF SHARE CAPITAL |
17.1 | In the event of any alteration of the Ordinary Share Capital by way of capitalisation or rights issue, sub-division, consolidation or reduction or any other variation in the share capital of the Company the Committee may make such adjustment as it considers appropriate:- |
(a) | to the aggregate number or amount of Shares subject to any Option; and |
(b) | to the Exercise Price payable for each Share under any such Option; and/or |
(c) | if an Option has been exercised but no Shares have been allotted or transferred in accordance with Rule 10.6, to the number of Shares which may be so allotted or transferred and the Exercise Price payable for each such Share |
PROVIDED THAT:-
(i) | no such adjustment is made unless the Board of Inland Revenue have given their prior written consent to the adjustment; and |
(ii) | except in the case of a sub-division, consolidation or a capitalisation issue, any such adjustment is confirmed in writing by the Auditors to be in their opinion fair and reasonable; and |
(iii) | except insofar as the Directors (on behalf of the Company) agree to capitalise the Companys reserves and apply the same at the time of exercise in paying up the difference between the Exercise Price and the nominal value of the Shares, the Exercise Price in relation to any Subscription Option shall not be reduced below the nominal value of a Share; and |
(iv) | the number of Shares as so adjusted has been rounded down to the nearest whole number and the Exercise Price has been rounded up to the nearest whole penny; and |
(v) | if the Grantor is not the Company, no such adjustment shall be made without the consent of the Grantor. |
20
17.2 | As soon as reasonably practicable after making any adjustment pursuant to Rule 17.1, the Directors shall (on behalf of the Grantor) give notice in writing thereof to every Optionholder affected thereby and shall at the written request of any such Optionholder and upon the surrender of any Option Certificates which he holds deliver or procure the delivery to him of revised Option Certificates in respect of his Options. |
18. | ALTERATION OF THE PLAN |
18.1 | Prior to the Approval Date the Directors may make any alteration or addition to this Plan including such amendments as may be necessary to take account of any comments of the UK Listing Authority and to ensure that this Plan complies with the conditions for approval of this Plan by the Board of Inland Revenue as set out in Schedule 9. |
18.2 | The Directors may at any time after the Approval Date alter or add to any of the provisions of this Plan in any respect PROVIDED THAT :- |
(a) | if it is intended that this Plan shall continue to be approved by the Board of Inland Revenue, no alteration or addition to any Key Feature this Plan shall take effect until the Board of Inland Revenue have confirmed that the approved status of this Plan will not be affected; and |
(b) | no alteration or addition to a Key Feature of this Plan which would cause this Plan to cease to be approved by the Board of Inland Revenue shall have effect unless and until notice in writing of the proposed alteration or addition has been given to the Inland Revenue and such approval has first been withdrawn; and |
(c) | no such alteration or addition shall be made to the advantage of existing or new Optionholders to the provisions relating to eligibility to participate, the overall limitations on the issue of new Shares, the basis for determining Optionholders rights to acquire Shares and the adjustment of such rights in the event of variation of the Ordinary Share Capital or this Rule 18 without the prior approval by ordinary resolution of the shareholders of the Company SAVE THAT the provisions of this Rule 18.2(c) shall not apply to the extent that such alteration or addition is in the opinion of the Directors a minor amendment which is necessary or appropriate:- |
(i) | to benefit the administration of this Plan; or |
(ii) | to take account of any change in legislation; or |
(iii) | to maintain Inland Revenue approval of this Scheme or obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for existing or new Optionholders, the Company, any Subsidiary or any Associated Company; and |
(d) | if in relation to any Options the Grantor is not the Company, no alteration or addition shall be made to the terms of such Options without the approval of the Grantor. |
21
19. | SERVICE OF DOCUMENTS |
19.1 | Except as otherwise provided in this Plan, any notice or document to be given to any individual in accordance or in connection with this Scheme shall be duly given:- |
(a) | if he holds office or employment within the Group, by delivering it to him at his place of work; or |
(b) | if it is posted in a pre-paid envelope to his address last known to the Company and if so sent it shall be deemed to have been given on the date of posting. |
19.2 | Any notice or document so sent to an Optionholder shall be deemed to have been duly given notwithstanding that such Optionholder is then deceased (and whether or not the Company has notice of his death) except where his Personal Representatives have established their title to the satisfaction of the Company and supplied to the Directors (on behalf of the Grantor) an address to which documents are to be sent. |
19.3 | Any notice in writing or document to be submitted or given to the Committee, the Directors, the Grantor or any member of the Group in accordance or in connection with this Plan may be delivered, sent by post or facsimile transmission but shall not in any event be duly given unless it is actually received by the secretary of the Company or such other individual as may from time to time be nominated by the Grantor for the purposes of this Plan and whose name and address is notified to Optionholders. |
20. | MISCELLANEOUS |
20.1 | The Company shall at all times keep available sufficient authorised but unissued Shares to satisfy the exercise in full of all the Subscription Options for the time being remaining capable of being exercised. |
20.2 | No Option to purchase existing Shares shall be granted by any person unless that person beneficially owns such Shares at the Date of Grant or the Directors are satisfied that sufficient Shares will be made available to satisfy the exercise in full of all Options granted or to be granted by that person. |
20.3 | The Company may issue Shares, and grant rights to acquire Shares, to the trustees of any trust established for the benefit of persons who include employees within the Group for the purpose of enabling such trustees, in the exercise of their powers (i) to grant Options and (ii) to transfer or procure the issue or transfer of Shares upon the exercise of Options granted by such trustees PROVIDED THAT any Shares issued or in respect of which such rights are granted by the Company (and, if not exercised, do not lapse) shall count in applying the overall limitation on the issue of Shares imposed by Rule 7 . |
20.4 | The decision of the Committee in any dispute or question affecting any Eligible Employee or Optionholder or any member or former member of the Group or Associated Company under this Plan shall be final and conclusive subject, whenever required under the provisions of this Plan, to the concurrence of the Auditors. |
20.5 | The Directors may from time to time make and vary such regulations not inconsistent with the rules of this Plan and establish such procedures for the administration and implementation of this Plan as they think fit and in the event of any question, dispute or disagreement as to the interpretation of this Plan or of any such regulations or procedures or as to any question or right arising from or related to this Plan, the decision of the Committee shall (except as regards any matter required to be determined by the Auditors hereunder) be final and binding upon all persons. |
22
20.6 | In any matter in which they are required to act hereunder, the Auditors shall be deemed to be acting as experts and not as arbitrators and the Arbitration Act of 1996 shall not apply hereto. |
20.7 | The costs of the administration and implementation of this Plan shall be borne by the Company. |
21. | JURISDICTION |
21.1 | This Plan shall be governed by and construed in all respects in accordance with English law. |
21.2 | The Company, the Grantor, Eligible Employees and Optionholders shall submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts as regards any claim legal action or proceedings arising out of this Plan and will waive any objection to such proceedings taking place in the English courts on the grounds of venue or on the grounds that such proceedings have been brought in an inconvenient forum. |
22. | DATA PROTECTION |
In accepting the grant of an Option an Optionholder shall agree and consent:-
(a) | to the collection, use, processing and transfer by the Group of certain personal information about the Optionholder, including the Optionholders name, home address and telephone number, date of birth, other employee information, details of all Options granted to the Optionholder, and of Shares issued or transferred to the Optionholder pursuant to this Plan (Data); and |
(b) | any members of the Group transferring Data amongst themselves and to any Grantor (if it is not the Company) for the purposes of implementing, administering and managing the Plan; and |
(c) | to the use of such Data by any such person for such purposes; and |
(d) | to the transfer to and retention of such Data by third parties in connection with such purposes. |
23. | THIRD PARTY RIGHTS |
Except as otherwise expressly stated to the contrary, neither this Plan nor the grant of any Option nor the U.K. Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 shall have the effect of giving any third party any rights under this Plan and that Act shall not apply to this Plan or to the terms of any Option granted under it.
23
[Option Certificate]
THE SMITH & NEPHEW 2001 UK APPROVED SHARE OPTION PLAN
OPTION CERTIFICATE
Name of Optionholder: |
__________________________________________ |
|
Address of Optionholder: |
__________________________________________ |
|
__________________________________________ |
||
Date of Grant: |
__________________________________________ |
|
Number of Shares: |
__________________________________________ |
|
Exercise Price: |
__________________________________________ |
SMITH & NEPHEW PLC/ * HEREBY GRANTS to the Optionholder named above an Option to [subscribe for/acquire]** the above number of Shares in the Company at the above Exercise Price.
This Option is exercisable subject to and in accordance with the rules of The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Approved Share Option Plan as they are amended from time to time. [Exercise of the Option is subject to the Performance Target set out in the Appendix to this Option Certificate.] This Option may not normally be exercised before [the third anniversary of the Date of Grant/the Optionholder has been notified that the Performance Target has been met].**
This Option will lapse and cease to be exercisable unless the Optionholder executes and returns to the Company Secretary so as to be received no later than [ ] the enclosed Form of Acceptance of this Option.
In accordance with Rule 9.1, this Option may not in any event be exercised later than the day immediately preceding the tenth/__________***anniversary of the Date of Grant as shown above.
Under current tax rules, a charge to income tax and national insurance contributions ( NICs ) may arise on the exercise of the Option.
It is a condition of exercise of the Option that the Optionholder agrees to indemnify the Company and the Optionholders Employer (or former employer) in respect of any liability of any such person to account for any tax or National Insurance liability arising upon the exercise of, or acquisition of Shares pursuant, to this Option ( Option Tax Liability ).
If an Option Tax Liability arises on any occasion and, within 30 days, the appropriate amount cannot be withheld from payment of the Optionholders remuneration or the Company has not received payment of such amount, the Grantor shall, to the extent necessary to reimburse the Optionholders Employer (or former employer), be entitled to sell sufficient of the Shares acquired in pursuance of this Option and to procure payment to the Employer (or former employer), out of the net proceeds of sale of such Shares, of monies sufficient to satisfy such indemnity.
[In the case of employers NICs arising on gains made on the acquisition of Shares pursuant to the Option, the Optionholder shall, when the Company so directs, make a joint election with the Optionholders Employer (or former employer) for liability to employers NICs arising upon the exercise of, or the acquisition of Shares in pursuance of, this Option to be transferred to the Optionholder/in the form attached.]****
24
This Option is not transferable but may be capable of exercise by your personal representatives in the event of your death.
EXECUTED as a deed by SMITH & NEPHEW PLC acting by:- |
) ) |
|
_____________________________________________________ |
Director |
|
_____________________________________________________ |
||
_____________________________________________________ |
Director/Secretary |
Date:-
* | Insert relevant Grantor |
** | Delete as appropriate |
*** | Insert appropriate anniversary |
25
FORM OF ACCEPTANCE OF GRANT
I HEREBY AGREE to accept the grant of an Option over Shares on (date) and agree and undertake to be bound by the terms and conditions set out in the rules of The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Approved Share Option Plan and the conditions(s) of exercise set out in the Appendix to the Option Certificate.
Recovery of tax and National Insurance Contributions (NICs) due under PAYE
1. | [I hereby agree with and undertake to the Company and any other company which is my Employer that my Employer may recover from me, as mentioned in Rule 2.10, the whole or any part of any Employers NICs payable in respect of any Option Gain. |
2. | I hereby agree and undertake that I shall, if and when so requested by the Company before this Option is first exercised, make a joint election with my Employer Company (in a form satisfactory to the Company and the Inland Revenue) for any liability of my Employer Company to employers NICs payable in respect of any Option Gain, to be transferred to me.]** |
3. | I hereby agree to indemnify the Company and my Employer (or former employer) in respect of any liability of any such person to account for any tax or NICs [including Employers NICs]* arising upon the exercise of, or acquisition of Shares pursuant to, my Option ( Option Tax Liability )*. |
4. | I understand and agree that, if an Option Tax Liability arises on any occasion, then unless either:- |
4.1 | my Employer (or former employer) is able to withhold the amount of such Option Tax Liability from payment of my remuneration, within the period of 30 days from the date of Option exercise; |
4.2 | I have indicated in writing to my Employer (or former employer) either on the notice of exercise or in a manner agreed with the Company, that I will make a payment to the Company of an amount equal to the Option Tax Liability and I do in fact make such a payment, within 14 days of being notified by the Company of the amount of the Option Tax Liability; or |
4.3 | I have authorised the Grantor (either on the notice of exercise of the Option or in a manner agreed with the Company) to sell sufficient of the Shares acquired pursuant to this Option and to procure payment to my Employer (or former employer), out of the net proceeds of sale of such Shares, monies sufficient to satisfy such indemnity |
the Grantor of my Option shall be entitled to sell sufficient of the Shares acquired pursuant to this Option and to procure payment to my Employer (or former employer) out of the net proceeds of sale of such Shares, monies sufficient to satisfy such indemnity.
5. | I hereby appoint any director of the Company to be my lawful attorney for the purpose of signing all such documents and doing all things necessary to satisfy my obligation to ensure the reimbursement of any amount of Option Tax Liability as mentioned in Clauses 1, 2, 3 and 4 above. This power of attorney is given by way of security for the performance of my obligations arising under Clauses 1, 2, 3 and 4 above and is irrevocable in accordance with Section 4 of the Powers of Attorney Act 1971. |
6. | Words and phrases used in this Form of Acceptance have the meanings they bear for the purposes of the Plan. |
26
SIGNED and delivered AS A DEED by |
) |
|||
__________________________________ |
) |
______________________________________________ |
||
in the presence of:- |
) |
( Optionholder signature) |
Witness signature: |
___________________________ |
|
Witness Name |
(print) _____________________ |
|
Address: |
___________________________ |
|
___________________________ |
||
Occupation: |
___________________________ |
|
Date |
___________________________ |
THIS FORM MUST BE RECEIVED BY THE GRANTOR OF THE OPTION BY OTHERWISE THE OPTION WILL BE DEEMED TO HAVE LAPSED.
Notes:-
Although the Date of Grant of the Option is as specified in the Option Certificate, the grant is conditional upon your agreement to be bound by the rules of the Plan. If you do not return the form of acceptance within the deadline specified above, the Option will be treated as void in all respects.
27
[Notice of Exercise to be attached to the Option Certificate]
THE SMITH & NEPHEW 2001 UK APPROVED SHARE OPTION PLAN
NOTICE OF EXERCISE OF OPTION
To: | The Company Secretary, Smith & Nephew plc ___________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________ |
I hereby exercise the Option referred to overleaf in respect of all/* of the shares over which the Option subsists, and request the allotment or transfer to me of those shares in accordance with the Rules of the Plan and the Memorandum and Articles of Association of the Company.
I enclose a cheque made payable to Smith & Nephew plc/ ** in the sum of £ being the aggregate Exercise Price of such shares.
Payment of Option Tax Liability
I understand that, as a result of the exercise of the Option, an Option Tax Liability may arise which I am required to satisfy. I wish to meet this Option Tax Liability by:-
¨ |
authorising the Company or my Employer or former Employer to deduct the necessary amount from my next salary payment under the PAYE procedure | |
¨ |
paying the Company such amount as is necessary to cover the Option Tax Liability within 14 days of my receiving details of that Option Tax Liability from the Company | |
¨ |
agreeing to the Grantor selling sufficient of my Option Shares so that the net proceeds of sale will cover the Option Tax Liability |
Please tick the box for your preferred payment method. If you do not tick any boxes the Company will first seek to withhold an amount sufficient to cover the Option Tax Liability from your next salary payment, and if the Option Tax Liability cannot then be satisfied in full, the Grantor will sell sufficient of your Shares to meet that liability.
I do/do not intend to pay the Company an additional amount in relation to any Option Tax Liability within 14 days of receiving details of that Option Tax Liability from the Company.
Name (block letters) |
Signature |
|||
Address |
Date ________________________ |
|||
NOTES:-
1. | This form must be accompanied by payment of the Exercise Price for the shares in respect of which the Option is exercised. |
2. | The Option may not be exercised in respect of less than 1,000 shares or (if less) all of the shares over which the Option subsists. |
3. | Where the Option is exercised by personal representatives, an office copy of the Probate or Letters of Administration should accompany the form. |
28
4. | The Plan has been approved by the Inland Revenue in accordance with section 185 and Schedule 9 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988. There is no charge to income tax on the receipt of a right to acquire shares under such a scheme. Under current tax rules, no charge to tax will arise on the exercise of the Options if it is exercised:- |
(a) | in accordance with the rules of the Plan (as amended from time to time with the consent of the Inland Revenue) at a time when the Scheme is approved by the Inland Revenue; and |
(b) | more than three years after the date of grant or, if earlier, upon the death of the Optionholder but not later than the day immediately preceding the tenth anniversary of the date of grant; and |
(c) | (except when exercised upon the death of the Optionholder) not less than three years after the exercise, in whole or in part, of any option (whether under this Plan or any other scheme, other than a savings-related share option scheme, approved under Schedule 9 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988) in circumstances where the Optionholder qualifies for such favourable tax treatment. |
Further, provided an Option is exercised within these statutory time limits, no charge to income tax will arise on any subsequent growth in value of the shares acquired.
If the Option is not so exercised, then under current tax rules, income tax will normally then be charged on the amount of the difference between the total exercise price paid and the market value of the shares acquired at that time.
5. | IMPORTANT. Neither the Company nor the Grantor undertake to advise you on the tax consequences of exercising your Option. If you are unsure of the tax liabilities which may arise, you should take appropriate professional advice before exercising your Option. |
6. | An Optionholder, whether or not a director of any company, shall not be entitled to exercise an Option at any time when to do so would contravene the provisions of the Model Code governing share dealings by directors and employees. |
* | Delete/insert number as appropriate |
** | Delete/insert payee as appropriate |
29
Exhibit 4 (c) (vii)
SMITH & NEPHEW PLC
THE SMITH & NEPHEW 2001 UK
UNAPPROVED SHARE OPTION PLAN
This is a copy of the rules of
The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan
as amended from time to time
____________________
Chairman
INDEX
Clause
|
Page
|
|||
1. |
This Plan |
1 | ||
2. |
Grant of Options |
6 | ||
3. |
Exercise Price |
7 | ||
4. |
Optionholder to Bear Cost of Employers NICs on Option Gains |
7 | ||
5. |
Relationship with Contract of Employment |
8 | ||
6. |
Non-Transferability of Options |
8 | ||
7. |
Performance Targets |
9 | ||
8. |
Overall Limits on the Granting of Options |
9 | ||
9. |
Individual Limits on the Granting of Options |
10 | ||
10. |
Exercise of Options |
10 | ||
11. |
Manner of Exercise of Options |
13 | ||
12. |
Demerger |
15 | ||
13. |
Statutory Reconstruction of the Company |
15 | ||
14. |
Winding-up of the Company |
15 | ||
15. |
Voluntary Arrangement |
15 | ||
16. |
Administration Order |
15 | ||
17. |
Change of Control |
16 | ||
18. |
Variation of Share Capital |
16 | ||
19. |
Alteration of the Plan |
17 | ||
20. |
Service of Documents |
18 | ||
21. |
Miscellaneous |
18 | ||
22. |
Jurisdiction |
19 | ||
23. |
Data Protection |
19 | ||
24. |
Third Party Rights |
19 |
RULES OF
THE SMITH & NEPHEW 2001 UK UNAPPROVED SHARE OPTION PLAN
1. | THIS PLAN |
1.1 | This Plan is an employees share scheme approved by ordinary resolution of the shareholders of the Company and established by resolution of the directors of the Company on 4 April 2001. |
1.2 | In this Plan the following words and expressions shall have the meanings given below: |
Acquiring Company |
a company which has acquired control of the Company | |
Announcement |
the preliminary announcement to the London Stock Exchange of the annual or half yearly results of the Company for a year | |
Associated Company |
any company which, in relation to the Company, is an associated company as that term is defined in section 416 of the Taxes Act except that, for the purposes of this Plan, subsection (1) of that section shall have effect with the omission of the words or at any time within one year previously | |
the Auditors |
the auditors for the time being of the Company or in the event of there being joint auditors, such one of them as the Committee may decide | |
the Committee |
the Remuneration Committee of the Directors, or such other committee comprising a majority of non-executive directors of the Company to which the Directors delegate responsibility for the operation of this Plan or following a change of control of the Company, those persons who comprised the Remuneration Committee or such other committee of the Directors immediately before such change of control | |
the Company |
Smith & Nephew plc (registered in England no 324357) | |
control |
has the meaning given in section 840 of the Taxes Act | |
Daily Official List |
the Daily Official List of the London Stock Exchange | |
the Date of Grant |
in relation to any Option, means the date on which that Option is granted in accordance with rule 2.7 | |
Dealing Day |
a day on which the London Stock Exchange is open for business | |
the Directors |
the board of directors of the Company or a duly authorised committee of the directors |
1
Eligible Employee | an employee of any member of the Group | |
other Employees Share Scheme |
(a) the Smith & Nephew 1985 Share Option Scheme; |
|
(b) the Smith & Nephew 1990 International Executive Share Option Scheme; |
||
(c) the Smith & Nephew Employee Share Option Scheme; |
||
(d) the Smith & Nephew 1991 Overseas Employee Share Option Plan; and |
||
(e) any other employee share option or share incentive scheme (except this Plan) established by the Company under which shares may be issued by the Company |
||
Exchange of Options | means the grant to the Optionholder, in consideration of the release of his Option (the Old Option) of rights to acquire shares in an Acquiring Company or a company which has control of an Acquiring Company or either is, or has control of, a company which is a member of a consortium owning either an Acquiring Company or a company having control of an Acquiring Company, being rights which are: | |
(a) in the opinion of the Directors, substantially equivalent in value to the Old Option (disregarding any Performance Target); and |
||
(b) on terms approved by the Directors |
||
the Exercise Price | the price per Share payable upon the exercise of an Option (as determined in accordance with rule 3) | |
Good Reason | means, in relation to an Optionholder ceasing to hold office or employment within the Group, ceasing to do so by reason of: | |
(a) injury, ill-health or disability (evidenced to the satisfaction of the Committee); or |
||
(b) dismissal by reason of redundancy (within the meaning of the Employment Rights Act 1996); or |
||
(c) retirement on or after reaching the age of 65 or the age at which the Optionholder is anticipated to retire in accordance with the terms of his contract of employment; or |
2
(d) the fact that the office or employment by virtue of which he is eligible to participate in this Plan relates to a business or part of a business which is transferred to a person who is neither an Associated Company nor a member of the Group; or |
||
(e) the fact that the company with which he holds the office or employment by virtue of which he is eligible to participate in this Plan is no longer a member of the Group or an Associated Company |
||
Grantor |
in relation to an Option, the Company or such other person as intends to grant or has granted that Option | |
the Group |
the Company and any company which is for the time being a Subsidiary | |
ITEPA |
the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 | |
Jointly-owned Company |
a company (and any subsidiary as defined in section 736 of the Companies Act 1985 of such company) of which the whole of the issued ordinary share capital is jointly-owned by a member of the Group and another person (not being a member of the Group) but which is not a Subsidiary and is not under the control of such other company | |
the London Stock Exchange |
London Stock Exchange plc | |
Market Value |
in relation to any Share in respect of which an Option is to be, or has been, granted means the average of the middle market quotations of a Share as derived from the Daily Official List for the 3 consecutive Dealing Days last preceding the Date of Grant | |
the Model Code |
the code adopted by the Company which contains provisions similar in purpose and effect to the provisions of the Model Code for Securities Transactions by Directors of Listed Companies issued by the UK Listing Authority from time to time | |
a New Joiner Option |
the first Option granted to an individual after he first becomes an Eligible Employee | |
NICs |
UK National Insurance contributions | |
N.I. Regulations |
the laws, regulations and practices currently in force relating to liability for, and the collection of, NICs |
3
non-UK Option |
an Option granted to an Eligible Employee who, at the Date of Grant, is not chargeable in the UK to tax on his earnings from the Group under Case I of Schedule E | |
Option |
a right to acquire Shares granted in accordance with and subject to the rules of this Plan which has not lapsed and ceased to be exercisable | |
Option Certificate |
a certificate issued pursuant to rule 2.7 evidencing the grant of an Option | |
Optionholder |
a person who has been granted an Option or, if that person has died and where the context requires, his Personal Representatives | |
Optionholders Employer |
such member of the Group as is the Optionholders employer or, if he has ceased to be employed within the Group, was his employer or such other member of the Group, or other person as, under the PAYE Regulations or, as the case may be, the N.I. Regulations, or any other statutory or regulatory enactment (whether in the United Kingdom or otherwise) is obliged to account for any Option Tax Liability | |
Option Gain |
in respect of an Option, the amount of any gain realised upon the exercise, assignment or release of the Option, being a gain that is treated as remuneration derived from the Optionholders employment by virtue of section 4(4)(a) of the Social Security Contributions and Benefits Act 1992 | |
Option Shares |
the Shares over which an Option subsists | |
Option Tax Liability |
in relation to an Optionholder, any liability of the Optionholders Employer to account to the Inland Revenue or other tax authority for any amount of, or representing, income tax or NICs (which shall, to the extent provided for in rule 4 include secondary Class 1 NICs) or any other tax charge levy or other sum (whether under the laws of the United Kingdom or otherwise) which may arise on the part of the Optionholder upon the grant, vesting, exercise, assignment or release of the Option or the acquisition of Shares under this Plan | |
Ordinary Share Capital |
the issued ordinary share capital of the Company other than fixed-rate preference shares |
4
the PAYE Regulations |
the regulations made under section 203 of the Taxes Act | |
Performance Option |
an Option the exercise of which is normally subject to the attainment of a Performance Target | |
Performance Period |
in relation to an Option, the period over which performance is to be judged for the purpose of determining whether, or to what extent, a Performance Target is met or, in the case of an Option which is not a Performance Option, the period of 3 years beginning with the Date of Grant or such other period as the Grantor shall specify at the time of grant of the Option | |
Performance Target |
a condition or conditions imposed on the exercise of an Option pursuant to rule 7 | |
Personal Representatives |
in relation to an Optionholder, the legal personal representatives of the Optionholder (being either the executors of his will to whom a valid grant of probate has been made or, if he dies intestate, the duly appointed administrator(s) of his estate) who have produced to the Company evidence of their appointment as such | |
this Plan |
The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan as set out in these rules and amended from time to time | |
Salary |
in relation to any person at a given time, the gross rate of basic annual salary (excluding any bonus, company pension contributions, and any other perquisites and benefits-in-kind) payable to that person at that time by members of the Group | |
Shares |
fully-paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company (or in the event of a reorganisation or reconstruction of the Company, shares representing such ordinary shares) | |
Subscription Option |
a right to subscribe for Shares granted in accordance with and subject to the rules of this Plan | |
Subsidiary |
any company which is for the time being a subsidiary (as defined in section 736 of the Companies Act 1985) of the Company | |
the Taxes Act |
the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988 | |
UK Listing Authority |
the Financial Services Authority in its capacity as the competent authority for the purposes of Part IV of the Financial Services Act 1986 | |
year |
a financial year of the Company. |
5
1.3 | For the purposes of this Plan, unless the context otherwise requires: |
(a) | references to an Option vesting or being or becoming vested in respect of any number or proportion of the Shares over which it subsists are to be read as references to the Option being immediately exercisable (subject always to the provisions of rule 11) in respect of such Shares; |
(b) | references to Shares in respect of which an Option subsists at any time are to be read and construed as references to the Shares over which the Option is then held (and in respect of which it has not then lapsed and ceased to be exercisable); |
(c) | any reference to any enactment includes a reference to that enactment as from time to time modified extended or re-enacted; |
(d) | words denoting the masculine gender shall include the feminine; |
(e) | words denoting the singular shall include the plural and vice versa; and |
(f) | references to rules, schedules and appendices are to the rules, schedules and appendices of this Plan and no account should be taken of the rule headings which have been inserted for ease of reference only. |
2. | GRANT OF OPTIONS |
Eligibility
2.1 | Subject to the following provisions of this rule 2, the Directors shall have an absolute discretion as to the selection of persons to whom Options may be granted. |
2.2 | An Option may only be granted to an Eligible Employee. |
2.3 | Subject to rule 2.4, an Option may only be granted: |
(a) | during the period of 42 days after this Plan is approved by shareholders of the Company in general meeting; or |
(b) | during the period of 42 days beginning with the fourth Dealing Day following an Announcement; or |
(c) | within a period of 28 days immediately after the person to whom it is granted first becomes an Eligible Employee; or |
(d) | at any other times if, in the opinion of the Committee, the circumstances are exceptional. |
2.4 | If the Grantor is restricted by statute, order or regulation (including any regulation, order or requirement imposed on the Company by the London Stock Exchange or any other regulatory authority) from granting an Option within any period as mentioned in rule 2.3(a)-(d), the Grantor may grant an Option at any time during the period of 42 days (or, in the circumstances referred to in rule 2.3(c), 28 days) beginning with the date on which all such restrictions are removed. |
2.5 | An Option may not be granted at any time if to do so would be a breach of the Model Code. |
2.6 | No Option may be granted after 4 April 2011. |
6
2.7 | An Option shall be granted by the Grantor executing as a deed and issuing to the Optionholder an Option Certificate which specifies: |
(a) | whether the Option is a Conditional Option or a Performance Option; |
(b) | the Date of Grant; |
(c) | the number of Option Shares; |
(d) | the Exercise Price; |
(e) | any Performance Target imposed pursuant to rule 7 or any other condition imposed under rule 2.9. |
(f) | that it is a term of the Option that the Optionholder agrees to indemnify the Grantor and the Optionholders Employer in respect of any Option Tax Liability |
and is otherwise in such form as the Grantor may from time to time specify.
2.8 | Unless the Grantor otherwise determines in relation to the grant of Options on any occasion, any person to whom an Option is granted must confirm his acceptance of such grant by executing as a deed and delivering to the Grantor duly completed forms of acceptance and election in such form as the Grantor may from time to time specify and if no such form of acceptance and election is received by the Grantor within 30 days after the Date of Grant (or such other time as the Grantor may notify to the Optionholder at the Date of Grant) the Option shall thereupon lapse and cease to be exercisable. |
2.9 | The Directors may specify that the exercise of any Option shall be subject to such other objective conditions (in addition to any Performance Target) as may be specified in the Option Certificate at the time of grant. |
2.10 | An Option shall not be granted by any person other than the Company without the prior approval of the Directors. |
2.11 | An Option shall not be granted to a director of the Company without the prior approval of the Committee. |
3. | EXERCISE PRICE |
3.1 | Subject to rule 3.2 and any adjustment being made pursuant to rule 18, the Exercise Price shall be determined by the Committee (with the prior consent of the Grantor, if appropriate) but shall be not less than Market Value. |
3.2 | The Exercise Price of a Subscription Option shall not (except as mentioned in sub-paragraph (ii) of rule 18.1) in any event be less than the nominal value of a Share. |
4. | OPTIONHOLDER TO BEAR COST OF EMPLOYERS NICs ON OPTION GAINS |
4.1 | In accepting the grant of an Option, the Optionholder shall indemnify the Grantor and the Optionholders Employer against any liability of any such person to account for any Option Tax Liability. |
4.2 | In accepting the grant of an Option the Optionholder shall, if required by the Grantor, agree and undertake with the Company, and with any other company which is a secondary contributor in respect of secondary Class I NICs payable in respect of any Option Gain (the Secondary Contributor) that: |
(a) | the Secondary Contributor may recover from the Optionholder (in such manner as the Company may determine and notify to the Optionholder at any time before the Option is first exercised) the whole or any part of any secondary Class I NICs payable in respect of any such Option Gain; and |
7
(b) | the Optionholder shall join with the Secondary Contributor in making an election (in such terms and such form as may be approved by the Inland Revenue) for the transfer of the whole, or such part as the Company may determine, of any liability of the Secondary Contributor to secondary Class I NICs on any such Option Gain to be transferred to the Optionholder. |
5. | RELATIONSHIP WITH CONTRACT OF EMPLOYMENT |
5.1 | The grant of an Option shall not form part of the Optionholders entitlement to remuneration or benefits pursuant to his contract of employment nor does the existence of a contract of employment between any person and the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company, give such person any right or entitlement to have an Option granted to him in respect of any number of Shares or any expectation that an Option might be granted to him whether subject to any conditions or at all. |
5.2 | The rights and obligations of an Optionholder under the terms of his contract of employment with the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company shall not be affected by the grant of an Option or his participation in this Plan. |
5.3 | The rights granted to an Optionholder upon the grant of an Option shall not afford the Optionholder any rights or additional rights to compensation or damages in consequence of the loss or termination of his office or employment with the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company for any reason whatsoever (whether or not such termination is ultimately held to be wrongful or unfair). |
5.4 | An Optionholder shall not be entitled to any compensation or damages for any loss or potential loss which he may suffer by reason of being unable to exercise an Option in consequence of the loss or termination of his office or employment with the Company or any present or past Subsidiary or Associated Company for any reason whatsoever (whether or not such termination is ultimately held to be wrongful or unfair). |
6. | NON-TRANSFERABILITY OF OPTIONS |
6.1 | During his lifetime only the individual to whom an Option is granted may exercise that Option. |
6.2 | An Option shall immediately cease to be exercisable if: |
(a) | it is transferred or assigned (other than to the Personal Representatives of the Optionholder), mortgaged, charged or otherwise disposed of by the Optionholder; or |
(b) | the Optionholder is adjudged bankrupt or an interim order is made because he intends to propose a voluntary arrangement to his creditors under the Insolvency Act 1986; or |
(c) | the Optionholder makes or proposes a voluntary arrangement under the Insolvency Act 1986, or any other scheme or arrangement in relation to his debts, with his creditors or any section of them; or |
(d) | the Optionholder is otherwise deprived (except on death) of the legal or beneficial ownership of the Option by operation of law or doing or omitting to do anything which causes him to be so deprived. |
8
7. | PERFORMANCE TARGETS |
7.1 | Except in the case of a New Joiner Option, an Option which is not a Performance Option may only be granted if the Directors are satisfied that individual performance targets set in relation to the year preceding the Date of Grant have been met or exceeded. |
7.2 | When an Option is granted, the Grantor may determine and specify in the Option Certificate that the exercise of such Option shall be conditional upon the attainment of such one or more targets relating to the performance of the Company and, if the Committee so determines, upon the performance of a Subsidiary and/or division and/or the Optionholder measured over such period and against such objective criteria as may be determined by the Committee PROVIDED THAT, subject to rules 7.4 and 7.5 the question of whether an Option can or cannot be exercised on any occasion shall not be determined or determinable at the discretion of any person. |
7.3 | Any such Performance Target may provide that the Option shall become vested in respect of a given number or proportion of the Shares over which it subsists according to whether, and the extent to which, any given Performance Target is met or exceeded. |
7.4 | After an Option has been granted the Committee may (with the consent of the Grantor, where appropriate), in appropriate circumstances, amend the Performance Target PROVIDED THAT no such amendment shall be made unless an event has occurred or events have occurred in consequence of which the Committee reasonably considers that the terms of the existing Performance Target should be so amended for the purpose of ensuring that either the objective criteria against which the performance of the Company and/or any Subsidiary or division and/or the Optionholder will then be measured will be a fairer measure of such performance or that any amended Performance Target will afford a more effective incentive to the Optionholder and will be no more difficult to satisfy than was the original Performance Target when first set. |
7.5 | After an Option has been granted the Committee (with the consent of the Grantor, where appropriate) may, in appropriate circumstances, waive in whole or in part any requirement that a Performance Target be met as a condition of exercise of such Option PROVIDED THAT no such waiver shall be made unless an event or events have occurred in consequence of which the Committee reasonably considers that the terms of the existing Performance Target no longer afford an effective incentive to the Optionholder. |
7.6 | The Directors shall, within the period of 60 days beginning with either the end of the Performance Period or, if later, the Announcement for the last year of the Performance Period, notify the Grantor, if it is not the Company, and the Optionholder of the number or proportion of the Option Shares (if any) in respect of which the Option lapses and ceases to be exercisable in consequence of a Performance Target not being met. |
7.7 | If, in consequence of a Performance Target being met, an Option becomes vested in respect of some but not all of the Shares over which it is held, it shall thereupon lapse and cease to be exercisable in respect of the balance of the Option Shares. |
7.8 | The number of Shares in respect of which an Option shall become vested on any occasion shall be rounded to the nearest whole number. |
8. | OVERALL LIMITS ON THE GRANTING OF OPTIONS |
10% in 10 years for all plans
8.1 | The number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options may be granted in any year, when added to: |
(a) | the number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options have previously been granted (and which, if not exercised, have not ceased to be exercisable); and |
9
(b) | the number of Shares issued or in respect of which rights to subscribe for Shares have previously been granted (and which have neither been exercised, nor have ceased to be exercisable) pursuant to any other Employees Share Scheme |
in that year and the preceding nine years shall not exceed 10 per cent of the Ordinary Share Capital.
5% in 10 years for executive plans
8.2 | The number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options may be granted in any year, when added to: |
(a) | the number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options have previously been granted (and which, if not exercised, have not ceased to be exercisable); and |
(b) | the number of Shares issued or in respect of which rights to subscribe for Shares have previously been granted (and which have neither been exercised, nor have ceased to be exercisable) pursuant to any other executive share option or incentive plan |
in that year and the preceding nine years shall not exceed 5 per cent of the Ordinary Share Capital.
9. | INDIVIDUAL LIMITS ON THE GRANTING OF OPTIONS |
The Committee shall determine the maximum amount, or multiple of an employees Salary, which shall be applied to limit the number, or the aggregate Market Value, of Shares in respect of which Options may, in any year, be granted (and, if not exercised, have not ceased to be exercisable) under this Plan and any other discretionary share option scheme to an Eligible Employee, or to employees within a defined group of Eligible Employees.
10. | EXERCISE OF OPTIONS |
10.1 | Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, an Option shall not in any event be exercisable on or after the tenth anniversary of the Date of Grant or such earlier date as the Grantor may specify when the Option is granted. |
10.2 | Save as otherwise provided in the following provisions of this Plan, a Performance Option may only be exercised after the Directors have given notice to the Optionholder as mentioned in rule 7.6. |
10.3 | Except as otherwise provided in the following provisions of this rule 10 and rule 17, an Option may not be exercised at any time unless the Optionholder then holds office or employment with a member of the Group or an Associated Company or a Jointly-owned Company. |
10.4 | An Option may not be exercised at any time if the Optionholder, having been required by the Grantor to join in making an election to transfer liability to employers secondary Class I NICs (as mentioned in rule 4.2), has failed to do so. |
10.5 |
Save as otherwise provided in rule 7 and in the following provisions of this rule 10 and rules 12 to 17, an Option may be exercised in respect of such proportions of the Option |
10
Shares from such times as the Grantor shall determine and specify in the Option Certificate. |
10.6 | An Option may not be exercised on any occasion if such exercise would not be in compliance with the Model Code. |
Injury, ill-health, disability, redundancy, retirement etc
10.7 | If an Optionholder ceases to hold office or employment within the Group for a Good Reason then, subject to rule 10.10, an Option granted to him may, within the period of 6 months (or, if the Committee so decides, such longer period not exceeding 18 months as the Committee may determine) beginning with the date of cessation or, if later, the third anniversary of the Date of Grant, be exercised in respect of: |
(a) | Shares in respect of which the Option was vested immediately before the Optionholder so ceased to hold office or employment within the Group (or if, in the case of a Performance Option, the Optionholder so ceases after the end of the Performance Period but before the date on which the Optionholder is notified as mentioned in rule 7.6, such of the Option Shares in respect of which the Option becomes vested when such notification is given); and |
(b) | if the Optionholder so ceased to hold office or employment within the Group before the end of the Performance Period, a proportion (corresponding to such proportion of the Performance Period as fell before the date of such cessation) of such of the Option Shares (if any) in respect of which the Option is then deemed to be vested as mentioned in rule 10.13; and |
(c) | if, in the exercise of their discretion, the Directors (with the consent of the Grantor, where appropriate) so determine, such additional number or additional proportion of the Option Shares as may be notified to the Optionholder |
and the Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of that period.
Leaving for other reasons
(a) | unless such determinations have been made by the Committee and notified to the Optionholder within the period of 3 months beginning with the date on which the Optionholder so ceases (or, if earlier, gives or receives notice of such cessation) then such Option may not be exercised and shall be deemed to have lapsed and ceased to be exercisable as from the date of such cessation or, if earlier, the date on which notice of such termination was given or received; and |
(b) | in relation to a Performance Option, unless the Committee is of the opinion that the Performance Target is then likely to be met in full, such proportion of the Option Shares shall not exceed such proportion of the Performance Period as fell before the date of such cessation. |
11
Death in service
Death after leaving
10.10 | If an Optionholder dies after ceasing to hold office or employment within the Group, his Personal Representatives may exercise his Option:- |
10.10.1 | within the period of 12 months beginning with the date of death in respect of such of the Option Shares over which it could have been exercised immediately before the Optionholder died; or |
if, in relation to a Performance Option, the Optionholder dies before the end of the Performance Period, and the Option was not, immediately before his death, capable of exercise in respect of any of the Option Shares
10.10.2 | within the period of 12 months beginning with the date of death, but only in respect of:- |
(i) | a proportion, corresponding to such proportion of the Performance Period as fell before the date of such cessation, of such of the Option Shares in respect of which the Option is deemed to be vested at the date of death; and |
(ii) | if, in the exercise of their discretion, the Directors (with the consent of the Grantor, where appropriate) so determine, such additional number, or additional proportion, of such of the Option Shares in respect of which the Option is deemed to be vested at the date of death. |
Leaving the Group
10.11 | For the purposes of this rule 10 an Optionholder shall not be treated as having ceased to hold office or employment within the Group unless and until he no longer holds any office or employment with any member of the Group or with any Associated Company or any Jointly-owned Company. |
Maternity leave
Deemed vesting
12
11. | MANNER OF EXERCISE OF OPTIONS |
11.1 | An Option shall be exercised only by the Optionholder serving a written notice upon the Grantor which: |
(a) | specifies the number of Shares in respect of which that Option is exercised which in any event shall not: |
(i) | exceed the number of Shares in respect of which that Option subsists and has become exercisable and which have not been specified for this purpose in a prior notice served by the Optionholder in accordance with this rule 11; nor |
(ii) | be less than 1000 Shares or, if less, the number of Shares in respect of which the Option subsists and has become exercisable; |
(b) | is accompanied by payment of an amount equal to the product of the number of Shares specified in the notice and the Exercise Price; and |
(c) | unless the Committee (or the Grantor, as appropriate) otherwise permits, is accompanied by the option certificate in respect of that Option |
and is otherwise in such form as the Committee (with the agreement of the Grantor, where appropriate) may from time to time determine.
11.2 | Upon receipt of a notice of exercise of an Option, the Grantor (if it is not the Company) shall as soon as practicable notify the Company of the name of the Optionholder and the number of Shares in respect of which the Option is exercised on that occasion. |
11.3 | Upon receipt of such notice the Company shall, as soon as practicable, notify the Grantor of the amount of any Option Tax Liability and of any secondary class I NICs for which the Optionholder is liable in consequence of having joined in making an election as mentioned in rule 4.2. |
Satisfaction of Optionholders liability to NICs
11.4 | If an Option is exercised or released on any occasion, the Optionholder shall pay or procure the payment to the Optionholders Employer of the full amount of any secondary class I NICs due in respect of any Option Gain and shall do so at such time as will ensure that the Optionholders Employer is in receipt of cleared funds in time to enable the Optionholders Employer to account to the Collector of Taxes for such contributions within 14 days following the end of the PAYE month in which the Option was so exercised or released. |
11.5 | The Grantor shall not be obliged to issue, transfer or procure the transfer of any Shares or any interest in any Shares under this Plan unless and until the Optionholder has paid to the Grantor such sum as is, in the opinion of the Grantor or Optionholders Employer (as appropriate), sufficient to indemnify the Grantor or the Optionholders Employer in full against any Option Tax Liability or has made such other arrangement as, in the opinion of the Grantor, will ensure that the Optionholder will satisfy his liability under such indemnity. |
11.6 |
Subject to rule 11.7, the Grantor shall have the right not to issue, transfer or procure the transfer to or to the order of an Optionholder the aggregate number of Shares to which the Optionholder would otherwise be entitled but to retain out of such aggregate number of Shares such number of Shares as, in the opinion of the Grantor, will enable the Grantor to sell as agent for the Optionholder (at the best price which can reasonably expect to be obtained at the time of sale) and to pay over to the Optionholders Employer sufficient monies out of the net proceeds of sale, after deduction of all fees commissions and |
13
expenses incurred in relation to such sale, to satisfy the Optionholders liability under such indemnity. |
11.7 | The provisions of rule 11.6 shall not apply in relation to the issue or transfer of Shares on any occasion if the Optionholder has either: |
(a) | paid to his Employer a sum which, in the opinion of his Employer is, or will be, sufficient to satisfy the Optionholders liability under the indemnity referred to in rule 11.5; or |
(b) | entered into arrangements with his Employer which, in the opinion of such Employer, will ensure that such liability is satisfied within such period as the Employer may determine. |
11.8 | Subject to rules 11.5 to 11.7 (inclusive), within the period of 30 days beginning with the date on which the Company receives a notice of exercise which complies with rule 11.1, the Company (if it is the Grantor) shall allot or otherwise procure the transfer, or the Grantor (if it is not the Company) shall transfer or procure the transfer to the Optionholder of such number of Shares as is specified in the notice. |
11.9 | If the Grantor is restricted from issuing, transferring or procuring the transfer of Shares upon the exercise of an Option by reason of any statutory, regulatory or other legal provision or rule or the Model Code or any other requirement or guidance issued by the London Stock Exchange or on behalf of institutional investors in the Company or any other body and which relates to dealings in Shares by directors or employees or any member of the Group, the Grantor shall not be obliged to issue, transfer or procure the transfer of Shares in consequence of such exercise until after all such restrictions are lifted and shall do so within the period of 30 days thereafter. |
11.10 | Subject to rule 11.11, as soon as reasonably practicable after allotting or procuring the transfer of any Shares pursuant to rule 11.8, the Grantor shall procure: |
(a) | the issue to the Optionholder of a definitive share certificate or such acknowledgement of shareholding as is prescribed from time to time in respect of the Shares so allotted or transferred; and |
(b) | where Shares are to be allotted and on that date Shares of the same class are listed on the Daily Official List, that any Shares so allotted are admitted to the Daily Official List; and |
(c) | if the Option remains partially unexercised, that either the relevant Option Certificate is amended so as to indicate the number of Shares in respect of which the Option subsists, or that the Optionholder is issued with a new option certificate which contains all the information which would have been contained in such amended Option Certificate. |
11.11 | Some or all of the Shares acquired upon the exercise of an Option may, if the Optionholder so requests, be issued or transferred to a nominee of the Optionholder provided that beneficial ownership of such Shares shall be vested in the Optionholder. |
11.12 | The allotment or transfer of any Shares under this Plan shall be subject to the Memorandum and Articles of Association of the Company and to any necessary consents of any governmental or other authorities (whether in the United Kingdom or otherwise) under any enactments or regulations from time to time in force and it shall be the responsibility of the Optionholder to comply with any requirements to be fulfilled in order to obtain or obviate the necessity of any such consent. |
14
12. | DEMERGER |
If notice is given to shareholders of the Company of a proposed demerger of the Company or of any Subsidiary, all Options may then be exercised (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) over such number or proportion of the Option Shares as the Committee (with the consent of the Grantor, if it is not the Company) may then determine and notify to Optionholders and within such period as the Committee may specify in such notice to Optionholders SAVE THAT no such notice to Optionholders shall be given unless the Auditors have confirmed in writing to the Grantor that (disregarding any Performance Target) the interests of Optionholders would or might be substantially prejudiced if before the proposed demerger has effect Optionholders could not exercise their Options and be registered as the holders of the Shares thereupon acquired.
13. | STATUTORY RECONSTRUCTION OF THE COMPANY |
If the court sanctions a compromise or arrangement proposed for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation pursuant to section 425 of the Companies Act 1985 an Option may within the period commencing on the date on which the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement and ending with the date upon which it becomes effective be exercised (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) over such number or proportion of the Option Shares as the Committee (with the consent of the Grantor, if it is not the Company) may then determine and notify to the Optionholder and to the extent that the Option remains unexercised when the compromise or arrangement become effective, the Option shall lapse.
14. | WINDING-UP OF THE COMPANY |
14.1 | If notice is given to holders of Shares of a resolution for the voluntary winding-up of the Company, all Options may, notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended, be exercised in respect of all of the Option Shares at any time before the commencement of the winding-up or within such other period as the Grantor notifies to the Optionholder. |
14.2 | An Option shall immediately lapse and cease to be exercisable upon the commencement of a winding-up of the Company. |
15. | VOLUNTARY ARRANGEMENT |
If a proposal is made to the Company and to its creditors for a voluntary arrangement under Part I of the Insolvency Act 1986, an Option may (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) be exercised in respect of all of the Option Shares at any time not later than 14 days before the date of the meeting summoned in accordance with section 3 of the Insolvency Act 1986 and the Option shall thereafter lapse and cease to be exercisable.
16. | ADMINISTRATION ORDER |
If an administration order is made in relation to the Company under Part II of the Insolvency Act 1986, an Option may (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) be exercised in respect of all of the Option Shares within the period of 28
15
days after the administration order is made and the Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of that period.
17. | CHANGE OF CONTROL |
17.1 | Subject to rules 17.4 and 17.5, if as a result of either: |
(a) | a general offer to acquire the whole of the Ordinary Share Capital which is made on a condition such that if it is satisfied the person making the offer will have control of the Company; or |
(b) | a general offer to acquire all the shares in the Company of the same class as the Shares |
the Company shall come under the control of another person or persons, the Optionholder shall be entitled to exercise his Option (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) in respect of all of the Option Shares within the period of six months of the date when the person making the offer has obtained control of the Company and any condition subject to which the offer is made has been satisfied.
17.2 | If at any time any person becomes entitled or bound to acquire shares in the Company under sections 428 to 430F (inclusive) of the Companies Act 1985 the Optionholder shall be entitled to exercise his Option (notwithstanding that any Performance Period has not then ended) in respect of all of the Option Shares at any time when that person remains so entitled or bound and shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of such period. |
17.3 | For the purposes of the preceding provisions of this rule 17 a person shall be deemed to have control of the Company if he and others acting in concert with him have together obtained control of it. |
17.4 | The provisions of rule 17.5 shall have effect only if, immediately after the Company has come under the control of an Acquiring Company, the Company nevertheless remains under the control of the person who, or persons who together, had control of the Company immediately before the Company came under the control of such Acquiring Company. |
17.5 | If, before an Option lapses, the Optionholders are each invited to accept an Exchange of Options, then Options shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of such period as the Directors shall determine and notify to Optionholders (being a period which is not less than 28 days beginning with the date on which such invitation is issued to Optionholders). |
18. | VARIATION OF SHARE CAPITAL |
18.1 | In the event of any alteration of the Ordinary Share Capital by way of capitalisation or rights issue, sub-division, consolidation or reduction or any other variation of the share capital of the Company the Committee may make such adjustment as it considers appropriate: |
(a) | to the aggregate number or amount of Shares subject to any Option; and/or |
(b) | to the Exercise Price payable for each Share under any such Option; and/or |
(c) | if an Option has been exercised but no Shares have been allotted or transferred in accordance with rule 11.8, to the number of Shares which may be so allotted or transferred and the Exercise Price payable for each such Share |
16
PROVIDED THAT:
(i) | except in the case of a sub-division, consolidation or capitalisation issue, any such adjustment is confirmed in writing by the Auditors to be in their opinion fair and reasonable; and |
(ii) | except insofar as the Directors (on behalf of the Company) agree to capitalise the Companys reserves and apply the same at the time of exercise in paying up the difference between the Exercise Price and the nominal value of the Shares, the Exercise Price in relation to any Subscription Option shall not be reduced below the nominal value of a Share; and |
(iii) | the number of Shares as so adjusted has been rounded down to the nearest whole number and the Exercise Price has been rounded up to the nearest whole penny; and |
(iv) | if the Grantor is not the Company, no such adjustment shall be made without the consent of the Grantor. |
18.2 | As soon as reasonably practicable after making any adjustment pursuant to rule 18.1, the Directors shall (on behalf of the Grantor) give notice in writing thereof to every Optionholder affected thereby and shall at the written request of any such Optionholder and upon the surrender of any option certificates which he holds deliver or procure the delivery to him revised option certificates in respect of his Options. |
19. | ALTERATION OF THE PLAN |
19.1 | The Directors may at any time alter or add to any of the provisions of this Plan in any respect PROVIDED THAT : |
(a) | no such alteration or addition shall be made to the advantage of existing or new Optionholders to the provisions relating to eligibility to participate, the overall limitations on the issue of new Shares, the individual limitations on Option grants under this Plan the basis for determining Optionholders rights to acquire Shares and the adjustment of such rights in the event of a variation of the Ordinary Share Capital or this rule 19 without the prior approval by ordinary resolution of the shareholders of the Company SAVE THAT the provisions of this rule 19.1(c) shall not apply to the extent that such alteration or amendment is in the opinion of the Directors a minor amendment which is necessary or appropriate: |
(i) | to benefit the administration of this Plan; or |
(ii) | to take account of any change in legislation; or |
(iii) | to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for existing or new Optionholders, the Company, any Subsidiary or any Associated Company; and |
(b) | if in relation to any Options the Grantor is not the Company, no alteration or addition shall be made to the terms of such Options without the approval of the Grantor. |
17
20. | SERVICE OF DOCUMENTS |
20.1 | Except as otherwise provided in this Plan, any notice or document to be given to any individual in accordance or in connection with this Plan shall be duly given: |
(a) | if he holds office or employment within the Group, by delivering it to him at his place of work; or |
(b) | if it is posted in a pre-paid envelope to his address last known to the Company and if so sent it shall be deemed to have been given on the date of posting. |
20.2 | Any notice or document so sent to an Optionholder shall be deemed to have been duly given notwithstanding that such Optionholder is then deceased (and whether or not the Company has notice of his death) except where his Personal Representatives have established their title to the satisfaction of the Company and supplied to the Directors (on behalf of the Grantor) an address to which documents are to be sent. |
20.3 | Any notice in writing or document to be submitted or given to the Committee, the Directors, the Grantor or any member of the Group in accordance or in connection with this Plan may be delivered, sent by post, or facsimile transmission but shall not in any event be duly given unless it is actually received by the secretary of the Company or such other individual as may from time to time be nominated by the Grantor for the purposes of this Plan and whose name and address is notified to Optionholders. |
21. | MISCELLANEOUS |
21.1 | The Company shall at all times keep available sufficient authorised but unissued Shares to satisfy the exercise in full of all the Subscription Options for the time being remaining capable of being exercised. |
21.2 | No Option to purchase existing Shares shall be granted by any person unless that person beneficially owns such Shares at the Date of Grant or the Directors are satisfied that sufficient Shares will be made available to satisfy the exercise in full of all Options granted or to be granted by that person. |
21.3 | The Company may issue Shares, and grant rights to acquire Shares, to the trustees of any trust established for the benefit of persons who include employees within the Group for the purpose of enabling such trustees, in the exercise of their powers (i) to grant Options and (ii) to transfer or procure the issue or transfer of Shares upon the exercise of Options granted by such trustees PROVIDED THAT any Shares issued or in respect of which such rights are granted by the Company (and, if not exercised, do not lapse) shall count in applying the overall limitation on the issue of Shares imposed by rule 8. |
21.4 | The decision of the Committee in any dispute or question affecting any Eligible Employee or Optionholder or any member or former member of the Group or Associated Company under this Plan shall be final and conclusive subject, whenever required under the provisions of this Plan, to the concurrence of the Auditors. |
21.5 | The Directors may from time to time make and vary such rules and regulations not inconsistent herewith and establish such procedures for the administration and implementation of this Plan as they think fit and in the event of any question, dispute or disagreement as to the interpretation of this Plan or of any such rules, regulations or procedures or as to any question or right arising from or related to this Plan, the decision of the Committee shall (except as regards any matter required to be determined by the Auditors hereunder) be final and binding upon all persons. |
18
21.6 | In any matter in which they are required to act hereunder, the Auditors shall be deemed to be acting as experts and not as arbitrators and the Arbitration Act of 1996 shall not apply hereto. |
21.7 | The costs of the administration and implementation of this Plan shall be borne by the Company. |
22. | JURISDICTION |
22.1 | This Plan shall be governed by and construed in all respects in accordance with English law. |
22.2 | The Company, the Grantor, Eligible Employees and Optionholders shall submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts as regards any claim legal action or proceedings arising out of this Plan and will waive any objection to such proceedings taking place in the English courts on the grounds of venue or on the grounds that such proceedings have been brought in an inconvenient forum. |
23. | DATA PROTECTION |
In accepting the grant of an Option an Optionholder shall agree and consent:
(a) | to the collection, use, processing and transfer by the Group of certain personal information about the Optionholder, including the Optionholders name, home address and telephone number, date of birth, other employee information, details of all Options granted to the Optionholder, and of Shares issued or transferred to the Optionholder pursuant to this Plan (Data); and |
(b) | any members of the Group transferring Data amongst themselves and to any Grantor (if it is not the Company) for the purposes of implementing, administering and managing the Plan; and |
(c) | to the use of such Data by any such person for such purposes; and |
(d) | to the transfer to and retention of such Data by third parties in connection with such purposes. |
24. | THIRD PARTY RIGHTS |
Except as otherwise expressly stated to the contrary, neither this Plan nor the grant of any Option nor the U.K. Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 shall have the effect of giving any third party any rights under this Plan and that Act shall not apply to this Plan or to the terms of any Option granted under it.
19
[Option Certificate]
THE SMITH & NEPHEW 2001 UK
UNAPPROVED SHARE OPTION PLAN
OPTION CERTIFICATE
Name of Optionholder: |
||||
Address of Optionholder: |
||||
Employer Company: |
||||
Date of Grant: |
||||
Type of Option: |
non-UK Option /UK Option/Performance Option** | |||
Number of Shares: |
||||
Exercise Price: |
SMITH & NEPHEW PLC / * HEREBY GRANTS to the Optionholder named above an Option to [subscribe for/acquire]** the above number of Shares in the Company at the above Exercise Price.
The Option is exercisable subject to and in accordance with the rules of The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan as they are amended from time to time (the Plan) [The exercise of a Performance Option is subject to the Performance Target set out in the Appendix to this Option Certificate. This Option may not normally be exercised before the Optionholder has been notified that the Performance Target has been met. / OR:
In accordance with rule 10.5, this Option may normally be exercised as follows:
(i) | 1 / 10 th of the Option Shares after the first anniversary of the Date of Grant; |
(ii) | a further 3 / 10 ths of the Option Shares after the second anniversary of the Date of Grant; |
(iii) | a further 3 / 10 ths of the Option Shares after the third anniversary of the Date of Grant; and |
(iv) | the balance of the Option Shares after the fourth anniversary of the Date of Grant.]** |
This Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable [on] the [tenth/__________*]** anniversary of the Date of Grant.
A charge to tax and social security contributions may arise upon the exercise or release of the Option. It is a term of the Option that the Optionholder agrees to indemnify the Company and the Optionholders Employer (or former employer) in respect of any liability of any such person to account for any tax or social security liability arising as a result of anything done pursuant to this Scheme (Option Tax Liability). The Optionholder shall be required to enter into arrangements satisfactory to the Company to ensure that any such Option Tax Liability will be recovered from the
20
Optionholder. [Insert following sentence for UK-based employees only:] In the case of employers National Insurance contributions arising on gains made on the exercise, assignment or release of the Option, the Optionholder shall, upon the direction of the Company, enter into a joint election with the Optionholders Employer (or former employer) [for the employers National Insurance contributions to be transferred to him/in the form attached]**. The Company shall be entitled to withhold the issue or transfer of Shares until such arrangements have been made.
This Option is not transferable but may be capable of exercise by your personal representatives in the event of your death.
EXECUTED as a deed by SMITH & |
) | |
NEPHEW PLC/ * |
) | |
acting by: |
) | |
Director | ||
Director/Secretary |
Date:
* | Insert as appropriate |
** | Delete as appropriate |
21
FORM OF ACCEPTANCE OF GRANT
1. | I HEREBY AGREE to accept the grant of an Option over Shares on (date) and agree and undertake to be bound by the terms and conditions set out in the rules of The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan [and the condition(s) of exercise set out in the Appendix to this Option Certificate.]* |
2. | I hereby irrevocably undertake that if as a result of the grant, vesting or exercise of the Option the Company or any company which is my employer or former employer (the Employer Company) is obliged to account to the Inland Revenue or any other tax authority for income tax, social security contributions or any other tax levy or charge, I shall indemnify the Employer Company against such liabilities as directed by the Directors of the Company. |
[Insert following paragraph for UK-based employees only:]
3. | I hereby agree and undertake that I shall, if and when so requested by the Company, complete a joint election with my Employer Company (in a form satisfactory to the Company and the Inland Revenue) for the whole of any liability of the Employer Company to secondary contributions on any gains arising on the exercise or release of the Option to be transferred to me pursuant to paragraph 3B of Schedule 1 to the Social Security Contributions and Benefits Act 1992. |
4. | I hereby appoint any director of [Smith & Nephew plc] to act as my attorney for the purposes of: |
(a) | selling (at the best price that can reasonably be expected to be obtained at the time of sale) such number of the Shares to which I become entitled upon the exercise of the Option on any occasion as will realise sufficient monies, after deduction of all commissions and expenses incurred in relation to such sale, to satisfy my liability under the indemnity referred to in clause 2 above; and |
(b) | paying such monies to the Secondary Contributor. |
5. | The power of attorney given in clause 4 above is given by way of security for the performance of my obligation to satisfy the indemnity referred to in clause and is irrevocable in accordance with section 4 of the Powers of Attorney Act 1971. |
6. | The Grantor of my Option shall not be obliged to issue or procure the transfer of such Shares to me unless and until the Directors of the Company are satisfied that arrangements have been made so that such liability is met in full. |
7. | I hereby authorise the Employer Company, the Company and/or the Grantor to transfer any information held on me to the Employer Company, the Company and/or any third party for the purposes of the Plan. |
22
SIGNED and delivered AS A DEED by |
) | |||||
) | ||||||
in the presence of:- |
) |
(Optionholders signature) |
Witness signature: |
||||
Witness Name (print) : |
||||
Address: |
||||
Occupation: |
||||
Date |
* Delete as appropriate
THIS FORM MUST BE EXECUTED IN THE PRESENCE OF A WITNESS AND BE RECEIVED BY THE GRANTOR OF THE OPTION AS BELOW:
[Insert name, address and fax number of grantor]
BY OTHERWISE THE OPTION WILL BE DEEMED TO HAVE LAPSED.
23
[Notice of Exercise to be attached to the Option Certificate]
THE SMITH & NEPHEW 2001 UK UNAPPROVED SHARE OPTION PLAN
NOTICE OF EXERCISE OF OPTION
To: | Company Secretary, Smith & Nephew PLC |
I hereby exercise the Option referred to overleaf in respect of all/___________* of the shares over which the Option subsists, and request the allotment or transfer to me of those shares in accordance with the Rules of the Plan and the Memorandum and Articles of Association of the Company.
I enclose a cheque made payable to Smith & Nephew PLC/ *** in the sum of £ being the aggregate Exercise Price of such shares.
Name (block letters) |
Signature |
|||
Address |
Date |
|||
NOTES:-
1. | This form must be accompanied by payment of the Exercise Price for the shares in respect of which the Option is exercised. |
2. | The Option may not be exercised in respect of less than 1000 shares or (if less) all of the shares over which the Option subsists. |
3. | Where the Option is exercised by your personal representatives, an office copy of the Probate or Letters of Administration should accompany the form. |
4. | A charge to tax and social security contributions may arise when this Option is exercised. It is a term of the Option that you will be required to enter into arrangements satisfactory to the Grantor to ensure that any such liability will be recovered from you. The Grantor is entitled to withhold the issue or transfer of Shares until such arrangements have been made. |
5. | IMPORTANT. Neither the Company, the Grantor nor your employer company undertakes to advise you on the tax consequences of exercising your Option. If you are unsure of the tax liabilities which may arise, you should take appropriate professional advice before exercising your Option. |
24
6. | An Optionholder, whether or not a director of any company, shall not be entitled to exercise an Option at any time when to do so would contravene the provisions of the Model Code governing share dealings by directors and employees. |
* | Delete/insert number as appropriate |
** | Insert for non-UK Options only |
*** | Delete/insert payee as appropriate |
25
Exhibit 4 (c) (x)
RULES OF
THE SMITH & NEPHEW INTERNATIONAL SHARESAVE PLAN (2002)
This is a copy of the rules of
The Smith & Nephew International Sharesave Plan (2002)
established by resolution of shareholders of
the Company at its Annual General Meeting on
3 April 2002 and adopted by the Company Secretary
pursuant to the authority delegated upon him by the
board of directors on 31 July 2002 and amended on 3
August 2004 by the Remuneration Committee pursuant to
the authority delegated to it.
CONTENTS
Rule
|
Page
|
|||
1. |
Interpretation |
3 | ||
2. |
Issue of Invitations |
8 | ||
3. |
Applications for Options |
9 | ||
4. |
Grant of Options |
10 | ||
5. |
Monthly contributions |
11 | ||
6. |
Exercise Price |
11 | ||
7. |
Limitation on Grant of Subscription Options |
11 | ||
8. |
Exercise of an Option |
12 | ||
9. |
Manner of Exercise of an Option |
13 | ||
10. |
Non-Transferability and Lapse of Options |
14 | ||
11. |
Relationship with Employment Contract |
15 | ||
12. |
Demerger, Reconstruction or Winding-up of the Company |
16 | ||
13. |
Take-over of the Company |
16 | ||
14. |
Variation of Share Capital |
17 | ||
15. |
Alteration of this Plan |
17 | ||
16. |
Service of Documents |
18 | ||
17. |
Applicable Law |
19 | ||
18. |
Third Party Rights |
19 | ||
19. |
Protection of Personal Data |
19 | ||
20. |
Miscellaneous |
19 |
RULES OF
THE SMITH & NEPHEW INTERNATIONAL SHARESAVE PLAN (2002)
1. | INTERPRETATION |
1.1 | Words and expressions used in this Plan shall have the meanings respectively given below: |
Acquisition Cost |
in relation to the exercise of an Option on any occasion, an amount in pounds sterling equal to the product of:
(a) the maximum number of Shares in respect of which that Option is then exercised in accordance with rule 8.5; and
(b) the Exercise Price |
|
the Administrator | Computershare Investor Services plc or such other person who is for the time being appointed by the Company to administer this Plan | |
Announcement Date | the date of notification to the London Stock Exchange of the annual or half year results of the Company | |
Applicant | a person who, in response to an Invitation, submits an Application | |
Application | an application for the grant of an Option made in accordance with rule 3 | |
Application Date | in relation to any Invitation such date as is specified in accordance with rule 2.5.5 to be the last day on which an Application may be submitted in response to Invitations issued on any occasion | |
Approval Date | the date of the close of the Annual General Meeting of the Company held in 2002 | |
Associated Company | any company which, in relation to the Company, is an associated company as that term is defined by section 416 of the Taxes Act except that for the purposes of this Plan, subsection (1) of that section shall have effect with the omission of the words or at any time within one year previously | |
Auditors | the auditors for the time being of the Company or if there are joint auditors, such one of them as the Directors may decide | |
Companies Act 1985 | the UK Companies Act 1985 | |
the Company | Smith & Nephew plc (registered in England no 324357) |
3
control | the meaning given in section 840 of the Taxes Act | |
Daily Official List | the daily official list of the London Stock Exchange | |
Date of Grant | in relation to any Option, the date on which such Option was granted | |
Dealing Day | a day on which the London Stock Exchange is open for business | |
Directors | the board of directors for the time being of the Company or a duly constituted committee of that board | |
Electronic Communication | has the meaning given in section 15 of the UK Electronic Communications Act 2000 (but excluding mobile telephone text messages) | |
Eligible Employee |
an Employee who either:
(a) has held employment within the Group for such continuous period as the Directors have determined; or
(b) is nominated by the Directors |
|
Employee | an employee of a Participating Company | |
Employer Company | in relation to an Applicant or an Optionholder at any time, the member of the Group or Associated Company with which such Applicant or Optionholder then holds or, if he has ceased to hold employment within the Group or with any Associated Company, last held office or employment | |
Exchange Rate | in relation to a conversion of currency on any day, the rate to be applied in making such conversion being such published exchange rate as the Directors shall determine for the preceding day or, if that preceding day is not a Dealing Day, the last preceding Dealing Day | |
the Exercise Date |
in relation to an Optionholders Savings:
(a) where the Optionholder has a 3-year Option, the third anniversary of the date on which his first Monthly Contribution is received by the Savings Body; and
(b) where the Optionholder has a 5-year Option, the fifth anniversary of the date on which his first Monthly Contribution is received by the Savings Body. |
|
the Exercise Price | in relation to Shares subject to any Option, the price per Share in pounds sterling payable for the acquisition of such Shares upon the exercise of that Option as determined in rule 6 |
4
Grantor | in relation to an Option, the Company or the Relevant Trustee which has granted or proposes to grant such Option | |
the Group | the Company and every other company which is for the time being a Subsidiary | |
the Individual Share Limit | in relation to any Option, the amount of the Notional Sterling Repayment Value divided by the Exercise Price | |
Initial Market Value | in relation to a Share subject to any Option, the average of the middle market quotations of a Share as derived from the Daily Official List for the 3 consecutive Dealing Days immediately preceding the Invitation Date | |
Invitation | an invitation to apply for the grant of an Option issued in accordance with rule 2 | |
Invitation Date | in relation to an Option, the date on which the Invitation was issued | |
Jointly Owned Company | a company (and any subsidiary as defined in section 736 of the Companies Act 1985 of such a company) of which the whole of the issued ordinary share capital is jointly owned by a member of the Group and another person (not being a member of the Group) but which is not a Subsidiary and is not under the control of such other person | |
Local Currency | the local currency of legal tender in the relevant jurisdiction | |
Local Currency Equivalent | in relation to an amount in pounds sterling on a given day, the equivalent value (or as nearly as may be) in Local Currency of such sterling amount after conversion at the Exchange Rate on that day | |
the London Stock Exchange | London Stock Exchange plc | |
Model Code | the code adopted by the Company which contains provisions similar in purpose and effect to the provisions of the Model Code for Securities Transactions by Directors of Listed Companies issued by the UK Listing Authority from time to time | |
Monthly Contribution | in relation to any Eligible Employee, the fixed amount (in Local Currency) of each of the 36 (or, in the case of a 5-year Option, 60) monthly savings contributions which that Employee undertakes to make in his Application |
5
Net Pay | in relation to an Optionholder, the amount of his earnings for a given month, being earnings from the Optionholders employment with any one or more members of the Group and any Associated Company, after any deductions have been made by the payer of or on account of any tax or social security contributions and after any other deductions (other than a deduction of a Monthly Contribution) which the payer has made under any legal obligation or pursuant to any authority duly given by the Optionholder | |
Notional Sterling Repayment Value |
in relation to any Application, the aggregate amount in pounds sterling (converted from Local Currency using the Exchange Rate on the Invitation Date) of:
(a) in the case of a 3-year Option, 38 Monthly Contributions; and
(b) in the case of a 5-year Option, 66.2 Monthly Contributions
or, in either case, such other number of Monthly Contributions as the Directors may determine in relation to Options granted on any occasion so as to be consistent with the bonus rates payable on a certified contractual savings scheme within the meaning of section 326 of the Taxes Act |
|
Option |
a right to acquire Shares which:
(a) is granted pursuant to, and is exercisable only in accordance with, this Plan and which is a 3-year Option or a 5-year Option; and
(b) has neither been exercised nor ceased to be exercisable |
|
Option Certificate | a certificate issued by the Grantor evidencing the grant of an Option | |
Option Shares | in relation to an Option, the Shares over which that Option subsists | |
Option Tax Liability | in relation to an Optionholder, any liability of any member or former member of the Group or any Associated Company or former Associated Company or any Relevant Trustee to account to any tax authority or other body for any amount of, or representing, income tax or social security contributions or any other tax charge levy or other sum which the Optionholder is charged upon or in consequence of the grant, vesting, exercise, assignment or release of an Option or the acquisition of Shares or cash under this Plan |
6
Optionholder | in relation to any Option, the person to whom that Option has been granted or, if that person has died, his legal personal representatives | |
Ordinary Share Capital | issued share capital of the Company other than fixed-rate preference shares | |
Participating Company | a member of the Group to which the Directors have determined that this Plan shall extend for the time being | |
Personal Data | has the meaning it bears for the purposes of the UK Data Protection Act 1998 | |
Personal Representatives | in relation to an Optionholder the legal personal representatives of the Optionholder who have satisfied the Company or the Administrator of their appointment as such | |
this Plan | The Smith & Nephew International Sharesave Plan (2002) (approved by shareholders of the Company on the Approval Date) as set out in these rules and as amended from time to time | |
Relevant Trustee | the meaning given in article 71(6) of the UK Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Regulated Activities) Order 2001 | |
Savings | in relation to an Optionholder at any time, the aggregate amount of that Optionholders Monthly Contributions held by the Savings Body together with any accrued interest thereon | |
Savings Body | such bank(s) and/or other savings institution(s) as may from time to time be approved by the Company for the purposes of this Plan | |
Shares | fully-paid ordinary shares in the capital of the Company | |
Subscription Options | Options which are rights granted by the Company to subscribe for Shares | |
Subsidiary | a subsidiary (as defined in section 736 of the UK Companies Act 1985) of the Company and which is under the control of the Company | |
Taxes Act | the UK Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988 | |
UK | the United Kingdom | |
UK Listing Authority | the Financial Services Authority in its capacity as the competent authority for the purposes of Part VI of the UK Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 | |
year | a financial year of the Company. |
7
1.2 | References to any statutory provision shall be read and construed as references to such provision as amended and re-enacted from time to time and no account should be taken of the rule headings which have been inserted for ease of reference only. |
1.3 | If any question, dispute or disagreement arises as to the interpretation of this Plan, the decision of the Directors shall (except as regards any matter required to be determined by the Auditors hereunder) be final and binding upon all persons. |
1.4 | In any matter in which they are required to act hereunder, the Auditors shall be deemed to be acting as experts and not as arbitrators and the UK Arbitration Act of 1996 shall not apply in relation to any such matter. |
1.5 | Words denoting the masculine gender shall include the feminine. |
1.6 | Words denoting the singular shall include the plural and vice versa. |
2. | ISSUE OF INVITATIONS |
2.1 | Subject to the following provisions of this rule 2, the Company may from time to time issue, or procure the issue by the Administrator, to all persons who are or are expected to be Eligible Employees, invitations to apply for the grant of Options. |
2.2 | Invitations may be issued: |
2.2.1 | in the period of 42 days after the Approval Date, and thereafter, |
2.2.2 | in the period of 42 days beginning with the fourth Dealing Day following an Announcement Date |
or, if the Company is restricted by statute, order or regulation (including any regulation, order or requirement imposed on the Company by the London Stock Exchange or any other regulatory authority) from issuing invitations in any such period, at any time in the period of 42 days beginning with the date on which such restriction is removed; and
2.2.3 | at any other time if the Directors consider the circumstances to be exceptional unless the Company is or would then be so restricted from issuing invitations at that time. |
2.3 | Invitations issued to Eligible Employees in a given jurisdiction shall be issued at the same time and be on the same terms. |
2.4 | Invitations may be issued in writing or by Electronic Communication or in the form of notices, advertisements, circulars or otherwise for the general attention of Employees and to which the particular attention of individual Employees is drawn by notices issued with pay and salary advice slips SAVE THAT an invitation may not be issued to an Eligible Employee by Electronic Communication unless that person is known by his Employer Company to have personal access during his normal business hours to information sent to him by Electronic Communication. |
2.5 | Each invitation shall: |
2.5.1 | identify the Savings Body; |
2.5.2 |
state that it is a condition of the grant of an Option that the Employee must first undertake to make 36 or 60 consecutive monthly savings contributions (by way of deductions from net payments of salary or by such other arrangement |
8
as may be permitted by the Directors in a specific country) in Local Currency to an account with the Savings Body; |
2.5.3 | specify the maximum and minimum amounts of such monthly savings contributions; |
2.5.5 | specify the last day on which an Application may be made |
and shall otherwise be in such form as the Grantor shall determine.
2.6 | On any occasion on which invitations are issued, the Directors may in their discretion (and acting with the consent of the Grantor where appropriate) determine and announce the maximum number of Shares in respect of which Options will be granted in response to Applications made pursuant to such Invitations. |
2.7 | The amount of an Employees Monthly Contribution shall be not less than the Local Currency equivalent of £5 and not greater than the Local Currency equivalent of £250 or, in either case, such other sum as the Directors may from time to time determine. |
2.8 | No invitation may be issued after 3 April 2012. |
3. | APPLICATIONS FOR OPTIONS |
3.1 | Any Eligible Employee to whom an Invitation has been issued may apply for an Option by submitting to the person specified in the Invitation an application in writing which: |
3.1.1 | is received at such address as shall be stated in the Invitation not later than the Application Date; |
3.1.3 | if the terms of the Invitation so permit, indicates whether the Employee wishes to be granted a 3-year Option or a 5-year Option; |
3.1.5 | otherwise complies with such terms and conditions as may have been specified in the Invitation; |
3.1.6 | is subject to the Employee continuing to hold employment with a Participating Company until the Date of Grant; |
3.1.7 | authorises the transfer and processing of the Applicants Personal Data for the purposes of the administration of this Plan; |
3.1.8 | provides that the Applicant agrees to accept and be bound by the rules of the Plan; |
9
3.1.9 | is duly completed and signed by the Applicant |
and is otherwise in such form as the Directors may determine.
3.2 | If an Applicant has indicated in his Invitation that he wishes to be granted a 5-year Option, the Directors may, if it is necessary to ensure compliance with rule 7 or any such limit as has been determined as mentioned in rule 2.6, treat such Application as if the Applicant had indicated that he wishes to be granted a 3-year Option. |
3.3 | No Eligible Employee shall make more than one Application nor be granted more than one Option in response to the issue of an Invitation on any occasion. |
4. | GRANT OF OPTIONS |
4.1 | An Option may be granted by the Company or, if the Company has agreed, a Relevant Trustee. |
4.2 | An Option shall not be granted to any person who is not an Eligible Employee at the Date of Grant. |
4.3 | The maximum number of Shares in respect of which an Option shall be granted in response to any Application shall not in any event exceed the Individual Share Limit. |
4.4 | Subject to rule 4.3, the Directors shall have an absolute discretion as to whether, and in respect of how many Shares, any Option should be granted. |
4.5 | Options for which Invitations have been issued on any occasion shall be granted within the period of 30 days beginning with the first of the 3 days by reference to which the Initial Market Value of a Share is determined on that occasion PROVIDED THAT if on any occasion it is necessary to reduce the number of Shares over which Options are granted (so as to avoid exceeding the limit set out in rule 7 or otherwise) in one or more countries, the Directors may grant such Options at any time within the period of 42 days beginning with such date. |
4.6 | As soon as reasonably practicable after the Date of Grant, the Grantor shall, or shall procure the, issue to each Optionholder of an Option Certificate which specifies: |
4.6.1 | the Grantor; |
4.6.2 | the Date of Grant; |
4.6.3 | the number of Shares in respect of which the Option is granted; |
4.6.4 | the Exercise Price; |
4.6.5 | the earliest date on which the Option will normally become exercisable; and |
4.6.6 | that it is a term of the Option that the Optionholder shall (to the extent permitted by law) be responsible for any Option Tax Liability which may arise |
and shall otherwise be in such form as the Grantor shall determine from time to time.
10
5. | MONTHLY CONTRIBUTIONS |
5.1 | Subject to rule 5.3, a Monthly Contribution may be made by: |
5.1.1 | the Optionholders Employer Company deducting the whole amount from the Optionholders Net Pay for the relevant month and paying such amount (on the Optionholders behalf) to an account with the Savings Body; or |
5.1.2 | the Optionholder entering into such other arrangement as may be permitted by the Employer Company for the Monthly Contribution to be paid to an account with the Savings Body. |
5.2 | An Optionholders Savings shall be deposited with the Savings Body and shall at all times remain the property of the Optionholder so that none of the Company, the Optionholders Employer, the Administrator or any Relevant Trustee shall have any interest in such Savings. |
5.3 | If in any month, and in consequence of an Optionholder being absent from work by reason of maternity leave, military service (or such other reason which is, in the Directors opinion an equivalent circumstance or event resulting in a period of temporary suspension in employment), the amount of such Optionholders Net Pay is insufficient to allow for the deduction in full of his Monthly Contribution for, or in respect of, that month, the Optionholder may make other arrangements for payment to the Savings Body of the whole, or any balance remaining, of such Monthly Contribution, provided that the full amount of such Monthly Contribution is paid to the Savings Body not later than 30 days after the end of the relevant month. |
5.4 | An Option shall not lapse and cease to be exercisable by reason only that the Optionholder has failed to make not more than six Monthly Contributions (whether by reason of any insufficiency of Net Pay or otherwise). |
5.5 | An Option shall immediately lapse and cease to be exercisable if, after six of the Optionholders Monthly Contributions have not been made, a seventh Monthly Contribution is not made by the due date for payment. |
6. | EXERCISE PRICE |
6.1 | Subject to rule 14, the Company shall determine the price per Share payable upon the exercise of Options granted on the same day to Eligible Employees in the same jurisdiction, but this shall not be less than: |
6.1.1 | 80% of the Initial Market Value (rounded up to the nearest whole penny); or, if greater |
6.1.2 | in the case of a Subscription Option, the nominal value of a Share. |
7. | LIMITATION ON GRANT OF SUBSCRIPTION OPTIONS |
7.1 | The Company may issue Shares to a Relevant Trustee for the purpose of enabling the Relevant Trustee to satisfy its obligation to transfer Shares to Optionholders upon the exercise of Options. |
7.2 | The number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options may be granted in any year, when added to: |
7.2.1 | the number of Shares in respect of which Subscription Options have previously been granted (and which, if not exercised, have not ceased to be exercisable); and |
7.2.2 |
the number of Shares issued or in respect of which rights to subscribe for Shares have previously been granted (and which have neither been exercised, |
11
nor ceased to be exercisable) pursuant to any other employee share option or share incentive plan |
in that year and the preceding nine years shall not exceed 10 per cent of the Ordinary Share Capital.
7.3 | To the extent that a Relevant Trustee has purchased Shares to be transferred to Optionholders in satisfaction of any Subscription Options, the Shares over which such Options are held shall be left out of account for the purposes of this rule 7. |
8. | EXERCISE OF AN OPTION |
8.1 | Subject to the following provisions of this rule 8 and rules 12 and 13, an Option shall only be exercisable within the period of 6 months beginning with the Exercise Date and, if not then exercised, shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of that period. |
8.2 | If an Optionholder dies, his Personal Representatives may exercise that Option to the extent permitted by rule 8.5: |
8.2.1 | if he dies before the Exercise Date, during the period of 12 months commencing on the date of his death; or |
8.2.2 | if he dies within the period of 6 months beginning on or after the Exercise Date, during the period of 12 months beginning on the Exercise Date |
and if it is not then exercised that Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of such 12-month period.
8.3 | An Option may be exercised to the extent permitted by rule 8.5 within the period of 6 months following the date upon which the Optionholder ceases to hold employment within the Group by reason of: |
8.3.1 | injury, ill-health or disability (evidenced to the satisfaction of the directors of his Employer Company); |
8.3.2 | dismissal by reason of redundancy and, in South Africa only, dismissal by reason of the Employer Companys operational requirements; |
8.3.3 | retirement at or after his normal retirement age; |
8.3.4 | the company by which the Optionholder is employed becoming neither a member of the Group nor an Associated Company nor a Jointly Owned Company; or |
8.3.5 | the fact that the Optionholders employment with a member of the Group or an Associated Company relates to a business or part of a business which is transferred to a person which is neither a member of the Group nor an Associated Company nor a Jointly Owned Company. |
8.4 | If at any time before the Exercise Date an Optionholder ceases to hold employment with a member of the Group or an Associated Company or a Jointly Owned Company for any reason other than those mentioned in rules 8.2 and 8.3, all Options granted to him shall immediately lapse and cease to be exercisable. |
12
8.5 | An Option may only ever be exercised: |
8.5.1 | subject to the Optionholder not having failed to make any Monthly Contributions, pursuant to rules 8.1 and 8.2.2 in respect of all of the Option Shares; or |
8.5.2 | pursuant to rules 8.2.1, 8.3, 12 or 13 (or pursuant to rules 8.1 and 8.2.2 if the Optionholder has failed to make one or more Monthly Contributions), in respect of such number of Shares as is equal to: |
(a) |
in the case of a 3-year Option, | C | x | D | ||||
36 | ||||||||
(b) |
in the case of a 5-year Option, | C | x | D | ||||
60 |
where:
C is the number of Option Shares; and
D is the number of Monthly Contributions actually made by the Optionholder before the date of exercise of the Option
or, in either case, such lesser number of Option Shares as the Optionholder may specify in the notice of exercise given pursuant to rule 9.1.
8.6 | For the purposes of this rule 8, an Optionholder shall not be treated as ceasing to hold employment within the Group until he no longer holds any office as a director or any employment with any member of the Group or any Associated Company or any Jointly Owned Company. |
8.7 | An Option may not be exercised more than once. |
8.8 | In deciding whether and when to exercise an Option, an Optionholder shall have regard to the Model Code. |
9. | MANNER OF EXERCISE OF AN OPTION |
9.1 | An Option shall be exercised only by the Optionholder giving notice in writing to the Grantor or, if so directed by the Company, the Administrator, which: |
9.1.1 | is given at any time when the Option is exercisable; |
9.1.2 | specifies the number of Shares in respect of which the Option is exercised in accordance with rule 8.5; |
9.1.3 | is accompanied by payment of an amount in pounds sterling equal to the Acquisition Cost; |
9.1.4 | unless the Grantor otherwise permits, is accompanied by the Option Certificate, |
and is otherwise in such form as the Grantor may from time to time determine and notify to the Optionholder.
13
9.2 | Within 30 days after the date on which the Grantor (or the Administrator) shall have received a valid notice of exercise of an Option the Grantor shall procure that: |
9.2.1 | the monies accompanying that notice are applied in payment of the Acquisition Cost for the number of Shares in respect of which the Option is then exercised; and |
9.2.2 | subject to rules 9.3 and 9.6, the number of Shares in respect of which the Option is then exercised are allotted and issued or transferred to or to the order of the Optionholder. |
9.3 | The Grantor shall not be obliged to issue, transfer or procure the transfer of any Shares or any interest in any Shares upon the exercise of an Option unless and until the Optionholder has paid to the Grantor such sum as, in the opinion of the Company, is sufficient to indemnify any existing or former member of the Group or any existing or former Associated Company or any Relevant Trustee in full against any Option Tax Liability or has made such other arrangement as, in the opinion of the Company, will ensure that the Optionholder will satisfy his liability under such indemnity. |
9.4 | As soon as reasonably practicable after allotting or transferring any Shares as mentioned in rule 9.2.2, the Grantor shall procure: |
9.4.2 | if at that time the Shares are listed on the Daily Official List, that any Shares so allotted are admitted to the Daily Official List. |
9.5 | If after an Option has been exercised, the Grantor is restricted from issuing, transferring or procuring the transfer of Shares to the Optionholder by reason of any statutory, regulatory or other legal provision, rule or the Model Code or any other requirement or guidance which is issued by the UK Listing Authority or any other body on behalf of institutional investors in the Company relating to dealings in Shares by directors or employees of any member of the Group, the Grantor shall not be obliged to issue, transfer or procure the transfer of Shares in consequence of such exercise until after all such restrictions are lifted but shall do so within the period of 30 days thereafter. |
9.6 | The allotment or transfer of any Shares upon the exercise of an Option shall be subject to the Memorandum and Articles of Association of the Company and to any necessary consents of any governmental or other authorities (whether in the United Kingdom or overseas) under any enactments or regulations from time to time in force and it shall be the responsibility of the Optionholder to do all such things as may be necessary to obtain or obviate the necessity of any such consent. |
9.7 | All Shares allotted or transferred upon the exercise of any Option shall rank equally in all respects with the Shares for the time being in issue save as regards any rights attaching to such Shares by reference to a record date prior to the date of such allotment or transfer. |
9.8 | The costs of stamp duty and dealing costs and commissions incurred when Shares are purchased upon the exercise of an Option shall be borne by the Company. |
10. | NON-TRANSFERABILITY AND LAPSE OF OPTIONS |
10.1 | During his lifetime only the individual to whom an Option is granted may exercise that Option. |
14
10.2 | An Option shall immediately lapse and cease to be exercisable if: |
10.2.1 | it is transferred or assigned (other than to Personal Representatives of the Optionholder), mortgaged, charged or otherwise disposed of by the Optionholder; |
10.2.2 | the Optionholder becomes bankrupt or makes, or proposes to make, a voluntary arrangement with all or any of his creditors in accordance with any applicable laws relating to personal insolvency; |
10.2.3 | the Optionholder is not or ceases for any other reason (except his death) to be the sole legal and beneficial owner of the Option free from encumbrances or would not, upon the exercise of the Option, be the sole legal and beneficial owner of the Shares thereby acquired, free from encumbrances; |
10.2.4 | (unless in any individual case the Company otherwise determines) the Optionholder, whilst remaining in employment with a member of the Group or an Associated Company or a Jointly Owned Company, instructs his Employer Company to cease deducting Monthly Contributions from his salary; |
10.2.5 | if, after six of the Optionholders Monthly Contributions have not been made for any reason, a seventh Monthly Contribution is not made on the due date for payment; or |
10.2.6 | (unless in any individual case the Company otherwise determines) an Optionholder obtains repayment of any of his savings contributions (or interest on such contributions) unless such Option is then immediately exercisable pursuant to rules 8.2, 8.3, 12 or 13. |
10.3 | Save as mentioned in rule 8.2.2, an Option shall in any event lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of the period of 6 months beginning with the Exercise Date. |
11. | RELATIONSHIP WITH EMPLOYMENT CONTRACT |
11.1 | The grant of an Option shall not form part of the Optionholders entitlement to remuneration or benefits pursuant to his contract of employment nor shall the existence of a contract of employment between any person and any present or past member of the Group or Associated Company or Jointly Owned Company, give such person any right entitlement or expectation to have an Option granted to him in respect of any number of Shares or any expectation that an Option might be granted to him or that he will be invited to apply for the grant of an Option whether subject to any conditions or at all. |
11.2 | Neither the existence of this Plan nor the fact that an individual has on any occasion been granted an Option (or been invited to apply for the grant of an Option) shall give such individual any right entitlement or expectation that he has or will in future have any such right entitlement or expectation to participate in this Plan by being granted an Option (or invited to apply for the grant of an Option) on any other occasion. |
11.3 | The rights granted to an Optionholder upon the grant of an Option shall not afford the Optionholder any rights or additional rights to compensation or damages in consequence of the loss or termination of his office or employment with any present or past member of the Group or Associated Company or Jointly Owned Company for any reason whatsoever (whether or not such termination is ultimately held to be wrongful or unfair). |
11.4 | The rights and obligations of an Optionholder under the terms of his contract of employment with any present or past member of the Group or Associated Company or Jointly Owned Company shall not be affected by the grant of an Option or his participation in this Plan. |
15
11.5 | An Optionholder shall not be entitled to any compensation or damages for any loss or potential loss which he may suffer by reason of being unable to exercise an Option in whole or in part in consequence of the loss or termination of his office or employment with any present or past member of the Group or Associated Company or Jointly Owned Company for any reason whatsoever (whether or not such termination is ultimately held to be wrongful or unfair). |
12. | DEMERGER, RECONSTRUCTION OR WINDING-UP OF THE COMPANY |
12.1 | If notice is given to shareholders of the Company of a proposed demerger of the Company or of any Subsidiary the Company may give notice to Optionholders that Options may then be exercised within such period (not exceeding 30 days) as the Company may specify in such notice to Optionholders SAVE THAT no such notice to Optionholders shall be given unless the Auditors have confirmed in writing to the Company that the interests of Optionholders would or might be substantially prejudiced if before the proposed demerger has effect Optionholders could not exercise their Options and be registered as the holders of the Shares thereupon acquired. |
12.2 | If the court sanctions a compromise or arrangement proposed for the purposes of or in connection with a scheme for the reconstruction of the Company or its amalgamation pursuant to section 425 of the UK Companies Act 1985 the Optionholder shall be entitled to exercise his Option during the period of 6 months commencing on the date on which the court sanctions the compromise or arrangement, and thereafter the Option shall lapse and cease to be exercisable. |
12.3 | If notice is given to the shareholders of the Company of a resolution for the voluntary winding-up of the Company, notice of the same shall be given to all Optionholders and each Optionholder shall be entitled to exercise his Option at any time within the period of 6 months commencing on the date on which the resolution is passed. |
12.4 | All Options shall immediately lapse and cease to be exercisable upon the commencement of a winding-up of the Company. |
13. | TAKE-OVER OF THE COMPANY |
13.1 | If, as a result of either: |
13.1.1 | a general offer to acquire the whole of the Ordinary Share Capital which is made on a condition such that if it is satisfied the person making the offer will have control of the Company; or |
13.1.2 | a general offer to acquire all the shares in the Company of the same class as the Shares |
the Company shall come under the control of another person or persons, an Optionholder shall be entitled to exercise his Option to the extent permitted by rule 8.5 within the period of 6 months beginning with the date when the person making the offer has obtained control of the Company and any condition subject to which the offer is made has been satisfied. To the extent that the Option is not then exercised, it shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of such period.
13.2 | If at any time any person becomes entitled or bound to acquire shares in the Company under sections 428 to 430F (inclusive) of the Companies Act 1985 an Optionholder shall be entitled to exercise his Option to the extent permitted by rule 8.5 at any time when that person remains so entitled or bound. To the extent that the Option is not then exercised, it shall lapse and cease to be exercisable at the end of such period. |
16
13.3 | For the purposes of the preceding provisions of this rule 13 a person shall be deemed to have control of the Company if he and others acting in concert with him have together obtained control of it. |
14. | VARIATION OF SHARE CAPITAL |
14.1 | In the event of any alteration of the Ordinary Share Capital by way of a capitalisation or rights issue or by way of sub-division, consolidation, reduction or any other variation in the share capital of the Company the Grantor may make such adjustments as it considers appropriate: |
14.1 | to the aggregate number of Shares subject to any Option; |
14.2 | to the Exercise Price; and/or |
14.3 | if an Option has been exercised but no Shares have been allotted or transferred, to the number of Shares which may be so allotted or transferred and the Acquisition Cost relating to such Shares |
PROVIDED THAT:
(a) | except in the case of a subdivision, consolidation or capitalisation issue any such adjustment is confirmed in writing by the Auditors to be in their opinion fair and reasonable; |
(b) | the aggregate Acquisition Cost payable by an Optionholder on the exercise of all of his Options shall not be materially altered; |
(c) | except insofar as the Directors, on behalf of the Company, may then agree to capitalise the Companys reserves and apply the same in paying up the difference between the Exercise Price and the nominal value of the Shares at the time of exercise, the Exercise Price in relation to a Subscription Option is not reduced below the nominal value of those Shares; |
(d) | the number of Shares as so adjusted shall be rounded down to the nearest whole number and the Exercise Price as so adjusted shall be rounded up to the nearest whole penny; and |
(e) | if the Grantor is not the Company, no such adjustment shall be made without the consent of the Grantor. |
14.2 | As soon as reasonably practicable after making any adjustment pursuant to rule 14.1 the Grantor shall give notice in writing thereof to every Optionholder affected thereby and may call in any Option Certificates for endorsement or replacement. |
15. | ALTERATION OF THIS PLAN |
15.1 | The Directors may at any time (with the prior consent of the Grantor) by resolution in writing alter or add to any of the provisions of this Plan in any respect PROVIDED THAT : |
15.1.1 |
no such alteration or addition shall be made to the advantage of existing or new Optionholders to the provisions relating to eligibility to participate, basis of determining entitlement to Optionholders rights to acquire shares, exercise price, overall and individual limitations on the grant of options under this Plan and the adjustment of such rights in the event of a variation of Ordinary Share Capital without the prior approval by ordinary resolution of the shareholders of the Company in general meeting SAVE THAT this provision shall not apply to |
17
the extent that such alteration or addition is in the opinion of the Directors a minor amendment which is necessary or appropriate: |
(a) | to benefit the administration of this Plan; |
(b) | to take account of a change in legislation; or |
(c) | to obtain or maintain favourable tax, exchange control or regulatory treatment for participants in the Plan or for the Company or any member of the Group in any jurisdiction; |
15.1.2 | if in relation to any Options the Grantor is not the Company, no alteration or addition shall be made to the terms of such Options without the approval of the Grantor; and |
15.1.3 | as soon as reasonably practicable after making any such alteration or addition the Directors (on behalf of the Grantor) shall give notice in writing thereof to every Optionholder (if any) affected thereby. |
16. | SERVICE OF DOCUMENTS |
16.1 | Except as otherwise provided in this Plan, any notice or document to be given by, or on behalf of, the Company or other Grantor or the Administrator to any person in accordance or in connection with this Plan shall be duly given: |
16.1.1 | by sending it through the post in a pre-paid envelope to the address last known to the Company to be his address and, if so sent, it shall be deemed to have been duly given on the date of posting; or |
16.1.2 | if he holds office or employment with any member of the Group or any Associated Company, by delivering it to him at his place of work or by sending to him a facsimile transmission or Electronic Communication addressed to him at his place of work and if so sent it shall be deemed to have been duly given at the time of transmission SAVE THAT a notice or document shall not be duly given by Electronic Communication unless that person is known by his Employer Company to have personal access during his normal business hours to information sent to him by Electronic Communication. |
16.2 | Any notice or document so sent to an Employee or Optionholder shall be deemed to have been duly given notwithstanding that such Optionholder is then deceased (and whether or not the Company or other Grantor has notice of his death) except where his Personal Representatives have supplied to the Company an address to which documents are to be sent. |
16.3 | Any notice in writing or document to be submitted or given by an Optionholder to the Grantor, the Company or the Administrator in accordance or in connection with this Plan may be delivered, sent by post, facsimile transmission or Electronic Communication but shall not in any event be duly given unless: |
16.3.1 | it is actually received (or, in the case of an Electronic Communication, opened) by the secretary of the Company or such other individual as may from time to time be nominated by the Company and whose name and address is notified to Optionholders; and |
16.3.2 | if given by Electronic Communication (and is so required by the Company), it includes a digitally encrypted signature of the Optionholder. |
18
16.4 | For the purposes of this Plan, an Electronic Communication shall be treated as not having been duly made or received if the recipient of such Electronic Communication notifies the sender that it has not been opened because it contains, or is accompanied by a warning or caution that it could contain or be subject to, a virus or other computer programme which could alter damage or interfere with any computer software or Electronic Communication. |
17. | APPLICABLE LAW |
17.1 | This Plan shall be governed by and construed in all respects in accordance with English law. |
17.2 | In applying for the grant of an Option an Eligible Employee shall be deemed to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts as regards any claim legal action or proceedings arising out of this Plan and to waive any objection to such proceedings taking place in the English courts on the grounds of venue or on the grounds that such proceedings have been brought in an inconvenient forum. |
18. | THIRD PARTY RIGHTS |
Except as otherwise expressly stated to the contrary, neither this Plan nor the grant of any Option nor the U.K. Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 shall have the effect of giving any third party any rights under this Plan and that Act shall not apply to this Plan or to the terms of any Option granted pursuant to this Plan.
19. | PROTECTION OF PERSONAL DATA |
19.1 | By accepting the grant of an Option the Optionholder shall agree and consent to: |
19.1.1 | the collection, use and processing by any member of the Group, the Administrator and any Relevant Trustee of Personal Data relating to the Optionholder, for all purposes reasonably connected with the administration of this Plan and the subsequent registration of the Optionholder or any other person as a holder of Shares acquired pursuant to the exercise of an Option; |
19.1.2 | any member of the Group, the Administrator and any Relevant Trustee transferring Personal Data to or between any of such persons for all purposes reasonably connected with the administration of the Plan; |
19.1.3 | the use of such Personal Data by any such person for such purposes; and |
19.1.4 | the transfer to and retention of such Personal Data by any third party for such purposes. |
20. | MISCELLANEOUS |
20.1 | The Company shall at all times keep available sufficient authorised but unissued Shares to satisfy the exercise in full of all the Subscription Options for the time being remaining capable of being exercised under this Plan. |
20.2 | No Option to purchase existing Shares shall be granted by any person unless that person beneficially owns such Shares at the Date of Grant or the Directors are satisfied that sufficient Shares will be made available to satisfy the exercise in full of all Options granted or to be granted by that person. |
20.3 |
The Directors may from time to time make and vary such rules and regulations not inconsistent herewith and establish such procedures for the administration and |
19
implementation of this Plan as they think fit. In the event of any dispute or disagreement as to the interpretation of this Plan or of any such rules, regulations or procedures or as to any question or right arising from or related to this Plan, the decision of the Directors shall (except as regards any matter required to be determined by the Auditors hereunder) be final and binding upon all persons. |
20.4 | The Company shall not be obliged to provide Optionholders with copies of any notices, circulars or other documents sent to holders of Shares. |
20.5 | The costs of the administration and implementation of this Plan shall be borne by the Company. |
20.6 | The issue of an Invitation on any occasion is made at the Companys discretion. No entitlement to the issue of an Invitation, the grant of an Option and/or the issue of Shares in the future shall thereby be created on the grounds that such Invitations were issued or Options were granted in the past nor on the grounds that Options may previously have been granted over a particular number of Shares at a certain price. Even the repeated grant of Options and/or the issue of Shares shall not create future entitlements to receive Options and/or Shares at all or to be granted Options over a specific number of Shares or at a specific price. |
20.7 | If any provision of this Plan is held invalid, illegal or unenforceable for any reason by any court of competent jurisdiction, such provision shall be severed and the remainder of the provisions of this Plan shall continue in full force and effect as if this Plan had been established with the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision eliminated. |
21. | SHARE AWARD OR CASH ALTERNATIVE |
21.1 | The Directors may determine that an Option will not be satisfied by the acquisition of Shares at the time of exercise but instead will be satisfied either by: |
21.1.1 | The transfer to him of Shares with a value equal to the Gain or will apply such value in the subscription of Shares for him; or |
21.1.2 | The payment to him in cash in his Local Currency of the Gain. |
In these circumstances the Acquisition Cost shall not be payable, and if already paid, will be repaid to the Optionholder.
The Directors may make this determination at the time the invitations are made, at the Date of Grant, or afterwards, to take account of local legal and tax requirements.
21.2 | For the purpose of this clause, the Gain means the amount by which the middle market quotation of a Share, as derived from the Daily Official List, for the 3 consecutive Dealing Days immediately preceding the Exercise Date, or such other date as determined by the Directors, less the Exercise Price. The number of shares available or cash paid under this clause will be after the deduction of any Option Tax Liability. |
20
Exhibit 8
SMITH & NEPHEW plc
Principal Subsidiary Undertakings
Company |
Country of
Incorporation |
|
TP Limited |
Scotland | |
Smith & Nephew Trading Group Limited |
England | |
T.J. Smith & Nephew Limited |
England | |
Smith & Nephew FZE |
United Arab
Emirates |
|
Smith & Nephew (Overseas) Limited |
England | |
Smith & Nephew S.A. |
Spain | |
Smith & Nephew (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd |
Malaysia | |
Smith & Nephew Healthcare Sdn Bhd |
Malaysia | |
Smith & Nephew Holdings Inc. |
USA | |
Smith & Nephew Inc. |
Puerto Rico | |
Smith & Nephew Inc. |
USA | |
Smith & Nephew S.A. de CV |
Mexico | |
Smith & Nephew GmbH |
Austria | |
Smith & Nephew SA-NV |
Belgium | |
Smith & Nephew A/S |
Denmark | |
Smith & Nephew OY |
Finland | |
Smith & Nephew France SAS |
France | |
Smith & Nephew SAS |
France | |
Smith & Nephew Deutschland (Holdings) GmbH |
Germany | |
Smith & Nephew GmbH |
Germany | |
Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics GmbH |
Germany | |
Smith & Nephew Limited |
Ireland | |
Smith & Nephew Srl |
Italy | |
Smith & Nephew (Europe) BV |
Netherlands | |
Smith & Nephew BV |
Netherlands | |
Smith & Nephew International S.A. |
Luxembourg | |
Smith and Nephew KK |
Japan | |
Smith & Nephew Healthcare Limited |
India | |
Smith and Nephew Luxembourg Sarl |
Luxembourg | |
Smith and Nephew Sarl |
Luxembourg | |
Smith & Nephew A/S |
Norway | |
Smith & Nephew Lda |
Portugal | |
Smith & Nephew AB |
Sweden | |
Smith & Nephew AG |
Switzerland | |
Smith & Nephew Inc |
Canada | |
Smith & Nephew Pty Limited |
Australia | |
Smith & Nephew Limited |
Hong Kong | |
Smith & Nephew Limited |
Korea | |
Smith & Nephew Limited |
New Zealand | |
Smith & Nephew Pte Limited |
Singapore | |
Sri Siam Medical Limited |
Thailand | |
Smith & Nephew Limited |
Thailand | |
Smith & Nephew (Pty) Limited |
South Africa | |
Smith & Nephew Investment Holdings Limited |
England | |
Smith & Nephew Raisegrade Limited |
England | |
Smith & Nephew Rareletter Limited |
England | |
Smith & Nephew Medical Limited |
England | |
Smith & Nephew Healthcare Limited |
England | |
Smith & Nephew Finance Holdings Limited |
Cayman Islands | |
Smith & Nephew Finance Oratec Limited |
England | |
Smith & Nephew Finance Limited |
England |
All companies trade under the name of Smith & Nephew and deal with medical device products.
Exhibit 12 (a)
302 CERTIFICATION
I, Sir Christopher ODonnell, certify that:
1. | I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Smith & Nephew plc; |
2. | Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report; |
3. | Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report; |
4. | The companys other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) for the company and have: |
(a) | Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared; |
(c) | Evaluated the effectiveness of the companys disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and |
(d) | Disclosed in this report any change in the companys internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the companys internal control over financial reporting; and |
5. | The Companys other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the companys auditors and the audit committee of the companys board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions): |
(a) | All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the companys ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and |
(b) | Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the companys internal control over financial reporting. |
Date: March 16, 2005 | By: |
/s/ SIR CHRISTOPHER ODONNELL |
||||||
Name: |
Sir Christopher ODonnell |
|||||||
Title: |
Chief Executive Officer |
Exhibit 12 (b)
302 CERTIFICATION
I, Peter Hooley, certify that:
1. | I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Smith & Nephew plc; |
2. | Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report; |
3. | Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report; |
4. | The companys other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) for the company and have: |
(a) | Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared; |
(c) | Evaluated the effectiveness of the companys disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and |
(d) | Disclosed in this report any change in the companys internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the companys internal control over financial reporting; and |
5. | The Companys other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the companys auditors and the audit committee of the companys board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions): |
(a) | All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the companys ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and |
(b) | Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the companys internal control over financial reporting. |
Date: March 16, 2005 | By: |
/s/ PETER HOOLEY |
||||||
Name: |
Peter Hooley |
|||||||
Title: |
Chief Financial Officer |
Exhibit 13 (a)
906 CERTIFICATION
The certification set forth below is being submitted in connection with the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 st December 2004 (the Report) for the purpose of complying with Rule 13a-14(b) or Rule 15d-14(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the Exchange Act) and Section 1350 of Chapter 63 of Title 18 of the United States Code.
Sir Christopher ODonnell, the Chief Executive Officer and Peter Hooley, the Chief Financial Officer of Smith & Nephew plc, each certifies that, to the best of his knowledge:
1. | the Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Exchange Act; and |
2. | the information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of Smith & Nephew plc. |
Date: March 16, 2005
/s/ SIR CHRISTOPHER ODONNELL | ||
Name: |
Sir Christopher ODonnell |
|
Title: |
Chief Executive Officer |
|
/s/ PETER HOOLEY | ||
Name: |
Peter Hooley |
|
Title: |
Chief Financial Officer |